980 - American Radio History
FOREWORD
The Harris Corporation, Broadcast Products Division, proudly
presents its catalog of television and radio transmitting and allied
studio equipment. This fine product line underscores Harris' position as one of the world's leading manufacturers of broadcast
equipment. The hardware featured on these pages meets virtually
every requirement of the television or radio broadcaster.
Field sales and service facilities are extensive. Sales offices are
located in New York City, Washington, D.C., Houston and Los
Angeles. In Canada, sales are handled by Harris Systems Limited
in Toronto and Montreal. International market activities are coordinated by the International Sales Department in Quincy, Illinois
through representatives located throughout the world.
The Broadcast Products Division is one of 19 divisions of Harris
Corporation, a world leader in communication and information
processing, and one of the nation's 500 largest corporations. Harris' other electronics divisions include Controls Division,
Electronic Systems Division, RF Communications Division, Harris
Semiconductor Division, PRD Electronics Division and Composition Systems Division. Harris Video Systems Operation, a
separate operating arm of Broadcast Products Division located in
Sunnyvale, California, manufactures an extensive line of digital
video products.
Several research centers within Harris' electronic group enable
the Broadcast Products Division to draw from a large staff of
scientists and engineers, as well as from the impressive engineering organization in Quincy. These resources assure our
customers that Harris broadcasting and communications equipment is synonymous with product leadership.
Harris has built its reputation on quality craftsmanship, superior
service, excellence of engineering design and pioneering of outstanding new products. We value your patronage; we'll justify your
confidence.
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFOIMATON PROCESSING
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION
IOC[ SSING
PDM
Pulse Duration
Modulator
Harris' patented Pulse Duration Modulation (PDM) is used in the
Harris VP -100A, SW -100, SW -50, MW -50A, MW -10, and MW -5A
broadcast transmitters. PDM produces conventional high level
plate modulation....the difference is simply the manner in which
the audio signal is amplified and applied in series with the RF
amplifier plate supply. However, this one difference provides several distinct advantages.... particularly a much higher efficiency,
and the elimination of large iron core components.
The Pulse Duration Modulator operates as follows:
1
.
The audio nput (A) is added to
form (C).
a
75 kHz sawtooth wave (B) to
I
I
threshold level (Power control) is set and determines the
point on the sawtooth wave at which the pulse amplifier will
conduct. After clipping and amplification, squared pulses (D),
which vary in duration with the input audio, are formed.
2. A
I
I
I
II
II
I
I
I
3. A low pass
I
II
filter removes the 75 kHz pulse rate, leaving very
Il
Il
high audio power to fully modulated the PA. No modulation
transformer or reactor is required.
I
I
r--,
r--
The duty cycle of the pulse determines the voltage at the plate of
the PA. For instance, a 50% duty cycle will produce 13 kV at the PA
or the 100 kW carrier; a 100% duty cycle will place the full supply
voltage of about 28 kV on the PA which conforms to over 100%
positive modulation peak; a 0% duty cycle will produce 0 voltage at
the PA or the 100% negative modulation tip. The rate of variation of
the pulse width is the audio signal...hence a Pulse Duration
Modulator.
INTEGRATOR
SUMMER
75 kHz
THRESHOLD
SQUARE WAVE
GENERATOR
AUDIO
INPUT
LEVEL
ADJUST
AMPLIFIER
SIMPLIFIED
BLOCK
DIAGRAM
1
www.americanradiohistory.com
so
100 volts
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
PSM
50 volts
24 amps
Progressive
Series Modulator
PA
Figure A
Up to now, series modulators -which have the advantage of great
operational simplicity -have been too inefficient to be used effectively. Now, with the introduction of Harris' Progressive Series
Modulator, simplicity and high efficiency have been combined into
one excellent high -level modulation method which is used in Harris' solid -state kilowatt AM transmitter, the MW -1A.
Conventional
Series
Modulator
1
conventional series modulator is shown in Figure A. It has one
active device, 01 (modulator), which regulates the 100 volt power
supply to provide the proper voltage at carrier and the modulation
voltage to the PA. Its only drawback is its inefficiency. Under
carrier conditions, only 50 volts is required at the PA. This means
50 volts is also across the modulator, 01. Whatever current is
required at the PA must flow through 01.
A
Aseurne 24 amps and 50 volts is required at the PA to achieve the
1000 -watt carrier. This means 24 amps is also flowing in 01 and
the power lost in 01 is 1200 watts (all heat). This is much too
inefficient, even for a one kilowatt transmitter. The PA and output
network operate at about 85 %, so the loss in the PA and output
network is only 200 watts. (1200 watts input and 1000 watts rf
output = 85% efficiency.)
52
volts
the advantages of a DC coupled series modulator are to be
utikzed, a more efficient method must be found -hence a Progressive Series Modulator (PSM). PSM is two series modulators, in
series, as shown in Figure B. Two power supply voltages are now
used. One is a little higher than that required to produce the proper
PA voltage at carrier conditions, and the second is high enough to
provide the positive peak required.
If
Now, during carrier, all the PA voltage comes from the 52 -volt
supply through CR1 and 01. Only about 2 volts is lost across the
modulators, so the required 50 volts, 24 amps is provided the PA.
The loss across the modulator at carrier is now 2 x 24, or 48 watts,
and the power to the PA is 50 x 24, or 1200 watts.
During the positive peak the PA voltage is supplied from the 104 volt supply through 02 and Q1 (CR1 disconnects the 52 -volt supply when 02 turns on.) During the negatvie peak 02 is open, and
the voltage is supplied from the 52 -volt supply through CR1 and
Q1
-a
Thus PSM
Progressive Series Modulator which is highly efficient, is DC coupled, has excellent transient response, and requires no modulation transformer or reactor or filter inductor.
Figure
B
Progressive
Series
Modulator
NOTE: Voltages used in the MW-1A vary slightly from the example
above, to provide 125% positive peak modulation capability.
CP-2M-1279
ADV. 514A PTD. IN U.S.A
2
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
VP-1 00A
100,000 Watt
Medium Wave
Broadcast
Transmitter
Overall efficiency better than 65%
Exclusive Pulse Duration Modulator IPDMI' for high
level plate modulation
-
Redundancy in solid state circuits
Vapor phase cooling for quiet operation and extended
tube life
Only five tubes. with three tube types
Designed for
a
wide climate range
'Patented
3
www.americanradiohistory.com
Front view, doors open
Featuring Harris' exclusive high level Pulse Duration Modulator, the
VP -100A provides the finest performance of any medium wave
broadcast transmitter in the same power range on the market today
...at significantly lower operating costs.
EFFICIENCY EXCEEDS 65 %. The VP -100A has an unusually high
overall efficiency of more than 65 %. This is made possible by the
almost 90% efficiency of the Pulse Duration Modulator -and means
about one -third less power consumption than other high level plate
modulated 100 kilowatt transmitters.
HIGH AVERAGE MODULATION CAPABILITY. The transmitter is
capable of sustained high average modulation such as that experienced with trapezoidal audio processing-which means greater
loudness at the receiver without increased transmitter carrier power.
This is a feature of the high efficiency. DC coupled PDM modulator
that avoids the use of large, inefficient transformers in the modulation
process. Another feature of this high efficiency series type modulator
is convenient front panel carrier power adjustment over a wide range.
-
ONLY FIVE TUBES. The entire transmitter employs just five tubes
with a modern ceramic 4CV100,000C power tetrode in the modulator
and final RF power amplifier sockets. All power supplies utilize long life solid state silicon rectifiers. High quality components, conservatively rated, are used throughout the VP -100A to assure greatest
reliability.
VAPOR PHASE COOLING. Cooling by the Vapor Phase method
MARRIS
OD ==.=.7.7::
-
produces quiet operation by eliminating the need for large blowers
the heat exchanger is cooled by a two horsepower blower. This
method of cooling also extends tube life by helping to eliminate "hot
spots" and by maintaining tube anode temperatures far below those
attained by other methods.
RF SECTION. The RF chain is conventional, using a transistorized
oscillator. buffer. emitter follower. and a 4CX1500A tetrode tube
amplifier to drive a single 4CV100.000C tetrode Class C power output
stage.
An automatic drive control limits the PA screen current. eliminating
the usual problem of over dissipating the screen of a tetrode during
tune -up.
MODULATION SYSTEM. Harris' exclusive Pulse Duration
Modulator is characterized by low plate dissipation and low peak currents; peak cathode currents are about one -half that of the other 100
kilowatt transmitters. Average plate dissipation runs substantially
below rated levels, and all peak voltages are maintained well below
component ratings.
THE
Wide frequency response is possible as large reactive components
are not used in the modulation system.
Control of the transmitter power output over a wide range is accomplished in a low -level stage of the modulator by means of a convenient front panel vernier control. No adjustment is necessary in any
high power RF circuit, including the loading coil.
'U.S. Patent No.3440566
4
www.americanradiohistory.com
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. All major components of the VP -100A are
protected by circuit breakers. Tubes and transistors are protected by
overload relays or current -limiting devices.
A quick- acting circuit protects against damage by high voltage arcs
by limiting the energy in such arcs to less than 10 watt seconds.
Protection against voltage standing wave ratios of greater than 1.2:1
provided. Both forward and reflected power are metered at the
front panel.
is
In case of momentary RF overloads the VP -100A will recycle twice
automatically. Should a third overload occur within a thirty second
period, the transmitter will remain off until manually reset. However, if
the time between overloads is greater than thirty seconds, continuous recycling will occur.
DUAL OSCILLATOR AND MODULATOR. Harris has provided
redundancy in all transistor sections to relieve any concern over solid
state circuitry in high -powered transmitters. Although the reliability of
transistor circuitry has been proven in transmitters now operating under extreme conditions, this duplication is your double assurance of
complete dependability.
DESIGNED FOR WIDE RANGE OF CLIMATES. The transmitter will
give top performance in a wide range of climates -from hot and
humid, to dry and dusty. With Vapor Phase cooling, ducting outside
air into the transmitter is not necessary. All transformers and similar
components are hermetically sealed, encased, or vacuum
impregnated. All high power radio frequency networks contain silver plated inductors and vacuum capacitors.
Power amplifier tube compartment, rear view.
GREATLY REDUCED FLOOR SPACE. Due to the high efficiency of
the transmitter and the elimination of large iron core components (no
modulation transformer and reactor), the VP -100A requires only 7.0
square meters (76 square feet) of floor space. Careful cabinet design
provides easy accessibility to all components.
CUSTOMER
EUAMISMfD
f1191PVEMT
}
11
0
CIRCUIT
COITACTOR ASS1
ARUM
NIGH VOLTAGE
POTER SUPPLY
5500 LI
7494 I KILOGRAMS
ILRII MOUAT[OI
I
55
ISI
0
lc.
T70
75
I
STEP -009M
APIO
VOLTAGE
0EGUL1101
JIA 0
35 /c.
II
45 lcM
0
7c
740
11 0c.
13
óc.
4151
NAID
7
{IC
I
Al
7
120 lIc.
P8.
SPACES
213
17
0
=
f-47
4c.
I--v.
Oc.
101
6
SPACES
60=
76
II
91
0
e,12000
7
9c.
7
31
5
9n
5c.
AIR
93 Óc.
7
711
IM
u.
I,
F-
AP -100A
n0
5000 LIS
7700 A 0
171 Oc.
76
93
VP -100A FLOOR PLAN
1
Oc.
11
1
// IIII
or)
5
www.americanradiohistory.com
DUAL CRYSTAL
RF
POWER
OSCILLATORI AMPLIFIERS
DRIVER
4CX1500A
AMPLIFIER
SOLID STATE
OUTPUT
NETWORK
4CV100.000C
LOW
PASS
FILTER
DAMPER
2CX10,000F
DUAL PULSE
DURATION
MODULATOR /AMPLIFIERS
SOLID STATE
MODULATOR
DRIVER
4CX1500A
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER
SUPPLY
MODULATOR
4CV100.000C
VP -100A BLOCK DIAGRAM
VP -100A SPECIFICATION S
POWER OUTPUT: 100.000 watts nominal unmodulated. capable 110,000 watts.
RF FREQUENCY RANGE: 535 kHz to 1620 kHz.
IMPEDANCE: 230 ohms, unbalanced.
STABILITY: 5 Hz.
SPURIOUS AND HARMONIC EMISSION: Less than 50 mW.
CARRIER SHIFT: Less than 5 °%° at 100% modulation at 1.000 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 1.5 dB from 40 to 10.000 Hz referenced to
1.000 Hz at 95% modulation
POWER INPUT: Any specified voltage 380V to 480V.
POWER CONSUMPTION:
RF OUTPUT
RF FREQUENCY
AUDIO FREQUENCY DISTORTION: Less than 3% from 40 to 10,000 Hz at 95%
modulation.
NOISE: 55 dB below 100% modulation at 1.000 Hz.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: 10 dBm 1-2 dB for 100% modulation.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600/150 ohms, balanced or unbalanced.
MODULATION LEVEL: 100% sinusoidal. 10 minutes. 50 to 5,000 Hz.
TRAPEZOIDAL MODULATION: Less than 5% tilt or overshoot, 100 Hz to 2,000
3
phase. 50 or 60 Hz.
kW- No
modulation
160 kW -30% modulation
215 kW-100% modulation
155
POWER FACTOR: 95%
VOLTAGE REGULATOR: Electronic voltage regulation for all power supplies
other than high voltage.
OVERALL EFFICIENCY: 65% at average modulation.
TUBES: Two 4CV100.000C: two 4CX1500A: one 2CX10.000F.
TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0 -50'C ambient air temperature.
HUMIDITY: 95% relative humidity. maximum.
STORAGE TEMPERATURE: 35 "C to 60 "C (with no water in system).
ALTITUDE: Up to 1.829 meters 16.000 feet) above sea level.
CABINET DATA: Each of two cabinets measures 1.83 meters (6 feet) wide. 1.37
meters (4.5 feet) deep. and 1.98 meters (6.5 feet) high. The heat exchanger
adds another 1.06 meters 13.5 feet) in height.
ORDERING INFORMATION
VP -100A. 100,000 watt medium wave
tubes.
transmitter with one set of
crys9s
and silicon rectifiers, for operation from
380 to 480 volts. 3 phase. 50 or 60 Hz
CP-, n1-;,9
994- 7651 -001
ADV. 453B PTD. IN U.S.A.
6
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
High level plate modulated, using a Pulse Duration
Modulator (PDM)` -no modulation transformer or
reactor
Built -in audio processing circuit allows greater
modulation density
High overall efficiency
...
exceeds 60%
Minimum power consumption
modulation
MW-50A
50,000 Watt
Medium Wave
Broadcast
Transmitter
...
only 87 kW at 30%
Only four tubes, with two tube types; just one power
amplifier tube and one modulator tube
Quiet, air -cooled operation
Compact design
Power level is adjusted in low level PDM stage. No
loading adjustment is required
Switches smoothly from high to low power with
carrier on
Automatic return to operation after
a
power failure
All remote control accessories built in
'Patented
7
www.americanradiohistory.com
MW -50A, front doors
Harris' MW -50A, 50- kilowatt medium
wave transmitter, provides overall performance superior to that of any other
broadcast transmitter in its power range
-at a lower operating cost! The transmitter is high level plate modulated, using Harris' exclusive, highly efficient Pulse
Duration Modulator (PDM) -and includes
a built -in audio processing circuit to allow greater modulation density. With the
MW -50A you get the loudest, clearest
sound in town -and the most advanced
50- kilowatt AM transmitter in the world.
-
HIGH EFFICIENCY EXCEEDS 60 %. The
Modulator employed in
the MW -50A is nearly 90% efficient (instead of the usual 50% or 60 %), enabling the transmitter to achieve an
unusually high overall efficiency of greater than 60 %. This means less power consumption than that of other 50- kilowatt
medium wave transmitters currently available.
Pulse Duration
ONLY FOUR TUBES. The entire transmitter employs just four tubes -with modern ceramic 4CX35,000C tetrode power
tubes operating well below manufacturer's dissipation ratings. Only two tube
types are used, which simplifies the stocking of spares. All power supplies use
removd.
long -life solid -state silicon rectifiers. Highest quality components, conservatively
rated, are used throughout the MW -50A
to assure a maximum degree of reli-
ability.
CONTINUOUS 100% MODULATION
RATING. This continuous sine wave modulation capability permits a higher average modulation to boost signal strength
without increasing transmitted carrier
power. The MW -50A provides 125%
positive peak capability when operating
at a full 50- kilowatt RF power output.
AUDIO PROCESSING. In the MW -50A,
an adjustable audio processing circuit is
built in. This circuit is designed to reduce
the small modulation peaks, which have
little power and are holding the average
level down, and allow the larger and
more powerful levels of the audio signal
to modulate the transmitter at the maximum limit. Front panel controls include
separate adjustments for both positive
and negative peaks; a pushbutton for
disabling and calibrating; and one pushbutton each to increase loudness by 1, 2
or 3 dB.
MAXIMUM CARRIER POWER 60 KILOWATTS. The Harris MW -50A provides a
maximum carrier power of 60 kilowatts,
8
www.americanradiohistory.com
which allows more reserve for driving directional arrays than any other 50 kilowatt medium wave broadcast transmitter.
The MW -50A uses DC feedback for power
output stability, which insures minimum
RF power output change with a change
of the power line voltage. The MW -50A
can be switched smoothly from high to
low power with the carrier on.
EASY TUNING. Output network tuning is
accomplished by PA plate tune and loading control of the power amplifier stage,
which operates essentially as a Class C
amplifier. Automatic gain control on the
power amplifier screen allows tuning of
the Type 4CX35,000C tetrode as if it
were a triode, without any risk of uver
dissipating the screen. After PA tuning
and loading controls are optimized,
power output is controlled in the low level
PDM stage.
RF
SECTION. The
RF
chain
is
conven-
tional, using a transistorized oscillator,
buffer, emitter follower, and a 4CX1500A
tetrode tube amplifier to drive a single
4CX35,000C tetrode Class C power output stage.
MODULATION SYSTEM. Harris'
Modulator is characterized by low plate dissipation and low
THE
Pulse Duration
o
tube peak currents. Peak cathode currents are about one -half that of other
50- kilowatt transmitters. Average plate
dissipation runs substantially below rated
levels, and all peak voltages are maintained well below component ratings. In
addition, the PDM design allows continuous 100% sine wave modulation.
The modulator efficiency is about 90%,
and a wide frequency response is possi-
ble, as large reactive components are
not used in the modulation system.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. All major components of the MW -50A are protected by
circuit breakers. Tubes and transistors are
protected by overload relays or current
limiting devices. Overloads are indicated
by light- emitting diodes.
"crowbar" circuit protects
against damage from high voltage arcs
by limiting the energy in such arcs to less
than 10 watt seconds.
A quick- acting
Protection against voltage standing wave
ratios of greater than 1.2 to 1.0 is provided. Both forward and reflected power
are metered at the front panel.
of momentary RF overloads, the
MW -50A will recycle automatically.
Should a repeated overload occur within
a thirty- second period, the transmitter
will remain off until manually reset. However, if the time between overloads is
greater than thirty seconds, continuous
recycling will occur.
In case
Low level Pulse Duration Modulator chassis, showing power control,
low level Pulse Duration Modulator and audio input /control board.
QUIET AIR COOLING. Cooling of the
MW -50A is accomplished by a 3- horsepower blower, 2300 CFM at 2" water,
located in the transmitter cabinet, which
provides cooling for the power tubes at
a very low noise level. The transmitter
cabinet air is flushed with a low speed
fan which also operates at a very low
noise level. Provisions are made at the
top of the transmitter for ducting the exhaust air to the outside of the transmitter building.
DESIGNED FOR A WIDE RANGE OF
CLIMATES. The MW -50A provides top
performance in all types of climates,
from hot and humid to dry and dusty. All
transformers and similar components
are hermetically sealed, encased, or
vacuum impregnated. Performance at
10,000 feet (3048 meters) is certified by
a recognized testing organization.*
TRANSMITTER LAYOUT. The MW -50A
consists of two cabinets and an external
high voltage power transformer. External
connections to the transmitter are made
through either the top or the bottom of
the unit, as desired, for great installation
Rear view, doors removed,
showing easy accessibility
to components.
flexibility.
Copy of certificate available on request.
9
www.americanradiohistory.com
OSC
C7J
RF
POWER
DRIVER
AMPLIFIER
RCA I SODA
AC
so kW
OUTPUT
NETWORK
X35000C
OSC
LOW
PASS
FILTER
DAMPER
IOM
AUDIO
DIODE
PULSE
IODUTATION
DURATION
MODULATOR
ENHANCER
MODULATOR
/AMP
INPUT
DRIVER
MODULATOR
ACX ISOLA
RCx35000C
NV
POWER
SUPPLY
t
BYPASS
MW -50A BLOCK DIAGRAM
MW -50A FLOOR PLAN
MW -50A SPECIFICATIONS
POWER OUTPUT:
50,000 watts (rated), 60,000 watts (capable). Convenient power reduction to 25,000 or 10,000 watts.
RF
POWER CONSUMPTION: 80 kW at 0% modulation
87 kW at 30% modulation
110 kW at 100% modulation
OVERALL EFFICIENCY: Better than 60% at average modulation.
POWER FACTOR: 95 %.
TUBES USED: (2) 4CX35.000C: (2) 4CX1500A.
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to +50 °C.
HUMIDITY: 95 %.
ALTITUDE: Up to 3,048 meters (10,000 feet) above sea level. (Higher on
FREQUENCY RANGE: 535 kHz to 1620 kHz, supplied to frequency os
ordered.
RF
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms unbalanced (higher on special order).
RF
FREQUENCY STABILITY:
RF
±5
Hz.
HARMONICS: Exceeds FCC and CCIR specifications.
CARRIER AMPLITUDE REGULATION: Less than 2% at 100% modulation.
special order.)
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: ±1.5 dB, from 20 to 10,000 Hz, referenced to 1,000 Hz, at 95% modulation.
AUDIO FREQUENCY DISTORTION (Unenhanced): Less than 3 %, 20 to
10,000 Hz at 95% modulation.
COMPRESSION RATIO: 4/1 dB at 3 dB of enhancement;
modulation.
NOISE (Unweighted):
-57
-95 %,
SIZE: 78 inches (2.0 meters) high, 144 inches (3.7 meters) wide, 48 inches
(1.2 meters) deep (transmitter cabinet). External components include
high voltage power supply and wall mounted circuit breaker assembly.
meters).
FLOOR SPACE: Main transmitter assembly 48 square feet (4.5 sq.
Power supply 15 square feet (1.4 sq. meters).
+125%
WEIGHT (Approximate):
Main Transmitter Assembly
Power
Net unpacked
5,000 lbs. (2268 kg) Net unpacked
Domestic packed 6,000 lbs. (2722 kg) Domestic packed
Export packed
7,200 lbs. (3266 kg) Export packed
CUBAGE: Packed: 700 cubic feet. (19.8 cu. meters)
FINISH: White and blue.
dB or better below 100% modulation.
AUDIO INPUT: 600 ohms at +10 dBm ±2 dB, for 100% modulation, unenhanced; +16 dBm with enhancement activated.
POWER INPUT: 480 V +5 %, 3
±5 %, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
phase, 60
Hz.
Available for 380
V
Supply
1,370 lbs. (622 kg)
1,500 lbs. (681 kg)
1,800 lbs. (817 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model MW -50A, with one set of tubes and two crystals, 60 Hz
Model MW -50A, with one set of tubes end two crystals, 50 Hz
100% set of spare tubes for MW-50A transmitter _______
Recommended minimum spare tubes for MW -50A transmitter _.
_
-
_
CP-2.5M-977
994 -7964 -003
994-7964 -005
990-0826-001
990-0827 -001
ADV. 486 PTD. IN U.S.A.
10
www.americanradiohistory.com
High level plate modulation, using a Pulse Duration
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCE SSINC
Modulator (PDM)*
125% positive peak modulation capability at 11,000
watts
No modulation transformer or reactor
MW -10
Built -in audio processing circuit allows greater
modulation density
Excellent accessibility to all components
10,000 Watt
Medium Wave
Broadcast
Transmitter
Automatic return to full power after power failure
All remote control accessories built in
Power level is adjusted in low level PDM stage. No
PA loading adjustment required
performance ratings
meters)
Full
at
10,000
feet (3048
'Patented
11
Harris' MW -10 ten kW medium wave PDM transmitter
which allows more reserve for driving
directional arrays. The transmitter uses
DC feedback for power output stability,
which insures a minimum of RF power
output change with a change of the
power line voltage. This is especially important where brownouts occur, and
where transmitters are logged every
three hours. The MW -10 is FCC type accepted for 10, 5 and 2.5 kilowatts, and
power reduction from 10 to 2.5 kilowatts
may be accomplished with carrier on.
The PA utilizes 3rd harmonic wave shaping for improved efficiency.
AUDIO PROCESSING. In the MW -10, an
adjustable audio processing circuit is
built in. This circuit is designed to reduce
the small modulation peaks, which have
little power and are holding the average
level down, and allow the larger and
more powerful levels of the audio signal
to modulate the transmitter at the maximum limit. Front panel controls include
separate adjustments for both positive
and negative peaks; a pushbutton for
disabling and calibrating; and one
pushbutton each to increase loudness by
1, 2 or 3 dB.
EASY TUNING. Tuning is similar to that
of a conventional Class C amplifier. Just
peak the "relative efficiency" meter on
the front panel, using the grid and plate
efficiency resonator controls.
Front view, doors removed.
As the ten -kilowatt model in Harris' advanced line of PDM medium wave transmitters, the MW -10 offers the outstanding performance features that have
made the MW -50A and MW -5A industry
favorites. These include low distortion,
excellent transient response, wide frequency response and high positive peak
capability for the loudest, cleanest signal
available in its power range.
Harris' patented Pulse Duration Modulator (PDM) produces conventional high
level plate modulation...the difference is
simply the manner in which the audio
signal is amplified and applied in series
with the RF amplifier plate supply. However, this one difference provides distinct advantages, particularly a much
higher efficiency (nearly 90% for the
modulator), and the elimination of large
iron core components.
125% POSITIVE PEAK MODULATION
CAPABILITY. The MW -10 is capable of
providing the maximum positive modulation peaks allowed by the FCC and the
Canadian D.O.C. (125 %), with reserve for
great reliability. This can mean higher
average modulation levels for louder,
clearer signals, with no increase in transmitter carrier power. A wide frequency
range is possible, as large reactive components are not used in the modulation
system.
ONLY TWO TUBES. The entire
transmitter employs just two tubes -a
3CX15,000H3 PA and a 4CX15,000A
modulator -both operating well below
manufacturer's dissipation ratings. All
power supplies use long -life solid -state
silicon rectifiers. Highest quality components, conservatively rated, are used
throughout the MW-10 to assure maximum reliability.
MAXIMUM CARRIER POWER 11,000
WATTS. The Harris MW -10 provides a
maximum carrier power of 11,000 watts,
12
www.americanradiohistory.com
EASY ACCESSIBILITY. Accessibility is
quick and easy to all components- front,
rear, inside and out. For instance, the oscillator, RF driver, PDM exciter and
audio driver are all immediately available
through swing down front panels. The
two low voltage power supplies may be
lifted out by removing four screws and a
few wires. Front and rear doors remove
in an instant for ease of maintenance.
The entire control circuit panel swings
out, allowing relays to be easily cleaned.
Also, meter panels lift up for quick access. Fault indicating devices and a
spacious overall transmitter layout will
also help the engineer isolate and repair
problems in minimum time.
RF SECTION. The RF chain consists of
two switchable crystals and oscillators, a
buffer, divider, RF amplifier, IPA, RF
driver, and PA. Only 15 transistors are
used in the entire RF chain.
The cyrstals and oscillators, buffer,
divider and RF amplifier are located on
one printed circuit board. The divider is a
single IC which is socket mounted for
easy replacement. Indicating lamps on
the PC board show if voltage is available
.
.
.
provides a louder, clearer signal than any
AM transmitter in its power range
and if RF is being generated.
metered at the front panel.
The IPA and RF driver are on a swing down chassis, and consist of five iden-
In
tical Class
D,
push -pull amplifier
modules. One module is used in the IPA
and four modules are used in the RF
driver. The four RF driver modules are
connected so that if one should fail, the
remaining three will provide adequate
drive to keep the transmitter on the air at
full power. Fault lamps indicate which
one of the modules failed.
The PA is a Class C amplifier with third
harmonic "efficiency" resonators, and
the output network is a conventional
Pi /L.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. All major components of the MW -10 are protected by
circuit breakers, which are easily reset table from the front panel.
Protection against voltage standing wave
ratios of greater than 1.2 to 1 is provided.
Both forward and reflected power are
case of momentary RF overloads, the
MW -10 will recycle automatically. Should
a repeated overload occur within a thirty second period, the transmitter will remain off until manually reset. However, if
the time between overloads is greater
than thirty seconds, continuous recycling
will occur.
Five resettable status /overload indicators are located on the meter panel.
Remote readout and reset of these indicators are also provided to help the
engineer determine if a trip to the transmitter site is required when the transmitter has recycled. For example, VSWR
recycles (as determined at the remote
control point) may be caused by lightning or icing of the transmission line. A
switch to low power may be all that is
necessary, and this can be accomplished by remote control.
QUIET AIR COOLING. A standard three-
quarter horsepower, single phase motor
is used on a quiet, low- speed, belt driven blower. Provisions are made on
the top of the transmitter for ducting the
exhaust air to the outside of the transmitter building.
GENERAL. An ovenless cyrstal oscillator
is used in the MW -10. This allows all
voltages to be removed from the trans-
mitter during maintenance periods or
power failures without having an offfrequency condition, due to a cold
crystal, when the power is restored.
Lighted front panel pushbuttons indicate
operation and power mode of the transmitter.
MW -10 meets all performance
specifications at altitudes up to 10,000
The
feet (3048 meters).
TRANSMITTER LAYOUT. The MW -10 is
completely self-contained in one cabinet -there are no external components.
Rear view, doors removed -note
clean layout and easy access
to components.
13
www.americanradiohistory.com
m.
OSC
DIVIDER
AMPLiFIER
NOUTPUT
PA
ORRiVER
x.,s000H)
ETWORK
LOW PASS
FILTER
DAMPER
DIODE
1-
ADM
MODULATION
AUDIO
INPUT
ENHA CER
ADM
CONTROL
D
MoD
AUDIO
DRIVER
EXCITER
ABaR
FEEDBACK
POWER
SUPPLY
t
BYPASS
MW -10 BLOCK DIAGRAM
MW -10 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER OUTPUT: (Rated) 10,000 watts. (Capable) 11.000 watts. FCC type accepted at 10,000. 5000 and 2500 watts.
MODULATION METHOD: Pulse Duration Modulation.
CARRIER SHIFT: (Q 95% modulation with 400 Hz tone) 2% or less.
AUDIO INPUT: (For 95% modulation) tO dBm, 2 dB. unenhanced. 16 dBm
with enhancement activated.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: .1 dB, 20 to 10,000 Hz. (Response referred
to 1 kHz, 95% modulation, with modulations at other frequencies held to
same percentage. Response may degrade at higher modulating frequencies it transmitter is operated into a bandwidth limited antenna system.)
THO DISTORTION:' 2% or less 0 95% modulation, 20 to 10.000 Hz unenhanced.
RF HARMONICS: Meets or exceeds FCC and CCIR requirements.
SPURIOUS OUTPUT: 80 dB or better.
RF FREQUENCY RANGE: 535 to 1605 kHz. Supplied to one frequency as
ordered.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms, unbalanced. Other
available on special order.
output impedances
RF OUTPUT CONNECTOR: 1% -inch male EIA flange. Other types of
connectors available on special order.
output
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.3 to 1.
NOISE:, Unweighted, 60 dB below 100% modulation. Weighted (CCIR Rec.
468 -1). 70 dB below 100% modulation.
POSITIVE PEAK CAPABILITY: 125% at 11 kW output, when modulated with
processed program type material.
NEGATIVE PEAK CAPABILITY: 95%.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: 20 Hz or less over operating temperature range.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 200/500 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz. closed delta or 350/430
volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz. 4 wire Wye.
LINE VOLTAGE REGULATION AND VARIATION: 5% maximum.
LINE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE:' 4% maximum.
POWER CONSUMPTION (10 kW Carrier):3 (Typical) 20.5 kW, 0% modulation:
22.1 kW. 50% tone modulation; 28.0 kW, 100% tone modulation. (Maximum) 22.1 kW, 0% modulation; 24.3 kW, 50% tone modulation: 30.8 kW,
1000/0
tone modulation.
POWER FACTOR: 95% or better.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE:' -20° to 50 °C ( 4° to 122°F) at sea
level. Decreases 3.5° per 1.000 feet of altitude (84 °F at 10.000 feet).
MAXIMUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 95%.
MAXIMUM ALTITUDE FOR FULL POWER RATING: 10,000 feet AMSL (3048
meters). Transmitters for operation above 10.000 feet AMSL require
special order.
SIZE:' 78" H
72" W
32" D (198 cm
183 cm
81.3 cm).
WEIGHT: Unpacked. 1500 lbs. (680.4 kg) - approximate. Domestic packed.
1900 lbs. (861.8 kg) - approximate. Export packed, 2150 lbs. (975.2 kg) approximate.
CUBAGE: 120 cu. ft. (3.4 cu. meters) packed - approximate.
FINISH: Blue and white.
TUBES USED: (1) 3CX15,000H3 and (1) 4CX15,000A.
REMOTE CONTROL: Normal terminal board interface.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Distortion measured at 95% modulation, or less, down to 25 %. If transmitter
is operated into a bandwidth limited antenna system, distortion at the higher
modulating frequencies may degrade.
Noise measured over the band 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with line to line voltages of
the supply line balanced. Noise may degrade to 56 dB below 100% modulation with line voltage unbalance not exceeding 4 %.
Typical power consumption figures are for 10 kilowatts output and for optimum transmitter adjustment. For higher output powers and /or transmitter
misadjustments, power consumption may be higher.
Maximum operating temperature derates linearly to 29°C (84.2 °F) at 10,000 feet AMSL (3048 meters).
Does not include height of output connector, which may be removed for
transport.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MW -10 Transmitter
Volts or 350 -430
MW -10 Transmitter
Volts or 350 -430
with one set of operating tubes and two crystals, for 200 -250
Volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz operation
994 -8301 -001
with one set of operating tubes and two crystals, for 200 -250
Volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz operation
994 -8301 -003
Spare 3CX15,000H3 tube
374- 0150 -000
Spare 4CX15,000A tube
374 -0097-000
Recommended spare semiconductor kit
990 -0966 -001
Low voltage and filament voltage regulator, and line voltage regulator for MW -10 available.
CP-2.5M-1279
ADV. 539A PTD. IN U.S.A.
14
www.americanradiohistory.com
grial
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS ANO
INFORMATION HANDLING
High level plate modulation, using a Pulse Dwrwtin
Modulator (PDM)*
Built -in audio processing circuit allows greater modulation density
High overall efficiency -low power consumption
125% positive peak modulation capability at 5600
watts
MW-5A
5000 Watt
Medium Wave
Broadcast
Transmitter
Excellent accessibility to all components
Extremely quiet air -cooled operation, using
a
low -
speed blower
No modulation transformer or reactor
Automatic return to full power after power failure
All remote control accessories built in
Power level is adjusted in low level PDM stage. No
PA
loading adjustment required
*Patented
15
www.americanradiohistory.com
Similar in design to its big brother, Harris' 50,000 -watt MW -50A, the MW-5A
provides on overall performance superior
to other AM broadcast transmitters in the
5- kilowatt power range -at an 'unusually
low operating cost. The MW -5A uses Harris' patented Pulse Duration Modulator
(PDM) to obtain conventional high level
plate modulation, and a built -in audio
processing circuit to allow greater modulation density. Designed to handle the
highly processed audio used in today's
competitive market, the MW -5A provides
low distortion, excellent transient response, wide frequency response, and
high positive peak capability for the loudest, cleanest possible signal.
HIGH EFFICIENCY- EXCEEDS 52 %. The
Pulse Duration Modulator employed in
the MW -5A is nearly 90% efficient (instead of the usual 50% or 60 %), enabling the transmitter to achieve an unusually high overall efficiency of greater
than 52 %. This means less power consumption than other 5- kilowatt AM transmitters.
125% POSITIVE PEAK MODULATION
CAPABILITY. The MW -5A is capable of
providing the maximum positive modulation peaks allowed by the FCC (125 %),
with reserve for great reliability. This can
mean higher average modulation levels
for louder, clearer signals, with no increase in transmitter carrier power and
no increase in distortion. A wide frequency range is possible, as large reactive components are not used in the modulation system.
AUDIO PROCESSING.
In the MW -5A, an
adjustable audio processing circuit is
built in. This circuit is designed to reduce
the small modulation peaks, which have
little power and are holding the average
level down, and allow the larger and
more powerful levels of the audio signal
to modulate the transmitter at the maximum limit. Front panel controls include
separate adjustments for both positive
and negative peaks; a pushbutton for disabling and calibrating; and one pushbutton each to increase loudness by 1, 2 or
3 dB.
ONLY TWO TUBES. The entire transmitter employs just two tubes -a 3CX2500F3
PA and a 4CX3000A modulator-both
operating well below manufacturer's dissipation ratings. All power supplies use
long -life solid -state silicon rectifiers. Highest quality components, conservatively
rated, are used throughout the MW -5A
to assure a maximum degree of reli-
ability.
MAXIMUM CARRIER
POWER 5600
WATTS. The Harris MW -5A provides a
maximum carrier power of 5600 watts,
which allows more reserve for driving
directional arrays. The transmitter uses
DC feedback for power output stability,
which insures a minimum of RF power
output change with a change of the power line voltage. This is especially important where brownouts occur, and where
transmitters ore only logged every three
hours. The MW -5A provides for easy
power reduction to one kilowatt -and
power may be switched from high to low
16
www.americanradiohistory.com
with carrier on. The PA utilizes 3rd harmonic wave shaping for improved efficiency.
EASY TUNING. Tuning is similar to that
for a conventional Class C amplifier. Just
peak the "relative efficiency" meter on
the front panel, using the grid and plate
efficiency resonator controls, for proper
tuning and maximum efficiency.
EASY ACCESSIBILITY. Accessibility is
quick and easy to all components- front,
rear, inside and out. For instance, the
oscillator, RF driver, PDM exciter and
audio driver are all immediately available through swing down front panels.
The two low voltage power supplies may
be lifted out by removing four screws and
a few wires. Front and rear doors remove
in on instant for ease of maintenance.
The entire control circuit panel swings out,
allowing relays to be easily cleaned. And
meter panels lift up for quick access. Fault
indicating devices and a spacious overall
transmitter layout will also help the engineer isolate and repair problems in a
minimum time.
RF SECTION. The RF chain consists of
two switchable crystals and oscillators, a
buffer, divider, RF amplifier, IPA, RF driver, and PA. Only 15 transistors are used
in the entire RF chain.
The crystals and oscillators, buffer, divider
and RF amplifier are located on one
printed circuit board. The divider is a single IC which is socket mounted for easy
replacement. Indicating lamps on the PC
board show if voltage is available and if
RF is being generated.
The IPA and RF driver are on a swing down chassis, and consist of five identical
Class D, push -pull amplifier modules. One
module is used in the IPA and four modules are used in the RF driver. The four
RF driver modules are connected so that
if one should fail, the remaining three will
provide adequate drive to keep the transmitter on the air at full power. Fault
lamps indicate which one of the modules
failed.
The PA is a standard Class C amplifier
and the output network is a conventional
Pi /L.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. All major components of the MW -5A are protected by
circuit breakers, which are easily reset able from the front panel.
Protection against voltage standing wave
ratios of greater than 1.2 to 1.0 is provided. Both forward and reflected power
are metered at the front panel.
In case of momentary RF overloads, the
MW -5A will recycle automatically. Should
a repeated overload occur within a thirty second period, the transmitter will remain
off until manually reset. However, if the
time between overloads is greater than
thirty seconds, continuous recycling will
occur.
Five resettable status /overload indicators
are located on the meter panel. Remote
readout and reset of these indicators are
also provided to help the engineer determine if a trip to the transmitter site is required when the transmitter has recycled.
For example, VSWR recycles (as determined at the remote control point) may
be caused by lightning or icing of the
transmission line. A switch to low power
may be all that is necessary, and can be
accomplished by remote control.
QUIET AIR COOLING A standard one half horsepower, single phase motor is
used on a quiet, low- speed, belt- driven
blower. Provisions are made on the top
of the transmitter for ducting the exhaust
air to the outside of the transmitter building.
GENERAL An ovenless crystal oscillator
is used in the MW -5A, allowing all voltages to be removed from the transmitter
during maintenance periods or power
failures without Faving an off- frequency
condition, due to a cold crystal, when the
power is restored.
Lighted front panel pushbuttons indicate
operation and power mode of the transmitter.
Operation of the MW -5A at 10,000 feet
is certified by a recognized testing organization.
TRANSMITTER LAYOUT The MW -5A is
completely self-contained in one cabinet
-there are no external components.
PDM and
RF
Driver Chassis swing down for easy access.
17
www.americanradiohistory.com
S
SW
OSC
IP A
AMIYIDEER
RE
PA
OUTPUT
DRIVER
ICX2300TI
NETWORK
LOW PASS
FITTER
DAMPER
DIODE
p H.
PDM
AUDIO
INPUT
iODULATION
CONTROL
POM
AUDIO
AND
EXCITER
DRIVER
ENHANCER
POWER
MODULATOR
,C
X
3000
SUPPLY
FEEDBACK
BYPASS
MW -5A BLOCK DIAGRAM
MW -5A SPECIFICATIONS
POWER OUTPUT: :Rated: 5000 watts. (Capable) 5600 watts. Type accepted
at 5000, 2500, and 1000 watts. High and low power modes can be set
between 1000 and 5600 watts.
RF
FREQUENCY RANGE: 535 kHz to 1620 kHz. Supplied to one frequency
as
RF
ordered.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
on special order.
50 ohms, unbalanced. 40 to 250 ohms available
CARRIER AMPLITUDE REGULATION: Less than 2% at 100% modulation.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: -I-1 dB, 20 to 10,000 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY DISTORTION (Unonhanced): 2% or less 20 to 10,000
Hz at 95% modulation.
125%
dB at 3 dB of enhancement; -95 %,
COMPRESSION RATIO: 4
modulation.
NOISE (Unweighted): 60 dB or better below 100% modulation.
1
AUDIO INPUT: 600 ohms at
with enhancement activated.
.
10 dBm,
-2
dB,
unenhanced;
POWER INPUT: 208,230 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz and
phase, 50 Hz.
16 dBm
208'230/380 volts,
POWER CONSUMPTION: 9.5 kW at 0% modulation; 10.0
modulation; 13.0 kW at 100% modulation.
PLATE
EFFICIENCY:
90
%'o
or
better.
OVERALL EFFICIENCY: Better than 52 %.
POWER FACTOR: 95 %.
HARMONICS: Meets or exceeds FCC specifications.
more below 5 kW output.
POSITIVE PEAK CAPABILITY: 125% positive peak modulation capability at
5 kW and at 5.6 kW output.
RF
SPURIOUS OUTPUT: 80 dB or
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to - 50°C.
ALTITUDE: Sea level to 3048 meters (10,000 feet).
SIZE: 78 "H x 72 "W x 32 "D. (198.12cm x 182.88cm x 81.28cm.)
-
approximate. Domestic packed,
WEIGHT: Unpacked, 1200 lbs. (567 kg)
1600 lbs. (726 kg)
approximate. Export packed, 1850 lbs. (840 kg)
-
-
approximate.
CUBAGE: 120 cubic feet packed. (3.4 cubic meters.)
FINISH: Blue and white.
3
kW at 40%
(1) 3CX2500F3 and 1) 4CX2000A.
MONITOR PROVISIONS: 10 RF volts output at 50/70 ohms for frequency
monitor. 10 RF volts output at 50/70 ohms for modulation monitor.
REMOTE CONTROL: Normal interface.
TUBES USED:
ORDERING INFORMATION
MW -5A Transmitter with one set of tubes and two crystals, for 208/230 volts, 3
phase, 60 Hz operation. Specify high and low power desired]
MW -SA Transmitter with one set of tubes and two crystals, for 2Oí/230/380 volts,
3 phases 50 Hz operation. [Specify high and low power desired]
..
100% set spare tubes for MW -5A
100% set spare transistors for MW-SA (diodes not included)
100% set spare diodes (includes HV rectifiers, but no transistors).
Low voltage and filament regulator, and line regulator for MW -SA available.
994.7965 -001
994 -7965 -003
990- 0764-001
990 -0765 -001
990-7067-001
ADV. 488 PTD. IN U.S.A.
CP-2.5M-977
18
www.americanradiohistory.com
LLP
HARRIS
[:ON1N1uNI CATI ONS AND
INf()nN1AT1CX., 1-IANOLINC
MW -1A
1000 Watt
Medium Wave
100% solid- state, including PA and modulator
High level modulation, using
a
Progressive Series
Modulator [PSM]*
Broadcast Transmitter
125% positive peak modulation capability at 1100
watts
Redundant power amplifier and modulator
Automatic return to air after power failure
DC feedback and voltage regulator are standard
Carrier -on switching from high -to -low or low -tohigh power, with no loss of programming
No modulation transformer, modulation reactor or
filter inductor
Excellent transient response
VSWR protection
Extensive use of plug -in modules
maintenance
for easy
High overall efficiency -low power consumption
Status /overload indicators on front meter panel
with remote readout and reset built in
Instant `on " -no warmup time
i
'Patented
Harris' MW -1A is the most advanced one-kilowatt AM
(medium wave) transmitter on the market today, offering
such state -of- the -art features as total solid -state design,
Progressive Series Modulator, and a built-in audio processing circuit to increase your modulation density. Designed to
handle the highly processed audio used in today's competitive market, the MW -1A provides low distortion, excellent
transient response, wide frequency response, and 125%
positive peak capability for the loudest, cleanest signal
available in this power range.
100% SOLID- STATE. Twelve transistorized power amplifier
modules (which include modulators) are operated in parallel
to provide 1100 watts output at 125% modulation. Failure of
one module will not affect the transmitter's performance at
the rated power output of 1000 watts. Even in the unlikely
event that several modules should fail, the transmitter still
stays on the air, although at a reduced power level. All other
active devices in the MW -1A are also solid state.
POWER AMPLIFIER. The PA of each module consists of two
transistors operating Class
D push -pull (square wave
switching mode). This method allows a typical efficiency of
19
The MW -1A provides for easy power reduction to 500 or 250
watts -and power may be switched with carrier and program
on!
EASY ACCESSIBILITY. Accessibility to all components is
quick and easy through front and rear of transmitter. The following modules are plug -in design for easy maintenance:
PA /modulator (12 modules), RF driver (identical to
PA /modulator modules), IPA, oscillator, audio driver, and
audio input and overload. The two low voltage power supplies
may be lifted out by removing four screws and a few wires.
Front and rear doors remove in an instant. The entire control
circuit panel swings out allowing relays to be easily cleaned.
And meter panels lift up for quick access.
Fault indicating devices and a spacious overall transmitter
layout will also help the engineer isolate and repair problems
in a minimum time.
mitis
Aismiiiii0111111
From left to right: one of the PA /Modulator modules, IPA module, RF
Driver module, and another PA /Modulator module -all easily accessible from the front of the transmitter.
85% without the use of special shaping circuits used in tube
designs. Each of the twelve PA modules is capable of at least
100 watts carrier and 500 watts peak, to provide full carrier
power and modulation capability even with the failure of one
modulator or PA.
PROGRESSIVE SERIES MODULATOR. The modulator used
in the MW -1A is a simple series regulator, connected in such
a way as to provide efficient high level modulation without the
use of a modulation transformer, modulation reactor, power
supply choke or 70 kHz filter. This eliminates components
which have limited transmitter performance in the past.
Control of the transmitter power over a wide range is accomplished in a low -level stage of the modulator by means of
a convenient front panel vernier control. No adjustment is
necessary in any high power RF circuit, including the loading
coil.
RF SECTION. The RF chain consists of a crystal oscillator,
divider, amplifier plug -in module, a plug -in IPA module, a
plug -in RF driver module and 12 plug -in PA /modulator
modules. Fault indicator lamps are located on the oscillator,
IPA, and audio input and overload. Fault indicator lamps for
the 12 PA modules are located at eye level on the front panel
of the MW -1A for easy visual trouble- shooting.
The RF driver module is identical to the PA modules for
redundancy. Should the driver fail, a PA module can be
placed in the RF driver location, and the PA allowed to
operate with one module short while the failed module is
repaired at the engineer's convenience.
The oscillator module is located on a swing -down chassis for
easy access.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. The two power supplies of the MW1A are protected by circuit breakers, which are easily reset
from the front panel.
Protection against voltage standing wave ratios of greater
125% POSITIVE PEAK MODULATION CAPABILITY. The
MW -1A is capable of providing the maximum positive
modulation peaks allowed by the FCC (125 %). This can mean
higher average modulation levels for louder, clearer signals,
with no increase in transmitter carrier power...and an expansion of your listener coverage area!
AUDIO PROCESSING. In the MW -1A, an adjustable audio
processing circuit is built -in. This circuit is designed to
reduce the small modulation peaks, which have little power
and are holding the average level down, and allow the larger
and more powerful levels of the audio signal to modulate the
transmitter at the maximum limit. Front panel controls include
separate adjustments for both positive and negative peaks; a
pushbutton for disabling and calibrating; and one pushbutton
each to increase loudness by 1, 2 or 3 dB.
EASY TUNING. Tuning is as easy as that of a conventional
Class C amplifier. Just dip the PA voltage, and load for the
proper current. No grid or plate efficiency resonators are required for maximum efficiency.
MAXIMUM CARRIER POWER 1100 WATTS. The Harris MW1A provides a maximum carrier power of 1100 watts, which
allows more reserve for driving directional antenna arrays.
The transmitter uses DC feedback and a power supply
regulator for power output stability, which insures a minimum
of RF power output change with a change of the power line
voltage. This is especially important where brownouts occur,
and where transmitters are only logged every three hours.
Oscillator and audio input /overload modules, and the remote power
control are located on a swing -down panel on the front of the transmitter.
20
www.americanradiohistory.com
than 1.2 to 1.0 is provided. Both forward and reflected power
are metered at the front panel.
o
In case of an overvoltage condition, the MW -1A will recycle
automatically. Should a repeated overload occur within a
thirty- second period, the transmitter will remain off until
manually reset. However, if the time between overloads is
greater than thirty seconds, continuous recycling will occur.
VSWR overload will recycle continuously.
Resettable status /overload indicators are located on the
meter panel. Remote readout and reset of these indicators
are also provided to help the engineer determine if a trip to
the transmitter site is required when the transmitter has
recycled. For example, VSWR recycles (as determined at the
remote control point) may be caused by lightning or icing of
the transmission line. A switch to low power may be all that is
necessary, and can be accomplished by remote control. Advanced circuit design provides lightning protection.
QUIET AIR COOLING. A single, small fan cools the entire
transmitter. No noisy blower is required.
BUILT -IN DUMMY LOAD. The MW -1A may be tested at a full
kilowatt output with 100% sine wave or full program modulation, using this built -in feature.
REMOTE CONTROL. All functions required for remote control are built in, including raise /lower power control, and PA
voltage and current metering. A local /remote switch is
provided on the control panel so the remote control point
cannot turn the transmitter on while being operated locally.
All electrical connections for remote control are brought out
to a single terminal board.
GENERAL. Normally, no components are removed from the
MW -1A for shipment -on delivery, just connect the main AC,
audio input and the antenna to the transmitter, make a few
adjustments and you are on the air!
An ovenless crystal oscillator is used in the MW -1A, allowing
all voltages to be removed from the transmitter during
maintenance periods or power failures without having an off frequency condition, due to a cold crystal, when power is
restored.
Lighted front panel pushbuttons indicate operation and
power mode of the transmitter.
A large air filter at the rear of the MW -1A may be removed for
cleaning while the transmitter is in operation.
The MW -1A is completely self- contained in one cabinet
there are no external components.
1
Front view of MW -1A, door and swing -down panel open.
www.americanradiohistory.com
-
ANTENNA
IPA
OSC
DRIVER
EE
PA LOAD
PA TUNE
ANTENNA
SWITCH
15
PA
MODULES
MODULATION
AUDIO
ENHANCER
INPUT
GATING
AUDIO
AUDIO
INPUT
MASS
Ac INPUT
DUMMY LOAD
CONTROL
OVEEIOAD
1
t
POWER
DEI VER
30 VOLT
-
IF
POWER
TO ALL PA a
SUPPLY
DRIVER MODULES
IS0V
160
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
MAIN
CIRCUIT
-1
MW -1A SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
POWER OUTPUT: (Rated) 1000 watts. (Capable) 1100 watts. Power reduction
to 500 watts or 250 watts.
RF FREQUENCY RANGE: 535 kHz to 1620 kHz. Supplied to one frequency as
ordered.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms, unbalanced.
CARRIER AMPLITUDE REGULATION: Less than 2% at 100% modulation.
RF HARMONICS: Meets or exceeds FCC and CCIR specifications.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 1 dB, from 20 to 10,000 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY DISTORTION (Unenhanced): 1.5% or less at 1 kW, 20 to
10,000 Hz, 95% modulation. 2% or less at 500 and 250 watts, 20 to 10,000 Hz.
95% modulation.
125%
COMPRESSION RATIO: 4/1 dB at 3 dB of enhancement: -95 %,
modulation.
NOISE (Unweighted): 60 dB or better below 100% modulation.
AUDIO INPUT: 10 dBm, 2, dB. 600 ohms balanced. unenhanced: *16 dBm,
2dB with enhancement activated.
POWER INPUT: 208-260 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz, single phase.
EFFICIENCY: PA- typically 85%: overall transmitter -50% or greater.
POWER CONSUMPTION: (typical) 2.0 kW at 0% modulation at 1000 watts carrier. 3.0 kW at 100% tone modulation at 1000 watts carrier.
SPURIOUS OUTPUT: Meets or exceeds FCC and CCIR requirements.
VOLT
NV SUPPLY
PS
MW-1A BLOCK DIAGRAM
\
POSITIVE PEAK CAPABILITY: 125% positive peak program modulation
capability at 1.0 kW and at 1.1 kW.
MONITOR PROVISIONS: 10 volts RF (RMS) modulated output sample at 50
ohms and High /Low balance control.
REMOTE CONTROL: Sell-contained interface for all standard systems.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Progressive Series Modulation (PSM).
IM DISTORTION: 2% or less 4/1 or 1/1, 60/2000 Hz or 60/7000 Hz.
MECHANICAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE: 95 %.
20 °C to +50 °C.
ALTITUDE: Sea level to 10.000 feet.
SIZE: 72"H x 311/2"W x 31' /T"D. (183cm
x 80cm x 80cm.)
WEIGHT: Unpacked. 595 lbs. (270 kg.)-approximate. Domestic packed. 785
lbs. (356 kg.)- approximate. Export packed, 895 lbs. (406 kg.)approximate.
CUBAGE: 68.7 cubic feet (2 cubic meters), packed.
FINISH: Blue and white.
TYPE OF ACTIVE COMPONENTS: 100% solid state.
POWER SUPPLY: Self- contained, dry.
ORDERING INFORMATION
60 Hz or 50 Hz operation
MW -1A transmitter, complete with all solid -state devices and one crystal, single phase.
AC
voltage)
input
(specify
Spare PA Module
Spare plug -in IPA module
Spare plug -in oscillator module
Spare plug -in audio driver module
Spare plug -in audio input /overload module
100% spare rectifier kit
Recommended spare rectifier kit
100% spare transistor kit
Recommended spare transistor kit
Spare crystal
994- 7966 -001
992-4201 -001
992 -4202 -001
992 -4207 -001
992 -4206 -001
992- 4205-001
990 -0810 -001
990 -0807 -001
990 -0811 -001
990- 0812 -001
444 -xxxx -000
ADV. 4P4A PTD. IN
CP-2M-1278
22
www.americanradiohistory.com
U
A.
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION
INFORMATION PAO
WAVE
ANTENNA
PHASING
EQUIPMENT
AND ACCESSORIES
Network design experience and capability that are
recognized and accepted throughout the industry
Highest construction standards in the industry
Highest quality long -life components with conservative ratings to maximize reliability
Wide network adjustment range for easy tune -up
Modern control circuitry provides full transmitter and
RF contactor protection, direct remote control
interface
Highest quality design and construction at affordable
prices
23
HARRIS' CUSTOMIZED MEDIUM WAVE PHASING AND
Harris phasors and medium wave antenna networks are
custom built to the highest standards in the industry. Our
network design experience is well known throughout the broadcast community. From 250 watts to 200 kilowatts, Harris
phasors and medium wave antenna networks are in use around
the world. Superior design and ^ onstruction techniques, and
the use of quality components are providing customers years of
stable and reliable performance.
The key to our phasor capability is our highly experienced
antenna design engineering staff, which is available to tailor
networks for your specific requirements. Recognized as experts in the medium wave antenna field, Harris engineers' field
experience gives them the perspective to understand the problems associated with installation and adjustment of medium
wave antenna networks.
i
+
+
F++±
t
Innovative network designs for special requirements such as
distortion reduction and broadband compensation can be provided. Computer design techniques aid in providing an op-
++
+
,
with multiple antenna mode operation. A simple, straightforward 24 -volt DC relay logic circuit is housed on one printed
circuit board. Clean printed circuit board construction eliminates problems normally associated with hand wired control
logic panels, thus improving reliability.
All relays, components, and terminal strips on the control logic
board are permanently labeled for quick and easy reference.
This modern control circuit includes features not found in many
competitive phasor designs. For example, a time delay is provided for RF to be completely removed before contactor switching - thus avoiding burned contacts. An automatic high voltage
restart command is given to the transmitter after pattern switch.
This eliminates a manual operator step and reduces annoying
"off the air" pattern switch time to one second. Remote control
commands are momentary, low current contact closures enabling direct connection to most remote control and ATS systems.
Remote mode status indication is also provided for station use.
These Harris control circuit features will extend component life,
minimize listener annoyance, and eliminate remote control and
transmitter interface equipment. This means direct savings to
your station.
COMPARE THESE CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
Easily operated cyclometers with counter dials are used on
front panel controlled components. Positive stop action is
provided on these controls.
Cabinet interconnections are mechanically solid and electrically continuous to provide a well integrated system. Phasor
cabinet side plates are made of aluminum, and separate
cabinet assemblies are connected with copper strap.
+
Several exclusive computer programs developed by Harris allow
computer modeling of antenna
systems for special applications
such as bandwidth predictions.
timum component configuration for your station. Experienced
technicians assemble and test each phasor and antenna unit to
assure a quality product. Many of the design and construction
practices are unique to Harris and are not found in competitive
units.
A modern control circuit is used with every phasor equipped
+ +
All tubing coils are connected to other components with tubing the
same size as that used in the coil. Parallel tapping straps with a
minimum of excess length are used. These features minimize the
risk of arcing or overheating.
Permanent stencilling is used to identify components and no stick
on labels are placed across capacitor insulation.
The phasor cabinets can be matched to the. styling of your Harris
transmitter. Optional front and rear doors and hinged meter panels
are available. All cabinet doors are equipped with interlocks to
remove power from the equipment when the doors are opened. All
phasor components are removable from inside the cabinet,
facilitating quick servicing. Thus, cabinets may be mounted flush
against a sidewall to conserve space.
Test jacks are provided at all phasor input and output ports and
ACU input locations. Thermocouple ammeter switches are make before -break with a compensating loop and are double throw to
completely remove the meter from the circuit. Toroidal ammeters
are also available. Other switches are available with provision to
accept plug -in meters and to provide "cold" attachment points for
operating bridge measurements without loss of air time.
All insulators are chosen to provide at least one inch per 5 kV
separation to ground. All coils are spaced at least one coil radius
from walls to minimize induced wall currents. Insulator material is
selected on the basis of dielectric strength and dissipation factor,
so that RF voltage gradients will not overstress the material.
Harris maintains a 24 -hour Service Department to assist you with
your emergency parts requirements.
Harris phasor engineers are eager to work with station personnel and
consulting engineers to provide a quality antenna system. For more
information, contact your Harris sales representative or call the Radio
Sales Department at our home office in Quincy, Illinois (217 -2228200).
24
www.americanradiohistory.com
ANTENNA NETWORKS...SUPERIOR DESIGN TECHNIQUES
Harris has been manufacturing custom medium
wave antenna networks for over 25 years. This
experience and outstanding craftsmanship
guarantees many years of reliable service.
Antenna Coupling Unit networks can be housed in
rugged all aluminum weatherproof enclosures as
shown, or on flat aluminum panels for mounting in
existing tower buildings.
close look at Harris' phasor construction reveals many
important features that add not only to the reliability, but to
the convenience of setup and maintenance.
A
simple, yet modern control logic board provides
several key features for stations with multiple antenna modes.
A
The optional custom phasor cabinet shown here
includes hinged front panels for common point
meter access.
25
www.americanradiohistory.com
AM ANTENNA COUPLERS AND ACCESSORIES
Housed in aluminum cabinet with double
front doors. Large coils combined with
capacitors of generous voltage and current
ratings to assure a lifetime of service under
extreme heat or cold. A large antenna lead
in bowl is provided. Mounting is with metal
flanges on the back of the tuning unit for
attachment to wooden poles set in ground or
for mounting on wall.
WEATHERPROOF SERIES -FED
ANTENNA COUPLER,
TEST JACKS
WEATHERPROOF 5 -10 KW
ANTENNA COUPLING UNITS
1250 WATTS
Harris manufactures both a medium power
and high power RF test jack for use in several medium wave antenna network applications. The medium power test jack (shown at
left) is rated for 35 amperes while the high
power version (shown at right) is rated for
100 amperes. These units are constructed
to assure maintenance free operation.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Medium Power Test Jack
High Power Test Jack
994 -3280 -002
994- 3280 -003
SPECIFICATIONS
CARRIER POWER: 5.000 watts or 10.000 watts
AM. as ordered.
FREQUENCY: 525 -1.700 kHz as ordered.
LINE IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms
TO MATCH: Series fed tower of from 70 to 100
electrical length.
METER SHORTING SWITCH
CIRCUIT: Full Tee Network.
WEIGHT: Approximately 200 lbs.
SIZE: 38'" high, 37" wide. 211/2" deep.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Antenna Coupling Unit, 5 kW ....994 -5309 -001
Antenna Coupling Unit, 10 kW ...994 -5309 -002
NOTE: When ordering, state carrier frequency,
transmission line impedance, power, tower
height and tower measurements, if known.
Couplers to match unusual loads such as short
or tall towers, shunt feed, etc., are available on
special order, at extra cost.
SPECIFICATIONS
CARRIER POWER: Up to 1250 watts AM.
FREQUENCY: 525 -1700 kHz as ordered.
LINE IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
TO MATCH: Series -fed tower of from 70° to 100°
electrical length.
CIRCUIT: Full Tee Network.
WEIGHT: 98 lbs.
SIZE: 20' high, 2014 wide, 183/4" deep.
RF ANTENNA METERS
Internal thermocouple standard scale.
Weston Model 308. three -inch square case.
Other ranges not listed below are available
with many carried in stock. Also expanded
scale meters in inventory.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter,
Meter,
Meter,
Meter,
0 -3 R.F. amperes
0 -6 R.F. amperes
0 -8 R.F. amperes
0 -10 R.F. amperes
634 -0206 -000
634 -0238 -000
634 -0209 -000
634 -0210 -000
Recommended for broadcast transmitter
powers of 1,000, 500 and 250 watts, 100%
modulated. Heavy edgewound coil has
generous inductance for a Tee network
along with fixed mica capacitors supplied.
Extra room is provided to install either diode
or thermocouple remote metering equipment. Heavy duty meter shorting switch
eliminates antenna meter from the circuit
when not in use for lightning protection. Meter is observed through plexiglass porthole.
Front door of cabinet has been removed for
illustrative purposes.
heavy duty, make -before -break meter
shorting switch of the plunger or push type.
Heavy bronze tempered spring grips on both
sides assure accuracy and durability.
A
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Shorting Switch, rating 15
994- 3493 -001
amperes
Meter Shorting Switch, rating 40
994 -6527 -001
amperes (shown above)
26
www.americanradiohistory.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
Antenna Coupler with
994-3494-001
antenna meter
NOTE: When ordering, state transmission line
impedance, frequency, tower height, and
tower measurements, if known. Couplers to
match unusual loads such as short or tall towers, shunt feed, etc., are available on special
order at extra cost.
ADDITIONAL MEDIUM WAVE ANTENNA ACCESSORIES
TOWER LIGHT ISOLATION CHOKES
RF CONTACTORS
HEAVY DUTY SAMPLING LOOP
Harris offers a complete line of RF contactors of both the mechanical and vacuum
variety.
The popular mechanical contactors, that
handle a wide range of medium wave antenna applications, are available from
stock.
DIODE TYPE
REMOTE METER EQUIPMENT
A
B
(20 AMP AC RATING)
Most popular of all tower light isolation
chokes. Available in 2 or 3 wire models and
in open type, or weatherproof as illustrated.
Wound on heavy triple X tubing with mica by -pass condensers on each circuit end.
Inductance approximately 350 uH. 3" standoff insulators are part of coil. (Weatherproof
type), 24" high, 173/4" wide, 101/4" deep.
Illustration on left shows weatherproof unit
with front cover removed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
2 wire, weatherproof,
Tower Choke,
Fig. A
994 -3937 -001
Tower Choke,
Fig. A
Tower Choke,
Fig. B
Tower Choke,
Fig. B
3
wire, weatherproof,
2
wire, open type,
3
wire, open type,
994 -3938-001
994-3935-001
994- 3936 -001
FEED -THRU BOWLS
For remote indication of RF current. Consists of a carefully constructed pickup loop
attached through a short coaxial cable to a
solid -state rectifier assembly. RF current is
measured without breaking the main lead.
No AC power is required. May be used with
any good 1 MA DC meter. Power range: 250
watts to 50,000 watts. Frequency range:
540 kHz to 1600 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Diode remote meter unit,
less meter
994- 6112 -001
MA METERS
Meter 3" sq. case,
scale 0 -3 R.F. amperes
632- 0418 -000
Meter 3" sq. case,
scale 0 -6 R.F. amperes
632 -0405 -000
Meter 3" sq. case,
scale 0-8 R.F. amperes
632 -0420 -000
Meter 3" sq. case,
scale 0 -10 R.F. amperes
632 -0421 -000
Meter 4" sq. case,
scale 0 -3 R.F. amperes
632 -0424 -000
Meter 4" sq. case,
scale 0 -8 R.F. amperes
632- 0426 -000
Meter 4" sq. case,
scale 0 -10 R.F. amperes
632 -0361 -000
Meter 4" sq. case,
scale 0 -15 R.F. amperes
632 -0428 -000
NOTE: Other meter scale ranges available at
extra cost. Above for use with diode remote
unit, not thermocouple.
0 -1
FEED -THRU BOWL ASSEMBLY
large feed -thru bowl with 50 kW modulated rating. Available in single and double
units and with solid or hollow studs as listed
below. Bowls are Alsimag. Hardware, heavy
brass. Velutex seals are provided for weathertight installation.
A
ORDERING INFORMATION
Solid stud, 2 bowls, for walls
to 101" thick
994- 2870 -001
Same as above but hollow stud 994- 3254 -001
Solid stud, single bowl, for
walls " thick
994 -5280 -001
Same as above but hollow stud 994 -5281 -001
1
This is a very rugged fixed non -shielded RF
sampling loop. It is heavily galvanized after
welding, and is fitted with large steatite insulators and heavy duty tower leg clamps for
easy and positive mounting. Complete with
type female "N" jack. For 50 to 70 ohm sampling line.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Heavy duty sampling loop
994- 6126 -001
ISOLATION COILS
Harris manufactures several types of sampling loop isolation coils to meet the needs
of the directional array and associated
monitoring system.
Standard units available use either 'h inch
343 inch phase stabilized foam transmission line. The isolation coils are available
with an optional resonating capacitor. The
unit can be mounted ori a flat aluminum wall
panel or housed in a weatherproof enclosure.
or
27
www.americanradiohistory.com
OPEN WIRE TRANSMISSION LINE ACCESSORIES
,x...-tCenter Post
Assembly
Line End Plate
Transmission
Line Bracket
TRANSMISSION LINE BRACKET. For 5 or 6 wire transmission
line. Rating up to 150 kW modulated. Made of 1/4" steel 3" wide with
welded L section on each side to fully prevent twisting under ice or
wind load. Supplied with 81/4" ribbed insulator, wire guides and all
hardware. Galvanized throughout.
994 -3327 -001
Line Bracket
HORN GAP. A very desirable item where higher power is employed. Connects to hot side of line and ground to drain off lightning and heavy static discharges. Usually one is employed for
each 200 feet of line. Insulator for 150 kW. Arc gaps heavy chrome
plate. Galvanized throughout.
994-3322 -001
Horn Gap
LINE END PLATE. To terminate the open wire line at each end.
Plate is 1/4" thick, 20" square. Fully galvanized. Includes turnbuckles, 251/2" strain insulator and all hardware. Rating up to 150
kW modulated.
994- 3328 -001
End Plate
CENTER POST ASSEMBLY. Has variety of uses such as end or
corner angling of transmission line, support insulator for two wire
line or rhombic antennas, and a guide insulator such as end of
building or coupling unit. Rating 150 kW. Galvanized throughout.
994- 3884 -001
Center Post Insulator
The Delta Model 0I13-1 Operating Impedance Bridge measures the
operating impedance of the individual radiators, networks, transmission line sections and common point of directional antennas while
they are functioning under normal power. The OIB -1 has a frequency
range of 500 kHz to 5 MHz, with a power rating up to 10 kW. Several
optional accessories are available for the OIB -1.
700- 0083 -000
Basic OIB -1
MODEL OIB -1
Operating
Impedance
Bridge
MODELS
CPB -1 /CPB -1 A
I..
Common Point
Impedance Bridges
4
MODELS
TCA /TCA -XM
RF Ammeter
Systems
.
The Delta Models CPB -1 or CPB -1A Common Point Impedance
Bridges can be custom installed in your Harris phasor or sold separately. The CPB -1 will handle common point powers up to 5 kW with
100% modulation on a continuous basis, while the CPB -1A is designed for 50 kW operation. Both instruments have two 4 -inch dials
calibrated directly in resistance and reactance. A front panel meter
provides a null condition.
700- 0055 -000
CPB -1
700- 0056 -000
CPB -1 A
The Delta Models TCA and TCA -XM are radio frequency current
measuring instruments designed for broadcast antenna systems.
These instruments are intended for applications where conventional
thermocouples have been used in the past. The units meet the FCC's
requirement of 2% accuracy and are calibrated at RF frequencies to
insure application accuracy. These units can be incorporated into
your custom Harris antenna network or sold separately. Contact us
for the various models and configurations available.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
CP -3M -280
ADV. 557 PTD. IN U.S.A
© Harris Corporation 1980
28
www.americanradiohistory.com
SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE: 540 kHz to 1600 kHz.
Available to 30 MHz on special order.
RF
HARRIS
INPUT: For 50 -ohm line at 6 to 20 volts.
POWER SOURCE: 105-125/210-250 volts, 50/60 Hz, 10 watts.
COMMUNICATION AND
.+iar. ANIION rwoCeerNo
MODULATION INDICATION
METER:
0% to 100% on negative peaks.
0./0 to 130% on positive peaks.
NEGATIVE FLASHER: 50% to 100% on negative peaks, continuously ad.
'Listable
POSITIVE RASHER: 50 %, 90 %, 95 %, 100 %, 105 %, 110 %, 115 %, 120 %,
125%, 130% and off.
AM -80
ACCURACY: Meter
is
+2% of full
scale at 1,000 Hz. Flashers are
±2% at
1,000 Hz.
Medium Wave
Modulation Monitor
AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: ±0.5 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
DISTORTION:
Harris' AM -80 medium wove modulation monitor is an FCC type accepted solid -state instrument designed to meet or exceed all requirements for measuring modulation percentages of broodcost stations in
the frequency ranges 540 kHz to 1600 kHz. It will provide the accurate
and dependable monitoring required by the FCC, and is suitable for
proof -of- performance measurements.
METERS. There are two meters on the front of the AM -80. The Carrier
Meter provides o continuous indication of the RF carrier amplitude. The
% of Modulation Meter provides continuous indication of the modulation percentage on the RF carrier. Two Flasher Lamps are provided to indicate both positive and negative peaks when the percent of modulation
exceeds the pre-set levels.
Less
than 0.3% with 600 -ohm load at 100% modulation.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE: At 100% modulation, output
load, approximately -10 dBm average.
0.55 volts into a 600 -ohm
is
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms, unbalanced.
FIDELITY MEASURING OUTPUT
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: ±0.5 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
DISTORTION:
Less
thon 0.3 %.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE: At 100% modulation, output
resistance greater than 100,000 ohms.
is
4.4 volts with a load
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 4,000 ohms, unbalanced.
NOISE: 70 dB below nominal outputs of both monitoring and fidelity outputs.
REMOTE OUTPUT: For meter and flasher indications at another location, use
Harris' remote meter panel 994 - 7097-001.
GENERAL
AUDIO OUTPUTS. Proof -of- performance measurements can be taken
from the monitor's high -fidelity output with absolute assurance that
readings of transmitter performance are accurate. A 600 -ohm audio
output is also provided to supply aural monitoring in the control rooms.
REMOTE OPERATION: Modulation readings by meter and flashers at a
distant location are obtainable with a Harris optional remote meter panel. Three separate output circuits provide (1) a ballistically correct signal
for o remote meter with a total loop resistance of 5,000 ohms or less, (2)
a remote negative peak flasher and (3) a remote positive peak flasher.
TRANSIENT PROTECTION. A special limiter is provided for use on the
RF input to clip transients which may damage the input diodes.
SIZE: 19" long x 7" high x 7" deep. (48.26 cm z 17.78 cm
mount in a standard relay rack.
WEIGHT: Domestic, 12 lbs. (5.44 kg). Export,
feet
21 lbs.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -4° to 125°
F.
17.78 cm.) Will
x
(9.53 kg). Cubage: 3 cubic
(
-20° to 52° C.)
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE: 0% to 95% relative humidity.
ALTITUDE: Sea level to 7500 feet (2286 meters).
ORDERING INFORMATION
AM -80 Solid -state AM Modulation Monitor
AM -80 Remote Meter Panel
Recommended Semiconductor Kit for AM -80
994 -7084-001
994 -7097-001
994 -7180-001
29
www.americanradiohistory.com
After A.C. power is applied the monitor stabilizes to reliable
readings within 5 minutes. There are no delicate thermostats or
heater controls. The reference oscillator is heated by a proportional oven which maintains the unit's accuracy at a constant
level over a wide range of ambient temperatures.
CFI
W
HAURRJS.
Only one crystal is needed to cover the entire broadcast band.
Setting up to the station frequency simply entails "programming"
the counter. The procedure is so simple that it can easily be accomplished in the field should the station change frequencies.
COMMUNICATION AND
RVFONMATION -I- OCTANND
A test button, when depressed, checks all LED's and read -out
tubes.
AF-80
A remote indicator may be operated over telephone lines of up
to 5000 ohms loop resistance. The optional remote accessory
may be factory installed or added later in the field. In either case
the remote panel contains an analog meter display. One control
adjusts calibration of the remote meter, and the test button confirms that the meter is polarized correctly.
Medium Wave
Frequency Monitor
Harris' medium wave frequency monitor is an FCC type accepted
instrument designed to meet or exceed all requirements for
measuring carrier frequencies of standard AM broadcast transmitters.
Available in a digital read -out model, this frequency monitor
employs solid -state integrated circuits throughout, and features
light -emitting diode (LED) indicators.
The monitor will accept as input any standard AM frequency,
and will indicate the deviation from assigned frequency. The input may be a modulated RF signal of 0.2 volts to 10 volts RMS.
Unlike other designs, there is no loss of indication when the sample RF is modulated above 95 %. A unique circuit "remembers"
the last valid measurement until the modulation of the RF input is
less
than 95% for a normal one -second counting period.
SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE: 540 -1600 kHz as ordered.
RF
INPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
RF
INPUT CONNECTOR:
RF
INPUT SENSITIVITY: (Unmodulated) 10 mV to 10
(Modulated) 0.2 V to 10 V RMS RF, 0 -95% modulation.
BNC.
carrier.
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR: Crystal -controlled in proportional oven.
540 kHz).
ACCURACY: Better than 1.85 ppm (0.5 Hz
DEVIATION INDICATOR RANGE: +31 Hz deviation.
STATUS INDICATORS (LED): Low input alarm;
±20
Hz
deviation alarm; Count
period.
5A N/O & N/C contacts at ±20 Hz or
ALARM RELAY: 120VAC /28 VDC
greater deviation.
are blanked, but the sign indicator continues to operate.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0 to 55 °C.
"alarm" indicator and relay contact closures warn of frequency errors greater than ±20 Hz.
RMS
A.C. POWER INPUT: 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 40 watts.
A two -digit display indicates the magnitude of the frequency error, and a plus -minus indicator shows if the frequency is above or
below the assigned frequency. Above ±31 Hz error, the digits
An
V
a
REMOTE: Maximum remote loop resistance...5000 ohms.
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE: 0 to 95% relative humidity.
ALTITUDE: 0 to 7500 feet above sea level.
DIMENSIONS: 19" wide, 3.5" high, 10.25" deep.
WEIGHT: (Domestic packed) 20 lbs. (Export packed) 45 lbs. (Cubage) 2.4 cu. ft.
ORDERING INFORMATION
994- 6698 -001
AF-80 medium wave frequency monitor, digital nad -out
Recommended spare IC's for AF -80 frequency monitor .. 990 -0747 -001
Remote (digital) meter panel for AF -80 frequency monitor
994 -6863 -001
above
.
)x 15M.180 ©HARRIS CORPORATION 1980
30
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADV 559 PTD. IN U.S.A.
W
Mal
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
MW
TRANSPORTABLE
Basic system includes all necessary buildings and
equipment for a complete medium wave transmitting
station
Available with a variety of options, including living
quarters and generator units
,.
A Completely Assembled,
Easy -To -Ship
Medium Wave
Transmuting Station
//Ì
Buildings pre-assembled,
tested prior to delivery
equipment
installed
and
Readily transportable to even the most difficult -to -reach
site
Minimum site preparation
High- strength, minimum -maintenance fiberglass
buildings
Harris transmitting equipment for top performance, top
reliability
31
www.americanradiohistory.com
www.americanradiohistory.com
such major items as a living quarters
shelter for one or two persons, and a
completely self- contained generator/
shelter unit to serve either as a
standby to the main power, or as the
main power source at a remote site. In
addition, such options as perimeter
lighting, air conditioning, etc. may be
included. This "options" concept
allows you the flexibility of setting up
exactly the type of station you need,
without paying for unwanted extras.
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIMIIIIIIIImuiumimiim
nllllllllllllllllllll
IIIII
rJ
IIIIIIIIII
The optional living quarters module is
supplied complete with furnishings,
equipment and storage areas. Facilities include bunk beds, desk, clothing
lockers, table and chairs, storage
cabinets, sink, electric cooker, toilet,
shower, wash basin, hot water heater
and exhaust. Air conditioning, a
washer /dryer unit, and a refrigerator/
freezer are optional.
Cutaway drawing of a typical one-kilowatt transmitter shelter, showing equipment Installation.
Transmitter and program Input equipment is factory Installed and tested prior to shipment.
optional generator shelter is
supplied with either a single AC
generator, or with dual AC generators
operated in a main /standby system.
The size of the shelter and of the
generators is dependent on the
amount of power required by the
complex (i.e.: power output of the
transmitter system, inclusion of living
quarters, air conditioning, perimeter
lighting, etc.).
The
SHELTER CONSTRUCTION
include panelled side walls, and
vinyl-asbestos tile flooring. The insulated doors are sealed on all four sides
with air -tight, dust -out weather stripping.
These pre -assembled, no -seam shelters are specifically designed to keep
electronic equipment in a safe,
controlled
environment, no matter
where the station is located. Each
unit --whether transmitter shelter, living quarters shelter or generator
shelter --is delivered fully equipped.
Harris' "MW Transportable" shelters
are constructed from top grade
heavy -duty materials to stand up
most difficult weather
conditions and the most punishing
use. Each shelter is built on a special
heavy -duty skid, which prevents warping and floor sagging, and can serve
as the foundation at the site. The skid
also allows each shelter to be shipped
easily, as the skid provides the lifting
points for the module.
under
the
The shelter exteriors are of extra -
site, so that little or no civil works ara required.
tough, weatherproof fiberglass, which
needs no routine maintenance, over
3/8 -inch plywood and 1 -518 -inch
styrofoam insulation. The interiors
READILY TRANSPORTABLE
Harris' "MW Transportable" shelters
are designed for shipment by flat -bed
truck, by rail, by sea and even by air to
almost any spot in the world. The
lightweight, yet extra -sturdy shelters
serve as shipping containers for the
rigidly- braced equipment inside en
route to the site, and as the final
housing at the site. This shelter
concept eliminates time consuming
and expensive unloading and installation of equipment at the station
location, and assures that you will be
ready to go on -air in minimum time
after delivery.
33
www.americanradiohistory.com
BASIC MW-1A, ONE -KILOWATT DUAL MEDIUM WAVE
1
PERSONNEL
SHELTER
GENERATOR
SHELTER
PERIMETER
LIGHTING
208 /230 VAC
30, 50 Hz
GENERATORS)
LARGE
FUEL
TANKS
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
MAINS 30,50 Hz
WASTE
HOLDING
TANK
WATER
TANK
ENCLOSED
ENTRY
POWER STEPDOWN
TRANSFORMER
208/230, 30, 50 Hz
AIR
CONDITIONING
REFRIGERATOR/
FREEZER
I
BLANK
PANEL
AUDIO
SWITCHER
OFF AIR
RECEIVER
PANEL
AGC
AMPLIFIER
LIMITER
BLOWER
ABOUT "MW TRANSPORTABLE" SYSTEMS
With Harris' "MW Transportable" you can set up a
medium wave transmitting station quickly, almost
anywhere on earth, with minimum preparation, minimum
difficulty. And you can set up exactly the type of
operation you want, by including options with a standard
system. Also, if your needs change, options can be added
at a later date to meet your new requirements.
34
www.americanradiohistory.com
TRANSMITTING SYSTEM, AND AVAILABLE OPTIONS
MW TRANSPORTABLE
SYSTEM
1
KILOWATT DUAL
TRANSMITTER
SHELTER
ANTENNA SYSTEM
535 -770 KHz; 770 -1100 KHz;
or 1100 -1620 KHz
ANTENNA
INSTALLATION
KIT
PROGRAM
INPUT
TWO MW -1A
KILOWATT
TRANSMITTERS
1
AUDIO
PATCH
PANEL
RACK
RF
PATCH
PANEL
RF
CHANGEOVER
ASSEMBLY
MODULATION
MONITOR
MECHANICAL
SUPPORT
ACCESSORY
CABLE
KIT
KIT
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
MONITOR
AMPLIFIER/
SPEAKER
RF
CHANGEOVER
CONTROL
The chart above shows a one -kilowatt alternate /main
transmitting system, and gives a quick indication of what
is standard and what is optional. There are, of course,
other transmitter configurations available in one -kilowatt
systems, and other power ranges available (five, ten and
twenty), but generally, most of the systems are similar to
that shown.
KEY:
STANDARD EQUIPMENT
SHOWN IN BLUE.
OPTIONS SHOWN IN GRAY.
- SHOWS OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
WITH THE OPTIONS.
35
www.americanradiohistory.com
118.0-1
80CM.80CM
i
PNL
106CM
PGM
INPUT
RACK
127 CM
14.2..1
t
01
.5
31
51
l'
4-AC
1
12.51
108CM
+--2.5y..1+
MW.IA
..1
C
Z
U
Z
Ill
w
Y
2
Ó
MW- 1p
O
°
2.
/
M
,ac
3
T}---'
Ó
71
AUTO RF.
CM
TRANSFER SWITCH
i2Y"I
f
1
MAINTENANCE
ACCESS DOOR
LOCKABLE
I
DOOR
OPTIO NALi
.OPEN FROM
INSIDE ONLY)
On.-kilowatt transmitter shelter
TYPICAL SHELTER FLOOR PLANS...
5.49 M
18'0"
O-rr
COIMITATIO
SINS AND STO
DUBBER
r-------
FOLD DOW
r-1 WIT
I
- -rwo,
ru
-
I
FAN
L
- -i
J
ELM
o
1,.T
TN
C110,
LT
I
DOUBLE
SUNK BEDS
I
r
TAMER
I
C11uA
- -
2.0 M
ero"
-'cu._yA ¡
TOILET
AND DEVER
f;ç:;
11.0I AAAAA
A
OD DOOM
Living shelter (optional)
5.49 M
18.0"
2
LAMP FLUOR. LIGHT
2
FLCS
30 LITER
LAMP FLUOR. LIGHT
a FLCS
30 LITER
OIL
TANK
OIL
TANK
2.A< M
BO"
2
227 LITER
60 GAL.
DAY
TANK
LAMP FLUOR. LIGHT
FLCS
227
LITER
60 GAL
DAY
TANK
2
LAMP FLUOR. LIGHT
a FLCS
TR AN SFE
AC PNL
SWITCH
Generator shatter (optional
36
www.americanradiohistory.com
QUICK -ERECT ANTENNA
o
The most practical antenna system for a station that has a tight on -air deadline is
the quick -erect mast radiator. This quarter -wave system is designed so that the
tower can be raised, and the ground system installed in a week or less. It includes
a sturdy, easily assembled aluminum tower and matching unit; guys and screw
anchors; all necessary hardware; a tool kit; and complete instructions....
everything you need to set up for operation quickly. The mast radiator is available
in power ratings up to 20 kilowatts, in the following frequency ranges: 535 -770
kHz; 770 -1100 kHz; and 1100 -1620 kHz.
ABOUT SHIPPING COSTS
The total cost of an "MW Transportable" pre- equipped,
pre -assembled structure, delivered on site, ready for use, is lower
than on "knock- down" construction...and is a much better
product. Although it costs a little more to ship a pre -assembled
building (shipping costs are based on cubage rather than weight),
when you take into consideration the cost of a crew on site for
assembly, expensive crating for the electronic equipment, etc.,
the pre -assembled building saves you money.
Also, with Harris' "MW Transportable ", the electronic equipment
is safely and properly installed in the building prior to shipment,
so that the building itself serves as a shipping container to protect
delicate equipment from rough handling, and from pilfering. On
delivery the equipment is in place, and requires minimal expense
to get it ready for use.
And finally, it is almost impossible to assemble and weatherproof
shelter on site and achieve the top quality results that are
assured by factory assembly prior to shipment.
a
Overall, then, you receive a superior product, at less cost, by
going with the pre-assembled "MW Transportable ". And, of
course, you save time in getting on the air.
37
www.americanradiohistory.com
Typical "MW Transportable" complex,
including transmitter shelter, quick -erect
antenna and optional living quarters
and generator shelters.
HARRIS' "MW TRANSPORTABLE" EQUIPMENT LIST
"MW Transportable" systems employ Harris' one, five or
ten kilowatt medium wave transmitters --in single, parallel
and alternate /main configurations, or employ two
separate transmitters for separate programming. The
listing below shows standard and optional equipment for
parallel or alternate /main operation --and the equipment
for the other two configurations would be almost
identical, except there would be no switcher or combiner.
Also, in the case of two separate transmitters, duplicate
program input equipment would be standard.
STANDARD EQUIPMENT
MAJOR OPTIONS
Transmitter Shelter: The size of the pre-assembled shelter
depends on the power of the transmitter system. The transmitter system and the program input equipment are pre installed in this shelter.
Personnel Shelter: Includes two bunk beds, desk and chair, two
clothing lockers, table and chairs, storage cabinets, sink,
electric cooker, toilet, shower, wash basin, hot water
heater, exhaust, reserve water tank and a waste tank. Air
conditioning, a washer /dryer unit, and a refrigerator/
freezer are optional with the shelter.
Transmitter System: Two Harris one, five or ten kilowatt
medium wave transmitters with either a changeover
switcher for alternate /main operation, or a combiner for
parallel operation.
Program input Equipment Rack: Includes an audio switcher
with ten high level inputs, and program and monitor
outputs; automatic gain control amplifier; modulation
monitor;
limiter;
VU
meter;
monitor amplifier/
speaker; audio patch panel; line amplifier; RF changeover
control; RF patch panel.
Antenna System: Quarter -wave mast radiator, with antenna
installation kit, including ground system. Specify frequency range (535 -770 kHz; 770 -1100 kHz; 1100 -1620 kHz).
Generator Shelter: Includes single AC generator, or dual AC
generators operated in a main /standby system. The size of
the generators and the shelter is dependent on your power
requirements.
Perimeter Lighting: Perimeter or area lighting in a variety of
configurations is available for security or safety purposes.
Optional Program input Equipment: Space is provided in the
transmitter shelter for additional racks of STL or
automation equipment...and there is space and wiring
included in the standard program input equipment rack for
one additional AGC amplifier and an additional limiter.
NOTE: EQUIPMENT LISTS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
C P-4. 5 M -877
ADV. 512 PTD. IN U.S.A.
38
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
SW-1 on
100,000 Watt
Short Wave
Broadcast
Transmitter
High level Pulse Duration Modulation
Exceeds 55 °° overall efficiency
10- Channel pre -set
tuning
Low power consumption
Only five tubes for 100 kW
Vapor phase cooling
Designed for trapezoidal programming
Minimum floor space
Full front and rear accessibility
39
Harris' SW -100 is a high -level, plate modulated short wave broadcast
transmitter, featuring automatic 10- channel pre -set tuning. Utilizing
the exclusive Pulse Duration Modulator, the SW -100 provides higher
efficiency, lower operating costs and overall performance superior to
that of any other short wave transmitter in the 100 kilowatt power
range. The transmitter is capable of operating at any frequency
between 3.2 and 22 MHz.
MINIMUM FLOOR SPACE. Due to the elimination of large iron core
components such as the modulation transformer and modulation
reactor, the SW -100 requires only 7 square meters (76 square feet) of
floor space. Advanced cabinet design provides easy accessibility to
all components.
RF SECTION. The RF chain is conventional using a transistorized os-
EFFICIENCY
EXCEEDS 55%. The Pulse Duration
Modulator employed in the SW-100 is almost 90% efficient (instead
of the usual 50% to 60 %), enabling the transmitter to achieve an unusually high overall efficiency of greater than 55 %. This means about
one third less power consumption than that of other high level plate
modulated 100 kW transmitters.
HIGH
10- CHANNEL PRE -SET TUNING. Few controls and ample metering
make the SW -100 the easiest tuning high power transmitter available.
The servo system will automatically tune to any of ten pre -set chan-
nels in about 10 seconds. Auxiliary switching is possible for each
channel for antenna switching, synthesizer programming, etc. Up to
ten different frequencies from 3.2 to 22 MHz can be remembered,
which allows pushbutton re- tuning to any pre -set frequency.
FIVE TUBE DESIGN. The entire transmitter employs just five tubes.
with modern ceramic 4CV50,000E tetrode power tubes operating well
below manufacturer's dissipation ratings. All power supplies utilize
long -life solid -state silicon rectifiers. Highest quality components.
conservatively rated, are used throughout the SW -100 to assure a
maximum degree of reliability.
HIGH AVERAGE MODULATION CAPABILITY. The transmitter is
capable of sustained high average modulation such as that experienced with trapezoidal audio processing -which means greater
loudness at the receiver without increased transmitter carrier power.
This is a feature of the high efficiency, DC coupled PDM modulator
that avoids the use of large, inefficient transformers in the modulation
process. Another feature of this high efficiency series type modulator
is convenient front panel carrier power adjustment over a wide range.
VAPOR PHASE COOLING. The SW -100 employs the vapor cooling
technique. This highly efficient method of heat transfer results in constant anode temperatures and extended tube life. This system allows
a much smaller and more efficient heat exchanger than older water
cooling systems.
cillator, buffer, emitter follower and a 4CX1500A tetrode tube
amplifier to drive a single 4CV50,000E tetrode Class C power output
stage.
An automatic drive control maintains the PA screen current at 1.75
amps, eliminating the usual problem of over- dissipating the screen of
a tetrode during tune -up.
THE MODULATION SYSTEM. Harris' Pulse Duration Modulator is
characterized by low plate dissipation and low peak tube currents;
peak cathode currents are about one -half that of other 100 kW transmitters. Average plate dissipation runs substantially below rated
levels, and all peak voltages are maintained well below component
ratings.
Wide frequency response is possible as large reactive components
are not used in the modulation system. Control of the transmitter
power output over a wide range is accomplished in a low -level stage
of the modulator by means of a convenient front panel vernier control. No adjustment is necessary in any high power RF circuit.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. All major components of the SW -100 are
protected by circuit breakers. Tubes and transistors are guarded by
overload relays or current -limiting devices.
quick- acting circuit protects against damage by high voltage arcs
by limiting the energy in such arcs to less than 10 watt seconds.
Protection against voltage standing wave ratios of greater than 1.5 to
1.0 is provided. Both forward and reflected power are metered at the
front panel.
A
momentary RF overloads the SW -100 will recycle three
times automatically. Should a third overload occur within a thirty second period. the transmitter will remain off until manually reset.
However, if the time between overloads is greater than thirty seconds. continuous recycling will occur.
In case of
The SW -100 employs a unique method of transmitter protection. The
modulator tube may be turned off in a low level state in about five
TRAPEZOIDAL RESPONSE
Trapezoidal audio processing may be used to develop greater intelligence carrying sideband power without increasing the transmitter
carrier power. To do this the audio input wave (A) is flattened at the
top, by clipping, then reamplified to form a trapezoidal wave (B). The
shaded areas in the diagram indicate the power gain.
The desired power gain is lost, however, if this clipped, or flattened
wave tilts downward due to poor low frequency response, or is
rounded out again to its original shape by sub -standard high frequency response.
The SW -100 has the capability of passing a 100 Hz 12 dB clipped
wave at 100% modulation with minimum tilt or rounding of the wave.
All the additional power gained by clipping the audio input is
delivered at the output of the transmitter, thus increasing volume at
the receiver.
www.americanradiohistory.com
microseconds. This removes the HV from the plate of the tube, thus
eliminating most faults which normally occur. The HV supply (diodes
and transformer) is capable of withstanding repeated short circuits
without harming the unit.
An automatic gain control monitors the PA screen. The PA may be
operated with no HV but with screen voltage and under any condition
of tuning with no damage being done to the PA tube.
Additional protection is provided by the HV circuit breaker. Tubes
and transistors are also protected by current limiting impedances.
THE SERVO SYSTEM. The all solid -state servo system will
automatically tune any of 10 pre -set channels in about ten seconds.
Each channel is "remembered" on one plug -in card. Auxiliary
switching also is provided on each pre -set channel card for antenna
switching, synthesizer, programming, etc. The fast tuning time is
made possible because the HV supply is not disabled during the tune
cycle: the RF drive is turned off in a low level solid -state stage, and all
tuning is done in parallel. When the tuning has been accomplished,
the modulator is turned back on silently and smoothly.
TRANSMITTER LAYOUT. The standard SW-100 consists of two
cabinets, a heat exchanger and an external high voltage power transformer and voltage regulator. Front and rear doors and meter panel
are magnetically latched. The SW -100 can be supplied with the heat
exchanger for roof top mounting.
SW -100. rear doors removed
(Heat exchanger not shown)
F-IA,RRts
41
www.americanradiohistory.com
fffff
o
DI
ACAS.
0001
PASS
SW -100 BLOCK DIAGRAM
SuAl
14.111-1
7")
PALIS
WALL TATO
AlOCIAATQA a
POWER AAMISWISO
IM"
V.N
NV
FORM
MORT
A TANK a
IV
SW -100 FLOOR PLAN
(External heat exchanger not shown)
retwoax
1
C
cLIT )
MOOR PENAL)
-
)
VOLTAGE
w01AATGE
----(1E1
(
,ori
MOOR AVOW
SW -100 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER OUTPUT: 100.000 watts nominal unmodulated.
POWER INPUT: Any specified voltage 380V to 480V. 3 phase. 50 or 60 Hz.
RF FREQUENCY RANGE: 3.2 to 22.0 MHz.
POWER CONSUMPTION:
180 kW
No modulation
190 kW
30% modulation
250 kW
100% modulation
METHOD OF TUNING: Manual. or selection of 10 pre -set channels.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 300 ohms balanced, 1.6 to
others available on special order.
RF FREQUENCY
STABILITY:
*_1
x 10 -L
(
1
maximum VSWR;
POWER FACTOR: Greater than 95%.
*_22 Hz at 22 MHz).
SPURIOUS AND HARMONIC EMISSION: Less than 50 mW.
OVERALL EFFICIENCY: 55% (P average modulation.
CARRIER SHIFT: Less than 2% at 95% modulation.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
1.000 Hz at 95% modulation.
.
1.5 dB from 50 to 10.000 Hz referenced to
TUBES: Two- 4CV50.000E: two- 4CX1500A: one -F -1099
TEMPERATURE RANGE:
AUDIO FREQUENCY DISTORTION: Less than 3% from 50 to 10.000 Hz at 95%
modulation.
0
0
dBm_2
to
50'C ambient air temperature.
HUMIDITY: 95% relative humidity. maximum.
STORAGE TEMPERATURE:
NOISE: 55 dB below 1.000 Hz, 100% modulated level.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL:
VOLTAGE REGULATOR: Electronic voltage regulation for all power supplies
other than high voltage.
35 °C to
60 °C.
ALTITUDE: Up to 1829 meters (6000 feet) above sea level.
dB for 100% modulation.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600/150 ohms, balanced or unbalanced.
MODULATION LEVEL: 100% sinusoidal. 10 minutes, 50-5000 Hz.
CABINET DATA: Each of two cabinets measures 1.83 meters (6 feet) wide. 1.37
meters (4.5 feet) deep. and 1.98 meters (6.5 feet) high. The heat exchanger
adds another 1.06 meters (3.5 feet) in height.
TRAPEZOIDAL MODULATION: Less than 5% tilt or overshoot, 100 Hz to 2000
Hz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SW -100, 100,000 watt short wave broadcast transmitter, with remote heat exchanger
994 -6734 -001
ADV. 467C PTD. IN U.S.A.
CP-2M-779
42
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
UNIIVIONI, Al ION ANI,
INFORMATION PROCESSING
SW-50
High level Pulse Duration Modulation
Low power consumption
Vapor phase cooling
50,000 Watt
Short Wave
Broadcast
Transmitter
10- Channel pre -set
tuning
Only five tubes for 50 kW
Full front and rear accessibility
Minimum floor space
Designed for trapezoidal programming
:3
www.americanradiohistory.com
The Harris SW -50 is a rugged, reliable 50 kW short wave
transmitter which uses the same design and engineering
criteria as the popular Harris SW -100. The SW -50 provides
overall performance superior to that of any other short wave
broadcast transmitter in the same power range -and at
significantly lower operating costs.This is made possible by
Harris' exclusive high level Pulse Duration Modulator.
HIGH EFFICIENCY- EXCEEDS 46 %. The Pulse Duration
Modulator employed in the transmitter is almost 90% efficient
(instead of the usual 50% or 60 %), allowing an unusually high
overall efficiency of more than 46 %.
ONLY FIVE TUBES. The transmitter employs just five
tubes -with a modern ceramic 4CV50,000E power tetrode in
the modulator and final RF power amplifier sockets. All power
supplies utilize long -life solid -state silicon rectifiers. Highest
quality components, conservatively rated, are used
throughout the SW -50 to assure greatest reliability.
100% MODULATION RATING. The high efficiency series
type Pulse Duration Modulator permits 100% sine wave or
trapezoidal modulation. Another feature of this high efficiency
series type modulator is convenient front panel carrier adjustment over a wide range.
PRE -SET TUNING. After the SW -50 has been tuned to the
desired frequency manually, the exact position of each
variable tuning element is stored in a simple "memory ". Up to
ten different frequencies from 3.2 to 22 MHz can be
"remembered ", which allows pushbutton re- tuning to any
preset frequency without further manual tuning. Few controls
and ample metering make this the easiest tuning 50 kW
transmitter available.
Rear view of RF isolation box showing power amplifier
tube assembly and vapor phase cooling boiler.
RF SECTION. The RF chain is conventional using a tran-
sistorized oscillator, buffer, emitter follower and a 4CX1500A
tetrode tube amplifier to drive a single 4CV50,000E tetrode
Class C power output stage.
An automatic drive control maintains the PA screen current at
1 75 amps, eliminating the usual problem of over -dissipating
the screen of a tetrode during the tune -up.
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS. All major components of the SW50 are protected by circuit breakers. Tubes and transistors
are guarded by overload relays or current -limiting devices.
A quick- acting circuit protects against damage by high
voltage arcs by limiting the energy in such arcs to less than 10
watt seconds. Protection against voltage standing wave ratios
of greater than 1.5 to 1.0 is provided. Both forward and
reflected power are metered at the front panel.
In case of momentary RF overloads the SW -50 will recycle
three times automatically. Should a third overload occur
within a thirty second period, the transmitter will remain off
until manually reset. However, if the time between overloads
is greater than thirty seconds, continuous recycling will occur.
The SW -50 employs a unique method of transmitter protection. The modulator tube may be turned off in a low level state
in about five microseconds. This removes the HV from the
plate of the tube, thus eliminating most faults which normally
occur. The HV supply (diodes and transformer) is capable of
withstanding repeated short circuits without harming the unit.
THE SERVO SYSTEM. The all solid -state servo system will
automatically tune any of 10 pre -set channels in about ten
seconds. Each channel is "remembered" on one plug -in card.
Auxiliary switching also is provided on each pre -set channel
card for antenna switching, synthesizer, programming, etc.
The fast tuning time is made possible because the HV supply
NARRI$
www.americanradiohistory.com
with heat exchanger. front
doors removed.
SW -50
is not disabled during the tune cycle; the RF drive is turned off
in a low level solid -state stage, and all tuning is done in parallel. When the tuning has been accomplished, the modulator is
turned back on silently and smoothly.
VAPOR PHASE COOLING. Vapor phase cooling eliminates
the need for large blowers moving high velocity air. Vapor
phase cooling also extends tube life by helping to eliminate
"hot spots" and maintaining anode temperatures far below
those attained by other methods.
GREATLY REDUCED FLOOR SPACE. Due to the high efficiency of the transmitter and the elimination of large iron
core components (no modulation transformer and reactor),
the SW -50 requires only 7.0 square meters (76 square feet) of
floor space. Careful cabinet design provides easy accessibility to all components.
TRANSMITTER LAYOUT. The standard layout of the transmitter consists of two cabinets, a heat exchanger designed
for mounting on top of the cabinets, and an external high
voltage power transformer. Front and rear doors, and meter
panel are magnetically latched. External connections to the
transmitter are made through the top so that floor ducts are
not necessary.
Ideal for use in all types of climate, this transmitter greatly
reduces the problems of cleaning and filtering of outside air.
With vapor phase cooling, ducting outside air into the transmitter is not necessary. Also, the cooling system requires little
attention other than maintaining the proper purity and water
level in the reservoir tank.
TRAPEZOIDAL RESPONSE
Trapezoidal audio processing may be used to develop greater
intelligence carrying sideband power without increasing transmitter carrier power. To do this the audio input wave (A) is
flattened at the top, by clipping, then reamplified to form a
trapezoidal wave (B). The shaded areas in the diagram indicate the power gain.
The desired power gain is lost, however, if this clipped, or flattened, wave tilts downward due to poor low frequency
response, or is rounded out again to its original shape by substandard high frequency response.
The SW -50 has the capability of passing a 100 Hz 12 dB clipped wave at 100% modulation with minimum tilt or rounding of
the wave.
All the additional power gained by clipping the audio input is
delivered at the output of the transmitter, thus increasing
volume at the receiver.
SW -50 rear view, doors off (heat exchanger not shown)
HARRIS
4b
www.americanradiohistory.com
(
1110o{IAtQa
MAU M/0.
I
orrw Aertww
w)
IM
viz-)
IIy
SW -50 FLOOR PLAN
FOM.
NM/
tarn I
rArErwot
tl
C
OUTFIT
.sVOUAI
xATI
1
F
II
0
- (2.7))(OOI SWAMI
(Iww1--
MO
rwIwi
et
at/SI
I
0
olVyt
SW -50 BLOCK DIAGRAM
u
1LLLLL
au Ms
SW -50 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER OUTPUT: 50.000 watts nominal unmodulated: capable 55.000 watts.
TRAPEZOIDAL MODULATION: Less than 5% tilt or overshoot, 100 Hz to 2000
Hz
RF FREQUENCY RANGE: 3.2 to 22.0 MHz.
POWER INPUT: Any specified voltage 380 V to 480 V. 3 phase. 50 or 60 Hz.
METHOD OF TUNING: Manual. or selection of 10 pre -set channels.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 300 ohms balanced. 1.6 to
others available on special order.
RF FREQUENCY
STABILITY:
10 -"
1
I
1
maximum VSWR.
POWER CONSUMPTION: 110 kW -no modulation: 114 kW -30% modulation;
145
kW-100% modulation.
POWER FACTOR: Greater than 95 %.
22 Hz at 22 MHz).
SPURIOUS AND HARMONIC EMISSION: Less than 50 mW.
VOLTAGE REGULATOR: Electronic voltage regulation for all power supplies
other than high voltage.
CARRIER SHIFT: Less than 2% at 95% modulation. Less than 5% at 100%
OVERALL EFFICIENCY: 46%
modulation
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
1.000 Hz at 95% modulation.
1.5 dB
from 50 to 10.000 Hz referenced to
NOISE: 55 dB below 1,000 Hz. 100% modulated level.
0
dBm
2
average modulation.
Two- 4CV50.000E; two- 4CX1500A:
TEMPERATURE RANGE:
AUDIO FREQUENCY DISTORTION: Less than 3% from 50 to 10.000 Hz at 95%
modulation.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL:
TUBES:
@
0
to
-
one
-F -1099.
50°C ambient air temperature.
HUMIDITY: 95% relative humidity. maximum.
STORAGE TEMPERATURE:
35 °C to
60 °C.
ALTITUDE: Up to 1829 meters (6000 feet) above sea level.
dB for 100% modulation.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 /150 ohms, balanced or unbalanced.
MODULATION LEVEL: 100% sinusoidal, one hour, 50 -5000 Hz.
CABINET DATA: Each of two cabinets measures 1.83 meters (6 feet) wide. 1.37
meters (4.5 feet) deep. and 1.98 meters (6.5 feet) high. The heat exchanger
adds another 1.06 meters (3.5 feet) in height.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SW- 50,50,000 watt short wave broadcast transmitter, top-mounted heat exchanger
As above, except with remote heat exchanger
9448808 -005
9444808-001
ADV. 466C PTD. IN U.S.A.
CP-2M-779
46
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Combines two 25- kilowatt amplifiers for
highest reliability
Only two tubes
...
solid- state, redundant IPAs
High efficiency, low operating cost
FMD -50K
50- Kilowatt
Dual FM
Broadcast
Transmitter
Wide RF bandwidth, minimum tunable components
Driven by the most advanced FM exciter in the
world -MS -15
Patented DSM stereo generator
typical
...
stereo separation
40 dB minimum, 50 dB
DTR filter technique limits overshoot to 2% or less
Solid -state control logic
Automatic power control
47
www.americanradiohistory.com
FMD -50K ... dual configuration for complete redundancy
... only two tubes
The design versatility of the MS -15 exciter
allows you to order mono operation originally, then add stereo and /or SCA at a later
date by plugging the appropriate module(s)
into the exciter. The FMD -50K is equipped
for wideband composite input in its standard configuration.
AUTOMATIC POWER CONTROL
The FMD -50K automatically monitors power output, and maintains the output at the
desired level. This standard feature insures
against out -of- tolerance power conditions.
Furthermore, the power set point can be remotely adjusted independently of the limit
points to allow operator control of power
output. During maintenance periods, the
automatic power control may be switched
off.
The FMD -50K dual 50- kilowatt transmitter
offers real protection against off-air time
through redundancy, and through extensive
use of solid -state circuitry. Only two tubes
are employed in the entire FMD -50K ..
high -gain, highly efficient 8990 tetrodes
used as the final power amplifiers. The
8990 uses a wavy fin radiator which provides exceptional cooling at reduced air
requirements, for quiet operation. The
quarter -wave PA cavity design eliminates
.
troublesome sliding contacts for tuning,
and assures wide RF bandwidth. This results in a signal path that is transparent to
the MS -15 exciter.
The basic FMD -50K transmitter consists of
two 25- kilowatt amplifiers, and a center
control cabinet. It provides redundancy in
all areas except the exciters. In case emergency operation is required, you stay on
the air at one -quarter normal power output.
An even higher level of redundancy is
achieved in the complete FMD -50K through
an optional arrangement of switches, sensors and circuits that make the FMD -50K
totally redundant from audio input to RF
output.
The FMD -50K with the RF output switching
option provides the capability of automa-
tically switching either transmitter directly to the antenna, thus providing one-half
normal operating power in the event of a
transmitter malfunction.
With the addition of the automatic exciter
switching option, automatic backup exciter
protection is provided. Also, an optional
RF input patch panel is available to connect either exciter directly to either transmitter by bypassing all of the automatic exciter switching equipment.
SOLID -STATE IPA'S
The redundancy of the dual FMD -50K is
heightened when the IPA in each 25 -kilowatt amplifier is considered. The IPA
stages are multiple solid -state amplifiers
combined in such a manner that failure of
one amplifier stage will not cause a total
loss of IPA RF power. The IPA solid -state
modules in the PA are identical to those
used in the booster amplifier for the MS -15.
The wide use of solid -state RF power circuits means that the FMD -50K uses only
two tubes!
LOW OPERATING COST
With today's mounting energy costs, transmitter efficiency must be a major consideration in any purchase 77% efficiency in
the final power amlifiers, high efficiency in
all amplifier circuits, and conservatively
rated components result in comparatively
low power consumption and low operating
stress on heat generating components in
the FMD -50K. This adds up to very impressive savings in operating and maintenance
costs.
VSWR PROTECTION
VSWR protection is mandatory in any high power transmitter- therefore, Harris has
incorporated this as a standard feature in
the FMD -50K. A high VSWR condition will
cause the transmitter to recycle ... if three
overloads occur within a given time period, the transmitter will shut down until
manually restarted. The transmitter may
also be programmed for single VSWR overload shutdown.
CONTROL CIRCUITRY
The FMD -50K is controlled by solid -state
logic circuitry. The logic circuitry not only
controls basic On /Off functions, but also
monitors critical stages for overload con-
ditions. Should an overload occur,
transmitter will recycle automatically.
the
The control logic used in the FMD -50K interfaces directly with most remote control
systems, eliminating the need for an additional remote control interface. The control
signals are momentary low current contacts. The transmitter output parameters
are buffered, and all status indicators can
be remoted.
FINEST STEREO PERFORMANCE
Featuring the advanced -design MS -15 exciter, Harris' FMD -50K provides the cleanest and the loudest stereo signal of any
50- kilowatt FM transmitter available today.
The DSM (Digitally Synthesized Modulation)
stereo generator allows the transmitter to
provide stereo separation of 40 dB minimum (50 dB typical), 30- 15,000 Hz -while
the DTR (Dynamic Transient Response) filter permits a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness, with no degradation of audio quality,
by limiting overshoot to 2% or less.
METERING AND VISUAL AIDS
The FMD -50K may be equipped for mono
or stereo operation, with or without SCA.
The FMD -50K provides a variety of indicators as troubleshooting aids and quick
48
www.americanradiohistory.com
Major functions, including combined output power, VSWR and reject load power
are displayed on easy -to -read 4 -inch meters in the center cabinet. Complete monitoring of operating functions of the individual 25- kilowatt amplifiers are also displayed. Low -level parameters of each amplifer are displayed on a multimeter, and
IPA RF output and reflected power are indicated on another meter. Filament voltage
is measured by a true RMS circuit.
'
references. These include illuminated On/
on pushbuttons and numerous LED status
indicators.
30.5" deep. Additionally, the HV power supplies may be located in any convenient
spots remote from the PA cabinets.
HV POWER SUPPLIES
The two high voltage power supplies are
housed in separate cabinets, and provide
the plate and screen voltage. The conservatively -rated three -phase plate supplies use
silicon rectifiers with AC line transient protection.
GENERAL
There are many other operational and convenience features incorporated into the
FMD -50K. These include:
Loss Protection -Built -in protection
against total AC failure and loss of phase
is provided. The FMD -50K will restart automatically following a total power failure,
while loss of a single phase will shut down
the transmitter.
Line
COMPACT SIZE
The trim FMD -50K cabinet configuration
measures only 90 2" wide, 72" high and
High Altitude Rating -High capacity, direct -drive blowers deliver sufficient air to
cool the transmitter at altitudes up to
10,000 feet (3048 meters).
-
Additional Protection
Magnetic circuit
breakers are utilized to protect the blower
motors, the filament supplies, the IPA supplies and the bias supplies. A safety interlock system and a drop solenoid system
discharge power supplies to safe levels.
Automatic Transmitter System Compatibility -The simple control logic interface and
full metering in the FMD -50K permit ATS
operation.
-
SO
KW
TO ANTENNA
FMD -50K BLOCK DIAGRAM
WITH FULL COMPLEMENT OF OPTIONS
MS-15
3
dB
BOOSTER
AMPS
3
A
MS 15
E
EXCITER
SWITCH
R
o
dB
REJECT
LOAD
I
TRANSMITTER
SWITCHER
EXCITER SWITCHING OPTION
RE
SWITCHING OPTION
HARRIS' FMD -50K DUAL FM TRANSMITTER CONFIGURATIONS
BASIC FMD -50K DUAL SYSTEM
Two FM -25K transmitters, less exciters.
One MS -15 exciter.
One dual RF booster amplifier with low
power hybrid coupler and reject load.
One 19 -inch center cabinet with control
and metering circuitry.
One high power hybrid coupler with
interconnecting transmission line
components.
One 12.5- kilowatt reject load.
FMD -50K WITH AUTOMATIC RF OUTPUT
SWITCHING
Two FM -25K transmitters, less exciters.
One MS -15 exciter.
One dual RF booster amplifier with low
power hybrid coupler and reject load.
One 19 -inch center cabinet with control
metering and RF control logic assembly.
One floor- mounted frame assembly with
three high power coaxial switches, one
high power hybrid combiner, and one
12.5- kilowatt reject load.
All necessary interconnecting
transmission line components.
OPTIONAL AUTOMATIC EXCITER
SWITCHING
One automatic RF control logic
assembly.
One coaxial transfer switch.
One test load for exciter.
All necessary cabling for system
interconnect.
(Requires second exciter, which is not
included in this option package).
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FOR FMD -50K
Mono generator(s).
Stereo generator(s).
SCA generator(s).
RF input manual patch panel for use
with exciter switching option.
80- kilowatt water -cooled test load.
Heat exchanger for test load.
49
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz @ ±75
kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100%.
TO ANTENNA
61/4" EIA
---
STEREOPHONIC MODE
HIGH
VOLTAGE
POWER
SUPPLY
HIGH
VOLTAGE
POWER
SUPPLY
460"
48
O'
L___J
TYPE OF MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced,
resistive. Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left(andlright)I +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100%
modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) standard 75 microsecond, FCC pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR)
filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond
steady state. Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000
Hz.
i
TYPICAL FMD -50K FLOOR PLAN
FMD -50K SPECIFICATIONS
IMD: 0.4%, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
Reference: 400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75 kHz
deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30-15.000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to main
channel) 45 dB below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 20 kW to 50 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating frequency.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 6'/s" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 3- phase, 50/60 Hz. 360/415 V. 3phase, 50 :60 Hz. Power consumption: 80,000 watts (approx.).
115 V as available.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
ALTITUDE: 10,000 feet (3048 meters).
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to +45 °C
( -4° to +113 °F).
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
SIZE: Transmitter: 90.2 "W (229 cm) x 72 "H (183 cm) x 30.5 "D
(77.5 cm). HV power supply cabinets: (each) 48 "W (122 cm) x
60.2 "H (153 cm) x 24.2 "D (61.5 cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
WEIGHT AND CUBAGE (Approximate): Export: 7000 lbs. (3178 kg).
Domestic: 6800 lbs. (3087 kg). Cubage: 400 cubic feet
(11.3 cubic meters).
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to other impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ± dB for 100% modulation at
1
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between
25 and 75 kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY::~ 500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and
2000 ohms unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm, ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microdB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or
second pre -emphasis ±1
75 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than 1%, 30 -5000 Hz. ±5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref:
100% = .5 kHz deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel): -60 dB or
better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 dB below
±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 30- 15,000 Hz. SCA demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated
with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: °ro to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
1
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbal-
anced.
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC
pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB, 30- 15.000 Hz. Selectable: flat. 25
or 50 microcesond pre -emphasis.
0 VRMS nominal for ±75 kHz deviation.
INPUT LEVEL:
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: ±0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: ±2, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
1
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FMD -50K, dual 50- kilowatt FM transmitter, with automatic RF output switching, for wideband
operation
....
FMD -50K, dual 50- kilowatt FM transmitter, basic system, for wideband operation
Automatic exciter switching option (does not include second exciter)
MS -15 exciter (does not include generator modules)
Monaural generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
RF input patch panel
80- kilowatt water -cooled test load
Heat exchanger for test load
RP -2.5M -180
994 -8455 -001
994- 8455 -002
994-8456-001
994-7950 -002
994-8019 -001
994-8020 -001
994 -7992 -001
994-8473 -001
700- 0121 -000
432- 0257 -000
ADV 553 PTD. IN U.S.A.
c. 1979 Harris Corporation
50
www.americanradiohistory.com
1
aW
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION *NO
IMPOPIMATION PNOCESSNO
Combines two 20- kilowatt amplifiers for highest reliability
Solid -state Maximum Signal Exciter -MS -15
Patented DSM (Digitally Synthesized Modulation) stereo
FM -40K
40- Kilowatt
FM
Broadcast
Transmitter
generator
provides separation exceeding accurate
measurement capability of most monitors
DTR (Dynamic Transient Response) filter technique limits
overshoot to 2% or less, permitting a 2 to 6 dB increase in
loudness with no audio quality degradation
Lowest operating cost
Stable, easy output tuning
Built -in connections for remote control
Automatic recycling
Full metering
Plug -in mono, stereo and SCA generators
51
www.americanradiohistory.com
at only one -third its dissipation rating for
maximum service life.
VARI -LINE
SILVER -PLATED
TANK
Vari -Line is an advanced, Harris- developed method of tuning a single -ended FM
amplifier for optimum output efficiency. A
portion of a parallel tubular 2 -% -inch copper transmission line (silver plated for efficient RF service) is made variable in
order to inductively tune the line to
operating frequency. This reduces the
complexity of sliding contacts and consequent maintenance problems.
With Vari -Line tuning, greater reliability is
possible. Mica capacitors are not used in
the tank circuit.
DUAL
HV SILICON
POWER SUPPLIES
Two separate three -phase HV power sup-
Reliability through redundancy-that's the
story on Harris' FM -40K, 40- kilowatt transmitter.
FINEST
STEREO
PERFORMANCE
The basic FM -40K transmitter system consists of two 20- kilowatt amplifiers, and a
center control cabinet containing the MS-
Featuring the advanced -design MS -15 exciter, Harris' FM -40K provides the cleanest
and the loudest stereo signal of any 40kilowatt FM transmitter available today.
The DSM (Digitally Synthesized Modulation) stereo generator allows the transmitter to provide stereo separation of 40 dB
minimum (50 dB typical), 30- 15,000 Hzwhile the DTR (Dynamic Transient
Response) filter permits a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness, with no degradation of
audio quality, by limiting overshoot to 2%
or less.
15 exciter -and provides redundancy in all
areas except the exciter and isolation
amplifier. In case emergency operation is
required, you stay on the air at one -quarter
normal power output.
The complete 40- kilowatt FM transmitter
system includes an optional Automatic Ex-
citer Switching Kit and
RF
Output
Switching Kit -and provides total redundancy! Should a malfunction occur anywhere in the system, you are still on the air
at one -half normal power!
basic system, outputs of each
amplifier are coupled through harmonic
filters to the output combining network.
This hybrid network sums the two 20kilowatt signals to produce a 40- kilowatt
output to the transmission line. However,
the two amplifiers remain isolated from
each other.
In
the
With the addition of the Automatic Exciter
Switching Kit, automatic backup exciter
protection is provided. And with the further
addition of the RF Output Switching
System, power output becomes one -half
the normal output during emergency
operation. Either or both of these options
may be included in the FM -40K at the time
you order -or added later in the field.
The FM -40K may be equipped for mono or
stereo operation, with or without SCA. The
design versatility of the MS -15 exciter allows you to order for mono operation
originally, then add stereo and /or SCA at a
later date by plugging the appropriate
module(s) into the exciter.
LOWEST
OPERATING
COST
the FM -40K, each of the 20- kilowatt
amplifiers operates at 80% efficiency or
better. Add to this conservatively rated
components and you have the lowest
operating cost of any FM transmitter in the
40- kilowatt power range. The 4CX15,000A
output tube in each 20- kilowatt amplifier
assures excellent performance -and runs
In
52
www.americanradiohistory.com
plies are used for each 20- kilowatt
amplifier. With each amplifier one HV
supply -for PA plate voltage -is housed in
a separate enclosure; the other supply,
which powers the IPA plate and screen circuit, and the PA screen, is housed in the
amplifier cabinet.
The FM -40K employs a special power supply protective circuit to assure that transient voltages or on -off power surges will
not damage the power transformer and
related components.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
momentary overload, the transmitter recycles automatically. Should the
overload reoccur in excess of the number
of times preset in the transmitter, the FM40K will then remain off the air until reset,
either locally or by remote control.
In case of
TESTING
Environmental tests, in conditions surpassing those of any location a transmitter is
likely to encounter, have been imposed on
the FM -40K. The transmitter is capable of
operating at altitudes up to 7500 feet (2286
meters), in an ambient temperature range
of -20° to +45° C ( -4° to +113° F).
addition, your FM -40K is fully tuned and
operationally tested on your frequency
before shipment.
In
REMOTE
CONTROL
All connections for remote control are built
in -just connect the FM -40K to a transmitter control unit, and you are ready for
functions controlled by lighted pushbuttons, which are clearly marked "Filament
On -Off" and "Plate On -Off".
components for easier maintenance and
troubleshooting.
GENERAL
HIGH CAPACITY BLOWERS. (one in each
20- kilowatt amplifier). Backed up by preci-
There are many other operational and
convenience features incorporated into
the FM -40K. These include:
sion air-pressure switches, these blowers
provide complete protection to the IPA
and PA tubes.
cabinets are attractively yet functionally
styled, with double front doors on each 20kilowatt amplifier. The finish is white, blue
and black.
PUSHBUTTON OPERATION. Daily operation of the FM -40K is simple, with on -off
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The FM -40K is
designed to allow quick accessibility to all
remote operation. No additional equipment is required.
o
HANDSOME STYLING. Transmitter
TYPE ACCEPTANCE. Harris' FM -40K is
FCC type accepted for mono, stereo and
SCA broadcasting in the 87.5 to 108 MHz
band.
FM -40K
BLOCK DIAGRAM
ANTENNA
r
i
614Nt
INPUT
SC
AJDUMMY
LOAD
17/2 HYBRID
COUPLER
LEFT AUDIO
INPUT
HYBRID
COUPLER
11/2
RIGHT AUDIO
INPUT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
COLOR KEY
COAXIAL
SWITCH
CONTROL
PANEL
RF OUTPUT
SWITCHING (OPTIONAL)
IGRAYI
L
.J
HARRIS' FM -40K FM TRANSMITTER CONFIGURATIONS
Basic Dual System
Two FM -20K transmitters, less exciters
One MS -15 exciter
One isolation amplifier with power supply
One center cabinet
One high -power hybrid coupler (combiner) with plumbing to interconnect
two transmitters
One low -power hybrid coupler
One 10- kilowatt reject load
One 50 -watt reject load
Automatic Exciter /Isolation Amplifier
Switching Kit (Optional)
For exciter redundancy, the following ad-
ditional equipment (included in this kit)
should be added to the basic system:
One MS -15 exciter
One isolation amplifier with power supply
One test load for exciter
One automatic changeover contact
panel (mounts in center cabinet)
RF Output Switching (Optional)
For RF switching of the high -power output
amplifiers, the following equipment
(included in this kit) should be added to
the basic system:
One control panel (mounts in center
cabinet)
Three coaxial transfer switches
One kit consisting of rigid coaxial line,
elbows and flanges
One 50- kilowatt test load required (not
included in kit)
Optional Equipment For FM -40K
Mono generator module
Stereo generator module
SCA generator module(s)
VSWR overload protection for each 20kilowatt amplifier
Status light system for each 20- kilowatt
amplifier
50- kilowatt air -cooled load
50- kilowatt water -cooled load
53
www.americanradiohistory.com
BASIC FM -40K BLOCK DIAGRAM
MONAORALEOENERATOR
IOPTIOMALI
5
EROñ,OioNRATOR
I
my
AMPLIFIER
MO
EC
RE
COO
40 kW
LOAD
SO
WA"
REJECT
LÓ.D
I
LI
SCA
SB
IoR,ION.0
sc. Eo RTOR-E..,,.
ONALI
E
Su PLI,
I
FM -40K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 20 kW to 40 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating fre-
quency.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 31/2" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: *_300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 3- phase, 60 Hz. (50 Hz available on special
order.) Power consumption: 60,000 watts (approx.). 115/230 V, 60 or 50 Hz,
150 watts for MS -15.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
ALTITUDE: 7500 feet (2286 meters).
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to 45°C ( -4° to +113 °F).
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
SIZE: Transmitter: 113 "W (287cm) x 78"H (198cm) x 33 "D (84cm). HV power
supply cabinets (2): each 30 "W (76cm) x 49 "H (125cm) x 30 "D (76cm).
FRONT DOOR SWING: 21" (53cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
WEIGHT AND CUBAGE: Export: 6800 lbs. (3087 kg). Domestic: 6000 lbs. (2724
kg). 270 cubic feet (7.5 cubic meters).
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to other
impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: '-10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre emphasis curve -_0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre -emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz t ±75 kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
TYPE OF MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced, resistive.
Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm ± 1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (lett and right) Standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50
microsecond pre-emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady
state. Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz. 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference:
400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75 kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30- 15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to main channel) 45
dB below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between 25 and 75
kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: 1500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: --7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000 ohms
unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond preemphasis 1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75 microsecond preemphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than 1 %, 30 -5000 Hz. -5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref: 100% = ±5 kHz
deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel): -60 dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 dB below ±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 3015,000 Hz. SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for *_75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: -0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: - 2°, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FM -40K, 40- kilowatt FM transmitter, basic system, for wideband operation, 60 Hz
Automatic exciter /isolation amplifier switching kit
RF output switching package
Monaural generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
VSWR interlock unit (two required for FM -40K)
Status light system (two required for FM -40K)
50- kilowatt air-cooled test load
50- kilowatt water -cooled teat load
994 -8053 -001
994 -6876 -001
994 -6877 -001
994 -8019 -001
994 -8020 -001
994 -7992 -001
994- 7004 -001
994-7108 -001
700- 0317 -000
700-0239 -000
ADV. 510A PTO. IN U.S
JK-2M-979
54
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
First one -tube high -power FM transmitter
High efficiency, low operating cost
FM -25K
25- Kilowatt
FM Broadcast
Transmitter
Solid- state, redundant IPA
Wide RF bandwidth, minimum tunable
components
Driven by the most advanced FM exciter
in the world -MS -15
Patented DSM stereo generator ... stereo
separation 40 dB minimum, 50 dB
typical
DTR filter technique limits overshoot
to 2% or less
Solid -state control logic
Automatic power control standard
Harris' technology has combined advances in
both tube and transistor designs, to bring you a
major step forward in high -power FM transmitters.
Transistors are now available which provide 50
watts of RF power at reasonable gain and low
junction temperatures. By combining several of
these transistors in wideband RF circuits, enough
power can be generated to drive an advanced
high -gain Eimac tetrode tube, the 8990. This tube,
when grid driven in a grounded cathode,
quarter -wave cavity, can produce 25 kilowatts
with 350 watts of drive at nearly 80%
plate efficiency!
The FM -25K, twenty -five kilowatt FM transmitter
reflects Harris' design philosophy that FM
transmitters should deliver RF power efficiently,
should not limit exciter performance, and should
integrate dependable solid -state control logic.
In the FM -25K, these features are teamed with
efficient, single-tube design, and with the world's
most advanced exciter -the MS -15.
The FM -25K was designed for applications
with tower limitations or specific coverage
requirements. The higher RF power output reduces
the number of antenna bays required for a given
ERP; and fewer bays mean a reduction in
windloading and mounting area, so that tower
size and/or height may be reduced. Also, fewer
antenna bays, with less gain, can mean improved
close -in coverage and the elimination of null fills.
SINGLE TUBE DESIGN. The FM -25K is the first
high -power FM transmitter to utilize a single -tube
design. A high -gain, highly efficient 8990 tetrode
is the only tube in the entire transmitter, and is
used as the final power amplifier. The tube uses a
55
www.americanradiohistory.com
Harris' FM -25K
transmitter will shut down until manually restarted. The
transmitter may also be programmed for single
VSWR overload shutdown.
wavy fin radiator which provides exceptional cooling at
reduced air requirements, for quiet operation. The quarterwave PA cavity design eliminates troublesome sliding
contacts for tuning, and assures wide RF bandwidth. This
results in a signal path that is transparent to
the MS -15 exciter.
SOLID -STATE IPA. Five solid -state power amplifier
modules (2 amplifiers per module) are combined to produce
350 watts of drive power, with plenty of reserve. One
module functions as the IPA driver, and the other four as
driver power amplifiers. All of these modules are identical,
so that in case the IPA driver should fail, one of the power
amplifier modules may be inserted in its place. Loss of one
of the four driver amplifier modules will not result in an
off-air condition, as these solid -state amplifiers are isolated
from each other. All five solid -state amplifier modules are
broadbanded, and require no individual tuning over the entire
88 -108 MHz FM band. The solid- state, modular concept
affords back -up capability for greatly improved reliability,
and reduces overall transmitter tuning requirements.
LOW OPERATING COST. With today's mounting energy
costs, transmitter efficiency must be a major consideration
in any purchase. 77% efficiency
in the final power amplifier,
high efficiency in all amplifier
circuits, and conservatively
rated components result in
comparatively low power
consumption and low operating
stress on heat generating
components in the FM -25K.
This adds up to very impressive
savings in operating and
maintenance costs.
CONTROL CIRCUITRY. The FM -25K is controlled by
solid -state logic circuitry. The logic circuitry not only controls
basic On /Off functions, but also monitors critical stages
for overload conditions. Should an overload occur, the
transmitter will recycle automatically, according to
the number of times pre -set (one or three).
The control logic used in the FM -25K interfaces directly
with most remote control systems, eliminating the need for
an additional remote control interface. The control signals
are momentary low current contacts to ground. The
transmitter output parameters are buffered, and
all status indicators are remoted.
METERING AND VISUAL AIDS. Major functions, including
.
RF output, VSWR and PA parameters are displayed on
easy -to -read four -inch meters. Low -level parameters are
displayed on a multimeter, and IPA RF output and
reflected power are indicated on another meter. Filament
voltage is measured by a true RMS circuit.
AUTOMATIC POWER
CONTROL. The FM -25K
automatically monitors power
output, and maintains the
output at the desired level.
This standard feature insures
against out -of- tolerance power
conditions. Furthermore, the
power set point can be remotely
adjusted independently of the
limit points to allow operator
control of power output. During
maintenance periods, the
automatic power control may
be switched off.
HV POWER SUPPLY. The
high voltage power supply is
housed In a separate cabinet,
and provides the plate and
screen supplies. The
conservatively -rated
three -phase plate supply uses
silicon rectifiers with AC line
transient protection.
COMPACT SIZE. The trim
PA cabinet can fit as a
replacement for all older 20to 25- kilowatt FM transmitters.
The cabinet is only 35 inches
wide, 72 inches high and 31
inches deep. Additionally, the
HV power supply may be
located in any convenient
spot remote from the
PA cabinet.
VSWR PROTECTION. VSWR
protection is mandatory in any
high -power transmitter
therefore, Harris has
-
GENERAL. There are many
other operational and
convenience features
incorporated into the FM -25K.
These include:
incorporated this as a standard
feature in the FM -25K. A high
VSWR condition will cause the
transmitter to recycle ... if
three overloads occur within
a
The FM -25K provides a variety
of indicators as trouble
shooting aids and quick
references. These include four
illuminated On /Off pushbuttons
and 26 LED's not including
those on the MS -15 exciter.
-
Line Loss Protection
Built-in protection against
total AC failure and loss of
given time period, the
56
www.americanradiohistory.com
high efficiency ...only one tube ...wide RF bandwidth
phase is provided. The FM -25K will restart automatically
following a total power failure, while loss of a single
phase will shut down the transmitter.
-A
high- capacity, direct -drive
blower delivers sufficient air to cool the transmitter at
altitudes up to 10,000 feet (3048 meters).
High Altitude Rating
Additional Protection -Four magnetic circuit breakers are
utilized to protect the blower motor, the filament supply, the
IPA supply and the bias supply. A wide- ranging interlock
system and a drop solenoid system quickly discharge
power supplies to safe levels.
ATS Compatibility -The simple control logic
interface and full metering in the FM -25K
permit ATS operation.
MS -15 EXCITER.
The solid -state MS -15 exciter employs
Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM), overshoot
compensation, and other Harris exclusive design techniques,
to give you an FM sound that is noticeably cleaner,
noticeably louder than any competitive signal.
The DSM stereo generator is a Harris development which
eliminates the tradeoff that exists between switching type
stereo generators (poor separation at high frequencies)
and balanced modulator types of stereo generators
(poor harmonic rejection and SCA crosstalk). The DSM
stereo generator is capable of both 50 dB separation
(typical) through 15 kHz and an exceptionally clean baseband,
promoting minimal interaction between stereo and SCA
service. Also, pilot phase is automatically controlled so
that high separation can be maintained under
varying operating conditions.
A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter has been
developed by Harris for FM stereo, which holds overshoot
to 2% or less on any program material processed by any
limiter. As a result, a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness can be
achieved without degradation of audio quality. Controlled
transient response, high stereo separation, low crosstalk
and low intermodulation distortion are all maintained with
increased loudness. For monaural stations wishing to
protect 41 and /or 67 kHz SCA channels, a defeatable
linear phase lowpass filter is provided for
optimal linear control of overshoot.
The MS -15 is available for wideband, mono or
stereo operation, with or without SCA. The modular
construction of the MS -15 allows you to change
the mode of operation or to add SCA st any time,
by simply plugging in the appropriate module(s).
HARRIS
INFORMATION PROCESSING
57
www.americanradiohistory.com
1,1
'S -1,
11
f111111
001,0 STATE
U1í111
IN
55111 5111,
mom.
111
PI
1111
II
SAPAI
1,11
ulllll MMIIIUI
---1UP11MLLI
51111/
SP
-Th
allllf/1
IAPIi11lI,
1
arida -11
1
11
IM111YL)
SCI
MRaTU1 -11111
OPTIONAL
1
mula
LOA
SAPPI,
II
S
SIPPI,
SC III
n11I
SIML,
SOFFIT
FM -25K BLOCK DIAGRAM
FM -25K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 10 kW to 25 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating frequency. Exciter programmable in 50 kHz increments.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 31/e" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 3- phase, 50/60 Hz and 360/415 V,
3 phase, 50/60 Hz, 4 -wire. Power consumption: 40kW typical.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
ALTITUDE: 10,000 feet (3048 meters).
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to +50 °C. Maximum
temperature 50 °C @ sea level, decreasing 2 °C per 1000 feet
(305 meters) to 30 °C maximum at 10,000 feet (3048 meters).
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
SIZE: Transmitter cabinet, 34.6" W (87.8 cm) x 71.7" H (182.1
cm) x 31.0" D (78.7 cm). HV power supply cabinet: 48.0" W
(121.9 cm) x 60.2" H (152.9 cm) x 24.2" D (61.5 cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
WEIGHT AND CUBAGE: (Estimated) Export: 3000 lbs. (1361 kg).
Domestic: 2700 lbs. (1225 kg). Cubage: 150 cubic feet.
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive,
adaptable to other impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation
at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC
pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat,
25 or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz @ ±75
kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 55 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
TYPE OF MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced,
resistive. Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100%
modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) Standard 75
microsecond, FCC pre-emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz.
Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR)
filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond
steady state. Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000
Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference: 400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75
kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30- 15,000 Hz, 50 dB
typical.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub-channel or stereo sub -to main
channel) 45 dB below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between
25 and 75 kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled)
and 2000 ohms unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond pre- emphasis ± 1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or
75 microsecond pre -emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than 1 %, 30-4500 Hz. ±5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref:
100% = ±5 kHz deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel): -60 dB or
better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub-channel to SCA): 50 dB below
±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels
modulated by frequencies 30- 15,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with
150 microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated
with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for ±75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: ±0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: ±2', 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FM -25K, 25,000 watt FM broadcast transmitter with MS-15 exciter, for wideband
operation, 50/60 Hz (specify 50 or 60 Hz)
Spare tube
Mono generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
RP-2 5M-279
994-8258-001
374 -0151 -000
994 -8019-001
994 -8020-001
994-7992-001
ADV. 540 PTD. IN U.S.A.
58
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INeOO MATlON IMOClYNO
Solid -state Maximum Signal Exciter -MS -15
Digitally Synthesized Modulation for high stereo
separation
Overshoot compensation
FM -20K
20- Kilowatt
FM
Broadcast
Transmitter
80% efficiency in the final amplifier
Dependable "Vari- Line" tuning
All connections for remote control built in
Automatic recycling
Full metering
Automatic output power control available
Plug -in mono,
stereo and SCA generators
59
www.americanradiohistory.com
plies are used for the FM -20K -both featuring "avalanche" silicon rectifiers for
greatest reliability and protection against
transient voltages or on -off power surges.
One HV power supply -for PA plate volt in a separate enclosure,
while the supply powering the IPA plate
and screen circuit, and the PA screen, is
housed in the main transmitter cabinet.
age-is housed
IN
_.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING.
In case of
momentary overload, the transmitter recycles automatically. Should the overload reoccur in excess of the desired number of times preset in the transmitter, the
FM -20K will then remain off the air until
it is reset, either locally or by remote
control.
TESTING. Environmental tests, in conditions surpassing those of any location a
transmitter is likely to encounter, have
been imposed on the FM -20K. The transmitter is capable of operating at altitudes
to 7500 feet, in an ambient temperature
range of -20 to +45 C.
addition, your FM -20K is fully tuned
and operationally tested on your frequency before shipment.
In
FM -20K, frone
FM -20K employs Harris' exclusive,
advanced- design MS -15 solid -state exciter, with Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM), to provide the very finest
stereo signal available. Technical specifications are exceptional compared to
other 20 kilowatt FM transmitters on the
market. And DSM with overshoot compensation allows a 2 to 6 dB increase in
loudness with no degradation of audio
quality. With Harris' FM -20K you not
only get the cleanest sound in town -you
get the loudest!
The
LOW OPERATING COST. 80% efficiency in the final amplifier, plus high
efficiency in all amplifier circuits, plus
conservatively rated components combine to give the FM -20K the lowest operating cost of any transmitter in its power
range. As amplifier tubes are operated
at only a fraction of their actual rating,
maximum service life is assured. You save
both on power bills and on tube costs.
TUBES. Only three tubes (two
tube types) are used in the FM -20K. The
MS -15 drives the intermediate power
THREE
consisting of two parallel
4CX250B's. The final single -ended power
amplifier is a 4CX15000A ceramic tetrode, which provides excellent perform-
amplifier,
view, doors open.
ance, and runs at only one -third its dissipation capability.
"VARI- LINE" SILVER PLATED TANK.
Vari -Line is an advanced, Harris- developed method of tuning a single -ended
FM amplifier for optimum output efficiency. A portion of a parallel tubular
25/13-inch copper transmission line (silver
plated for efficient RF service) is made
variable in order to inductively tune the
line to operating frequency.
With Vari -Line tuning, greater reliability
is possible. Mica capacitors are not used
in the tank circuit. This reduces the complexity of sliding contacts and consequent
maintenance problems.
PLUG -IN MONO, STEREO AND SCA
GENERATORS. The FM -20K may be
equipped for mono or stereo operation,
with or without SCA. The design versatility of the exciter allows you to order
for mono operation originally, then add
stereo and /or SCA at a later date by
plugging the appropriate module(s) into
the exciter. Since the SCA generators
have spectrally pure filtered outputs, 41
and 67 kHz SCA channels may be operated simultaneously, while in the mono
mode, without harmonic interference.
DUAL HV SILICON POWER SUPPLY.
Two separate three -phase power sup-
60
www.americanradiohistory.com
REMOTE CONTROL. All connections for
remote control are built in -just connect
the FM -20K to a transmitter control unit,
and you are ready for remote operation. No additional transmitter equipment is required.
FULL METERING. Eight easy -to -read
meters, including a multimeter, provide
full monitoring of the seventeen parameters of the operating tubes and exciter.
There is also a directional coupler which
measures forward power and VSWR, and
an elapsed time meter.
GENERAL. There are many other operational and convenience features incorporated into the FM -20K. These include:
Pushbutton Operation
On -off functions
are controlled by lighted pushbuttons at
the top left of the transmitter. These are
clearly marked "Filament On- Off ", "Plate
On- Off ".
-
-
High- Capacity Blower
backed up by a
precision air -pressure switch gives complete protection to the IPA and PA tubes.
Straightforward Design
allows easy accessibility to all components.
Front Panel Test Points
permit fast
checking of exciter circuit conditions.
Handsome Styling
the transmitter cabinet is attractively yet functionally styled,
with double front doors. The finish is
white and blue, with black meter panel.
-
-
-
-
FCC Type Acceptance
the FM -20K is
FCC type accepted for mono or stereo
broadcasting in the 87.5 to 108 MHz FM
band.
HARRIS' MS- 15...THE MOST ADVANCED FM EXCITER IN THE INDUSTRY
The
solid -state MS -15
exciter employs
Digitally Synthesized Modulation, overshoot compensation, and other exclusive
design techniques, to give you an FM
sound that is noticeably cleaner, noticeably louder than any competitive signal.
The exciter is available for mono or stereo
operation, with or without SCA. The modular construction of the MS -15 allows you
to change the mode of operation, or to
add SCA, at any time, by simply plugging
in the appropriate module(s).
approval of a system for quadraphonic FM will not obsolete the MS -15.
Module positions exist which are ready
to accept a quad generator.
FCC
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION. The DSM stereo generator is a
new development which eliminates the
tradeoff that exists between switching
type and balanced modulator types of
stereo generators -poor separation at
high frequencies in the former or poor
harmonic rejection and SCA crosstalk in
the latter. The DSM stereo generator is
capable of both 50 dB separation (typical) through 15 kHz and an exceptionally
clean baseband, promoting minimal interaction between stereo and SCA service. Also, pilot phase is automatically
controlled so that high separation can be
maintained under varying operating conditions.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter has
been developed by Harris for FM stereo,
with overshoot no greater than 2% on
any program material processed by any
limiter. As a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased loudness can be achieved without degradation of audio quality. Controlled transient response, high stereo
separation, low crosstalk, and low inter modulation distortion are all maintained
with increased loudness. For monaural
stations wishing to protect 41 and /or 67
kHz SCA channels, a defeatable linear
phase lowpass filter is provided for optimal linear control of overshoot.
COMPATIBILITY. The MS -15 exciter is
mechanically and electrically compatible
with the Harris TE -3 exciter. Mountings
are in the same location and use the same
hardware.
output power is 15 watts into 50 ohms,
continuously adjustable to 3 watts by one
control. A directional coupler samples
and meters forward and reflected power,
with remote metering capability. A harmonic filter is placed at the RF module
output, reducing harmonics to a low level.
The balanced 600 ohm audio input is
transformerless to give maximum common mode rejection and excellent response. Inputs will withstand high transients or steady state voltages above or
below ground reference.
RF
The basic exciter audio response is wide band and flat, and can be used directly
with a studio -transmitter link. The exciter
is
self -contained,
including
the
power
supply.
OTHER FEATURES. The Harris MS -15 exciter can be quickly and easily programmed to any carrier frequency in the 87.5
to 108 MHz band in 50 kHz increments.
The RF output network is broadband and
requires no tuning. Carrier frequencies
are generated through a digital synthesizer which is locked to a 10 MHz TCXO
high stability frequency standard. The
TCXO has improved crystal aging characteristics and does not require an oven.
The synthesizer also provides outputs at
2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25 MHz for easy
frequency comparison to the National
Bureau of Standards WWV transmissions.
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 75, 50, 25
or 0 microseconds in either monophonic
or stereophonic operation.
Remote control capability includes switching between stereo and mono, and selection of left, right, or left- plus -right inputs
for monophonic operation.
OPERATION. SCA operation is
added to the exciter through a plug -in
module. It is available with either stereo
or mono operation; up to two channels
can be added to mono exciters, or a
single SCA used with stereo. Any channel between 25 kHz and 75 kHz can be
used, although 41 kHz and 67 kHz are
normally provided. Either frequency is
selectable on the SCA channel card.
SCA
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 150, 75, 50
or 0 microseconds. The input audio is
applied to a programable lowpass filter,
and the output of the SCA generator
filtered so that 150 microseconds pre emphasis can be used with no degradation of SCA to main channel crosstalk.
Each SCA module has a pair of audio
inputs, one AC coupled for audio, and
the other DC coupled for data and video
transmission.
The subcarrier level is adjustable to provide from 1% to 30% composite base band SCA injection. When an SCA sub carrier is turned on or off, an automatic
composite level switcher noiselessly compensates for the change in baseband injection level. 100% peak modulation is
maintained independent of SCA status.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The entire
exciter is modular for ease of troubleshooting and maintenance. An extender
card is provided to allow easy servicing.
Extensive metering is provided, and LED
status lights on the modules indicate
various performance features.
61
www.americanradiohistory.com
.T. lb-1214412..
TOP VIEW
fiT
-1
q
AIR
OUT
MS-IS
IM EXCITER
IT
IPA
PA
Iil ICx230/
1CX13000
OUTPUT
20 LW
MONAURAL GENERATOR
F
G_
STEREO
OR
(OPTIONAL(
SCA GENERATOR-41
(OPTIONAL)
_AO
IN MON TOR
LHr
-4
SCA OENERATOR-47 LNr
(OPTIONAL
i
1'.
RI
WILL SWIVEL
GRID MAS
SUPPLY
PLATE
I
SCREEN
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
10
3.1
e
Pa Ittttttttt
I
1
FM -20K BLOCK DIAGRAM
l
V.
pi
CABLE ACCESS
(OPTIONAL)
fP
NI
41I
EIA
WANGE
EF
OUT
MICRO
MATCH
FM -20K
FLOOR PLAN
r/
FM -20K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 10 kW to 20 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating fre-
quency.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 31" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
RF
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct
Carrier Frequency Modulation.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: +100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 3- phase, 60 Hz. (50 Hz available on special order.) Power consumption: 30,000 watts (approx.). 115/230 V, 60
or 50 Hz, 150 watts for MS -1S.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 7500 feet.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to +45 °C.
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
SIZE: Transmitter cabinet, 42 "W (107cm) x 78 "H (198cm) x 33 "D (84cm).
HV -power supply cabinet, 30 "W (76cm) x 49 "H (12Scm) x 30 "D (76cm).
FRONT DOOR SWING: 21" (53cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
WEIGHT AND CUBAGE: Export: 2800 lbs. (1270 kg). Domestic: 2300 lbs.
(1043 kg). 141 cubic feet.
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to
other impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: -10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre emphasis curve ±0.3 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz
@
+75
kHz
STEREOPHONIC MODE
Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced, reAdaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) Standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or
AUDIO
INPUT
sistive.
50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
45 dB below
90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB
below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between 25 and
75 kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: +7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000
ohms unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: t10 dBm +1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond
pre- emphasis ±1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75 microsecond
pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than %, 30.5000 Hz. +5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref: 100%
±5 kHz deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel):
dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (mein or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 dB below ±5 kHz
deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 30- 15,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond deemphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to
dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
-
1
-60
deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
TYPE OF MODULATION:
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady
state. Delectable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30. 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference: 400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75 kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz +1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30-15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to main channel)
-30
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for ±75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: +0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: +2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FM -20K 20,000 watt FM broadcast transmitter with MS -15 exciter, for wideband operation, 80 Hz 994- 8052 -001
100% spare tube kit
990- 0552-001
Mono generator (add for mono operation)
994- 8019-001
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
994- 8020-001
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 87 kHz)
994-7992-001
CP-2M-279
ADV. 487A PTD. IN U.S.A.
www.americanradiohistory.com
Solid -state Maximum Signal Exciter -MS -15
HARRIS
Patented DSM Stereo Generator provides separation exceeding accurate measurement capability of most monitors
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
filter technique limits overshoot to 2% or less, permitting a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness with no audio
quality degradation
DTR
FM-10K
10- Kilowatt
FM Broadcast
Transmitter
Low operating cost
Stable, easy output tuning
Built -in connections for remote control
Automatic recycling
Full metering
Plug -in mono, stereo and SCA generators
63
www.americanradiohistory.com
reoccur in excess of the desired number of
times preset in the transmitter, the FM-10K
will then remain off the air until it is reset,
either locally or by remote control.
HV SILICON POWER SUPPLY. One three phase HV power supply is used in the FM10K. It provides the PA plate voltage, PA
screen voltage, and powers the IPA plate
and screen circuits. The bias supply for the
PA is a bridge circuit of four silicon rectifiers. The transmitter employs a special
power supply protective circuit to assure
maximum
protection from transient
voltages or on -off power surges.
BUILT -IN REMOTE CONTROL. Connect
the transmitter control unit to the transmitter, tie in the telephone line to the studio
control unit, and you are ready for complete remote control operation. All necessary functions can be controlled remotely -and no additional equipment is required for a Harris control system.
TESTING. Environmental tests, in conditions surpassing those of any location a
transmitter is likely to encounter, have been
imposed on the FM-10K. The transmitter is
capable of operating at altitudes up to
10,000 feet (3000 meters), in an ambient
temperature range of -20° to +45° C.
addition, your FM -10K is fully tuned and
operationally tested on your frequency
before shipment.
In
METERING AND VISUAL AIDS. Six easy to -read meters, including four multimeters,
provide full monitoring of twenty -eight
parameters in the transmitter and the exciter. To aid in fault location, a system of
indicator lights provides status display of
important transmitter parameters.
Featuring the advanced- design MS -15 exciter, Harris' FM-10K provides the cleanest
and loudest stereo signal of any 10
kilowatt FM transmitter available today.
The DSM (Digitally Synthesized Modulation) stereo generator allows the transmitter to provide stereo separation of 40 dB
minimum, 30- 15,000 Hz -while the DTR
(Dynamic Transient Response) filter permits a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness, with
no degradation of audio quality, by limiting overshoot to 2% or less. Add to this
high efficiency plus conservatively rated
components and you hove a really exceptional FM transmitter -the Harris FM -10K.
ONLY TWO TUBES. Just two tubes are
employed in the FM -l0K
4CX10,000D
PA and a 4CX300A IPA. The ceramic -type
4CX10,000D is a high -gain tetrode that
operates with a 2 -to -1 dissipation safety
margin, and was selected as the power
amplifier because of its proven longer
useful life.
-a
"VARI- LINE"
SILVER PLATED TANK.
Vari -line is a Harris -developed method of
tuning a single -ended FM amplifier for optimum output efficiency. A portion of a
parallel tubular 1% inch copper transmission line (silver plated for efficient RF service) is made variable in order to inductively
tune the line to operating frequency.
VSWR PROTECTION. To protect the transmitter PA, a VSWR overload circuit has
been incorporated. The VSWR circuit
monitors the reflected power from the output directional coupler and interrupts the
high voltage power supply when the VSWR
exceeds a pre- determined level. The transmitter will attempt to restart, and if the
VSWR clears, return to air. Multiple VSWR
trips within a given period will couse the
transmitter to shut down.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING. In case of
momentary overload, the transmitter recycles automatically. Should the overload
64
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL. There are many other operational and convenience features incorporated into the FM -10K. These include:
Pushbutton Operation -On -off functions
are controlled by lighted pushbuttons at
the top left of the transmitter. These are
clearly marked "Filament On -Off", "Plate
On- Off".
High -Capacity Blower- backed up by a
precision air- pressure switch gives complete
protection to the IPA and PA tubes.
Straightforward Design -allows easy accessibility to all components.
Interruption Restart -this feature
provides for automatically returning the
transmitter "on air" after a temporary or
indefinite outage of the AC power source.
A front panel override switch is also
provided.
AC
FCC Type Acceptance
-the
FM -10K is FCC
type accepted for mono or stereo broadcasting in the 87.5 to 108 MHz FM band.
HARRIS' MS -15
solid -state
MS -15
... THE MOST ADVANCED FM EXCITER
exciter
employs
overshoot compensation, and other exclusive
design techniques, to give you an FM sound
that is noticeably cleaner, noticeably
louder than any competitive signal. The exciter is available for mono or stereo operation, with or without SCA. The modular
construction of the MS -15 allows you to
change the mode of operation, or to add
SCA, at any time, by simply plugging in the
appropriate module(s).
The
Digitally Synthesized Modulation,
approval of a system for quadraphonic FM will not obsolete the MS -15.
Module positions exist which are ready to
accept a quad generator.
FCC
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION. The DSM stereo generator is a new
development which eliminates the tradeoff
that exists between switching type and
balanced modulator types of stereo generators -poor separation at high frequencies in the former or poor harmonic rejection and SCA crosstalk in the latter. The
DSM stereo generator is capable of both
50 dB separation (typical) through 15 kHz
and an exceptionally clean baseband, promoting minimal interaction between stereo
and SCA service. Also, pilot phase is automatically controlled so that high separation can be maintained under varying
operating conditions.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter has
been developed by Harris for FM stereo,
with overshoot no greater than 2% on any
program material processed by any limiter.
As a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased
loudness can be achieved without degradation of audio quality. Controlled transient response, high stereo separation, low
crosstalk, and low intermodulation distortion are all maintained with increased
loudness. For monaural stations wishing to
protect 41 and /or 67 kHz SCA channels, a
defeatable linear phase lowpass filter is
provided for optimal linear control of overshoot.
COMPATIBILITY. The MS -15 exciter is
mechanically and electrically compatible
with the Harris TE -3 exciter. Mountings are
in the same location and use the same
hardware.
RF output power is 15 watts into 50 ohms,
continuously adjustable to 3 watts by one
control. A directional coupler samples and
meters forward and reflected power, with
remote metering capability. A harmonic
filter is placed at the RF module output,
reducing harmonics to a low level. The
balanced 600 ohm audio input is
transformerless to give maximum common
mode rejection and excellent response. Inputs will withstand high transients or
steady state voltages above or below
ground reference.
audio response is wide
band and flat, and can be used directly
with a studio- transmitter link. The exciter is
self -contained, including the power supply.
The basic exciter
-
OTHER FEATURES. The Harris MS -15 exciter can be quickly and easily programmed to any carrier frequency in the 87.5 to
108 MHz band in 50 kHz increments. The
RF output network is broadband and requires no tuning. Carrier frequencies are
generated through a digital synthesizer
which is locked to a 10 MHz TCXO high
stability frequency standard. The TCXO
has improved crystal aging characteristics
and does not require an oven. The synthesizer also provides outputs at 2.5, 5, 10,
15, 20 and 25 MHz for easy frequency
comparison to the National Bureau of
Standards WWV transmissions.
IN THE INDUSTRY
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 75, 50, 25 or
0 microseconds in either monophonic or
stereophonic operation.
Remote control capability includes switch-
ing between stereo and mono, and selection of left, right, or left- plus-right inputs
for monophonic operation.
SCA OPERATION. SCA operation
is
add-
ed to the exciter through a plug -in module.
It is available with either stereo or mono
operation; up to two channels can be add-
ed to mono
with stereo.
and 75 kHz
and 67 kHz
frequency
card.
is
exciters, or a single SCA used
Any channel between 25 kHz
can be used, although 41 kHz
are normally provided. Either
selectable on the SCA channel
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 150, 75, 50 or
0 microseconds. The input audio is applied
to a programable lowpass filter, and the
output of the SCA generator filtered so
that 150 microseconds pre- emphasis can
be used with no degradation of SCA to
main channel crosstalk.
Each SCA module has a pair of audio inputs, one AC coupled for audio, and the
other DC coupled for data and video
transmission.
The subcarrier level is
adjustable to provide
from 1% to 30% composite baseband
SCA injection. When an SCA subcarrier is
turned on or off, an automatic composite
level switcher noiselessly compensates for
the change in baseband injection level.
100% peak modulation is maintained independent of SCA status.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The entire exciter is modular for ease of troubleshooting and maintenance. An extender
card is provided to allow easy servicing.
Extensive metering is provided, and LED
status lights on the modules indicate
various performance features.
65
www.americanradiohistory.com
-a:.
TOP VIE
RI
Is
FxCIIFR
PA
IPA
MS
AC
l,
r300A
I
IIxI:
RI
MONAUCAL GENEITOR
f
MON
1OR
Q
k13
.'.12
t
AIR
OUT
l
I ABIS ACCESS
CMTIONL
STEREO GENFRAIOR
<'.
T
v
OUTPUT
PM
w
I
,OPTIONL
GENFRIOI-AI
r----CA
SN
OPIIONAU
SC GFNEIAIOI
GRID BIAS
HIG`l VOLTAGE
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
7'1 ESA
MANGE
67 IN
Al OUT
OPTIONAL
FM -10K
FLOOR PLAN
FM -LOK BLOCK DIAGRAM
FM -10K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 10 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating frequency.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 314" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: +300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 3- phase, 60 Hz (50 Hz available.) Power consumption: 17,000 watts (approx.). 115/230 V, 60 or 50 Hz, 150 watts for MS15
HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 10,000 feet (3000 meters).
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE:
°C to +45 °C.
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
SIZE: Transmitter cabinet, 42 "W (107cm) x 78 "H (198cm) x 33 "D (84cm).
FRONT DOOR SWING: 21" (53cm).
FINISH: White, blue and block.
WEIGHT AND CUBAGE: Export: 2200 lbs. (998 kg). Domestic: 1800 lbs. (817
kg). 120 cubic feet.
RF
-20
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to other
impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response IPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm +1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre -emphasis
curve +0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre
emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0 2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz + +75 kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
-
STEREOPHONIC MODE
MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced, resistive.
Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm +1 dB for 100% modulation at
TYPE OF
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) Standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre -emphasis curve +0.5 dB 30-15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50
microsecond pre -emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady state.
Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference:
400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, +75 kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz +1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30- 15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to main channel) 45 dB
below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (1), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between 25 and 75
kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY:
FREQUENCY STABILITY: +500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: +7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000 ohms
unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm +1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond pre emphasis +1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75 microsecond pre emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable IPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than 1./o, 30 -5000 Hz. ±5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref: 100% _ +5 kHz
deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel): -60 dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 d8 below ±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 3015,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for +75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: +0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: +2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FM -10K, 10,000 watt FM transmitter
As above, except for 50 Hz operation
with
MS -15 exciter, for
wideband operation, 60 Hz.
Mono generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (odd for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
JK-3M-479
994 -8051 -001
994- 8051 -002
994 -8019 -001
994 -8020 -001
994 -7992 -001
ADV. 501A PTD. IN U.S.A.
66
www.americanradiohistory.com
Solid -state Maximum Signal Exciter -MS -15
Patented D5M Stereo Generator provides separation exceeding accurate measurement capability of most monitors
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
filter technique limits overshoot to 2% or less, permitting a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness with no audio
quality degradation
INFORMATION PROCESSING
DTR
FM-5K
Low operating costs
Stable, easy output tuning
5- Kilowatt
Built -in connections for remote control
FM Broadcast
Automatic recycling
Transmitter
Full metering
I
Plug -in mono, stereo and SCA generators
67
www.americanradiohistory.com
HV SILICON POWER SUPPLY. All power
supplies are housed inside the transmitter
cabinet. One three -phase supply provides
the PA plate voltage, and powers the IPA
plate and screen circuits. The transmitter
employs a special power supply protective
circuit to assure maximum protection from
transient voltages or on -off power surges.
BUILT -IN REMOTE CONTROL. Connect
the transmitter control unit to the transmitter, tie in the telephone line to the studio
control unit, and you are ready for complete remote control operation. All necessary functions can be controlled remotely -and no additional equipment is required for a Harris remote control system.
TESTING. Environmental tests, in conditions surpassing those of any location a
transmitter is likely to encounter, have been
imposed on the FM -5K. The transmitter is
capable of operating at altitudes up to
7,500 feet (2250 meters), in _,, ambient
temperature range of -20° to +45° C.
addition, your transmitter is fully tuned
and operationally tested on your frequency
before shipment.
In
METERING AND VISUAL AIDS. Six
meters, including four large, front-panel
meters, provide full monitoring of the transmitter's operating parameters. Included is
a power indicator that permits direct
reading of both power output and
standing wave ratio. To aid in fault location, a system of indicator lights provides
status display of important transmitter
parameters.
Featuring the advanced- design MS-15 exciter, the Harris 5 kW FM -5K provides the
cleanest and the loudest stereo signal of
any FM transmitter in its power range. The
DSM (Digitally Synthesized Modulation)
stereo generator allows the transmitter to
provide stereo separation of 40 dB
minimum, 30- 15,000 Hz -while the DTR
(Dynamic Transient Response) filter permits
a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness, with no
degradation of audio quality, by limiting
overshoot to 2% or less. Add to this high
efficiency plus conservatively rated components and you have a truly exceptional FM
transmitter.
tuning a single -ended FM amplifier for optimum output efficiency. A portion of a
parallel tubular 1% inch copper transmission line (silver plated for efficient RF service) is made variable in order to inductively
tune the line to operating frequency.
ONLY TWO TUBES. Just two tubes are
employed in the transmitter. A type 4CX250B tube amplifies the solid -state exciter
output and supplies a nominal 250 watts to
drive the ceramic 4CX5000A final
amplifier. This power tetrode operates as a
single ended amplifier to produce 5
kilowatts of RF power.
VSWR PROTECTION. To protect the transmitter PA, a VSWR overload circuit has
been incorporated. The VSWR circuit
monitors the reflected power from the output directional coupler and interrupts the
high voltage power supply when the VSWR
exceeds a pre- determined level. The transmitter will attempt to restart, and if the
VSWR clears, return to air. Multiple VSWR
trips within a given period will cause the
transmitter to shut down.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING. In case of
momentary overload, recycling takes place
automatically. Should an overload reoccur
in excess of the number of times preset, the
transmitter will then remain off the air until
it is reset, either locally or by remote control.
GENERAL. There are many other operational and convenience features incorporated into the FM-5K transmitter. These include:
Pushbutton Operation -On -off functions
are controlled by lighted pushbuttons at
the top left of the transmitter. These are
clearly marked "Filament On- Off ", "Plate
On- Off ".
High -Capacity Blower- backed up by a
precision air -pressure switch gives complete
protection to the IPA and PA tubes.
Straightforward Design -allows easy accessibility to all components.
"VARI- LINE"
Vari -Line
is
SILVER PLATED TANK.
a Harris -developed method of
68
www.americanradiohistory.com
Interruption Restart -this feature
provides for automatically returning the
transmitter "on air" after a temporary or
indefinite outage of the AC power source.
A front panel override switch is also
provided.
AC
FCC Type Acceptance -The transmitter is
FCC type accepted for mono, stereo and
SCA broadcasting in the 87.5 to 108 MHz
FM band.
HARRIS' MS -15
The
solid -state
MS -15
... THE MOST ADVANCED FM EXCITER IN THE INDUSTRY
exciter employs
Digitally Synthesized Modulation, overshoot compensation, and other exclusive
design techniques, to give you an FM sound
that is noticeably cleaner, noticeably
louder than any competitive signal. The exciter is available for mono or stereo operation, with or without SCA. The modular
construction of the MS -15 allows you to
change the mode of operation, or to add
SCA, at any time, by simply plugging in the
appropriate module(s).
FCC approval of a system for quadraphonic FM will not obsolete the MS -15.
Module positions exist which are ready to
accept a quad generator.
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION. The DSM stereo generator is a new
development which eliminates the tradeoff
that exists between switching type and
balanced modulator types of stereo generators -poor separation at high frequencies in the former or poor harmonic rejection and SCA crosstalk in the latter. The
DSM stereo generator is capable of both
50 dB separation (typical) through 15 kHz
and an exceptionally clean baseband, promoting minimal interaction between stereo
and SCA service. Also, pilot phase is automatically controlled so that high separation can be maintained under varying
operating conditions.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter has
been developed by Harris for FM stereo,
with overshoot no greater than 2% on any
program material processed by any limiter.
As a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased
loudness can be achieved without degradation of audio quality. Controlled transient response, high stereo separation, low
crosstalk, and low intermodulation distortion are all maintained with increased
loudness. For monaural stations wishing to
protect 41 and /or 67 kHz SCA channels, a
defeatable linear phase lowpass filter is
provided for optimal linear control of overshoot.
COMPATIBILITY. The MS -15 exciter is
mechanically and electrically compatible
with the Harris TE -3 exciter. Mountings are
in the same location and use the same
hardware.
RF output power is 15 watts into 50 ohms,
continuously adjustable to 3 watts by one
control. A directional coupler samples and
meters forward and reflected power, with
remote metering capability. A harmonic
filter is placed at the RF module output,
reducing harmonics to a low level. The
balanced 600 ohm audio input is
transformerless to give maximum common
mode rejection and excellent response. Inputs will withstand high transients or
steady state voltages above or below
ground reference.
The basic exciter
audio response is wide band and flat, and can be used directly
with a studio -transmitter link. The exciter is
self -contained, including the power supply.
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 75, 50, 25 or
0 microseconds in either monophonic or
stereophonic operation.
Remote control capability includes switching between stereo and mono, and selection of left, right, or left- plus -right inputs
for monophonic operation.
SCA OPERATION. SCA operation is added to the exciter through a plug -in module.
It is available with either stereo or mono
operation; up to two channels can be added to mono exciters, or a single SCA used
with stereo. Any channel between 25 kHz
and 75 kHz can be used, although 41 kHz
and 67 kHz are normally provided. Either
frequency is selectable on the SCA channel
card.
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 150, 75, 50 or
0 microseconds. The input audio is applied
to a programable lowpass filter, and the
output of the SCA generator filtered so
that 150 microseconds pre- emphasis can
be used with no degradation of SCA to
main channel crosstalk.
Each SCA module has a pair of audio inputs, one AC coupled for audio, and the
other DC coupled for data and video
transmission.
OTHER FEATURES. The Harris MS -15 exciter can be quickly and easily programmed to any carrier frequency in the 87.5 to
108 MHz band in 50 kHz increments. The
RF output network is broadband and requires no tuning. Carrier frequencies are
generated through a digital synthesizer
which is locked to a 10 MHz TCXO high
stability frequency standard. The TCXO
has improved crystal aging characteristics
and does not require an oven. The synthesizer also provides outputs at 2.5, 5, 10,
15, 20 and 25 MHz for easy frequency
comparison to the National Bureau of
Standards WWV transmissions.
The subcarrier level is adjustable to provide
from 1% to 30% composite baseband
SCA injection. When an SCA subcarrier is
turned on or off, an automatic composite
level switcher noiselessly compensates for
the change in baseband injection level.
100% peak modulation is maintained independent of SCA status.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The
citer is modular for ease of
shooting and maintenance. An
card is provided to allow easy
Extensive metering is provided,
status lights on the modules
entire extroubleextender
servicing.
and LED
indicate
various performance features.
69
www.americanradiohistory.com
-
(.13'w.12h-
IOPvI
RI
OVIPUI
FM
f.cnlR
AC
Ni>N
i
'51MA,
PA
IPA
ACn5WuA
1250B
RF
GENEPAIOP
SIEREO
MON
-
GENERIO
OPTION/II
I
~
SCAT
JJI
GINI.TOP AI
OPIIONL
GINEI10*
7
1
IN,I
GRID BIAS
POIOLTAGE
SUPPLY
NEP SUPPLY
SN,
OUI
29
L
-Iv
CABLE ACCESS
OPnONAI
AIR
1
==11
TOR7
9
12- /
wlll
JA
OPTIONAL
B
I
FM -5K BLOCK DIAGRAM
I
+Y!^''`MI`rCRO]--?t-yr,;llll
WATCH
MArC
FM -5K
FLOOR PLAN
78
II
+
FUNGF
I
760SwlvEl
FM-5K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 1.0 to 5.1 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating frequency.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 31/4" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 3- phase, 60 Hz (50 Hz available.) Power consumption (opprox.): 10 kW consumption at 5 kW output. 115/230 V, 60 or 50
Hz, 150 watts for MS -15.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 7,500 feet (2250 meters).
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to +45 °C.
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
SIZE: Transmitter cabinet, 42 "W (107cm) x 78 "H (198cm) x 33 "D (84cm).
FRONT DOOR SWING: 21" (53cm).
FINISH: White, blue and block.
WEIGHT AND CUBAGE: Export 2100 lbs. (953 kg). Domestic: 1700 lbs. (771
kg). 120 cubic feet.
:
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to other
impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre- emphasis
curve ±0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre
-
emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or
IMO: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
less, 30-
15,000 Hz.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz (141 ±75 kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced, resistive.
Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
TYPE OF
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) Standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre -emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50
microsecond pre -emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady state.
Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference:
400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75 kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30- 15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to -main channel) 45 dB
below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (1 + R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between 25 and 75
kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000 ohms
unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond pre emphasis +1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75 microsecond pre emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Progromable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less thon %, 30-5000 Hz. ±5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref: 100% = ±5 kHz
deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel): -60 dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 dB below ±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 3015,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
1
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for ±75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: ±0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz
PHASE LINEARITY: ±2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FM -5K, 5 kW FM transmitter with MS -15 exciter, for
As above, except for 50 Hz operation
wideband operation, 60
Mono generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
Hz
994. 8049 -001
994 -8049 -002
994- 8019 -001
994 -8020 -001
994- 7992 -001
ADV. 507A PTD. IN U.S.A.
1K-3M-479
70
www.americanradiohistory.com
Solid -state Maximum Signal Exciter -MS -15
Digitally Synthesized Modulation for high stereo
HARRIS
separation
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATIMI PROCESSING
Overshoot compensation
Low power consumption
FM-2.5K
Single phase power
Stable, easy output tuning
2.5-Kilowatt
All connections for remote control built in
FM Broadcast
I
Transmitter
Automatic recycling
Full metering
Plug in mono, stereo and SCA generators
71
www.americanradiohistory.com
off the air until it is reset, either manually or by remote control.
POWER OUTPUT CONTROL. The transmitter has a built -in motor- operated rheostat connected to the screen supply for
adjusting the power output. A built -in reflectometer with a VSWR power meter
makes adjustments of the power output
easy and accurate.
REMOTE CONTROL. The FM -2.5K features built -in remote metering for the
plate voltage, plate current and power
output. No interface components are required to adapt a Harris remote control
system to the transmitter. The transmitter's remote control circuitry can also be
interfaced easily to other manufacturers'
remote systems.
PUSHBUTTON OPERATION. Manual
operation of the transmitter is simple. OnOff functions are controlled by lighted,
dual pushbuttons at the top left of the
cabinet. They are clearly marked Filament On and Off, Plate On and Off.
After the filaments of the tubes are turned
on, a time -delay relay allows the cathodes to reach operating temperatures
before the plate power can be turned on.
TESTING.
Environmental
conditions surpassing those of
any location a transmitter is likely to encounter, have been imposed on the
FM -2.5K. The transmitter is capable of
operating at altitudes to 7500 feet, in an
ambient temperature range of -20° to
+45 °C.
COMPLETE
tests,
FM -2.5K, rear view, door oft.
FM -2.5K employs Harris' exclusive,
advanced- design MS -15 solid state ex-
The
citer, with Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM), to provide the very finest
stereo signal available. Technical specifications are exceptional compared to
other 2.5 kilowatt FM transmitters on the
market. And DSM with overshoot compensation allows a 2 to 6 dB increase in
loudness with no degradation of audio
quality!
kilowatts at full output -and will provide
3000 watts effective radiated power in
both horizontal and vertical planes when
used with a Harris 3 -bay FMC -3A Dual
Cycloid Ill antenna. This assumes a coaxial cable efficiency of as low as 82 %.
The transmitter consumes only 4.8
...
The FM -2.5K uses single phase power
in areas where this is the only type of
power available, no additional lines are
required.
equipped for mono or stereo operation,
with or without SCA. The design versatility of the exciter allows you to order
for mono operation originally, then add
stereo and /or SCA at a later date by
plugging the appropriate module(s) into
the exciter. Since the SCA generators
have spectrally pure filtered outputs, 41
and 67 kHz SCA channels may be operated simultaneously while in the mono
mode without harmonic interference.
STABLE, EASY OUTPUT TUNING. Plate
tuning of the final amplifier is stable and
easily adjusted. The plate circuit is a
shorted, one -quarter wavelength configuration, with the plate line operated at
DC ground potential. Coarse plate tuning is pre -set for the operating frequency
on the plate line. Fine adjustment is made
with the plate tuning knob on the front
panel. Amplifier loading is changed by a
variable output loading control.
in
addition, your FM -2.5K is fully tuned
and operationally tested on your frequency before shipment.
In
HARMONIC FILTER STANDARD. Supplied with a Harris- designed harmonic
filter, the transmitter fully meets FCC requirements for spurious radiation. All filtering is mounted inside the transmitter
cabinet and provides rapid cut -off of
second and higher order harmonics.
QUALITY COMPONENTS. Every transmitter component is conservatively operated and chosen to give optimum performance in continuous duty service. In
Harris' MS -15 exciter, only performance proven solid -state devices and precision
temperature compensated components
are used throughout.
STYLING. Handsomely yet functionally
styled, the transmitter cabinet is finished
in white and blue, with a black meter
panel. The FM -2.5K is completely self
contained in one cabinet, and simplicity
of design allows easy access to all components.
4
-
-the 4X150A intermediate power amplifier, and the 5CX1500A single -ended
final power amplifier.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING. The recycle
circuitry in the FM -2.5K is adjustable, self clearing and uncomplicated. Should a
momentary overload occur, the transmitter will recycle automatically. If the over-
TYPE ACCEPTANCE. The FM -2.5K
PLUG -IN MONO, STEREO AND SCA
GENERATORS. The FM -2.5K may be
load occurs in excess of the number of
times pre -set, the transmitter will remain
type accepted for mono or stereo broadcasting in the 87.5 to 108 MHz band.
Two tubes are employed in the FM -2.5K
72
www.americanradiohistory.com
is
FCC
HARRIS' MS- 15...THE MOST ADVANCED FM EXCITER IN THE INDUSTRY
The
solid -state MS -15
exciter employs
Digitally Synthesized Modulation, overshoot compensation, and other exclusive
design techniques, to give you an FM
sound that is noticeably cleaner, noticeably louder than any competitive signal.
The exciter is available for mono or stereo
operation, with or without SCA. The modular construction of the MS -15 allows you
to change the mode of operation, or to
add SCA, at any time, by simply plugging
in the appropriate module(s).
approval of a system for quadraphonic FM will not obsolete the MS -15.
Module positions exist which are ready
to accept a quad generator.
FCC
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION. The DSM stereo generator is a
new development which eliminates the
tradeoff that exists between switching
type and balanced modulator types of
stereo generators -po r separation at
high frequencies in t
former or poor
harmonic rejection an SCA crosstalk in
the latter. The DSM tereo generator is
capable of both 50 dB separation (typical) through 15 kHz and an exceptionally
clean baseband, promoting minimal interaction between stereo and SCA service. Also, pilot phase is automatically
controlled so that high separation can be
maintained under varying operating conditions.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter has
been developed by Harris for FM stereo,
with overshoot no greater than 2% on
any program material processed by any
limiter. As a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased loudness can be achieved without degradation of audio quality. Controlled transient response, high stereo
separation, low crosstalk, and low inter modulation distortion are all maintained
with increased loudness. For monaural
stations wishing to protect 41 and /or 67
kHz SCA channels, a defeatable linear
phase lowpass filter is provided for optimal linear control of overshoot.
COMPATIBILITY. The MS -15 exciter is
mechanically and electrically compatible
with the Harris TE -3 exciter. Mountings
are in the same location and use the same
hardware.
output power is 15 watts into 50 ohms,
continuously adjustable to 3 watts by one
control. A directional coupler samples
and meters forward and reflected power,
with remote metering capability. A harmonic filter is placed at the RF module
output, reducing harmonics to a low level.
The balanced 600 ohm audio input is
transformerless to give maximum common mode rejection and excellent response. Inputs will withstand high transients or steady state voltages above or
below ground reference.
RF
The basic exciter audio response is wide band and flat, and can be used directly
with a studio -transmitter link. The exciter
is self- contained,
including the power
supply.
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 75, 50, 25
or 0 microseconds in either monophonic
or stereophonic operation.
Remote control capability includes switching between stereo and mono, and selection of left, right, or left- plus -right inputs
for monophonic operation.
OPERATION. SCA operation is
added to the exciter through a plug -in
module. It is available with either stereo
or mono operation; up to two channels
can be added to mono exciters, or a
single SCA used with stereo. Any channel between 25 kHz and 75 kHz can be
used, although 41 kHz and 67 kHz are
normally provided. Either frequency is
selectable on the SCA channel card.
SCA
Pre- emphasis is selectable to 150, 75, 50
or 0 microseconds. The input audio is
applied to a programable lowpass filter,
and the output of the SCA generator
filtered so that 150 microseconds pre emphasis can be used with no degradation of SCA to main channel crosstalk.
Each SCA module has a pair of audio
inputs, one AC coupled for audio, and
the other DC coupled for data and video
transmission.
OTHER FEATURES. The Harris MS -15 exciter can be quickly and easily programmed to any carrier frequency in the 87.5
to 108 MHz band in 50 kHz increments.
The RF output network is broadband and
requires no tuning. Carrier frequencies
are generated through a digital synthesizer which is locked to a 10 MHz TCXO
high stability frequency standard. The
TCXO has improved crystal aging characteristics and does not require an oven.
The synthesizer also provides outputs at
2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25 MHz for easy
frequency comparison to the National
Bureau of Standards WWV transmissions.
The subcarrier level is adjustable to pro-
vide from 1% to 30% composite base band SCA injection. When an SCA sub carrier is turned on or off, an automatic
composite level switcher noiselessly compensates for the change in baseband injection level. 100% peak modulation is
maintained independent of SCA status.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The entire
exciter is modular for ease of troubleshooting and maintenance. An extender
card is provided to allow easy servicing.
Extensive metering is provided, and LED
status lights on the modules indicate
various performance features.
73
www.americanradiohistory.com
OAS- IE
PM
IX OM
IPA
PA
4x1SOA
ecxLS.eA
-Sp
RP
OUTPUT
1.5 kW
MONAU.AL 00101A TON
(OPTIMAL)
ETTMEO
1
Gba.AloR
(OPTIONAL/
I
---4
-- ___
sU
OENEATO.-41
OtIONAU
ECA
OENEIATO.-67 INS
IOPnONALi
J
PLATE E
ORTD WAS
SCREEN
SUPPLY
POWS.
IKON
YOETAOE
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
FM -2.5K
BLOCK DIAGRAM
FM -2.5K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 800 W to 2.5 kW.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating frequency.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 13k" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation (DCFM).
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 197/250 V, 60 or 50 Hz, single phase, two wire.
Power consumption: 4800 watts (approx.). 115/230 V, 60 or 50 Hz,
150 watts for MS -15.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 7500 feet.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 °C to +45 °C.
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
OVERALL CABINET SIZE: 29 "W (74cm) x 78 "H (198cm) x 33 "D (84cm).
FRONT DOOR SWING: 29" (74cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
WEIGHT & CUBAGE: Export: 1350 lbs. (612 kg). Domestic: 1100 lbs. (499 kg).
104 cu. ft. (2.9 cu. m).
TYPE OF
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to
other impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: t10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre.empho
sis curve ±0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 micro.
second pre- emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30. 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz
@
=75
kHz
deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced, resistive.
Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm =1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) Standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre-emphasis curve =0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or
TYPE OF MODULATION:
50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady
state. Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or less, 30. 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference: 400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, 1-75 kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30. 15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to main channel)
45 dB below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between 25 and
75 kHz on special order.
±500
FREQUENCY STABILITY:
Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000
ohms unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond
pre- emphasis ±1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75 microsecond
pre. emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than %, 30 -5000 Hz. -.5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref: 100%
±5 kHz deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub. channel): -60 dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub-channel to SCA): 50 dB below ±5 kHz
deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 30- 15,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond de.
emphasis.
-
1
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to
dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
-30
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for -.75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: ±0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: ±2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FM -2.5K 2500 watt FM broadcast
As above, except 50 Hz
100% spare tube kit
transmitter with MS -15 exciter, for wideband operation,
Mono generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 87 kHz)
CP-3M-479
BO
Hz
994 -8047 -001
994 -8047-003
990 -0587 -001
994 -8019 -001
994 -8020 -001
994- 7992 -001
ADV.489A PTD. IN U.S.A.
74
www.americanradiohistory.com
Solid -state Maximum Signal Exciter -MS -15
HARRIS
CIM,,,,,, .,>,
FM-1
t:
K
Patented DSM Stereo Generator provides separation exceeding accurate measurement capability of most monitors
filter technique limits overshoot to 2% or less, permitting a 2 to 6 dB increase in loudness with no audio
quality degradation
DTR
Low operating cost
Stable, easy output tuning
1
-Kilowatt
FM Broadcast
Transmitter
Built -in connections for remote control
Automatic recycling
Full metering
Plug -in mono, stereo and SCA generators
75
www.americanradiohistory.com
section harmonic filter, the transmitter fully
meets FCC requirements for spurious radiation. The second harmonic shorting stub is
mounted inside the transmitter cabinet,
leaving the easy -to- install low -pass in -line
filter as the only external component.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING. In case of
momentary overload, the transmitter
recycles automatically. Should the
overload reoccur in excess of the desired
number of times preset in the transmitter,
the FM-1K will then remain off the air until
it is reset, either locally or by remote control.
REMOTE CONTROL. All necessary
operating functions can be remote controlled. No additional equipment is required to adapt a Harris remote control
system to the transmitter. Connections are
easily and simply made at a terminal strip
in the cabinet.
TESTING. Environmental tests, in conditions surpassing those of any location a
transmitter is likely to encounter, have been
imposed on the FM-1K. The transmitter is
capable of operating at altitudes up to 10,000 feet (3000 meters), in an ambient
temperature range of -20° to +45° C.
In addition, your FM-1K is fully tuned and
operationally tested on your frequency
before shipment.
FULL METERING.
employs Harris' exclusive,
advanced- design MS -15 solid -state exciter
to provide the cleanest and the loudest FM
signal of any one -kilowatt FM transmitter
available today. The DSM (Digitally
Synthesized Modulation) stereo generator
allows the transmitter to provide stereo
separation of 40 dB minimum, 30- 15,000
Hz -while the DTR (Dynamic Transient
Response) filter permits a 2 to 6 dB increase
in loudness, with no degradation of audio
quality, by limiting overshoot to 2% or
The
FM-1K
less.
-a
ONE TUBE DESIGN. Just one tube
4CX1000A tetrode -is all that is needed to
supply 1000 watts output in the FM-1K.
Driven directly by the MS -15 exciter, the
4CX1000A serves as the power amplifier
and is operated well within its ratings for
long tube life.
MONO, STEREO AND SCA
GENERATORS. The FM-1K may be
equipped for mono or stereo operation,
with or without SCA. The design versatility
of the exciter allows you to order for mono
PLUG -IN
operation originally, then add stereo
and /or SCA at a later date by plugging
the appropriate module(s) into the exciter.
Six meters, including
four large, front -panel meters, provide full
monitoring of the transmitter's operating
parameters. Included is a power indicator
that permits direct reading of both power
output and standing wave ratio.
STABLE, EASY OUTPUT TUNING. Plate
tuning of the final amplifier is stable and
easily adjusted. The plate circuit is a
shorted one -quarter wavelength configuration, with the plate -line operated at DC
ground potential. Coarse plate tuning is
preset for the operating frequency on the
quarter -wave tank circuit. Fine adjustment
is made with the plate tuning knob on the
front panel. Amplifier loading is changed
by o variable output loading capacitor.
POWER OUTPUT CONTROL. The
transmitter's output loading control is
motor- driven for smooth power adjustments, either locally or from a remote
point. This feature allows the screen
voltage of the 4CX1000A to be Zenerdiode regulated for exceptional operating
stability and tube life.
HARMONIC FILTERS STANDARD.
Supplied
with a
Harris -designed
multi-
76
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL. There are many other operational and convenience features incorporated into the FM -1K. These include:
Pushbutton Operation -On -off functions
are controlled by lighted pushbuttons at
the top left of the transmitter. These are
clearly marked "Filament On- Off ", "Plate
On- Off".
High- Capacity Blower- backed up by a
precision air -pressure switch, gives complete protection to the final amplifier tube.
Design -allows
accessibility to all components.
Straightforward
easy
Handsome Styling -the transmitter cabinet
is attractively yet functionally styled, and
features a white and blue finish, with a
black meter panel.
FCC Type Acceptance
-the
FM -1K
is
FCC
type accepted for mono or stereo broadcasting in the 87.5 to 108 MHz FM band.
/rrr-rrr7rl,
e
,.
\1
HARRIS' MS -15
The
solid -state
MS -15
... THE MOST ADVANCED FM EXCITER
exciter employs
Digitally Synthesized Modulation, overshoot compensation, and other exclusive
design techniques, to give you an FM sound
that is noticeably cleaner, noticeably
louder than any competitive signal. The exciter is available for mono or stereo operation, with or without SCA. The modular
construction of the MS -15 allows you to
change the mode of operation, or to add
SCA, at any time, by simply plugging in the
appropriate module(s).
approval of a system for quadraphonic FM will not obsolete the MS-15.
Module positions exist which are ready to
accept a quad generator.
FCC
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION. The DSM stereo generator is a new
development which eliminates the tradeoff
that exists between switching type and
balanced modulator types of stereo generators -poor separation at high frequencies in the former or poor harmonic rejection and SCA crosstalk in the latter. The
DSM stereo generator is capable of both
50 dB separation (typical) through 15 kHz
and an exceptionally clean baseband, promoting minimal interaction between stereo
and SCA service. Also, pilot phase is automatically controlled so that high separation can be maintained under varying
operating conditions.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter has
been developed by Harris for FM stereo,
with overshoot no greater than 2% on any
program material processed by any limiter.
As a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased
loudness can be achieved without
degradation of audio quality. Controlled
transient response, high stereo separation,
low crosstalk, and low intermodulation distortion are all maintained with increased
loudness. For monaural stations wishing to
protect 41 and /or 67 kHz SCA channels, a
defeatable linear phase lowpass filter is
provided for optimal
overshoot.
linear control of
COMPATIBILITY. The MS -15 exciter is
mechanically and electrically compatible
with the Harris TE -3 exciter. Mountings are
in the same location and use the same
hardware.
output power is 15 watts into 50 ohms,
continuously adjustable to 3 watts by one
control. A directional coupler samples and
meters forward and reflected power, with
remote metering capability. A harmonic
filter is placed at the RF module output,
reducing harmonics to a low level. The
balanced 600 ohm audio input is
transformerless to give maximum common
mode rejection and excellent response. Inputs will withstand high transients or
steady state voltages above or below
ground reference.
RF
audio response is wide band and flat, and can be used directly
with a studio -transmitter link. The exciter is
self -contained, including the power supply.
The basic exciter
IN THE INDUSTRY
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 75, 50, 25 or
0 microseconds in either monophonic or
stereophonic operation.
Remote control capability includes
switching between stereo and mono, and
selection of left, right, or left- plus -right inputs for monophonic operation.
SCA OPERATION. SCA operation is added to the exciter through a plug -in module.
It is available with either stereo or mono
operation; up to two channels can be added to mono exciters, or a single SCA used
with stereo. Any channel between 25 kHz
and 75 kHz can be used, although 41 kHz
and 67 kHz are normally provided. Either
frequency is selectable on the SCA channel
card.
Pre -emphasis is selectable to 150, 75, 50 or
0 microseconds. The input audio is applied
to a programable lowpass filter, and the
output of the SCA generator filtered so
that 150 microseconds pre- emphasis can
be used with no degradation of SCA to
main channel crosstalk.
Each SCA module has a
pair of audio in-
puts, one AC coupled for audio, and the
other DC coupled for data and video
transmission.
adjustable to provide
from 1% to 30% composite baseband
SCA injection. When an SCA subcarrier is
turned on or off, an automatic composite
level switcher noiselessly compensates for
the change in baseband injection level.
100% peak modulation is maintained independent of SCA status.
The subcarrier level is
OTHER FEATURES. The Harris MS -15 exciter cal be quickly and easily programmed to any carrier frequency in the 87.5 to
108 MHz band in 50 kHz increments. The
RF output network is broadband and requires no tuning. Carrier frequencies are
generated through a digital synthesizer
which is locked to a 10 MHz TCXO high
stability frequency standard. The TCXO
has improved crystal aging characteristics
and does not require an oven. The synthesizer also provides outputs at 2.5, 5, 10,
15, 20 and 25 MHz for easy frequency
comparison to the National Bureau of
Standards WWV transmissions.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The entire exciter is modular for ease of troubleshooting and maintenance. An extender
card is provided to allow easy servicing.
Extensive metering is provided, and LED
status lights on the modules indicate
various performance features.
77
www.americanradiohistory.com
PA
PM
IRONS
MONAURAL
4Cx1000A
-
TOP VIEW
RF
OUTPUT
I
1W
'4
GIN/IA101
iOPT1ONALI
RF
I'T
ISIIRq
OUTPUT
EIA LINE
WNIRATOR
1OP110T1A1i
SCA
GIT111ATOR-1
SCA
aaNRAiOR-4/
0I00o0
OPTIONAL
I
MN
iOPIIONAU
GRID BIAS
I
SUPPLY
SCREEN
MGM
POWER
VOLTAGE
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
FM -1K
FRONT VIEW
7e
FM-1K
FLOOR PLAN
29
BLOCK DIAGRAM
FM-1K SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: One kilowatt.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating frequency.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: 1%" EIA flange.
FREQUENCY STABIUTY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45 °C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation (DCFM).
MODULATION CAPABIUTY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208/240 V, 60 or 50 Hz, single phase, three wire. Power
consumption: 2100 watts (approx.). 115/230 V, 60 or 50 Hz, 150 watts for
MS -15.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements.
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 10,000 feet (3000 meters).
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE:
°C to +45 °C.
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.7 to 1.
OVERALL CABINET SIZE: 29 "W (74cm) x 78 "H (198cm) x 33 "D (84cm).
FRONT DOOR SWING: 29" (74cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
WEIGHT & CUBAGE: Export: 1300 lbs. (590 kg). Domestic: 1050 lbs. (476 kg).
104 cu. ft. (2.9 cu. m).
-20
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to other
impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatoble.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre- emphasis
curve ±0.5 dB, 30-15,000 Hz. Selectable: flot, 25 or 50 microsecond pre emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz â ±75 kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 50 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100%.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
TYPE OF MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left to right) 600 ohms balanced, resistive. Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL (left and right) +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) Standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre -emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30. 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50
microsecond pre -emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady state.
Defeotable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
less,
30-15,000 Hz.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference:
400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75 kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30- 15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to -main channel) 45 dB
below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 50 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programable, any frequency between 25 and 75
kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABIUTY: ±500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000 ohms
unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond pre emphasis ±1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75 microsecond pre emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than %, 30-5000 Hz. ±5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref: 100% _ ±5 kHz
deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub-channel): -60 dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (main or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 dB below ±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 3015,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
1
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for ±75 kHz deviation.
AMPUTUDE RESPONSE: ±0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: ±2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1 kW
FM transmitter with MS-15 excitor, for wideband operation, 50/60 Hz.
Mono generator (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
FM-1K,
J
K-1.5M-1279
994 -8046 -001
994- 8019 -001
994 -8020 -001
994- 7992 -001
ADV. 508A PTD. IN U.S.A.
78
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
All solid state
FM-300KD
Solid -State Main /Alternate 300 -Watt
FM Transmitter
Complete backup with optional automatic changeover
in FM -300KD
... stereo separation
exceeding accurate monitor measurement capability
DSM stereo generator*
FM-300K
Solid -State 300 -Watt FM Transmitter
DTR filter technique holds overshoot to 2 °á or less
2
to 6 dB increase in loudness
Improved reliability
Recycling overload circuit
Remote control connections
Full metering
Plug -in mono, stereo and SCA generators
No crystals required -field tuneable 87.5 to 108 MHz
Patented
Harris' 300 -watt FM transmitter is available in two configurations
standard model (FM -300K) and the main /alternate version
(FM- 300KD) with optional automatic changeover.
-the
The FM -300KD is a completely redundant transmitter designed
to give you total protection against off -air time. Consisting of two
300 -watt FM transmitters and an optional automatic changeover
panel mounted in a single 24 -inch wide cabinet, the FM -300KD
will automatically switch to the alternate transmitter in case of
RF loss from the main unit. This configuration also allows you to
perform transmitter maintenance during
no down time.
broadcast hours with
The FM -300K single transmitter is mounted in the same size
cabinet as the FM- 300KD, and the extra cabinet space may be
utilized for monitoring and test equipment.
Both transmtters are 100% solid state for top reliability, and
represent two of the first all- solid -state 300 -watt broadband transmitters ever developed. Harris was the first equipment manufacturer to introduce an all- solid -state radio broadcast transmitter -the MW -1, one -kilowatt AM transmitter -and has been delivering these transmitters since early 1975. This solid -state
transmitter engineering experience and technology has now
been applied to Harris' 300 -watt FM transmitters to bring you
the n st advanced design available anywhere.
FM -300KD Main /Alternate Transmitter
The transmitters also incorporate such Harris -developed features
as Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM) for the very finest
stereo signal available; and the Dynamic Transient Response
(DTR) filter, which holds overshoot on any program material to
2% or less. Additional features include automatic recycling; an
air cooling system with replaceable dust filter; availability of
two SCA channels; a wideband input for use with microwave
studio -transmitter links; and modular design for ease of maintenance.
79
www.americanradiohistory.com
the event of an IPA failure for operation at
reduced
power.
Optimum
broadband
matching of the input provides a low VSWR
to the FM exciter over the entire FM band.
CONTROL, METERING
& IPA /PA
MS -15 SOLID STATE
EXCITER
AUTO CHANGE -OVER
PANEL
CONTROL, METERING
& IPA
/PA
CONTROL CIRCUITS. Control function circuits are provided for transmitter turn on,
AFC lock, RF mute, air flow, PA overload,
and VSWR protection. Remote control interface is also provided. Status lights with
memory are provided for VSWR and amplifier
overloads. The transmitters are
equipped for AC restart in case of a power
failure while on the air.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING. The recycle circuitry is self-clearing and uncomplicated.
Should a momentary overload occur, the
transmitter will recycle automatically. If
the overload occurs in excess of the number of times pre -set, the transmitter will
remain off the air until it is reset, either
manually or by remote control.
HARMONIC FILTER. An internal (self -contained) harmonic filter is provided which
assures compliance with RF harmonic output requirements. It allows coverage of the
entire FM band.
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER. An internal directional coupler provides local and remote indication of both forward output
power and reflected power. The reflected
power section is connected to the control
circuit for the purpose of initiating amplifier shutdown in the event of excessive
VSWR. The forward power section initiates
changeover to the spare amplifier after the
output power drops to a pre- determined
level (FM -300KD only).
MS -15 SOLID STATE
EXCITER
FM -300KD MAIN /ALTERNATE
300 -WATT FM TRANSMITTER
POWER AMPLIFIER (PA). The power amplifier consists of four modules, each
module containing two transistor amplifiers
in a highly efficient broadband amplifier
circuit. Each module has an individual current protection circuit and voltage regulator. LED status lights indicate the condition
of each amplifier. A front panel test point
allows a measurement of relative RF power
output with a DC voltmeter. The PA RF
broadband output combiner network allows
the failure of an amplifier module without
causing an off -air condition. Each module
is rated at 100 watts, with transmitter power
output 300 watts nominal.
INTERMEDIATE POWER AMPLIFIER (IPA).
The IPA is identical to the PA modules, and
can be interchanged with a PA module in
80
www.americanradiohistory.com
POWER SUPPLY. The DC power supplies
for the control circuits and amplifier modules are capable of operation from any
conventional 200 -260 VAC, 50/60 Hz single
phase AC power supply. The PA RF amplifier modules are supplied by a feedback type integrated circuit voltage regulator
whose output is adjustable with a single
front panel control. Each voltage regulator
can operate with a continuous short on its
output safely, without causing further damage, due to its current foldback capability.
The IPA voltage regulator is also adjustable. Cooling is provided for regulator
devices. Silicon power rectifiers are used
throughout.
METERING. Ample transmitter metering is
provided for functions including RF output, VSWR, PA DC input voltages and currents, IPA DC input voltage and current,
and unregulated supply voltage. LED indicators on the IPA module and PA module
front panels give indication of correct RF
output for easy fault location.
advanced development which eliminates
the tradeoff that exists between switching
type and balanced modulator types of
stereo generators -poor separation at high
frequencies in the former or poor harmonic
rejection and SCA crosstalk in the latter.
The DSM stereo generator is capable of
both 50 dB separation (typical) through
15 kHz and an exceptionally clean base band, promoting minimal interaction between stereo and SCA service. Also, pilot
phase is automatically controlled so that
high separation can be maintained under
varying operating conditions.
CONTROL, METERING
& IPA /PA
MS -15 SOLID STATE
EXCITER
FM -300K
300 -WATT
FM TRANSMITTER
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic
Transient Response (DTR) filter has been
developed by Harris for FM stereo, with
overshoot no greater than 2% on any program material processed by any limiter. As
a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased loudness
can be achieved without degradation of
audio quality. Controlled transient response, high stereo separation, low crosstalk, and low intermodulation distortion are
all maintained with increased loudness. For
monaural stations wishing to protect 41
and /or 67 kHz SCA channels, a defeatable
linear phase low pass filter is provided
for optimal linear control of overshoot.
F.300KD
SCA OPERATION. Up to two SCA channels
can be added to monaural transmitters, or
a single SCA channel added to a stereo
FT1300K
transmitter through module(s) plugged into
the exciter. Any channel between 25 kHz
and 75 kHz can be used, although 41 kHz
and 67 kHz are normally provided. Either
frequency is selectable on the SCA channel card.
TRANSMITTER
AUDIO
CONTROL
SW
AUTOMATIC SNITCHER
I
l
I
ICH
ANTENNA
J
Each SCA module has a pair of modulation inputs, one balanced and AC coupled
for audio, and the other DC coupled for
data and video transmission.
FM300K
Block diagram of FM-300KD transmitter system, with
optional equipment shown inside dotted lines.
QUALITY COMPONENTS. Every transmit-
ter component is conservatively operated
and chosen to give optimum performance
in continuous duty service.
PLUG -IN MONO, STEREO AND SCA GENERATORS. The FM -300K and FM -300KD
transmitters may be equipped for mono or
stereo operation, with or without SCA. The
design versatility allows you to order for
mono operation originally, then add stereo
Pre- emphasis is selectable to 150, 75, 50 or
microseconds. The input audio is applied
to a programmable lowpass filter, and the
output of the SCA generator filtered so
that 150 microseconds pre -emphasis can
be used with no degradation of SCA to
main channel crosstalk.
0
and /or SCA at a later date by plugging the
appropriate module(s) into the exciter.
Since the SCA generators have spectrally
pure filtered outputs, 41 and 67 kHz SCA
channels may be operated simultaneously
while in the mono mode without harmonic
interference.
The subcarrier level is adjustable to provide from 1% to 30% composite baseband
SCA injection. When an SCA subcarrier is
turned on or off, an automatic composite
level switcher noiselessly compensates for
the change in baseband injection level.
100% peak modulation is maintained independent of SCA status.
GENERAL
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION
(DSM). The DSM stereo generator is an
The MS -15 exciter RF output
power is 3 to 15 watts into 50 ohms, continuously adjustable by one control. A di81
www.americanradiohistory.com
rectional coupler samples and meters forward and reflected power, with remote
metering capability. A harmonic filter is
placed at the RF module output, reducing
harmonics to a low level. The balanced 600
ohm audio input is transformerless to give
maximum common mode rejection and excellent transient response. Inputs will withstand high transients or steady voltages
above or below ground reference.
The transmitters can be quickly and easily
programmed to any carrier frequency in
the 87.5 to 108 MHz band in 50 kHz increments. Carrier frequencies are generated
through a digital synthesizer which is
locked to a 10 MHz TCXO high stability
frequency standard. The TCXO has improved crystal aging characteristics and
does not require an oven. The TCXO output may be conveniently and directly com-
pared with any one of several worldwide
frequency standards.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE. The transmitters
are modular for ease of trouble- shooting
and maintenance. An extender card is provided to allow easy servicing. Extensive
metering is provided, and LED status lights
on the exciter modules indicate various
performance features.
FM- 300K /FM -300KD SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 300 watts.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz. Exciter programmable
in 50 kHz increments. IPA and PA wideband.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
OUTPUT TERMINATION: Type N female.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 45° C TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation
(DCFM).
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 208 to 245 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz. Single phase,
t5%
variation.
RF HARMONICS: 60 dB or better.
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 12,000 ft. (3658 meters) maximum at rated ambient.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0 °C to +50 °C.
HUMIDITY: Up to 95% non-condensing.
MAXIMUM VSWR: 1.2 to 1.
OVERALL CABINET SIZE: Approx. 273/4" W x 713/4" H x 293/4"
D (70.5 cm x 182.3 cm x 75.6 cm).
FINISH: White, blue and black.
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive,
adaptable to other impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC
pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25
or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz @ ±75
kHz deviation).
AM NOISE: 65 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
TYPE OF MODULATION: Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (Left to right) 600 ohms balanced,
resistive. Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (Left and right) +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100%
modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (Left and right) Standard 75
microsecond, FCC pre- emphasis curve ±0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz.
Selectable: flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, greater than 45 dB rejection at
19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR)
filter.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady state. Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (Left or right) 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000
Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (Left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference: 400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ±75
kHz deviation.
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz t1 Hz, 0° to 45 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum 30- 15,000 Hz.
CROSSTALK: (Main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to -main
channnel) 45 dB below 90% modulation.
SUB CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 60 dB below 90% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R), mono (L), mono (R).
Remoteable.
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM.
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programmable, any frequency between 25 and 75 kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ±7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled)
and 2000 ohms unbalanced (DC coupled).
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond pre- emphasis ±1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or
75 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programmable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than 1%, 30 -4500 Hz. t5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (Main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (Ref:
100% = ±5 kHz deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel): -60 dB or
better.
CROSSTALK: (Main or stereo sub -channel to SCA): 50 dB below
±5 kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by frequencies 30- 15,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated
with 150 microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive,
unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for ±75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: ±0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: ±2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
ADV. 534A PTD. IN U.S.A.
RP-2M279
82
www.americanradiohistory.com
IAARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
Patented DSM Stereo Generator provides separation
exceeding accurate measurement capability of most
monitors
INFORMATION PROCESSING
filter technique permits 2 to
increase by eliminating overshoot
DTR
MS -15
6
dB
loudness
Ultra linear VCO for minimum distortion
Ovenless TCXO provides maximum stability
Maximum Signal
FM
Exciter
System design virtually eliminates crosstalk into L -R
and SCA channels under dynamic and steady state
conditions
Automatic pilot phase control and digital circuitry give
long -term high performance
MS- 15 --the first significant advance in FM exciters in
over a decade
I!
www.americanradiohistory.com
Harris' MS -15 FM Exciter features modular construction for great
versatility and ease of maintenance.
A few years ago, Harris introduced PDM to
the AM broadcaster and sent hundreds of
conventional AM transmitters to standby
service.
The MS-15 FM exciter now makes all other
FM exciters as obsolete as the plate
modulated AM transmitter. Using patented
DSM (Digitally Synthesized Modulation)
and DTR (Dynamic Transient Response)
techniques, the MS -15 offers the quality minded FM broadcaster the first real
alternative to the "me -too" designs, based
on decade -old technology, found in other
FM exciters.
ULTRA- LINEAR VCO. The unique VCO of
the MS -15 features superb linearity not
found in conventional modulated oscillator
designs. The 0.2% maximum monaural
distortion specification is conservative,
and typical readings below this limit are
not unusual.
Since non -linearities in any direct FM
modulated oscillator severely limit stereo
performance, the importance of this ultra
linearity can easily be seen. Performance
is not compromised by complexity. There
are no tuning adjustments required of any
kind. Only a single jumper is used to select
84
www.americanradiohistory.com
either the lower or upper half of the FM
band!
DIGITAL SYNTHESIZER. The MS -15 uses a
10 MHz TCXO high -stability reference
oscillator and programable divider chain
in its dual -state phase locked loop AFC
system. The synthesizer provides outputs
at 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25 MHz, permitting
direct comparison against WWV transmissions on these frequencies. The synthesizer can be easily programmed to any carrier
frequency in the 87.5 to 108 MHz band in
50 kHz increments. The dual state AFC will
acquire the VCO over a ± 10 MHz range in
THE MOST ADVANCED FM EXCITER IN THE INDUSTRY
maximum of 5 seconds, starting from an
unlocked condition. Once locked, the AFC
passband is narrowed, maximizing FM
signal to noise.
a
DIGITALLY SYNTHESIZED MODULATION.
The DSM stereo generator is a new,
patented development that obsoletes
switching and balanced modulator forms
of stereo generation. While these earlier
types of stereo generation suffer from
degraded separation at the lower and
upper frequency limits (50 Hz and 15 kHz),
and /or poor harmonic rejection resulting
in degraded crosstalk, DSM has neither of
these trade -offs. This results in the
cleanest- sounding stereo performance of
any FM exciter. Minimum separation is 45
dB from 30 to 15,000 Hz and typically
separation will exceed 50 dB over this
entire band. Since this exceeds guaranteed
accuracy of most modulation monitors,
only carefully calibrated test equipment
will be able tc accurately measure the
actual performance of the MS -15.
The high performance characteristics of
the DSM generator are easy to maintain
year after year. The digital circuitry
employed reduces user adjustments to a
bare minimum, and these are relatively
non -critical in nature. An automatic pilot
phase control makes it virtually impossible
to misadjust this critical parameter.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. A Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) filter was
developed by Harris for FM stereo which
holds overshoot on any program material
to 2% or less. As a result, from 2 to 6 dB
increased loudness can be achieved with
no degradation of audio quality. Controlled transient response, high stereo
separation, low crosstalk and low inter modulation distortion are all maintained
with the increased loudness.
SCA OPERATION. Up to 2 optional SCA
generators may be plugged into the exciter
mainframe. A balanced 600 ohm input is
provided for normal SCA program audio,
and a separate DC coupled wideband input
to the generator's direct FM modulator is
provided for telemetry or data transmission where DC coupling is required.
under dynamic programming
conditions, which plagues many SCA
generation systems, is virtually inaudible
in the MS -15 exciter system.
ruggedly constructed from interlocking
aluminum extrusions. A positive guidance
system permits easy removal and reinsertion of all modules. All modules can be
serviced from the front of the exciter using
the extender card supplied with the
exciter.
Audio inputs are transformerless and
balanced to give maximum common mode
rejection while maintaining excellent response. Inputs will withstand high transients or steady state voltages above or
below ground reference.
basic exciter audio response is
wideband and flat, and can be used,
without interface, directly with a studio transmitter link.
The
Crosstalk
POWER AMPLIFIER. The power amplifier
module is conservatively rated at 15 watts
output, and requires no tuning across the
entire FM band. A lowpass filter with one
tuning adjustment keeps RF harmonics to
less than -53 dB. The output is VSWR
protected to prevent accidental damage to
the PA.
GENERAL.
The
MS -15
mainframe
is
exciter is configured to accept a
plug -in quadraphonic FM generator and
provides metering of Left and Right rear
audio inputs. All of the five competing
quadraphonic systems currently under
consideration by the FCC can be accommodated by the MS -15.
The
Status LED indicators are used throughout
to aid in troubleshooting. Metering is
provided to monitor 20 functions. A peak
reading audio voltmeter aids in setting up
the exciter on tones, and can serve as an
accurate peak program indicator.
Harris DSM stereo
generator, with digitally
synthesized modulation,
provides 45 dB stereo
separation minimum, 3015,000 Hz, and overshoot
no greater than 2%.
The
T
HARRIS
:C
85
www.americanradiohistory.com
MS -15 SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
POWER OUTPUT: 3W to 15W, continuously variable.
FREOUENCY RANGE: 87.5 to 108 MHz, tuned to specified operating
frequency (programmable, 50 kHz channel spacing).
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms, open and short circuit proof.
OUTPUT CONNECTION: BNC.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ±300 Hz 0° to 50'C, TCXO.
TYPE OF MODULATION: Direct Carrier Frequency Modulation (DCFM).
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ± 100 kHz.
AC INPUT POWER: 100 to 130 VAC or 200 to 260 VAC, 60 or 50 Hz, 150 W.
RF HARMONICS: Suppression meets all FCC requirements for 10 watt
educational (53 dB).
POWER SUPPLY RECTIFIERS: Silicon.
ALTITUDE: 15,000 ft.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0°C to 50 °C (operational to -20 °C).
OVERALL CABINET SIZE: 17.7" W (44 cm) x 14 "H (35 cm) x 12 "D (30
cm). (19" rack mounting standard)
FINISH: Black
AUDIO /CONTROL CONNECTIONS: 2 x 18 pin barrier strips paralleled
by 36 pin and socket connector.
MODULATION METER: 10 position, fast rise A/C metering (adjustable
to meet FCC ballistics).
MULTIMETER: 10 position, DC metering.
MONAURAL MODE
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced, resistive, adaptable to
other impedances.
INPUT FILTER: Controlled response LPF, defeatable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: + 10 dBm ± 1 dB for 100% modulation at 400
2% maximum overshoot beyond
steady state. Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right). 0.4% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: (left or right) 65 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
Reference: (400 Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis, ± 75 kHz
deviation, measured 30 Hz to 15 kHz).
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 50 °C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
STEREO SEPARATION: 45 dB minimum, 30- 15,000 Hz.
DYNAMIC STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum under normal
programming conditions.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub -channel or stereo sub -to -main
channel) 45 dB below 90% modulation.
SUB- CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 60 dB below 100% modulation.
76 kHz SUPPRESSION: 60 d8 minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L + R) mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE:
SCA SPECIFICATIONS
MODULATION: Direct FM
FREQUENCY: 41 or 67 kHz programmable, any frequency between 25
and 75 kHz on special order.
FREQUENCY STABILITY: ± 500 Hz.
MODULATION CAPABILITY: ± 7.5 kHz.
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms balanced (AC coupled) and 2000
ohms unbalancd (DC coupled, BNC connections on rear panel).
dB for 100% modulation at
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: + 10 dBm ±
Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Standard 75 microsecond FCC pre emphasis curve ± 0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50
microsecond pre- emphasis.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: 0.2% or less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.2 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
FM NOISE: 68 dB below 100% modulation (ref. 400 Hz @ ± 75 kHz
deviation, measured 30 Hz to 15 kHz with 75 microsecond
de-em phasis).
AM NOISE: 70 dB below reference carrier AM modulation 100 %, P out
15 W.
STEREOPHONIC MODE
TYPE OF MODULATION: Digitally synthesized modulation (DSM).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced,
resistive. Adaptable to other impedances.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm ± 1 dB for 100%
modulation at 400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right). Standard 75 microsecond, FCC pre- emphasis curve ± 0.5 dB 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable:
flat, 25 or 50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF,45 dB rejection at 19 kHz.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
1
400 Hz.
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 41 kHz and 67 kHz, 150 microsecond
pre- emphasis ±1 dB, standard. Selectable: flat, 50 or 75
microsecond pre-emphasis.
INPUT FILTERING: Programmable LPF, 4.5 kHz standard.
DISTORTION: Less than 1 %, 30 -4,500 Hz. ±5 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE: (Main channel not modulated) 55 dB minimum (ref 100% =
± 5 kHz deviation at 400 Hz).
CROSSTALK: (SCA to main or stereo sub -channel); -60 dB or better.
CROSSTALK: (Main or stereo sub -channel to SCA); 50 dB below ±5
kHz deviation of SCA, with mono or stereo channels modulated by
frequencies 30- 15,000 Hz, SCA demodulated with 150 microsecond
de- emphasis.
CROSSTALK: SCA to SCA (41 kHz /67 kHz) 50 dB demodulated with 150
microsecond de- emphasis.
AUTOMATIC MUTE LEVEL: Variable from 0 to -30 dBm.
MUTE DELAY: Adjustable 0.5 to 20 seconds.
INJECTION LEVEL: 1% to 30% of composite. Adjustable.
:
WIDEBAND MODE
INPUT CONNECTOR: BNC.
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Greater than 5000 ohms resistive, unbalanced.
INPUT LEVEL: 1.0 VRMS nominal for ± 75 kHz deviation.
AMPLITUDE RESPONSE: ± 0.25 dB, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
PHASE LINEARITY: ± 2 °, 30 Hz to 75 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
exciter, for wideband operation, 19 inch rack mounted
Mono option (add for mono operation)
DSM stereo generator with DTR (add for stereo operation)
SCA generator (add for SCA operation, specify 41 or 67 kHz)
MS -15
994 -7950 -002
994-8019-001
994-8020-001
994- 7992 -001
ADV. 492C PTD IN
CP-2M-879
86
www.americanradiohistory.com
U S A
Mal
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
MS-15R
The MS -15R stereo generator is an exclusive Harris development
that features Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM) and
Dynamic Transient Response (DTR). This generator offers the
quality- minded FM broadcaster the first real advancement in
stereo generation in a decade -and obsoletes switching and
balanced modulator forms of stereo generation.
FM STEREO
GENERATOR
Drives composite Studio -Transmitter Links or wideband
input of any FM exciter
Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM)
and Dynamic Transient Response (DTR) plug -in modules
as Harris' MS -15 FM exciter
Uses the some
Output module features a true peak reading Light Emitting Diode (LED) display of all stereo functions
Active transformerless inputs for best transient response
Low output impedance for driving lengths of coaxial
cable
Digital circuitry design reduces adjustments to
minimum
Unique compensation circuit for use with STL's
All operating controls are on the front panel
Modular construction for ease of maintenance
Standard 19 -inch rack mounting
a
While these earlier types of stereo generation suffer from
degraded separation at the lower and upper frequency limits (30
Hz and 15 kHz), and /or poor harmonic rejection resulting in
degraded crosstalk, DSM has neither of these trade -offs. This
results in the cleanest- sounding stereo performance of any stereo
generator. Minimum separation is 45 dB from 30 to 15,000 Hz
and typical separation will exceed 50 dB over this entire band.
Since this exceeds the guaranteed accuracy of most modulation
monitors, carefully calibrated test equipment is required to
measure the actual performance of the MS -15R.
The high performance characteristics of the DSM generator are
easy to maintain year after year. The digital circuitry reduces
user adjustments to a minimum, and these adjustments are
relatively non -critical in nature. An "automatic" pilot phase control assures long -term stability of this critical parameter.
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION. The Dynamic Transient
Response filter, developed by Harris for FM stereo, holds
overshoot on any program material to 2% or less, and can be
used with any FM limiter. As a result, from 2 to 6 dB increased
loudness can be achieved with no degradation of audio quality.
Controlled transient response, high stereo separation, low
crosstalk and low intermodulation distortion are all maintained
with the increased loudness.
GENERAL. The modular MS -15R is ruggedly constructed and
designed for rack mounting. A positive guidance system permits
easy removal and reinsertion of modules, which can be serviced
from the front of the generator.
87
www.americanradiohistory.com
Audio inputs are transformerless and balanced to give maximum
common mode rejection while maintaining excellent transient and
frequency response. Inputs will withstand high transients or
steady state voltages above or below ground level.
status indicators are used throughout to aid in
troubleshooting. A peak- reading audio LED display aids in setLED
ting up the stereo generator, and also serves as an accurate peak
program indicator.
The MS -15R can be used with any FM exciter that will accept a
wideband input, and is FCC type accepted for use with the Harris
MS -15 exciter.
MS -15R SPECIFICATIONS
AC INPUT POWER: 100 to 130 VAC or 200 to 260 VAC, 60 Hz or 50 Hz, 25 W.
HUMIDITY RANGE: 0 to 95% relative humidity, non- condensing.
microsecond pre- emphasis.
ALTITUDE: 15,000 feet A.M.S.L.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0°
AUDIO FREQUENCY RESPONSE: (left and right) standard 75 microsecond,
FCC pre -emphasis curve ±0.5 dB, 30- 15,000 Hz. Selectable: flat, 25 or 50
INPUT FILTERING: 15 kHz LPF, 50 dB minimum rejection at 19 kHz and above.
C
to
+50°
C
(operational to
-20° C).
OVERALL CABINET SIZE: 17.6 in. wide (44.7 cm) x 3.5 in. high (8.9 cm) z 15.8
in. deep (40.1 cm). (19 -inch rock mounting standard). Net weight: 18 pounds
(8.2 kg).
AUDIO TRANSIENT RESPONSE: 2% maximum overshoot beyond steady state.
Defeatable for test purposes.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (left or right) 0.4% or
FINISH: Black with white lettering.
MODULATION METERING: Output module features o true peak reading
display of left, Right, L+R, L -R, Pilot Injection and Composite levels.
1
V RMS to
less, 30- 15,000 Hz.
IMD: 0.4 %, 60/7000 Hz, 4:1 ratio.
AUDIO /CONTROL CONNECTIONS: 12- position barrier strip.
COMPOSITE OUTPUT LEVEL: Adjustable from less than
4.5 V RMS for 100% modulation.
OVERSHOOT PROTECTION: Dynamic transient response (DTR) filter.
LED
greater than
COMPOSITE OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 150 ohms unbalanced, resistive (BNC connector).
NOISE: (left or right) 75 dB minimum below 100% modulation. Reference: (400
Hz, 75 microsecond de- emphasis,
V RMS output, measured 30 Hz to 15
kHz).
1
PILOT OSCILLATOR: Crystal controlled.
PILOT STABILITY: 19 kHz ±1 Hz, 0° to 50° C.
PILOT PHASE: Automatically controlled.
EXTERNAL COMPOSITE INPUT FOR ADDITIONAL SCA'S OR TELEMETRY:
10K resistive, unbalanced, BNC connector. Amplitude response ±0.25 dB, 30
Hz to 75 kHz.
STEREO SEPARATION: 45 dB minimum, 30- 15,000 Hz.
DYNAMIC STEREO SEPARATION: 40 dB minimum under normal programming
conditions.
COMPOSITE BASEBAND COMPENSATION: Compensator provides separate
amplitude and phase compensation for STL or modulated oscillator deficiencies. (Defeatable.)
RFI
PROTECTION: All inputs filtered from 100 kHz through 1000 MHz.
TYPE OF
MODULATION: Digitally synthesized modulation (05M).
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE: (left and right) 600 ohms balanced, resistive.
Adoptable to other impedances.
CROSSTALK: (main to stereo sub-channel or stereo sub -to -main channel) 45 dB
below 90% modulation.
SUB- CARRIER SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
76 KHZ SUPPRESSION: 60 dB minimum below 100% modulation.
MODES: Stereo, mono (L +R), mono (L), mono (R). Remoteable.
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL: (left and right) +10 dBm ±1 dB for 100% modulation at
400 Hz
ORDERING INFORMATION
MS-15R Stereo Generator
J
994- 8140 -001
K-6 M-1177
ADV. 521 PTD. IN U.S.A.
88
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
High power handling capability
Internal feed point to radiating element
COMMUNICATION ANO
SSIN(
Multi- station capability
Excellent bandwidth characteristics
Rugged brass construction
FMH
SUPER -POWER
CIRCULARLY POLARIZED
FM ANTENNA
Silver plated inner- conductor connectors
Radlused element tips to avoid corona problems
Stainless steel support brackets and hardware
The Harris super -power FMH circularly polarized FM antennas
feature unusually high power handling capabilities, excellent
bandwidth characteristics, and multi- station capability.
RADIATING ELEMENT. The radiating element is of brass construction, and has an outside diameter of 3 -1 /e ". The feed point is
completely internal, with a pressurized environment up to the feed
point. Each element is rated at 40 kW, with the exceptions of the
"A" series end fed and 2 bay antennas and the center fed 2 bay,
which are rated at 32, 35 and 39 kW respectively. Element ratings
are limited only by the average power handling capability of the
3 -'/e" rigid coaxial line, which we have conservatively derated from
1
48 kW to 40 kW.
89
www.americanradiohistory.com
"A" Modal,
The rugged construction means these antennas will withstand the
most severe weather extremes and wind velocities up to 150 miles
per hour.
TYPE
FMH-1AE
FMH -2AE
FMH -2AC
FMH -2AC6
FMH -3AE
FMH -4AE
FMH -4AC
FMH -4AC6
FMH -5AE
FMH -6AE
FMH -6AC
FMH -6AC6
FMH -7AE
FMH -8AE
FMH -8AC
FMH -8AC6
FMH -10AC
FMH -10AC6
FMH -12AC
FMH -12AC6
CIRCULARITY. The horizontally polarized radiation pattern is
omni -directional when the antenna is pole mounted atop a tower,
and circularity is typically ± 2 dB when the antenna is mounted on
a 14" diameter steel pole. When side mounted, the antenna pattern will be somewhat affected by the supporting structure.
DEICING. Deicers are not required in a normal environment, as
the typical VSWR is 1.5:1 or less with '/x -inch of radial ice. However, heaters for deicing are available.
TYPE
NO.
FMH -1BE
FMH -2BE
FMH -2BC
FMH -3BE
FMH -4BE
FMH -4BC
FMH -5BE
FMH -6BE
FMH -6BC
FMH -7BE
FMH -88E
FMH -8BC
FMH -10BC
FMH -12BC
The FMH "C" version uses a 4-Vs" element feed stem, and 6 -'/e"
rigid interbay line, with 6 -'/e" end feed. It is available in arrays of up
to 6 bays.
Each antenna is supplied with a 6-foot input transformer. The input
is 50 ohm EIA with either a 3 -14" flange or a 6 -Ve" flange, depending on the model type. All antennas are completely assembled and
tuned to the customer's frequency at the factory. Also, pressure
testing is done at that time to assure the customer of a leak -free
antenna, provided the antenna is properly installed by a qualified
erector and is free of damage.
MOUNTING. Stainless steel mounting brackets and hardware are
supplied for standard constant cross section towers or steel poles
at no additional cost. Brackets for mounting on tapered towers are
available at additional cost.
CP -1.5M -180
© Harris Corporation
dB
[LBS]
32kW
114
137
314"
32kW
31/4"
39kW
64kW
32kW
32kW
39kW
64kW
32kW
32kW
39kW
64kW
32kW
32kW
39kW
64kW
39kW
64kW
39kW
64kW
225
250
304
319
301
421
336
447
472
470
637
652
523
758
558
804
971
61/4"
31/4"
31/4"
31/4"
61/4"
31/4"
31/4"
3K"
61/4"
31/4"
3174"
314"
61/4"
31/2"
61/4"
314"
61/4"
669
694
745
780
986
1096
1138
1305
1320
1433
1653
1770
891
916
967
1138
1189
1360
1987
2108
1411
FEMALE POWER2 CALCUINPUT LATED
50
WT.
OHM
CAPA INPUT
BILITY [LBS]
0.4811
0.9971
0.9971
1.5888
-3.3623
-0.0128
-0.0128
61/4"
1.9278
61/4"
2.1332
2.1332
2.7154
3.3028
3.3028
3.8935
4.4872
4.4872
5.6800
6.8781
3.2903
3.2903
4.3384
5.1888
5.1888
5.9034
6.5197
6.5197
7.5435
8.3747
61/4"
40kW
56kW
80kW
56kW
56kW
614"
112kW
614"
614"
614"
56kW
61/4"
56kW
56kW
112kW
112kW
112kW
POWER GAIN/
TYPE
NO.
FMH -10E
FMH -2CE
FMH -3CE
FMH -4CE
FMH -5CE
FMH -8CE
MODEL NUMBERS. Because of the many variations within each
FMH model category, it is helpful in ordering to understand the
Harris model numbers:
=4 bay
A= "A"' Model
C= Center Fed
6= 6 -1/4" input
CALCU -3
LATED
WIND LOAD
3114"
61/4"
61/4"
61/4"
61/4"
61/4"
61/4"
"C" Modal, 6 -K" Intarbay Lina
DIMENSIONS. Each FMH element is approximately 47 -1 inches
long, and 30 inches high. Weight is approximately 57 pounds per
element with line block.
4
-3.3823
-0.0128
-0.0128
-0.0128
1.9278
3.2903
3.2903
3.2903
4.3384
5.1888
5.1888
5.1888
5.9034
6.5197
6.5197
6.5197
7.5435
7.5435
8.3747
8.3747
POWER GAIN/
POWER
The FMH "B" version uses a 4 -Ye" element feed stem, and a 4 -'/e"
rigid interbay line. It is available in either 6 -1/e" end fed or 6 -'/e"
center fed models in arrays of up to 12 bays.
=1 bay
13= "B" Model
E= End Fed
0.4611
0.9971
0.9971
0.9971
1.5588
2.1332
2.1332
2.1332
2.7154
3.3028
3.3028
3.3028
3.8935
4.4872
4.4872
4.4872
5.6800
5.6800
6.8781
6.8781
dB
FEMALE POWER2 CALCUINPUT LATED
50
OHM
CAPA WT.
INPUT
BILITY [LBS]
"B ' Modal, 41/4" Intarbay Lina, 4 -Vs" Element Stem
ANTENNA MODELS. The Harris FMH super -power FM antenna is
available in three versions. The "A" version uses a 3 -Ye" element
feed stem, and 3 -Ve" rigid interbay line. It is available in 3 -1/4" end
fed, 3 -1/e" center fed and 6 -V /e" center fed models, in arrays of up to
12 bays.
1
POWER GAIN/
POWER
Due to the excellent bandwidth characteristics of the radiating
element, multi- station operation is possible using a common antenna system. The necessary filtering components are available
from Harris for such diplexing or multiplexing operations. Stations
having a frequency separation of up to 4 MHz may be diplexed on a
common antenna. However, in the case of 40 kW transmitters, a
minimum frequency separation of 1.2 MHz is advisable to avoid
excessive heating of filter components.
FMH -4AC6
Interbay Lina, 3 -K" Element Stem
NO.
BANDWIDTH CAPABILITY. The FMH antenna has a low standing
wave ratio of 1.07:1 or less, ± 200 kHz per given channel with field
trimming. VSWR at antenna input without field trimming is 1.1:1 for
pole mounting atop a tower. VSWR at antenna input without field
trimming is 1.5:1 or less when side mounted on a tower.
FMH -1 BE
31/4"
56kW
112kW
dB
0.4611
0.9971
1.5888
2.1332
2.7154
3.3028
-3.3623
-0.0128
61"
1.9278
3.2903
4.3384
5.1888
61/4"
6K"
614"
614"
61/4-
[LBS]
159
201
297
336
435
573
407
468
613
818
612
711
849
888
987
1125
1164
1440
1716
879
1024
1229
1290
1435
1641
1702
2113
2524
4-Ys" Element Stem
FEMALE POWER2 CALCU50
INPUT LATED
OHM
CAPAWT.
INPUT
BILITY [LBS]
POWER
CALCU -3
LATEO
WINDLOAD
40kW
80kW
120kW
120kW
120kW
120kW
205
410
615
820
1025
1230
CALCU -3
LATED
WINDLOAD
(LBS)
260
520
780
1040
1300
1560
FOOTNOTES -(Apply to all models)
Horizotal and vertical power gain and dB gain are the same. 2. Power
input capability up to 2,000 ft. above mean sea level. Derating required
above 2,000 ft. 3. Windload based on 50/33 PSF. 112 m.p.h. actual wind
velocity NOTE: Brackets included in weight and windload calculations.
1.
ADV. 462A PTD. IN U.S.A.
1980
90
www.americanradiohistory.com
Power input handling capability of
9
kW end fed or 12
kW center fed
HARRIS
Excellent bandwidth capability
Internal feed point to radiating element
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMAT,ON PROCESSING
Rugged brass construction
Deicers not required
FML
LOW POWER
CIRCULARLY POLARIZED
FM ANTENNA
Stainless steel support brackets and hardware
Hemispherical element tips to avoid corona problems
The Harris low power FML circularly polarized FM antenna features excellent bandwidth characteristics and the same rugged
construction as Harris' higher -power FM antennas.
RADIATING ELEMENT. The radiating element of the FML antenna is of brass tubular construction, with an outside diameter of
inches. The feed point is completely internal, with a pres1 -3/4
surized environment up to the feed point.
ANTENNA MODELS. Two versions of the FML are available. The
"E" version is an end fed model mounted on -% inch, 50 ohm rigid
line. The "C" version is center fed, and uses 3 -3 /e inch, 50 ohm rigid
1
line.
www.americanradiohistory.com
End fed models have a power input capability of 9 kW, limited by
the average power capability of the -% inch rigid coaxial line,
which we have conservatively derated from 15 kW to 9 kW. the
center fed versions have a power input capability of 12 kW with the
3 -1/8 inch input feed. Each antenna comes with a 6 foot input
transformer. The antenna system feed point is 6 feet below the
bottom bay for end fed models, and approximately 6 feet below the
center of the antenna for center feed antenna systems. The input
is standard -5/8 inch EIA female flange for end fed models, and
3-'/8 inch EIA female flange for center fed models.
1
1
The element stem is of heavy wall brass tubing assuring that the
element will withstand rugged environmental conditions.
RADIATION PATTERN. Complete antenna patterning facilities
are available for measuring the antenna radiation patterns. An
electrically equivalent full size tower section, approximately 20
feet long, is set up on the antenna range. The exact size and
location of the ladder, coaxial transmission lines, conduits and
cables are duplicated on this tower section, and an identical antenna element is mounted on the tower for such measurements.
Pattern optimization for the vertical polarization component, or
both vertical and horizontal polarization components is available
to improve the pattern circularity. Directionalizing this antenna is
possible and requires compliance with FCC regulations pertaining
to directional FM antennas. Antenna pattern measurement and
optimization is at additional cost.
BANDWIDTH CAPABILITY. The FML antenna has a low standing
wave ratio of .1 :1 or less, + 200 kHz per given channel with field
trimming. VSWR at antenna input, without field trimming is 1.1:1
for pole mounting atop a tower. VSWR at antenna input, without
field trimming, is 1.5:1 or less, when side mounted on a tower.
1
CIRCULARITY. The horizontally polarized radiation pattern is
omnidirectional when the antenna is pole mounted, and circularity
is typically ± 2 dB when the antenna is mounted on a 14 inch
diameter steel pole. When side mounted, the antenna pattern will
be affected by the structure.
DEICING NOT REQUIRED. The typical VSWR of the FML antenna
with 1/z inch of radial ice is 1.5:1, or less, thus almost totally
eliminating the need for deicers. Only in extremely cold mountainous environments experiencing several inches of radial ice on
antenna elements would the FML antenna encounter VSWR
problems.
CONSTRUCTION. The radiating element and support stem are of
brass tubular construction, using thick wall brass in the support
stem. This provides a rugged construction capable of survival
under severe weather extremes and with wind velocities up to 150
miles per hour (90 lbs. per square foot on flat members, 60 lbs. per
square foot on cylindrical members).
Each antenna is completely assembled and tuned to the customer's frequency at the factory. The antenna is also pressure tested
at that time in order to assure an antenna free of leaks.
The mounting brackets are supplied for uniform cross section
towers or steel poles. Brackets for mounting on tapered towers are
available at extra cost. All brackets and hardware are made of
stainless steel.
MODEL NUMBERS. The Harris model numbers for the low power
FML circularly polarized FM antenna are interpreted as follows:
FML -1E
=
bay
1
E =
FML -12C
12 = 12 bay
1
end fed
center fed
C =
FML LOW POWER CIRCULARLY POLARIZED FM ANTENNAS
POWER GAIN1
TYPE
FEMALE
TYPE
FEED
NO.
POWER
dB
FML-1E
FML -2E
0.4611
-3.3623
0 9971
-0
FML -3E
1.5588
1
FML -45
FML -4C
2 1322
3.2903
2.1322
3
FML -5E
FML -5C
2.7154
2.7154
43384
4
3384
FML -6E
FML -6C
3.3028
5
1888
33028
51888
FML -7E
FML -7C
38935
5.9034
FML -8E
FML -8C
4.4872
4 4872
6.5197
6.5197
END
CENTER
FML-9C
FML -10C
5.0826
5.6800
6.2783
7.0608
7.5435
6.8781
8.3747
7.4785
8.7381
8.0800
9.0741
FML -11C
FML -12C
FML -13C
FML -14C
3
8935
5
0128
9278
2903
9034
79785
END
END
END
POWER2
INPUT
50
OHM
CAPABIL-
INPUT
ITY
-ky'
-W'
1 -%'
9kW
9kW
9kW
1
1
END
CENTER
3 -'h"
END
OFF CENTER
3 -4L"
1
1
-W'
-sr"
END
CENTER
1
-+>,"
3
-Y."
END
OFF CENTER
3
-'4'
1
-41"
1
->k
9kW
12
kW
9kW
12
kW
9kW
12
kW
9kW
12
kW
9kW
CALCULATED
WEIGHT
[LBS.]
102
192
155
295
209
242
397
473
262
296
500
576
316
349
602
679
369
403
705
808
884
987
1089
1192
1294
1397
1500
-'4"
12
kW
OFF CENTER
3 -1/2'
12
CENTER
OFF CENTER
CENTER
OFF CENTER
CENTER
3 -'h"
12
3 -1"
12
3 -a4"
12
-W'
3-W'
12
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
510
563
617
670
724
777
3
12
[LBS.]
92
51
423
456
3
CALCU -3
LATED
WIND
LOAD
781
FOOTNOTES. 1. Horizontal and vertical power gain and dB gain are the same. 2. Power input capability up to 2,000 ft. above mean sea level. Derating
required above 2,000 ft. 3. Wind load based on 112 mph wind velocity (50/30 psf) and the wind blowing normal to the side of the antenna. Weight and wind load
calculations include brackets, interbay line and the transformer section. Calculations based on the frequency of 95 MHz.
CP -1.5M -180
(c_
Harris Corporation 1980
ADV. 519A PTD.
92
www.americanradiohistory.com
IN
U.S.A.
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANI)
INTOAMATION PHOC:F SSINC.
Center mounting eliminates pole interference
FMP
High power handling capability
SELF -SUPPORTING
CIRCULARLY POLARIZED
FM ANTENNA
Internal feed point to radiating element
Multi- station capability
Excellent bandwidth characteristics
No heaters, de -icers or radomes normally required
Rugged brass construction
Silver plated inner- conductor connectors
Radiused element tips to avoid corona problems
Stainless steel support brackets and hardware
The Harris FMP self- supporting circularly polarized FM antennas
feature unusually high power handling capabilities, excellent
bandwidth characteristics, and multi- station capability. Since the
elements are center mounted, interference from the support pole
is
eliminated
RADIATING ELEMENT. The radiating element is of brass construction, and has an outside diameter of 3 -1/21". The feed point is
completely internal, with a pressurized environment up to the feed
point. Each element is rated at 40 kW, the ratings limited only by
the average power handling capability of the 3 -1/e" rigid coaxial
line, which we have conservatively derated from 48 kW to 39 kW.
The rugged construction means these antennas will withstand the
most severe weather extremes and wind velocities up to 150 miles
per hour.
BANDWIDTH CAPABILITY. The FMP antenna has a low standing
wave ratio of 1.07:1 or less, _ 200 kHz per given channel with field
trimming. VSWR at antenna input without field trimming is 1.1:1 for
pole mounting atop a tower.
Due to the excellent bandwidth characteristics of the radiating
element, multi -station operation is possible under certain conditions. using a common antenna system. The necessary filtering
components are available from Harris for such diplexing or multiplexing operations. Stations having a frequency separation of up
to 4 MHz may be diplexed on a common antenna with some conditional limitations.
CIRCULARITY. The horizontal plane radiation pattern, for both
horizontal and vertical polarization components, is omnidirectional when the antenna is pole mounted atop a tower. The
pattern circularity for both polarization components is typically
2dB.
93
www.americanradiohistory.com
FMP ANTENNA DATA
DEICING. Deicers are not required in a normal environment. The VSWR is rated at
1.5:1 or less with 1/2-inch of radial ice; however, in field usage VSWR is typically 1.2:1
or less with 1/2 -inch of radial ice.
POWER GAIN1
ANTENNA MODELS. The Harris FMP self supporting antenna is designed for pole
mounting. The element feed stems are
3 -1/e ". Two 3 -1/2" rigid interbay transmission
lines are used, with one line on one side of
the pole and the second line on the opposite
side of the pole.
Normally, one to six bays are end fed, and
antennas of over six bays are center fed if an
even number of bays or fed at a point 1/2 -bay
below center if an odd number of bays.
Each antenna is supplied with a 6 -foot transformer section on the input. The input flange
is 50 ohm EIA with either 3 -1/2" or 61/e"
flange, or a 4 -1/s" 50 ohm flange is also available. All antennas are completely assembled and tuned to the customer's frequency
at the factory. Also, pressure testing is done
at that time to assure the customer of a leakf ree antenna, provided the antenna is properly installed by a qualified erector and is
free of damage.
MOUNTING. Stainless steel mounting
brackets and hardware are supplied for
steel poles. (The pole is not supplied.) Maximum pole deflection must not exceed 3/4"
per 10 feet of pole length.
DIMENSIONS. Each FMP half -element is
approximately 35 inches long and 18 inches
high. Weight is approximately 26 pounds
per half -element with line block.
MODEL NUMBERS. Because of the many
different models, it is helpful in ordering to
understand the Harris type numbers. The
first digit in the Harris type number following
the prefix "FMP -" signifies the number of
bays the antenna has. The letter "E" after
that digit refers to an end fed version, and
the letter "C" means the antenna is center
fed. The final digit in the type number
identifies the size of the female 50 ohm input, either 3 -11/2", or 4 -Ve" or 6 -1/4". See the
examples below.
FMP-1E3
FMP-7C6
= 1 bay
E = End Fed
3 = 31/2" Input
7 = 7
1
CP -1.5M -180
bays
C = Center Fed
6 = 61/4" Input
TYPE
NO.
FEMALE
POWER2
INPUT
50
OHM
CAPABIL-
CALCULATED
WEIGHT
[LBS.]
CALCU-3
LATED
WINDLOAD
POWER
dB
INPUT
ITY
FMP-1E3
FMP-1E4
FMP-1E6
0.4611
0.4611
0.4611
-3.3623
-3.3623
-3.3623
3-1h"
39 kW
185
4-1/s"
6-1h"
50kW
64kW
245
245
280
325
325
FMP-2E3
FMP-2E4
FMP-2E6
0.9971
0.9971
0.9971
-0.0128
-0.0128
-0.0128
335
395
395
518
563
563
FMP-3E3
FMP-3E4
FMP-3E6
1.5588
1.5588
1.5588
485
545
545
756
FMP-4E3
FMP-4E4
FMP-4E6
635
695
695
994
1039
1039
785
845
845
1232
1470
1515
[LBS.]
3-1/4"
39 kW
4-1/e"
50kW
6-1/2"
64 kW
1.9278
1.9278
1.9278
3-1/s"
4-1/e"
39 kW
50 kW
6-1/s"
64 kW
2.1332
2.1332
2.1332
3.2903
3.2903
3.2903
3-1/s"
4-1/4"
39 kW
50 kW
6-1/4"
64kW
FMP-5E3
FMP-5E4
FMP-5E6
2.7154
2.7154
2.7154
4.3384
4.3384
4.3384
3-1h"
4-1/s"
39kW
50kW
6-Ve"
64 kW
FMP-6E3
FMP-6E4
FMP-6E6
3.3028
3.3028
3.3028
5.1888
5.1888
5.1888
3-1/e"
39 kW
4-%e"
50kW
6-1/e"
64 kW
935
995
995
FMP-7C3
FMP-7C4
FMP-7C6
3.8935
3.8935
3.8935
5.9034
5.9034
5.9034
3-Vs"
39 kW
50 kW
64 kW
1085
1145
1145
1691
FMP-8C3
FMP-8C4
FMP-8C6
4.4872
4.4872
4.4872
6.5197
6.5197
6.5197
3-1/4"
6-1/2"
39 kW
50 kW
64 kW
1235
1295
1295
1929
1974
1974
FMP-9C3
FMP-9C4
FMP-9C6
5.0826
5.0826
5.0826
7.0608
7.0608
7.0608
3-1h"
4-1h"
6-Ve"
39 kW
50 kW
64 kW
1385
1445
1445
2167
2212
2212
FMP-10C3
FMP-10C4
FMP-10C6
5.6800
5.6800
5.6800
7.5435
7.5435
7.5435
3-1/4"
4-1/e"
39 kW
50 kW
6-1/e"
64kW
1535
1595
1595
2405
2450
2450
FMP-11C3
FMP-11C4
FMP-11C6
6.2783
6.2783
6.2783
7.9785
7.9785
7.9785
3-1h"
39kW
50kW
64kW
1685
1745
1745
2643
2688
2688
FMP-12C3
FMP-12C4
FMP-12C6
6.8781
6.8781
6.8781
8.3747
8.3747
8.3747
3-1/4"
4-1/4"
39kW
50kW
6-1h"
64 kW
1835
1895
1895
2880
2925
2925
4-1/e"
6-1/e"
4-1/2"
4-1/s"
6-1/s"
801
801
1277
1277
1515
1736
1736
FOOTNOTES
1. Horizontal and vertical power gain and dB gain are the same. 2. Power input capability up to 2,000 ft.
above mean sea level. Derating required above 2,000 ft. 3. Windload based on 50/33 PSF. 112 m.p.h.
actual wind velocity. NOTE: Brackets included in weight and windload calculations.
© Harris Corporation 1980
ADV. 505A PTD. IN U.S.A.
94
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
Any number of elements from one to sixteen may be utilized,
providing maximum flexibility in the selection of power gain for a
particular installation. Antennas with null fill, beam tilt, and special
horizontal to vertical power splits (other than 50/50) are available.
Radomes or deicers are available for climates that experience
icing conditions.
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION
A
INFORMATION PROCE SSIN(,
FMS
DUAL -CYCLOID
CIRCULARLY
POLARIZED
FM ANTENNA
The Dual -Cycloid consists of two basic parts: (1) the radiating
element and, (2) interconnecting transmission line sections. The
radiating elements in an array are all identical electrically and
mechanically. Utilizing the effective ring design of the Cycloid as
the basic unit, two vertical elements have replaced the fixed end
plates; the rear terminal block is now a matching balun mating the
antenna impedance to the interconnecting transmission line.
The vertical sections have adjustable caps for a fine adjustment of
the horizontal /vertical radiation ratio which is set at the factory.
Corona suppression balls are included as a standard item. Designed for rugged trouble -free operation, all antenna elements are
fabricated of a durable weather resistant brass alloy with excellent
electrical properties.
Antenna elements are normally spaced one wave length apart with
interconnecting transmission line sections and feed through a
common system input termination of 50 ohms, which is a standard
31/e" EIA female flange.
The Harris Dual -Cycloid Type FMS antenna transmits circular
polarization as authorized by FCC rules and regulations. The station's effective radiated power will still be determined by the signal
radiated in the horizontal plane. This is determined by the antenna
gain (see table) in the horizontal plane multiplied by the power
input to the antenna.
CIRCULARITY. Both the horizontal and vertical radiation pattern
of the Dual- Cycloid antenna have been measured within ± 2dB in
free space. When side mounted, the antenna pattern will be somewhat affected by the supporting structure.
Supplied on a standard 3V8" EIA line, the antenna is complete with
mounting brackets for standard AM and FM towers.
95
www.americanradiohistory.com
FEED POINT. Antennas of 8 bays or less are usually end fed; a 6
foot matching transformer is connected to the bottom bay. Antennas of 9 bays or more are center fed if an even number of bays, or
at a point one -half way below the antenna center if an odd number
of bays; a 10 foot matching transformer is connected to an elbow
attached to the center feed tee.
MOUNTING. The antenna is mounted on a specially designed
stainless steel supporting bracket, fabricated to mate with the
tower in a mounting arrangement specified by the purchaser. Antennas are usually mounted on the leg or tower face of a guyed or
self supporting tower. A special quotation will be made for
brackets on TV towers and non -standard radiators and poles.
Radomes available
for FMS Antenna
Order Type FMS -(X) (X indicates number of bays required)
FMS DUAL -CYCLOID SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE: Factory tuned to one frequency in the 88 to 108
MHz band
POLARIZATION: Circular, clockwise.
POWER GAIN: See table below. Referred to a half -wave dipole in free
INPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 ohms.
INPUT CONNECTION: 31/2 inch. 50 ohm EIA female flange.
POWER INPUT RATING: Approximately 10 kW per bay (see table).
WINDLOAD: 50 lbs per square foot for flat surfaces, 33 lbs per square foot
for cylindrical surfaces. Figures available for other wind loading.
DIMENSIONS: (One bay) 30 in. high x 351/2 in. typical.
FEED POINT: One to eight bays, end fed. Nine bays and over, center fed
with even number of bays. or at a point '/2 bay below center with odd
number of bays.
space.
AZIMUTHAL PATTERN: Circular ± 2.0 dB
polarization: same for vertical polarization.
in
free space for horizontal
VSWR AT INPUT (Without field trimming): Top mounting, 1.1 :1 or better.
Side mounting, 1.5:1 or better.
VSWR AT INPUT (With field trimming): Top or side mounting, 1.1
or
1
better over
100 kHz.
FMS DUAL -CYCLOID ANTENNA
POWER GAIN [In each polarization]
TYPE
NO.
FMS -1
FMS -2
FMS -3
FMS -4
FMS -5
FMS -6
FMS -7
FMS -8
FMS -9
FMS -11
FMS -12
FMS -13
FMS -14
FMS -15
FMS -16
APPROX.
RATING
LENGTH
FT.2
POWER
dB
FIELD1
KW
0.4611
0.9971
1.5588
-3.3623
-0.0128
1.9278
10
2.1332
2.7154
3.3028
3.8935
4.4872
3.2903
4.3384
5.1888
5.9034
6.5197
7.0608
7.5435
0.6790
0.9985
1.2485
.4605
5.0826
5.6800
6.2783
6.8781
7.4785
8.0800
8.6818
9.2846
FMS -10
INPUT
POWER
-
WEIGHT
[INCL.
BRACKETS]
LBS.3
WIND LOAD
WIND LOAD
LBS.4
W /RADOMES
LBS.4
80
133
259
20
10
176
296
547
30
20
262
458
835
1
40
30
348
620
1123
1.6478
40
40
434
783
1411
1.8174
40
50
520
945
1699
1.9732
40
60
606
1108
1987
40
70
692
1270
2275
40
80
799
1506
40
90
885
1668
40
100
971
1831
40
110
1057
1993
40
120
1143
40
130
1229
2156
2318
9.3861
2.1183
2.2545
2.3833
2.5057
2.6226
2.7347
2.8425
2.9465
40
140
1315
9.6776
3.0471
40
150
1401
2636
2924
3212
3500
3788
4076
4364
4652
7.9785
8.3747
8.7381
9.0741
2480
2643
FOOTNOTES
To obtain the effective free space field intensity at one mile in my /m for one kilowatt antenna input power, multiply field gain by 137.6.
2. When determining coax
line length on end feed antenna, add 10' to allow for matching stub. When determining coax line lengths on center feed antenna, termination will be 6' below
center due to matching stub. 3. Radome weight is 20 lbs. additional per bay. Heaters are not included in weights given. Heater weight, including junction boxes
and interbay cable is 7 lbs. additional per bay. Heater elements replaceable in the field. 4. Based on 50 psf wind pressure on flat surfaces, 33 psf on cylindrical
surfaces (112 mph actual wind velocity). Antenna will withstand velocities up to 150 mph.
1.
EQUIPMENT FURNISHED: Antenna elements as ordered; antenna mounting hardware (specify tower manufacturer and type); interconnecting
rigid coax transmission line; standard 3'/e inch EIA female flange.
CP -1.5M -180
:ç
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT: Deicer system, 300 watts or 500 watts per
bay, 115 volts or 230 bolts, 50/60 Hz...complete with conduit boxes and
RF shielded interbay wiring harness.
Harris Corporation 1980
ADV 463A PTD. IN U.S.A.
96
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
o
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCE551N0
DUAL -CYCLOID II
DUAL -CYCLOID III
Circularly Polarized
FM Antennas
DUAL -CYCLOID II. Harris' Dual -Cycloid II circularly polarized FM
antenna provides all of the electrical advantages of the Dual Cycloid, in a lighter weight, low silhouette design for minimum
windloading. The antenna features center feed for medium power
handling capabilities -from four to twelve bays handle transmitter
powers through 10 kilowatts. Antenna elements are normally
spaced one wavelength apart with interconnecting transmission
line sections and feed through a common antenna system input
termination of 50 ohms, with a standard 31h inch EIA female
flange.
All antenna elements are fabricated of a durable, weather resistant brass alloy. Null fill and beam tilt are available. Standard
stainless steel brackets for mounting the antenna on the tower leg
are included with the antenna. Optional deicers are available,
consisting of two 150 -watt heating elements per bay, for either 115
volts or 230 volts, as specified. The heater elements are replaceable in the field. Junction boxes and shielded interbay wiring is
included. Heater weight including junction boxes and interbay
cable, is 6 lbs. additional per bay. Order type FMC -(X) B (X indicates number of bays).
FMC -[X] B SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE: Factory tuned to one specific frequency in the 88 to
108 MHz band.
POLARIZATION: Circular, clockwise.
FREE SPACE PATTERN: Horizontal component circular ± 2 dB. Vertical
component circular ± 2 dB.
VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL POWER RATIO: Fixed at 50/50.
VSWR: 1.2 to or better ± 200 kHz as tuned at the factory. VSWR when
tower mounted 1.5 to or better ± 200 kHz as tuned at the factory. VSWR
when tower mounted 1.5 to or better ± 200 kHz. Capable of adjustment
1.1 to ± 100 kHz with field tuning.
POWER GAIN: Horizontal polarization: see table. Vertical polarization:
see table. Referred to a half wave dipole in free space.
POWER INPUT RATING: Maximum of 12 kW.
INPUT CONNECTION: 3,/e" EIA female flange, 50 ohm.
WINDLOAD: Designed for 50 pst for flat surfaces, 33 psf for cylindrical
surfaces.
WEIGHT: Single bay 24 lbs., less brackets. Zvi" interbay coaxial line
weighs approximately 13 lbs. per section.
DIMENSIONS: Single bay height approximately 30 ". Length
approximately 27 ".
1
1
1
1
DUAL -CYCLOID III. Designed for lower power stations, Harris'
Dual -Cycloid III circularly polarized FM antenna is an end -fed
version of the Dual -Cycloid II
is lighter in weight, and has less
windloading. From one to eight bays handle transmitter powers
through 7.5 kilowatts.
-it
The antenna consists of 146 -inch transmission line with individual
bays separated by approximately one wavelength at the operating
frequency. All antenna elements are fabricated of durable,
weather- resistant brass alloy. Null fill and beam tilt are not available on the Dual -Cycloid Ill.
Deicers are available, they consist of two 150 -watt or 300 -watt
heating elements per bay for either 115 volts or 230 volts, as
specified. Junction boxes and shielded interbay wiring harness are
included. These elements are factory installed, and are replaceable
in the field. Heater weight, including junction boxes and interbay
cable, is 6 lbs. Standard stainless steel brackets for mounting the
antenna on the tower leg are included with the antenna. Order type
FMC -(X)A (X indicates the number of bays required).
FMC -[X] A SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE: Factory tuned to one specific frequency in the 88 108 MHz band.
POLARIZATION: Circular, clockwise.
FREE SPACE PATTERN: Horizontal component circular ± 2 dB. Vertical
component circular ± 2 dB.
VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL RATIO: Fixed at 50/50.
VSWR: 1.2 to or better + 200 kHz as tuned at the factory. VSWR when
tower mounted 1.5 to or better ± 200 kHz. Capable of adjustment to 1.1
to ± 100 kHz with field tuning.
POWER GAIN: Horizontal polarization: see table. Vertical polarization:
see table. Referred to a half wave dipole in free space.
POWER INPUT RATING: Maximum of 7.5 kW for three to eight bays. 3 kW
for single bay, 6 kW for two bays.
INPUT CONNECTION: A six foot transformer section is attached to the
bottom bay of each antenna system which has a 11/4" 50 ohm EIA female
connector.
WINDLOAD: Designed for 50 psf for flat surfaces, 33 pst for cylindrical
surfaces.
WEIGHT: Single bay 24 lbs., less brackets. Zvi" interbay coaxial line
weighs approximately 13 lbs. per section.
DIMENSIONS:
Single bay height approximately 30 ".
Length
approximately 27 ".
1
1
1
97
www.americanradiohistory.com
DUAL -CYCLOID II
DUAL -CYCLOID III
WIND -3
POWER GAIN
1
TYPE
NO.
FMC -4B
FMC -5B
FMC -6B
FMC -7B
FMC -8B
FMC -9B
FMC -10B
INPUT
POWER
2.1332
2.7154
3.3028
3.8935
4.4872
5.0826
FMC -115
5.6800
6.2783
FMC -12B
6.8781
dB
FIELD
[kW]
WIND -3
LOAD
WIND -3 W /RAD-
POWER
WT.2
LOAD
OMES
[LBS.] [LBS.]
(LBS.)
LOAD
POWER GAIN1
TYPE
POWER
12
181
365
764
12
218
442
941
FMC -1A
0.4661
5.1888 1.8174
5.9034 1.9732
12
255
520
1118
FMC -2A
12
292
597
1296
FMC -3A
0.9971
1.5588
6.5197
7.0608
7.5435
7.9785
12
329
675
1473
FMC -4A
1650
FMC -5A
366
12
752
12
403
830
1828
FMC -6A
12
440
907
2005
FMC -7A
12
447
985
2182
FMC -8A
WT.2
INPUT
NO.
3.2903 1.4605
4.3384 1.6478
2.1183
2.2545
2.3833
2.5057
8.3747 2.6226
WIND-3 w /RAD-
POWER
2.1332
2.7154
3.3028
3.8935
4.4872
dB
FIELD
-3.36230.6790
-0.0128 0.9985
[kW]
LOAD
[LBS.] [LBS.]
ONES
(LBS.)
3
32
61
161
6
69
139
338
1.9278 1.2485
7 5
106
216
515
1.4605
7.5
143
294
693
1.6478
7.5
180
371
870
1.8174
7.5
217
449
1047
1.9732
7.5
254
526
1224
2.1183
7.5
291
604
1402
3.2903
4.3384
5.1888
5.9034
6.5197
FOOTNOTES. 1. Power gain in each polarization. To obtain effective free space field intensity at one mile MV /M for one k lowatt an enna power, mu tiply field
gain by 137.6. 2. Weights given include brackets, interbay transmission line and transformer section (center fed tee section and elbow weight also included in
Dual -Cycloid III weight). Weight per radome is 18 lbs. for Dual -Cycloid II and 18 lbs. for Dual -Cycloid III (should be mutt plied times the number of bays). 3.
Windload based on 50 psf on flat surfaces and 33 psf for cylindrical surfaces (actual wind velocity 112 mph). Computed for 100 MHz antenna with mounting
brackets but less heater junction boxes and heater cables.
DUAL -CYCLOID II- Length of 4 bay antenna is approximately 30 feet. To determine the length of other antennas, add 10 feet per additional bay. Dual- Cycloid II
antennas fed at center if an even number of bays, or at a point 1 -bay below antenna center if an odd number of bays. A 10-ft. matching transformer is attached to
an elbow attached to the center feed tee.
DUAL -CYCLOID III- Length of 2 bay antenna
coax length, add six feet to antenna length.
is
approximately
10 feet. To
determine length of other antennas, add
feet per additional bay. When determining
10
EDUCATIONAL FM ANTENNAS
The Harris FM -11 series of FM antennas uses lightweight horizontally polarized ring type radiators having a horizontal plane radiation pattern that is essentially omni -directional. The FM -11 uses a
single ring element; the FM -22 uses two ring elements; the FM -33
uses three elements; and, the FM -44 uses four ring elements.
Antennas having more than one ring element use a vertical spacing of one wavelength between elements.
The antennas are designed for mounting on a pipe or pole having
an outside diameter of 2 to 21/2 inches. Two "U" bolts are provided
on each antenna element for mounting. The mounting pole is not
supplied, but can be provided at additional cost, as can the proper
coaxial cable.
FM -11 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE: Factory tuned to one specific frequency in the
88 -108 MHz band.
POLARIZATION: Horizontal.
TYPICAL PATTERN WHEN MOUNTED ON SMALL STEEL POLE: Horizontal plane pattern circularity of approximately ± 3 dB.
TYPICAL VSWR: 1.5 to 1, or less, _+ 1.2 MHz.
INPUT CONNECTOR: Type UHF female which mates with the type UHF
male (PL -259 or 83.1 SP).
WINDLOAD CALCULATION: Based on 50 lbs. /sq. ft. for flat surfaces, 33
lbs. /sq. ft. for cylindrical surfaces (wind velocity of 112 miles per hour).
DIMENSIONS: Single bay height approximately 9 ". Length approximately
23 ". Two bay antenna 11 ft. high; 3 bay is 22 ft.; 4 bay is 33 ft.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE
NO.
FM -11
FM-11 A Single ring antenna
710 -0102 -000
FM -22A 2 -ring
FM -33A 3 -ring antenna
710- 0103 -000
710 -0201 -000
FM -44A 4 -ring antenna
710 -0202 -000
antenna
FM11 SERIES
FM-22
FM -33
FM -44
POWER GAIN
POWER
POWER
dB
FIELD
RATING
[WATTS]
0.80
1.80
2.75
3.72
-0.969
2.55
4.39
0.894
1.342
1.658
1.929
CP -1.5M -180
© Harris Corporation
5.70
WINDWT.
LOAD
[LBS.]
[LBS.]
500
7.5
800
16.5
800
27.5
196
800
36
257
52.5
117
ADV. 464A PTD. IN U.S.A.
1980
98
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
No de -icing
conditions
required
under normal
environmental
Internal feed point to radiating element
Pattern tested
DIRECTIONAL DUAL
POLARIZED
FM ANTENNA
Field trimming normally not required
High power handling capability
Rugged brass construction
. Stainless steel support brackets
. Wide bandwidth characteristics
99
Harris' FMD -(X) is a directional dual polarized FM antenna
designed for pole mounting. It is available with up to eight bays
and with either 1- 5/9 inch or 3- ve inch EIA 50 ohm female input.
The "X" in the type number indicates the number of bays. The
suffix "A" following the complete type number signifies 1- 5/8 "
input and the suffix "B" indicates 3 -'fie " input. (Example
FMD-4A is a 4 -bay antenna with 1- 5 " input).
-
POWER. The maximum power input
capability for the "A" series is 12 kilowatts. The maximum power
input capability for the "B" series is 20 kilowatts for a single
bay, and 40 kilowatts for two (2) through eight (8) bays.
UP TO 40 KW INPUT
The interbay lines use 3- v8 inch rigid, with three such lines
used between bays, two for the horizontal element feeds and
one for the vertical element feeds. A combiner, for combining
the three transmission line feeds, is used below the bottom bay.
A six foot transformer section is used immediately below this
combiner.
BROADBAND DIPOLE ELEMENTS. The antenna uses broadband 3- 'le " diameter dipole elements, and these will not require
deicing under normal environmental conditions. Each bay level
normally uses two driven horizontal elements, one horizontal
parasitic reflector and one driven vertical element. In some
cases, vertical parasitic elements may be used on each bay for
the purpose of further shaping the vertical polarization
component.
Heaters are not normally required for antenna deicing purposes
due to the excellent bandwidth characteristics exhibited by the
antenna. Typically, as measured between 1.5:1 VSWR points,
the bandwidth is in the region of 5 to 7 MHz. As a result, the
antenna could probably experience icing of up to 3/4 inch
thickness without the VSWR going above 1 .5:1
.
HARRIS
OD
ANTENNA SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION. The antenna system Is
designed to be pressurized, using dry air or dry nitrogen, and the
system should be purged and then pressurized to a positive
pressure of approximately 2 to 5 pounds per square inch (0.14 to
0.35 kilograms per square centimeter) immediately following
installation.
CUSTOM MOUNTING POLE. The FMD antenna is supplied with
a custom matching pole, thereby permitting the support pole to
be drop shipped directly to the customer. The directional
antenna may be purchased without the pole only on a special
quotation basis, in which case there will be an added
engineering charge made, and the cost of the Harris pole
deducted from this total price. The pole is a hot dip galvanized
pedestal mount, with removable step bolts. For poles 30 feet or
more in length the minimum wall thickness is 0.500 inch. A plate
is provided on the top of the pole as a support for a beacon.
Should a buried pole support be desired, specific requirements
will be needed fora special price quotation.
ANTENNAS PATTERNED AT FACTORY. Each Harris FMD
directional antenna is patterned on a test range, not at the
customer's site. A single bay of the antenna (in accordance with
FCC pattern test requirements) is mounted on a pole identical
(or electrically equivalent) to that on which the antenna is to be
finally installed. If the customer supplies his own pole, then
complete data on the pole must be submitted for final pattern
testing.
The antenna is patterned with the test pole erected vertically on
a turntable on the antenna range, and measurements made in
the xy, or horizontal plane, for both the horizontal and vertical
polarization components. Normally, the antenna bay being
patterned is operated in the transmitting mode. A special dipole
IIMPORYIATION 0.040,1013
100
www.americanradiohistory.com
receiving antenna, located a sufficient distance away, is used
with its output feeding an accurate field intensity meter, and the
pattern of the antenna plotted as the test pole is rotated.
Patterns for each of the two polarization components are plotted
separately. Adjustments are made to the antenna bay in order to
achieve a suitable antenna radiation pattern.
o
The complete antenna is assembled on a steel pole and carefully
tuned at the factory. As a result, field trimming should normally
not be required.
The final pattern achieved may be expected to differ slightly
from the initial pattern proposed, so it may be necessary to file
application to modify the construction permit to comply with
the exact measured pattern, which the customer will receive
upon the completion of the antenna pattern tests.
an
Following the completion of the final patterning of the antenna,
Harris will provice the station, and/or its consultant, with the
final measured antenna radiation pattern, calculated gain data,
and the details of the antenna pattern measurement procedure.
This final data is then submitted by the station to the FCC or
other broadcasting authority.
ORDERING INFORMATION. Orders for the Harris Dual Polarized
Directional FM Antenna should specify the desired true azimuth
orientation, maximum ERP permitted, radiated power limitations and their true orientation, transmission line efficiency (or
specify the type of transmission line and its length), and the
transmitter power output capability. Such antenna pattern
requirements are normally specified by the stations'sconsultant.
Ideally, a copy of the FCC construction permit should be
supplied so that the manufacturer can assure full compliance
with the requirements of such authorization relative to the
antenna.
The pattern shown above is that of a three -bay Harris FMD-3 Dual
Polarized Directional FM Antenna designed specifically for the 107.7
MHz frequency.
HARRIS
101
i
Supporting Pole
Horizontal
Reflector
tat
Horizontal
Radiating
Element
Radiating
13/4" x 19"
[Diameter]
Element
Drilled [12]
Vertical
1 Ve
Radiating
-
" Diameter Holes
Element
POLE MOUNTING FLANGE
For Harris Dual Polarized
Directional FM Antenna
[Does not apply to FMD -1A or 1 B]
HARRIS FMD DUAL POLARIZED
DIRECTIONAL FM ANTENNA -TOP VIEW
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DATA
HARRIS
TYPE
NO.
INPUT
POWER
RATING
KW
FMD-1A
FMD-1B
12
20
FMD -2A
FMD -2B
12
40
FMD-3A
FMD-3B
12
FMD-4A
FMD-4B
12
40
FMD-5A
FMD -5B
FMD -6A
FMD -6B
12
40
FMD-7A
FMD -7B
12
40
1
FMD -8A
FMD -8B
12
40
1aí "
FEMALE
INPUT
FLANGE
FT
PSF]
LBS
OVERTURNING
MOMENT
FT LBS
BOLT
CIRCLE
DIAMETER
INCHES
50/33
3'/e
"
"
20
20
606
626
796
832
9595
10000
16
16
9
9
mi
31/4
"
"
30
30
2240
2260
1821
1856
30024
30593
21
21
17
17
eí "
3'/e "
40
40
2994
3014
2557
2593
54917
55682
26
26
17
17
31/4
"
"
50
50
4245
4265
89308
90254
31
31
17
17
1 1/2
"
62
62
5901
5921
3490
3526
4680
4716
153210
154407
38
17
38
17
17
17
1
46
1
1
40
POLE
LENGTH
WEIGHT
POLE
AND
ANTENNA
LBS
HEIGHT
ELECTRICAL
CENTER
ABOVE
TOWER TOP
FT
TOTAL
WIND LOAD
[BASED ON
1 e
3'/e "
12
40
1
1
"
72
72
7956
7976
5523
5559
208204
209581
43
43
5/.
"
82
82
9250
9270
6350
6386
271315
272872
48
48
17
17
92
92
11305
11325
7192
7227
343159
344847
53
53
17
17
3'/e "
3'/e "
3'1 "
MAXIMUM POWER GAIN FOR TYPICAL PATTERNS 1 -4 ON PREVIOUS PAGES
HARRIS
TYPE
NO.
FMD-(1A or 1B)
FMD -(2A or 2B)
FMD -(3A or 3B)
FMD -(4A or 4B)
FMD -(5A or 5B)
FMD -(6A or 6B)
FMD -(7A or 7B)
FMD -(8A or 86)
PATTERN
PATTERN 4
PATTERN 3
PATTERN 2
1
HORIZ.
VERT.
HORIZ.
VERT.
HORIZ.
VERT.
HORIZ.
VERT.
0.81
0.72
1.53
2.39
0.79
1.70
2.64
0.70
1.49
2.33
0.76
1.63
2.54
0.70
1.50
2.34
0.72
1.54
2.39
0.69
1.47
2.29
3.26
4.14
5.03
5.92
6.82
3.61
4.58
5.56
6.55
7.55
3.18
4.03
4.90
5.77
6.64
3.47
4.40
5.35
6.29
7.25
3.19
4.05
4.92
5.79
6.67
3.26
4.14
5.03
5.92
6.82
3.13
3.98
4.83
5.68
6.54
1.74
2.71
3.70
4.71
5.71
6.73
7.75
NOTE: The above power gain figures are approximate only, but are useful as a guide in determining the number of bays required. The gain figures will vary
with the pattern shape, and the exact gain figures are determined when the final antenna pattern is achieved.
The power gain for the vertical polarization component Is less thanthe horizontal polarization component since it will differ a bit in shape, and in addition,
the vertically polarized component can not exceed the horizontally polarized component at any azimuth.
CP -1.5M -180
©
ADV. 468A PTD. IN U.S.A.
Harris Corporation 1980
102
www.americanradiohistory.com
FM
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMERS
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS ANO
INFORMATION HANDLING
FM
ANTENNA
ACCESSORIES
. .a
®
e
r
i
A...
..
O'
..m.
III
..,,,....,oso..... pI
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA HEATER
CONTROL SYSTEM
Fully automated control of FM, TV and other types of electrically
operated broadcast and communications antenna heater
systems. Suitable alarms indicate visually and aurally existing
weather conditions and register partial and total heater failure.
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY: 88 to 108 MHz. Tuned to the station's FM carrier
frequency at the factory.
VSWR: (10 kW unit) Less than 1.05 to at the FM station frequency, ±
1.0 MHz when terminated in a matched 50 ohm load. (25 kW unit) Less
than 1.05 to
at the FM station frequency, ± 0.5 MHz when
terminated In a matched 50 ohm load.
INSERTION LOSS: (10 kW unit) Less than 0.05 dB. (25 kW unit) 0.10 dB
or less.
INPUT: (10 kW unit) 31/4" EIA 50 ohm captive male swivel flange. (25 kW
unit)3 '/a" EIA 50 ohm male flange.
OUTPUT: (10 kW unit) 15A " EIA 50 ohm female swivel flange. (25 kW
" EIA 50 ohm male flange ( will mate with a 3Ve " EIA 50 ohm
unit)3
female flange).
WEIGHT: (10 kW unit) Approx. 105 lbs. (25 kW unit) 255 lbs.
FLANGE TO FLANGE LENGTH: (10 kW unit) 67 to 73 inches, depending
on the FM frequency. (25 kW unit) 44 inches.
MOUNTING: (10 kW unit) In a cradle supplied. The cradle is fitted with a
2 -inch pipe flange on the bottom. Two stainless steel straps secure
the tank to the cradle. The 2 -Inch mounting pipe is not supplied with
the transformer. (25 kW unit)Separate 3 -Inch pipe flange on bottom.
Two stainless steel straps secure tank to cradle.
PRESSURIZATION: Designed for use in a pressurized system with gas
passing through the unit.
1
1
POWER INPUT: 115 VAC, 60 Hz.
INPUTS: Temperature sensors; precipitation sensor; heater failure
sensor.
INDICATORS: Rain, freeze, low temperature, heaters, heater fail.
Selectable aural &arm for any or all of those listed.
MOUNTING: Standard 31/4" x 19" rack panel. 8 Inches deep.
OPTIONS: 12 VDC function outputs for telemetering status data. Model
2570 -CA calibration box. Power contactors and enclosures.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Antenna Heater Control System
The FM isolation transformer is designed to couple the FM
power across the base insulator of a transmitting tower used
jointly as an AM and FM radiator without introducing
objectionable mismatch into the FM antenna feed line. An
isolation transformer is especially desirable for feeding high
impedance AM radiators, or AM radiators which are part of an
AM directional antenna system, which might be adversely
affected by a "bazooka" type isolation system. Isolation
transformers are available from Harris in 10 kW and 25 kW
models (25 kW model not pictured).
710- 0139 -000
r
1
ORDERING INFORMATION
REPLACEMENT ANTENNA HEATER ELEMENTS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Dual -Cycloid Antennas [2 elements per bay]
Dual -Cycloid II [2 elements per bay]
710- 0138 -000
Cycloid Antenna [2 elements per bay]
710-0138-000
710- 0137 -000
Isolation Transformer, standard 1 S/e " EIA flanges, adjusted
to customer's operating frequency at the factory. For use with a
maximum transmitter power of 10 kW
820- 1027 -000
10 kW FM Isolation Transformer, same as above except supplied with
11/4 "- 31/2 " adapters. Input and output 3' /a " EIA 50 ohm female
10 kW FM
820 -1028 -000
Isolation Transformer, standard 3'/a " EIA flanges, adjusted to
customer's operating frequency at the factory. For use with a
maximum transmitter power of 25 kW
820 -0444 -000
25 kW FM
CP- 5M-776
ADV 465 PTD IN
U
S
A
103
www.americanradiohistory.com
relevant to your particular service need. Over the telephone our Field
Service engineer will listen to your difficulties and walk you through the
proper trouble- shooting steps in order to isolate the problem. Once the
difficulties are located, the representative will contact the Parts Department to order the necessary parts while you are still on the phone -thus
assuring that the order has been placed and will be shipped on the next
available transportation.
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
.VCNYMTON
NoQ.l10
If the equipment difficulty you are experiencing has left you ott -air or in
an emergency condition, dial the 222 -8200 number and state plainly that
you are experiencing an EMERGENCY. The word EMERGENCY will im-
mediately enter your problem and parts requirement upon the
billboard type system designed by the
Emergency Service Board
Harris Service Department to provide priority service to emergency
customers. Once you are listed on "the Board" service department personnel go directly to work tracking the needed parts and supplies; the
job is not considered completed until the equipment is in your hands and
you have confirmed its arrival.
SERVICE
AND
TRAINING
-a
While every effort is made to handle emergencies over the phone and
eliminate costly customer expenses, a team of Field Service Engineers in
Quincy and others strategically located across the country are available
to make station visits and are qualified and equipped to handle
emergencies in the field promptly and accurately.
PARTS DEPARTMENT. Although the Harris Parts Department works
closely with Field Services, it is also capable of direct customer interaction. If you are knowledgeable of your equipment problems and wish to
order a repair part, call the (217) 222 -8200 number and request the
PARTS DEPARTMENT. One of our Parts Department personnel will take
your order and immediately confirm the parts availability from our inventory. A large parts inventory coupled with a main warehouse inventory
makes it possible for Harris to offer you 24 hour receipt of your order for
over 90% of all requests.
CUSTOMER TRAINING. Because the technology of broadcast equipment is advancing at an increasingly rapid rate, many station personnel
are seeking ways to stay abreast with these changes. Knowledge acquired even a few years ago may not be sufficient now to ensure proper
operation and maintenance of current equipment. Consequently, participation in a program of continuous technical updating is a high priority
objective of many Broadcast technical staffs. Such participation can help
considerably in maximizing equipment performance and reliability.
Harris' dedication to producing highest quality, state -of- the -art broadcast products is rivaled only by its commitment to offer complete
customer service, both on a routine basis and in emergencies. Striving
to eliminate the expense and inconvenience of equipment repairs and
down time. Harris has assembled a dedicated team of qualified personnel to staff its non -stop, three -fold service department consisting of Field
Services, Parts Department, and Customer Training.
FIELD SERVICE DEPARTMENT. Although technical service availability
represents a value not always totally appreciated, Harris' 24 hours, 7
days a week Field Service Department has been many customer's salvation through the years. By dialing (217) 222 -8200 and asking for the
FIELD SERVICE DEPARTMENT you will be put in contact with a
representative who has been specially trained in the product information
Several sources of update training are available and one of the most
productive is the Harris broadcast seminar program conducted in
Quincy. Illinois. Here instructors with years of formal teaching experience coupled with vast broadcast electronics knowledge conduct
courses on all major equipment manufactured by the Harris Broadcast
Products Division.
In order to maximize the benefits of these courses, circuit analysis
presentations are made with an emphasis on understanding state -ofthe -art component and system applications in present day equipment.
Thorough conceptual sessions are conducted during the applicable
seminar on such Harris features as Pulse Duration Modulation (PDM);
Progressive Series Modulation (PSM); Intermediate Frequency (IF)
Modulation; Digitally Synthesized Modulation (DSM); etc. As a preventative measure, a portion of each seminar addresses specific
maintenance and troubleshooting techniques.
For more information on the types of training courses offered, the cost.
and time and place of each seminar, call (217) 222 -8200 and request the
CUSTOMER TRAINING DEPARTMENT.
ADV. 558 PTD. IN U.S.A.
JK-2M-180
104
www.americanradiohistory.com
rri
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Cyclotran incorporates Harris' circularly polarized CPV antenna and 100 -kW dual TVD -100H high band transmitter
Transmitter and antenna designs eliminate need for new
transmitter building and antenna tower
CYCLOTRAN
SYSTEM
Top mount CPV antenna offers tower loading comparable to
Batwing and traveling wave antennas
FOR
CIRCULARLY POLARIZED
TELEVISION SIGNAL
TRANSMISSION
CPV also features excellent axial ratio, high power handling
capabilities
TVD -100H transmitter is very compact- occupies about the
same floor space as existing 50 -kW transmitters
Dual 100 -kW transmitter consists of two TV -50H, 50 -kW
transmitters operating in parallel -each featuring solid state IPA and employing only 3 tubes
105
www.americanradiohistory.com
the most
efficient,
most economical way
to enjoy
the benefits
of circularly polarized
television
i
broadcasting...
Harris'
CYCLOTR AN'
SYSTEM
Now, with Harris' development of
a
total concept for circularly polarized
TV signal transmission, CP really
comes of age. This technological
which
we
call
breakthrough,
"Cyclotran" ( "Cyclo" for circular,
Aran" for transmission), is the first
system designed specifically for television CP applications. It incorporates the Harris TVD -100H, 100 kilowatt dual high band transmitter
and the
fers the
pictures
proved
Harris CPV antenna, and ofpotential for sharper, clearer
through ghost reduction, imsignal -to -noise ratios, and
better fringe area coverage. Even 4
with horizontal receiving antennas,
fringe area coverage will improve and
106
www.americanradiohistory.com
Harris' first development in TV circular polarization was the Cavity
Backed Radiator (CBR) antenna,
which was introduced in 1976. The
CBR was designed to allow TV stations to broadcast a horizontally
polarized signal until CP was
approved -then the same antenna
could be used for circular polarization
once approval came from the FCC.
practical improvement in signal -tonoise ratios may occur.
a
Cyclotran also offers the most
economical way to achieve circular
polarization!
As CP requires both a new antenna
and increased transmitter power, one
of Harris', and broadcasters', primary
concerns has been the costs associated with going to circular polarization. Prior to the introduction of our
Cyclotran System, CP might have
meant expensive reinforcement, or
even replacement, of an existing tower; and a potential doubling of space
requirements for the transmitter
which could have required an entire
new building.
-
Cyclotran eliminates the need for
these costly changes. The 100 kilowatt dual Harris transmitter has
been designed to fit into approximately the same floor space as existing 50- kilowatt transmitters, so that
additional transmitter facilities should
not be required. And, as the Harris
CPV top mount antenna offers wind loading specifications comparable to,
or lower than Batwing and traveling
wave antennas, it may be used as a
direct replacement for either
without expensive changes in tower
systems.
-
CP DEVELOPMENT
Although FCC approval of CP was
granted in April, 1977, several years
before that event Harris realized that
a tremendous interest in CP was
building in the broadcast industry.
As the "ratings race" heated up in
most markets, broadcasters were
looking for an edge -that something
"extra" that might help add a few
points. And CP offered the possibility
of a better picture on home screens.
This antenna was the immediate predecessor of the CPV, and is currently
radiating CP at Station KBYU -TV,
Provo, Utah. Since the antenna's installation, a dramatic improvement
has been seen in the station's signal
throughout the coverage area, which
includes Salt Lake City, the country's
49th ranked market.
With Cyclotran, combining a specially
designed transmitter and an advanced CP antenna, Harris has now
brought a systems concept to circular
polarization.
TVD -100H TRANSMITTER
This 100 -kilowatt dual transmitter
consists of two completely independent Harris TV -50H, 50- kilowatt
transmitters operating in parallel,
combined through a Harris Dualtran
RF switching system. The TVD -100H
is designed specifically for CP
applications.
Along with its unusually compact design, the TVD -100H features solid state IPA's containing broadband amplifiers. Also, each TV -50H employs
only three tubes, including a conservatively rated Type 8984 tetrode
operating as the visual PA, for low
power consumption. DC filaments in
the visual and aural stages provide
improved signal -to -noise ratios.
Another TVD -100H feature is complete redundancy. In the event of a
malfunction of one -half of the parallel
combination, you still stay on the air at
one -fourth authorized power, without
interruption of the carrier -and half power operation is achieved in 3 seconds with the touch of a button.
HARRIS
The transmitter also incorporates
Harris' state -of- the -art Transversal
SideBand (TSB) filters; IF (Intermediate Frequency) Modulation;
true linear operation of power amplifiers; and solid -state visual and aural exciter /modulators to provide the
finest color performance and sound
fidelity available.
CPV ANTENNA
addition to its low windloading
characteristics, the Harris CPV antenna is fed from a single transmission line, thereby reducing tower
loading due to transmission line.
In
Other characteristics of the CPV include excellent circularity (standard
omnidirectional pattern varies less
than ± 2dB); low axial ratio (less than
2dB); VSWR less than 1.05:1 at visual
carrier and below 1.1:1 over each
channel; directional horizontal pattern capability; and a variety of vertical patterns that may be tailored to
specific coverage requirements.
THE BEST, MOST
ECONOMICAL WAY TO GO CP
Again, we want to emphasize that
with a Harris Cyclotran System, a
broadcaster may enjoy all of the benefits of CP signal transmission with out the expense and inconvenience
of providing extensive new facilities.
In most cases the existing transmitter
building will be large enough to house
the TVD -100H, and the existing tower
will be adequate to handle the CPV
antenna.
This system was designed specifically to give you the best circularly
polarized television performance,
while minimizing capital investment.
For CP applications, there's nothing
to equal it.
See your Harris District Sales Representative, or call the Harris Television Sales Department at 217 -2228200. We'll be glad to give you addi-
tional information.
gli-A-Alin
CP -1.5M -879
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
ADV 528A
PTD
IN
USA
107
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Harris AM -FM -TV
Transmitter Powers
AM
-
Medium Wave
200,000 watt
100,000 watt
50,000 watt
20,000 watt
10,000 watt
5,000 watt
1,000 watt
Model
TV -Low Band VHF
Model
VP-200A
VP-100A
MWD-100
MW-50A
50
36
35
25
kilowatt
kilowatt
kilowatt
kilowatt
18 kilowatt
1.3 kilowatt
BTD-50L2
BTD-36L3
BT-35L2
BT-25L2
BT-18L3
BT-1300L2
M W D-20
MW-10
MWD-10A
MW-5A
MW-1A
TV
-
High Band VHF
100 kilowatt
50 kilowatt
AM - Short Wave
100,000 watt
50,000 watt
36 kilowatt
35 kilowatt
25 kilowatt
SW-100
SW-50
18 kilowatt
10 kilowatt
1.3 kilowatt
TVD-100H
TV-50H
TVD-50H
TVD-36H
TV-35H
TV-25H
TV-18H
TV-10H
BT-1300H2
FM
kilowatt
kilowatt
kilowatt
kilowatt
10 kilowatt
7.5 kilowatt
5 kilowatt
3 kilowatt
2.5 kilowatt
1 kilowatt
300 watt
100 watt
50 watt
15 watt
50
40
25
20
FMD-50K
FM-40K
FM-25K
FM-20K
FM-10K
FM-7.5K
FM-5K
FM-3K
FM-2.5K
FM-1K
FM-300KD/FM-300K
FM-100K
BFE-50G3
MS-15
TV - UHF
220 kilowatt
110 kilowatt
60 kilowatt
55 kilowatt
40 kilowatt
30 kilowatt
108
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-220U
TV-220UA
TV-110U
TV-110UA
TV-60U
TV-60UA
TV-55U
TV-55UA
BT-40U 1
TV-30U
TV-30UA
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION A
INFORMATION PROC'1SS1NG
Compact TV -50H design permits 100 -kW dual configuration for CP use in approximately same floor space as existing 50 -kW transmitters
TV-50H
50- Kilowatt VHF High Band
Color Television Transmitter
Solid -State IPA's
Only
3
tubes (TV -SOH)
6
tubes (TVD -100H)
Transversal SideBand filter -no group delay, no tuning
adjustments required
IF
TV D-100 H
100 -Kilowatt Dual VHF High Band
Color Television Transmitter
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers
Automatic power control standard
Excellent cooling system
Latest design for unattended operation
Modular, pre -wired cabinets for easiest installation
109
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV- 50H...
SOUD -STATE IPA/
THREE -TUBE DESIGN
The Harris TV -50H features a solid -state
IPA and a three -tube design to greatly
enhance reliability, reduce tuning re-
quirements and allow an unusually compact cabinet configuration.
This advanced high band VHF -TV trans-
mitter requires only one aural and two
visual tubes to provide a 50- kilowatt
visual and a 5- kilowatt aural output. A
circulator between the visual stages
minimizes retuning requirements after a
tube change.
The solid -state IPA contains broadband
amplifiers so that no tuning is re-
quired -and it is fully protected against
damage caused by overloads or load
variations. Gradual (1 to 2 seconds) RF
turn -on permits DC voltage stabilization
before RF drive application to power
amplifiers, for added transmitter
protection. The IPA is fully metered for
monitoring and maintenance, while excellent cooling helps maintain long transistor life.
DUAL CONFIGURATION
FOR CP
APPLICATIONS
compact design of the TV -50H
makes it ideal for 100 -kilowatt dual
The
configurations for use with circularly
polarized TV antennas. A 100- kilowatt
configuration, employing two TV -50H's
and a center control cabinet, would require only about the some floor space
as one existing 50- kilowatt transmitter!
SUPERB
PERFORMANCE
addition to a solid -state IPA, the TV50H incorporates such state -of- the -art
In
110
www.americanradiohistory.com
features as Harris' Transversal SideBand
(TSB) filter; IF (intermediate frequency)
Modulation; true linear operation of
power amplifiers; and solid -state visual
and aural exciter /modulators, to
provide the finest color performance
and sound fidelity available today. As
no envelope delay correction or adjustments are required for the sideband
filter, stability, reliability and color
quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are straightforward and uncomplicated, while
design simplicity and conservatively
rated components assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance.
The TV -50H consists of a 1.7- kilowatt
exciter /driver, an aural power amplifier, a visual power amplifier, and an
external HV power supply. The transmitter employs a single -ended visual PA
(8984 tetrode) for low power consumption, and DC filaments in the visual and
aural stages for improved signal -tonoise ratios.
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
FILTER
The Harris solid -state sideband
filter
is
an advanced surface acoustic wave
design, and shapes visual sidebands at
the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the full output power of the
transmitter. Unlike previous VSB filters,
which require from 600 to 1000 nsec of
group delay correction and many adjustments, the TSB filter has an inherent
linear phase characteristic and requires
no group delay correction. Other VSB
filters need 6 to 12 tuning controls,
while the Harris TSB filter needs no tuning controls as it requires no tuning ad-
justments -ever!
The MCP-1V visual exciter/modulator is a solid- state, independent,
self- contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris' TSB filter (right)
mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter, and measures only
11/2 inches square.
is
Additionally, the
TSB filter has steeper
skirts and higher attenuation outside the
channel passband for improved VSB
wave shaping.
drawer extended for test purposes.
Only
1
IF
filter
is
square inches in size, the TSB
mounted on a PC board in the
visual exciter.
Y2
SOLID -STATE
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The Harris solid -state MCP-1V visual ex-
citer/modulator is an independent, self contained unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal.
Power output can be varied up to one
watt with a single front panel control, or
from a remote location, without retuning of any kind.
The
exciter
is
mounted in a pull -out
drawer and may be operated outside
the main transmitter for test purposes. A
switch and meter mounted on the front
panel permit monitoring exciter
parameters. Power and video gain controls are motor driven with manual
override provision.
The MCP -1V provides
great reliability
excellent frequency
response, and truest color quality. It is
also designed for minimum maintenance
and set -up time, and for remote control
and unattended operation. This is all
made possible through the use of the
latest design techniques, including
Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
and
stability,
The Harris
aural exciter /modulator
is a
solid -state self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can
be set with a single knob on the front
panel, or by remote control, with no
need for retuning. The aural exciter /modulator is mounted in a pull -out
drawer, and may be operated with the
MODULATION
One of the important features of the TV50H is its true low -level IF Modulation,
which offers a top quality picture, and
excels in electrical performance, reliability and simplicity of operation.
In the TV -50H the visual and aural exciters generate fully modulated low level IF signals. The output of a common
crystal controlled reference oscillator is
used to raise the individual IF signal to
the desired "on channel" output frequency.
lower power levels
than other designs, intermediate frequency modulation needs fewer circuits
to produce a fully processed, quality
picture signal. Less than one volt of
video signal is needed to modulate the
RF carrier.
As it occurs at much
The Harris ring
modulator design per-
mits modulation percentages to approx-
imately 2% without compromising
transmitter performance -and eliminates most pre- distortion circuitry. This
results in exceptional color performance and nearly perfect signal linearity.
Even such colors as highly saturated yellow and cyan are faithfully reproduced
with IF Modulation.
Due to the low -level techniques, which
include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring
modulator, low -level sideband filtering
and very linear broadband amplifiers,
the broadcast signal is a faithful
reproduction of the signal applied to
the transmitter input. IF Modulation
results in low incidental phase noise,
and the elimination of many transmission problems at their source. This
means that no half -way measures -such
correction, compensation
and feedback circuits -are required to
eliminate the effects of these problems
later.
as numerous
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Solid -state memory, timing and logic
circuits -employing CMOS IC's for
design simplicity and enhanced reliability -offer complete and foolproof
control of all transmitter functions. Built in memory circuitry enables the entire
transmitter to return to the air automatically in the stage it was operating
prior to a partial or full power failure.
The memory is continuous, and is maintained without an emergency power
source during power failures.
control logic and protective circuitry, in addition to commanding normal AC contrci functions, is also used to
visually indicc.re, through indicator
lights, the operating status of the
transmitter system. These indicator lights
allow isolation of circuit faults, and are
easily remoted.
The
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and unattended operation. The power controls are motor
driven and the necessary remote control
sampling points are built -in on accessible terminal boards.
Today, Harris TV transmitters ore being
operated successfully worldwide in an
unattended mode, with and without
remote control access. In addition,
Harris' transmitter design is consistent
with anticipated automatic transmitter
needs in the future.
111
www.americanradiohistory.com
AUTOMATIC
POWER CONTROL
Automatic gain control of all RF
amplifier stages, in conjunction with the
exciters' automatic power control, insures constant power output, even with
variations in line voltages. This feature is
standard in the TV -50H.
STABILITY
One factor assuring RF stability is the
use of a solid -state IPA and conservatively rated Type 8988 and 8984
ceramic tetrodes operating as VHF
linear amplifiers. These amplifier stages
operate in a common grid and screen
configuration and tube neutralization is
not required.
EXCELLENT
COOLING SYSTEM
cooling system of the TV -50H is
quiet and efficient, and employs direct
The
drive blowers, with
motors fully
protected by automatic reset devices.
Tube manufacturers' recommendations
are met or exceeded at altitudes up to
7,500 feet, enhancing tube life without
power derating.
POWER SUPPLIES
The HV power supply is a multi -phase
full wave rectifying system exhibiting
very low ripple content prior to output
filtering. It is designed for excellent
regulation and low video impedance for
optimum picture performance. This
power supply, including transformer
and solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a
single assembly, mounted externally
from the transmitter. Routine maintenance access is provided by a removable
panel.
Vacuum tube filaments are fed with DC
to maximize the output signal -to -noise
ratio. Grid and screen supplies use
solid -state regulators.
driver cabinet has an independent solid -state HV power supply,
and the visual and aural exciters have
their own independent, solid -state
regulated power supplies.
The 1700 -watt
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
Total transmitter component accessibility is provided, front and back. Visual
and aural exciters slide out and can
operate independently from the
transmitter outside the exciter /driver
cabinet. Various exciter circuits, such as
oscillators, modulators and processing
circuitry, are of modular construction
and can be removed for maintenance or
replacement.
Easy to read, and mounted at eye -level,
4 -inch meters are provided to monitor
required transmitter functions. Meter
panels are double- hinged for con-
transmitter has been built in a
modular fashion so that cabinets may
be separated into convenient, easy -tohandle sub -assemblies to facilitate installation. Additionally, the compact
venient access during maintenance. A
complete system of overload indicators
is also provided in each cabinet for
monitoring transmitter operation. In the
event of a transmitter malfunction, an
examination of the indicators will locate
the problem area.
The
design of the TV -50H minimizes space
requirements in the transmitter building.
TVD -100H - 100 -KILOWATT DUAL
HIGH BAND COLOR TV TRANSMITTER
for use with circularly
polarized television antennas, the
TVD -100H furnishes a 100- kilowatt
visual power output, yet occupies approximately the same floor space as
existing 50- kilowatt TV transmitters!
This dual transmitter consists of two
completely independent 50- kilowatt
transmitters (TV- 50H's) operating in
parallel, combined through the Harris unique- design Dualtran RF switch-
emergency operation).
Transmitter B diplexed to the
antenna and transmitter A to the
station loads (alternate /main or
emergency operation).
Transmitters A and B combined to
the station loads (test mode).
Designed
ing system.
With the TVD -100H you get two
aural exciter /modulators, two visual
exciter -modulators, two TSB filters,
two solid -state visual and aural
IPA's, two visual and aural PA's and
short,
two HV power supplies
total redundancy. Complete reliability.
-in
The Dualtran switching system is fac-
tory assembled in one cabinet, and
can interface with either a hybrid or
a notch diplexer.
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING. In the
event of a malfunction of one -half of
the parallel combination, the Harris
TVD -100H offers automatic and instantaneous reduction to one -fourth
authorized power. This function will
occur without interruption of the carrier. With the touch of a button, half
power operation is achieved in less
than three seconds.
-
Visual and aural exciters are connected in a hot standby condition,
and will automatically switch in less
than 10 milliseconds in case of failure
in either unit. In all modes, aural follows visual for simplified logic control and reliable operation.
OPERATING VERSATILITY. Four
modes of operation may be obtained
electrically by means of control
pushbuttons on the output switcher;
by control buttons on the transmitter
control panel; or by remote control.
These are:
Transmitters A and B combined
and diplexed to the antenna (normal operating mode).
Transmitter A diplexed to the
antenna and transmitter B to the
station loads (alternate /main or
112
www.americanradiohistory.com
switching operation from one
mode to any other mode requires less
than three seconds.
The
When using a notch diplexer, three
other operating modes may be
selected manually by changing links
on the Dualtran output switching
cabinet; transmitters A and B corn bined and diplexed to the station
loads; transmitter A diplexed to the
station loads; and transmitter B
diplexed into station loads.
CONTROL CABINET. The RF Phasing
and Control Panel and the Automatic
Exciter /Modulator Switcher are
standard equipment with the TVD 100H, and are located in a control
cabinet that
is
typically placed
between the two independent 50kilowatt transmitters. The cabinet is
the same height as the transmitters,
and the same color, to provide a
pleasing installation. All adjustments
for dual operation may be made of
this cabinet.
The Harris exciter /modulators,
with
Modulation, allow phasing of
transmitters for dual operation to be
accomplished simply and reliably at
low power levels from the RF Phasing
and Control Panel. In addition to
phasing control, the panel has provisions for monitoring total combined
aural power and total combined
visual power in forward and
IF
reflected modes.
Automatic Exciter /Modulator
Switcher is also a standard part of
the control cabinet, and allows for
either manual or automatic selection
of exciters.
The
SPECIFICATIONS. Visual and aural
performance specifications of the
TVD -100H are the same as those of
the TV -50H (with the exception of
visual power output and aural power
output).
L
MCP
VISUAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
SOLID.STATE
AMPLIFIER
PA
HARMONIC
IPA
8988
BORA
Pit TER
COLOR
NOTCH
50 kw
-1
L_
-J
PS
PS
AURAL
EXCITER
MODULATOR
SOLID STATE
PA
IPA
8807
HARMONIC
HI TER
5
k
AGC
TV -50H BLOCK DIAGRAM
7
1
---
POWER SUPPLY
--
35"
(52" HIGH)
70
TV -50H
FLOOR PLAN
DOOR SWING (TYP.)
35.3"
t
102.7"
32.1"
DRIVER
AURAL
AMPLIFIER
VISUAL
AMPLIFIER
(72" HIGH)
35.3"
1
106"
113
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-50H SPECIFICATIONS
(NOTE: TVD -100H visual and aural performance specifications some as below except for visual power output and aural power output.)
FCC
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Block to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
SIGNAL-TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
50 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/s" EIA standard.
174 -216 MHz (Channels 7 -13).
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
-42 dB or better
-3.58 MHz
-23 dB or better
-1.25 MHz and lower
±0.5 dB
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
0 dB reference
Carrier
±0.5 dB
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
-30 dB or better
+4.75 MHz and higher
±0.75 dB.
1% of sync peak.
0.5 dB
or better.
1.0 dB or better.
±1° or better.
±3° or better.
-55
dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
±40 ns
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
±30 ns
at 3.58 MHz:
±60 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
dB.
VIDEO INPUT:'
HARMONIC RADIATION:
-80
AURAL PERFORMANCE
kW at diplexer output. (10 kW optional).
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'4" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with ±25 kHz deviation
-60 dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
5
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
-EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:°
FREQUENCY STABILITY:'
PRE
±250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
0° to +45 °C (at sea level).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
Sea level to 7500 ft.
106 "W x 32.1 "D x 72 "H. Weight: 2600 lbs.
Power supply: 70 "W
x 35 "D x 52 "H.
Weight: 2600 lbs.
Power input: 480 Volts, ±25 Volts and 208/240 volts,
±11 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Power consumption:
125 kVA, block picture. Power factor: .9 or better.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100%= peak of sync.
' Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub-carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
' Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
o
After de- emphasis.
' Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC) from the visual carrier.
'
ORDERING INFORMATION
standards service, Channels 7 -13, with operating tubes, transistors, IC's,
solid -stale rectifiers, crystals, required pre -correction circuitry, low -level vestigial sideband filter, harmonic and color
notch filters
TVD -100H, 100 kW dual VHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 7 -13, equipped as above
TV -SOH, 50 kW VHF -TV
transmitter for
FCC
994 -8225 -001
994 -8457 -001
ADV. 525A PTD. IN U.S.A.
1K-2M-979
114
www.americanradiohistory.com
Two independent, complete 25- kilowatt transmitters for
total redundancy and on- the -air reliability
"Hot" standby exciters, modulators and sideband filter
for maximum redundancy
HARRIS
AN,
ATION
Harris' Dualtran output switching system allows parallel,
single transmitter or alternate/main operation
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filters -no group
delay, no tuning adjustments required
TV D-50 H
Solid -State exciters and IPAs enhance reliability
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for superb
color and sound reproduction
IF
50- Kilowatt Dual
VHF High Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Superior color
quired
performance -minimal corrections re-
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control systems
Simple solid -state logic control
Fast turn -on time
Modular pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy installation
115
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD-50H
Transmitters A and
B
combined On -Air.
Transmitter A On -Air and transmitter
into the station loads.
B
Transmitter B On -Air and transmitter A
into the station loads.
Transmitters A and B combined to the
station loads (test mode).
The switching
operation from one mode to
any other mode requires less than two
conds.
TOTAL REDUNDANCY FOR
COMPLETE REUABILITY
The Harris TVD -50H, 50-kilowatt dual high
band VHF TV transmitter, is designed for
television broadcasters who want the utmost in reliability and performance -with
the flexibility for remote control or
automatic operation. This dual transmitter
consists of two completely independent 25kilowatt transmitters operating in parallel,
combined through the Harris unique- design
Dualtran RF switching system.
With the TVD -50H you get two aural exciter /modulators, two visual exciter/
modulators, two TSB filters, two solid -state
visual and aural IPA's, two visual and aural
PA's, and two HV power supplies -in short,
total redundancy! Complete reliability!
one- fourth authorized power. This function
will occur without interruption of the carrier. With the touch of a button, half -power
operation
is
achieved in less than two
se-
se-
When using a notch diplexer, three other
operating modes may be selected manually
by changing links on the Dualtran output
switching cabinet: transmitters A and B
combined and diplexed to the station
loads; transmitter A diplexed into station
loads; and transmitter B diplexed into station loods.
conds.
Visual and aural exciters are connected in
a hot standby condition, and will automatically switch in less than 10 milliseconds in case of failure in either unit. In
oll modes, aural follows visual for simpli-
fied logic control and reliable operation.
OPERATING VERSATILITY. Four modes of
operation may be obtained electrically by
means of control pushbuttons on the output
switcher; by control buttons on the transmitter control panel; or by remote control.
These ore:
EXCELLENT PERFORMANCE
Surface acoustic wave technology is applied to vestigial sideband filtering in the
visual exciter. The Transversal SideBand
(TSB) filter displays a near -ideal bandpass
function for CCIR Systems "M" (FCC) and
"B" bandwidths. This, combined with the
filter's true linear phase characteristic, offers excellent reproduction of pulse
waveforms and encoded color information
without adjustment.
The Dualtran switching system is factory assembled in one cabinet, and con be supplied to interface with either a hybrid or a
notch diplexer.
IF (intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low -level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
combine to provide outstanding color and
sound fidelity. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments are required for the
solid -state Transversal SideBand filter(s),
stability, reliability and color quality are
greatly enhanced.
DUALTRAN OUTPUT
SWITCHER CABINET
All switches, patch panels, combiners, reject and dummy loads,
couplers, sensors and control
logic are factory assembled,
tested and optimized for best
VSWR across the channel. The
only external transmission line
connections are for the transmitters, antenna and diplexer. This
installation labor and
saves
time, and insures excellent performance without field optimization. Motorized coaxial
switches accomplish RF switching at the push of a button on
the output switcher control panel, center transmitter control
cabinet or via remote control.
Solid state control logic auto-
Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are straightforward and uncomplicated, while design
simplicity and conservatively rated components in the TVD -50H assure long-term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance. DC filaments in the visual
and aural stages provide improved signal to -noise ratios.
The transmitter
is
FCC type accepted, and
-
factory power testing assures performance
matically routes command
signals to turn off plate
to specifications.
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING. In the event of
a malfunction of one -half of the parallel
combination, the Harris TVD -50H offers
automatic and instantaneous reduction to
voltages, operate proper coaxial switches and re -apply plate
voltage...all in two seconds or
less.
116
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD-50H
CENTER CONTROL CABINET
I
-F`B7B7
_.
All adjustments and control of dual transmitter operation can be accomplished
from the control cabinet, supplied as standard equipment in all Harris Dualtran
systems. This cabinet is normally mounted
between the two independent transmitters
to provide a pleasing installation. The RF
phasing and control panel, the exciter/
modulator switcher, and the local control
panel are standard equipment with the
Harris Dualtran systems.
Phasing and Control Panel : Here the
output of the on -air exciter /modulator is
split to drive the two transmitters. Phasing
controls and attenuators provide adjustment of the two signals to assure maximum
combined transmitter output. Switchable
visual and aural power meters are
provided to monitor combined forward,
combined reflected and reject power levels.
Also, Dualtran output switcher control logic
pushbuttons on this panel can select "A +
B Air", "A Air", "B Air" or "A + B Test"
RF
6-1111
C174,-=.
,._T z_;
._ a r._
._..
0
modes.
Local Control Panel : Provides simultaneous control of both transmitters including filament and plate on /off and aural
and visual raise /lower functions. All system
remote control terminals are available on
this panel.
Exciter /Modulator Switcher : Solid -state
control logic provides manual or automatic
switching of the two exciter /modulators
from "hot standby" to "on -air" status in
case of exciter failure. Switching occurs in
10 milliseconds for no perceptible loss of
signal.
Input Patch Panel (Optional)
:
Permits
bypassing the exciter /modulator switcher
via BNC cables to patch any combination
of aural /visual exciters to any transmitter.
This provides extra flexibility for emergency situations and for system maintenance and testing.
Input Bypass Switcher (Optional-.
Not Shown) : In single transmitter modes
RF
this switcher removes the 3 dB coupler in
the RF phasing /control panel from input
circuitry, thereby putting full rated power
of any one transmitter on the air.
117
TVD-50H
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY
SOLID -STATE IPA
25- kilowatt transmitter features a
solid -state IPA to greatly enhance
Each
reliability and reduce tuning requirements.
solid -state IPAs contain broadband
so that periodic bandpass adjustments are not required -and they are
fully protected against damage caused by
The
amplifiers,
overloads or load variations. For added
transmitter protection, RF drive is applied
over a one to two second interval, which
permits DC voltage stabilization before full
RF drive application to power amplifiers.
The IPAs are fully metered for monitoring
and maintenance, while excellent cooling
helps maintain long transistor life.
25- kilowatt transmitter employs a
single -ended visual PA (8916 tetrode), and
DC filaments in every stage for an excellent
signal -to -noise ratio.
(IF) MODULATION
One of the features of the TVD -50H is its
true low-level IF Modulation, which offers a
top quality picture, and excels in electrical
performance, reliability and simplicity of
operation.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low-level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the color signal is a
faithful reproduction of the signal applied
to the transmitter input.
(TSB) FILTER
The Harris solid -state sideband
filter
an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
previous VSB filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear phase characteristic and requires no group delay correction or tuning.
is
great reliability and
stability, excellent frequency response, and
truest color quality. It is designed for
The MCP -1V provides
minimum maintenance and set -up time,
and for remote control and unattended
operation. This is all made possible through
the use of the latest design techniques, including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state, self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning. It is mounted in a pull -out drawer, and
may be operated with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The Harris
COOLING
SYSTEM
of the TVD-50H is quiet
and efficient, and employs direct drive
blowers, with the motors fully protected by
automatic reset devices.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
Solid -state memory, timing and logic circuits offer complete and foolproof control
of all transmitter functions. Built-in memory
circuitry enables the entire transmitter to
return to the air automatically in the state it
was operating prior to an AC power inter-
ruption.
control logic, in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is
also used to visually indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the
transmitter system. These indicator lights allow easy isolation of circuit faults, and are
easily remoted.
The
SOLID-STATE
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The Harris solid -state MCP -1V visual exciter /modulator is an independent, self contained unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output can be varied up to one watt with a
single front panel control, or from a remote
location, without retuning of any kind.
EXCELLENT
The cooling system
Each
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND
STABILITY
One factor assuring RF stability is the use of
solid -state IPA'S and conservatively rated
Type 8988, 8807 and 8916 ceramic
tetrodes operating as VHF linear
amplifiers. These amplifier stages operate
in a common grid and screen configuration
and tube neutralization is not required.
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and ATS. The power controls are motor driven and the necessary
remote control sampling points are built -in
on accessible terminal boards. Today, Harris TV transmitters are being operated successfully worldwide with a variety of
remote control systems.
AUTOMATIC
POWER
CONTROL
Automatic gain control of all RF amplifier
stages, in conjunction with the exciters'
automatic power control, insures essentially
constant power output, even with variations in line voltages. This feature is standard in the TVD -50H.
118
www.americanradiohistory.com
POWER
SUPPLIES
The HV power supplies for the TVD -50H
visual and aural PAs exhibit very low ripple
content. They are designed for excellent
regulation and low video impedance for
optimum picture performance. In addition,
for ease of maintenance, the two power
supplies, including transformers and solid state rectifiers, are housed in two separate
assemblies, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access is
provided by removable panels.
4
Vacuum tube filaments in the visual transmitters are operated from DC power supplies to maximize the output signal -to -noise
ratio. Grid and screen supplies are 100%
solid state.
The visual and
aural exciters have their
solid -state regulated
own independent,
power supplies.
EASE OF
MAINTENANCE
Convenient access to components is
provided, permitting the transmitter to be
easily maintained. Visual and aural exciters
slide out and can operate independently
from the transmitter outside the cabinet.
Various exciter circuits, such as oscillators,
modulators and processing circuitry, are of
modular construction and can be removed
for maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for easy access during maintenance.
4
TVD-50H
J
In
PIN
-°40-1
v
l
Ine PO.
r-
Mer
0.1I
cv
Tt?
_ Hti
..
..... (
.
7
0-40
o
D._..... ....,.....,....
r?
RF FLOW TVD -50H
T
II
OUTPUT
,wnCNo
NIGH.
.OwII
SU..I,
WITH NOTCH DIPLEXER
T
.Owl.
7.
SUPPLY
1604
PO, NIGH.
T
71..
MIGNI
I
F.VISUM
AS
D.IVI.
l]
97 3
MOW
-+{
INPUT
SWII(NII
77 17
36'
30'
VISUM
DPI VII
T
31
5"
PA
97 3"
TVD -50H FLOOR PLAN
119
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD -50H SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC (System
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
"M ")
50 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/s EIA standard.
174 -216 MHz (Channels 7-13).
± 250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
-3.58 MHz
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
-42 dB or
-26 dB or
±0.5 dB
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
better
better
0 dB reference
±0.5 dB
-30 dB or
+4.75 MHz and higher
±0.75 dB.
better
1% or better.
3% or better.
1.0 dB or better.
±3° or better.
±1° or better.
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
-55 dB or
better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
± 40 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
± 30 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
± 60ns.
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
VIDEO INPUT:'
HARMONIC RADIATION:
-80 dB.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
10 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3 'h" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis
with ±25 kHz deviation.
-60 dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE- EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:6
FREQUENCY STABILITY:'
±250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
-10° to
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
+50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 h.
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
216.72" W
x
31.5"
D x
72.0"
H.
Power supplies (2) each: 36" W
Weight: 950 lbs.
Output switcher: 34" W
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
x
48"
Weight: 6,770 lbs.
x 24" D x 60.4" H.
D x
72"
H.
Weight:
1,350 lbs.
Power input: 208/240 volts, ±11 volts, 3 phase,
50/60 Hz. Power consumption (approx.): 116
kVA, black picture, 10% aural; 98 kVA, average
picture (50% APL), 10% aural; 124 kVA, black
picture at 20% aural; 106 kVA, average picture
at 20% aural.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
After initial aging of 60 days.
' Measured at 65 °r° and 15% of modulation. Reference 100%= peak of sync.
' Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
'
o
r
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC) from the visual carrier.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TVD -50H, 50 kW dual VHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 7 -13,
crystals, VSB filter, color notch filter, harmonic filters, input and output switchers
1K
:M
185
HARRIS
(
()PRORATION
with operating tubes, semiconductors,
veo
994 -8408 -001
Any 556
120
www.americanradiohistory.com
PTO
iN
U S A
Two independent, complete 18- kilowatt transmitters for
total redundancy and on- the -air reliability
W
HARRIS
"Hot" standby exciters, modulators and sideband filter
for maximum redundancy
COMMUNICATION ANO
IIIPOAMATION IMOCaIMO
Harris' Dualtran output switching system allows parallel,
single transmitter or alternate /main operation
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filters -no group
delay, no tuning adjustments required
TVD -36H
Solid -State exciters and IPAs enhance reliability
36- Kilowatt Dual
VHF High Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for superb
color and sound reproduction
IF
Superior
quired
color
performance -minimal corrections
re-
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control systems
Simple solid -state logic control
Fast turn -on time
Modular pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy installation
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD-36H
Transmitters A and
B
combined On -Air.
Transmitter A On -Air and transmitter
into the station loads.
B
Transmitter B On -Air and transmitter A
into the station loads.
Transmitters A and B combined to the
station loads (test mode).
operation from one mode to
any other mode requires less than two seconds.
The switching
TOTAL REDUNDANCY FOR
COMPLETE RELIABILITY
The Harris TVD -36H, 36- kilowatt dual high
band VHF TV transmitter, is designed for
television broadcasters who want the utmost in reliability and performance -with
the flexibility for remote control or
automatic operation. This dual transmitter
consists of two completely independent 18kilowatt transmitters operating in parallel,
combined through the Harris unique- design
Dualtran RF switching system.
With the TVD -36H you get two aural exciter /modulators, two visual exciter/
modulators, two TSB filters, two solid -state
visual and aural IPA's, two visual and aural
PA's, and two HV power supplies -in short,
total redundancy! Complete reliability!
one -fourth authorized power. This function
will occur without interruption of the carrier. With the touch of a button, half -power
operation
is
achieved in less than two
se-
conds.
When using a notch diplexer, three other
operating modes may be selected manually
by changing links on the Dualtran output
switching cabinet: transmitters A and B
combined and diplexed to the station
loads; transmitter A diplexed into station
loads; and transmitter B diplexed into station loads.
Visual and aural exciters are connected in
a hot standby condition, and will automatically switch in less than 10 milliseconds in case of failure in either unit. In
all modes, aural follows visual for simplified logic control and reliable operation.
OPERATING VERSATILITY. Four modes of
operation may be obtained electrically by
means of control pushbuttons on the output
switcher; by control buttons on the transmitter control panel; or by remote control.
These are:
EXCELLENT PERFORMANCE
Surface acoustic wave technology is applied to vestigial sideband filtering in the
visual exciter. The Transversal SideBand
(TSB) filter displays a near -ideal bandpass
function for CCIR Systems "M" (FCC) and
"B" bandwidths. This, combined with the
filter's true linear phase characteristic, offers excellent reproduction of pulse
waveforms and encoded color information
without adjustment.
The Dualtran switching system is factory assembled in one cabinet, and can be sup-
plied to interface with either a hybrid or a
notch diplexer.
IF (intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low-level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
combine to provide outstanding color and
sound fidelity. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments are required for the
solid -state Transversal SideBand filter(s),
stability, reliability and color quality are
greatly enhanced.
DUALTRAN OUTPUT
SWITCHER CABINET
All switches, patch panels, combiners, reject and dummy loads,
couplers, sensors and control
logic are factory assembled,
tested and optimized for best
VSWR across the channel. The
only external transmission line
connections are for the transmitters, antenna and diplexer. This
saves installation labor and
time, and insures excellent performance without field optimization. Motorized coaxial
switches accomplish RF switching at the push of a button on
the output switcher control panel, center transmitter control
cabinet or via remote control.
Solid - state control logic auto-
Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are straightforward and uncomplicated, while design
simplicity and conservatively rated components in the TVD -36H assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance. DC filaments in the visual
and aural stages provide improved signal to -noise ratios.
The transmitter is FCC type accepted, and
factory power testing assures performance
matically routes command
signals to turn off plate
to specifications.
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING. In the event of
a malfunction of one -half of the parallel
combination, the Harris TVD-36H offers
automatic and instantaneous reduction to
voltages, operate proper coaxial switches and re -apply plate
voltoge...all in two seconds or
less.
122
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD-36H
CENTER CONTROL CABINET
All adjustments and control of dual transmitter operation can be accomplished from
the control cabinet, supplied as standard
equipment in all Harris Dualtran systems.
This cabinet is normally mounted between
the two independent transmitters to
provide a pleasing installation. The RF
phasing and control panel, the exciter/
modulator switcher, and the local control
panel are standard equipment with the
Harris Dualtran systems.
Phasing and Control Panel: Here the
output of the on -air exciter/modulator is
split to drive the two transmitters. Phasing
controls and attenuators provide adjustment of the two signals to assure maximum
combined transmitter output. Switchable
visual and aural power meters are
provided to monitor combined forward,
combined reflected and reject power levels.
Also, Dualtran output switcher control logic
pushbuttons on this panel can select "A +
B Air", "A Air ", "B Air" or "A + B Test"
RF
modes.
Local Control Panel: Provides simultaneous control of both transmitters including filament and plate on /off and aural
and visual raise /lower functions. All system
remote control terminals are available on
this panel.
Exciter /Modulator Switcher: Solid -state
control logic provides manual or automatic
switching of the two exciter /modulators
from "hot standby" to "on -air" status in
case of exciter failure. Switching occurs in
10 milliseconds for no perceptible loss of
signal.
Input Patch Panel (Optional) : Permits
bypassing the exciter /modulator switcher
via BNC cables to patch any combination
of aural /visual exciters to any transmitter.
This provides extra flexibility for emergency situations and for system maintenance and testing.
RF
Input Bypass Switcher (Optional
-
single transmitter modes
this switcher removes the 3 dB coupler in
the RF phasing /control panel from input
circuitry, thereby putting full rated power
of any one transmitter on the air.
Not Shown)
:
In
123
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD-36H
SOLID -STATE IPA
18- kilowatt
transmitter features o
solid -state IPA to greatly enhance
reliability and reduce tuning requirements.
Each
solid -state IPAs contain broadband
amplifiers, so that periodic bandpass adjustments are not required -and they are
fully protected against damage caused by
overloads or load variations. For added
transmitter protection, RF drive is applied
over a one to two second interval, which
permits DC voltage stabilization before full
RF drive application to power amplifiers.
The IPAs are fully metered for monitoring
and maintenance, while excellent cooling
helps maintain long transistor life.
The
18- kilowatt transmitter employs a
single -ended visual PA (8916 tetrode) and
DC filaments in every stage for an excellent
signal -to -noise ratio.
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY
(IF) MODULATION
STABILITY
One of the features of the TVD -36H is its
true low -level IF Modulation, which offers a
top quality picture, and excels in electrical
performance, reliability and simplicity of
operation.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low -level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the color signal is a
faithful reproduction of the signal applied
to the transmitter input.
(TSB) FILTER
filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
previous VSB filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear phase characteristic and requires no group delay correction or tuning.
The Harris solid -state sideband
The Harris solid -state MCP -1V visual ex-
citer /modulator is an independent, self contained unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output can be varied up to one watt with a
single front panel control, or from a remote
location, without retuning of any kind.
The MCP -1V provides great reliability and
stability, excellent frequency response, and
truest color quality. It is designed for
minimum maintenance and set -up time,
and for remote control and unattended
operation. This is all made possible through
the use of the latest design techniques, including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid- state, self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning. It is mounted in a pull -out drawer, and
may be operated with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The
COOLING
SYSTEM
of the TVD -36H is quiet
and efficient, and employs direct drive
blowers, with the motors fully protected by
automatic reset devices.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
Solid -state memory, timing and logic circuits offer complete and foolproof control
of all transmitter functions. Built -in memory
circuitry enables the entire transmitter to
return to the air automatically in the state it
was operating prior to an AC power inter-
POWER
SUPPLIES
The HV power supplies for the TVD -36H
visual and aural PAs exhibit very low ripple
control logic, in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is
also used to visually indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the
transmitter system. These indicator lights allow easy isolation of circuit faults, and are
easily remoted.
content. They are designed for excellent
regulation and low video impedance for
optimum picture performance. In addition,
for ease of maintenance, the two power
supplies, including transformers and solid state rectifiers, are housed in two separate
assemblies, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access is
provided by removable panels.
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
Vacuum tube filaments in the visual transmitters are operated from DC power supplies to maximize the output signal -to -noise
ratio. Grid and screen supplies are 100%
solid state.
ruption.
The
SOLID -STATE
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
EXCELLENT
The cooling system
Each
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND
One factor assuring RF stability is the use of
solid -state IPA'S and conservatively rated
Type 8988, 8807 and 8916 ceramic
tetrodes operating as VHF linear
amplifiers. These amplifier stages operate
in a common grid and screen configuration
and tube neutralization is not required.
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
The visual and
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and ATS. The power controls are motor driven and the necessary
remote control sampling points are built -in
on accessible terminal boards. Today, Harris TV transmitters are being operated successfully worldwide with a variety of
remote control systems.
AUTOMATIC
POWER
CONTROL
Automatic gain control of all
RF
aural exciters have their
solid-state regulated
own independent,
power supplies.
EASE OF
MAINTENANCE
Convenient access to components is
provided, permitting the transmitter to be
easily maintained. Visual and aural exciters
slide out and can operate independently
from the transmitter outside the cabinet.
Various exciter circuits, such as oscillators,
modulators and processing circuitry, are of
modular construction and can be removed
for maintenance or replacement.
amplifier
stages, in conjunction with the exciters'
automatic power control, insures essentially
constant power output, even with variations in line voltages. This feature is standard in the TVD -36H.
124
www.americanradiohistory.com
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for easy access during maintenance.
TVD-36H
o
r
I
-rv
-also
1
.,.-}-_
r
o
.0
r-
._
O,. , a,,o
:
LI
HL ! }
a
_1
I
C
I
060
{
1St Wig
J
D. ....................
RF
HI
OUTPUT
,wnnu
.
FT
GH,
T
1
SUP
w.
7!
7'
POW.,
L
Z;..
SUPPLY
HIGH,
w.
I
I
061 Y..
47
FLOW TVD-36H WITH NOTCH DIPLEXER
w..,
1{
I
V,U.
T
31 5'
1wCw..
22
47
12
7
TVD -36H FLOOR PLAN
125
www.americanradiohistory.com
TVD -36H SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC (System
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic,):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
"M ")
36 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/4 EIA standard.
174 -216 MHz (Chonnels 7 -13).
+250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or
less.
than 2 %.
-3.58 MHz
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
Less
-42
-26
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
+0.75 dB.
1% or better.
dB or better
dB or better
±0.5 dB
0 dB reference
+0.5 dB
-30 dB or better
3% or better.
1.0 dB or better.
±3° or better.
±1° or better.
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
-55
dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
+ 40 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
± 30 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
± 60 ns.
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
VIDEO INPUT:'
75 ohm system.
dB.
-80
HARMONIC RADIATION:
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
7.2 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/e" EIA Std.
FM NOISE:
-60
+10dBm, +2dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
+0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis
with ±25 kHz deviation.
dB or better rel. to +25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
AM NOISE:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:'
±250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
-10° to
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
216.72" W
+50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 h.
x 31.5" D x 72.0" H. Weight: 6,770 lbs.
Power supplies (2) each: 36" W x 24" D x 60.4" H.
Weight: 950 lbs.
Output switcher: 34" W
x
48"
D x
72" H. Weight:
1,350 lbs.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
input: 208/240 volts, +11 volts, 3 phase,
50/60 Hz. Power consumption (approx.): 110
kVA, block picture, 10% aural; 93.6 kVA,
overage picture (50% APL), 10% aural; 118 kVA,
black picture at 20% aural; 100.4 kVA, average
picture at 20% aural.
Power
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% =peak of sync.
Maximum
variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
s
' Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
s
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
o After de- emphasis.
' Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC) from the visual carrier.
'
'
ORDERING INFORMATION
TVD -36H, 36 kW dual VHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 7 -13,
crystals, VSB filter, color notch filter, hormonic filters, input and output switchers
JR-2N ISO
with operating tubes, semiconductors,
()HARRIS COPRORATION 1980
994 - 8499 -001
ADV
126
www.americanradiohistory.com
555 PTD. IN
U S
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION f1gC 8.91ND
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter- requires no
group delay correction, no tuning adjustments
Solid -state exciters and IPA
Superior color performance -minimal corrections required
Fast turn -on time
TV-25H
Automatic power control
IF
25- Kilowatt VHF
High Band
Color Television
Transmitter
is a
standard feature
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers
Solid -state control circuits
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control systems
Compact design, with excellent accessibility
Pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy
installation
127
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-25H
IF (intermediate
frequency) Modulation, true linear operation of power amplifiers, and solid -state
visual and aural exciter /modulators, to
provide the finest color performance and
sound fidelity available today. As no
envelope delay correction or adjustments
are required for the sideband filter,
stability, reliability and color quality are
greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment,
power output control and amplifier tuning
are straightforward and uncomplicated,
while design simplicity and conservatively
rated components assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance.
state -of- the -art features as
transmitter employs a single -ended
visual PA (8916 tetrode), and DC filaments
in every stage for an excellent signal -tonoise ratio.
The
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND
(TSB) FILTER
filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
previous VSB filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear phase characteristic and requires no group delay correction or tuning.
The Harris solid -state sideband
Additionally, the TSB filter has steep skirts
and high attenuation outside the channel
passband for excellent VSB wave shaping.
Ultra-linear driver cabinet with solid -state IPA
Only V2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter.
1
The Harris TV -25H features a solid -state
IPA to greatly enhance reliability and
reduce tuning requirements, with a compact cabinet configuration.
This advanced high -band VHF -TV transmit-
ter requires only one aural and two visual
tubes to provide a 25- kilowatt visual and a
5- kilowatt aural output. Under normal
operating conditions the quick -heat tubes
permit transmitter turn -on within 20 seconds. A circulator between the visual
stages minimizes retuning requirements
after a tube change.
Surface acoustic wave technology is applied to vestigial sideband filtering in the
visual exciter. The Transversal SideBand
(TSB) filter displays a near -ideal bandpass
function for CCIR Systems "M" (FCC) and
"B" bandwidths. This, combined with the
filter's true linear phase characteristic, offers excellent reproduction of pulse
waveforms and encoded color information
without adjustment.
The
solid -state IPA contains broadband
so that periodic bandpass adjustment is not required -and it is fully
protected against damage caused by
SOLID -STATE
amplifiers,
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
overloads or load variations. For added
transmitter protection, RF drive is applied
over a one to two second interval, which
permits DC voltage stabilization before full
RF drive application to power amplifiers.
The IPA is fully metered for monitoring and
maintenance, while excellent cooling helps
maintain long transistor life.
The Harris solid -state MCP -1V visual ex-
SUPERB
COLOR
PERFORMANCE
In
addition to the solid -state IPA and the
filter, Harris' TV -25H incorporates such
TSB
128
www.americanradiohistory.com
citer /modulator is an independent, self contained unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output can be varied up to one watt with a
single front panel control, or from a remote
location, without retuning of any kind.
The exciter is mounted in a pull -out drawer
and may be operated outside the main
transmitter for test purposes. A switch and
meter mounted on the front panel permit
monitoring exciter parameters. Power and
video gain controls are motor driven with
manual override provision to permit both
local and remote adjustment.
TV-25H
great reliability and
stability, excellent frequency response, and
truest color quality. It is designed for
minimum maintenance and set -up time,
and for remote control and unattended
operation. This is all made possible through
the use of the latest design techniques, including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
The MCP-1V provides
Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid- state, self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning. It is mounted in a pull -out drawer, and
may be operated with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
POWER
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The HV power supply for the visual and
aural PAs exhibits very low ripple content.
It is designed for excellent regulation and
low video impedance for optimum picture
performance. In addition, for ease of
maintenance, this power supply, including
transformer and solid -state rectifiers, is
SUPPLIES
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and ATS. The power controls are motor driven and the necessary
remote control sampling points are built -in
on accessible terminal boards. Today, Harris TV transmitters are being successfully
operated worldwide with a variety of
remote control systems.
housed in a single assembly, mounted externally from the transmitter. Routine
maintenance access is provided by a
removable panel.
Vacuum tube filaments in the visual and
aural transmitters are operated from DC
power supplies to maximize the output
signal -to -noise ratio. Grid and screen supplies are 100% solid state.
AUTOMATIC
POWER CONTROL
Automatic gain control of all RF amplifier
stages, in conjunction with the exciters'
automatic power control, insures essentially
constant power output, even with variations in line voltages. This feature is standard in the TV -25H.
INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY
(IF) MODULATION
One of the important features of the TV25H is its true low -level IF Modulation,
which offers a top quality picture, and ex-
The visual and aural exciters have their
own independent,
power supplies.
regulated
solid -state
MAINTENANCE
STABILITY
EASE OF
reliability
One factor assuring RF stability is the use of
a solid -state IPA and conservatively rated
Type 8988 and 8916 ceramic tetrodes
In the TV-25H the visual and aural exciters
generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
"on channel" output frequency.
operating as VHF linear amplifiers. These
amplifier stages operate in a common grid
and screen configuration and tube
neutralization is not required.
Convenient access to components is
provided, permitting the transmitter to be
easily maintained. Visual and aural exciters
slide out and can operate independently
from the transmitter outside the cabinet.
Various exciter circuits, such as oscillators,
modulators and processing circuitry, are of
modular construction and can be removed
for maintenance or replacement.
electrical performance,
and simplicity of operation.
cels in
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low -level sideband filtering and very lineur
broadband amplifiers, the color signal is a
faithful reproduction of the signal applied
EXCELLENT COOLING SYSTEM
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
The cooling system of the TV -25H is quiet
and efficient, and employs direct drive
blowers, with the motors fully protected by
automatic reset devices.
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for easy access during
maintenance.
to the transmitter input.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Solid -state memory, timing and logic circuits offer complete and foolproof control
of all transmitter functions. Built -in memory
circuitry enables the entire transmitter to
return to the air automatically in the state it
was operating orior to an AC power interruption.
AGC SAMPLE
L
MCP
VISUAL
EXCITER
MODUL AT0*
AURAL
EXCITER
HARMONIC
BVEIEP
FILTER
BB
POWER
POWER
Surn.
SION.
POWER
~ SUPPLE
C
SINET
RMOwC
SOLID STATE
MODULATOR
control logic, in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is
also used to visually indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the
transmitter system. These indicator lights allow isolation of circuit faults, and are easily
remoted.
R807
The
EII
51w
ER
r
AGC SAMPLE
TV -25H BLOCK DIAGRAM
129
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-25H SPECIFICATIONS
FCC (System
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
"M")
CCIR (System
25 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connectors: 3'/s EIA standard.
174 -216 MHz (Channels 7.13).
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less
than 2 %.
-42
-26
-3.58 MHz
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
dB or better
dB or better
±0.5 dB
0 dB reference
±0.5 dB
dB or better
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
-30
"B")
kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/s" EIA standard.
174 -230 MHz (Band III).
±250 Hz (Maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
-4.43 MHz
-30 dB or better
-1.25 MHz
-26 dB or better
+0.5,
dB
-0.75 MHz
+0.5,
dB
-0.50 MHz
+0.5. -0.5 dB
Carrier
+1.5 MHz
,Reference
+3.0 MHz
±0.5 dB
+4.43 MHz
+0.5,
dB
+5.0 MHz
+0,5, -2.5 dB
+5.5 MHz
-26 dB or better
21
-3
-1
-1
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
±0.75 dB.
±0.75 dB.
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
1% or better.
3% or better.
3% or better.
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
1% or better.
±3° or better.
±3° or better.
1.0 dB or better.
Amplitude dev. 'min /s max better than 0.85 mod.
with signal No. 3 CCIR, from 10% to 85% in
to 5 MHz.
frequency ronge
±1° or better.
-40 dB below black to white transition.
2t 2 %, 20t 3% or better.
up to 4.5 MHz: ±50 ns.
from 4.5 MHz to 4.8 MHz: ±100 ns.
(measured with Nyquist demodulator meeting ARD
specifications.)
75 ohm system.
80 dB.
40 dB or better with ref. to ±50 kHz dev.
1
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K- FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
± 1° or better.
-55 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
at 3.58 MHz:
± 40 ns.
± 30 ns.
± 60 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
(referenced to standord curve -FCC).
VIDEO INPUT:'
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION (noise):
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE,
15 kHz and 250 kHz:
--
75 ohm system.
dB.
-80
(Not applicable).
(Not applicable).
±75 ns -10%
±100 ns + 11%
400 -1000
ns
±3% for
±200
±400 -1000
LF
+7%
±5%
ns
ns
variation.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
5
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/4" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis
with ±25 kHz deviation.
Up to 5 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31h" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±50 kHz.
600 ohms.
50 microseconds ±5 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30. 15,000 Hz).
Less than 1% from 30 to 15,000 Hz with ±50 kHz
der. (less than twice measured amount at 70 kHz
--55
-60
-55
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:'
kW at diplexer output.
60 dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
(Not applicable).
±250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
-10°
to +50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Seo level to 7500 ft.
97.3" W
e
31.5"
D
supply: 36" W
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
e
72" H. Weight: 3235 lbs. Power
24" D e 60.4" H. Weight: 950 lbs.
e
Power Input: 208/240 volts, ± 11 volts, 3 phase,
50/60 Hz. Power consumption (approx.): 58 kVA,
block picture. 10% aural: 49 kVA, overage picture (50% APL), 10% aural: 62 kVA, black picture at 20% aural; 53 kVA, average picture at
deviation).
dB or better rel. to ±50 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
40 dB or better.
-±250
Hz.
-
10° to +50 °C.
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 2286 meters.
247.1 cm W e 80 cm D e 183 cm H. Weight 1,470 Kg.
Power supply: 91.5 cm W e 61 cm O e 153.4 cm H.
Weight, 432 Kg.
Power input: 380/415 volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power
consumption (approx.): 58 kVA, black picture,
10% aural: 49 kVA, average picture (50% API),
10% aural: 62 kVA, block picture at 20% aural;
53 kVA, overage picture of 20% aural.
20% aural.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
'
'
'
'
r
'
Aher initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100%= peak of sync.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
Rel. to 100% AM modulation at ±50 kHz deviation.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC), 5.5 MHz (CCIR) from the visual carrier.
ORDERING INFORMATION
transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 7 -13, with operating tubes, transistors, ICs, solid state rectifiers, crystals, required pre -correction circuitry, low-level vestigial sideband filter, harmonic and color notch filters 994 -8405 -001
TV -25H, 25 kW VHF -TV
TV -25H 21 kW VHF-TV transmitter for CCIR System
ped as above
"B" service, 174 -230 MHz (Band III), 380/415 volts, 50 /60
1x,25WI50 t<jnARRIS COPRORATION 1980
Hz, equip-
994 -8405 -003
ADV. 517
130
www.americanradiohistory.com
TD.
IN U.5 .A.
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter- requires no
group delay correction, no tuning adjustments
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCE881NC
Solid -state exciters and IPA for enhanced reliability
Superior
quired
color
performance -minimal
corrections
re-
Fast turn -on time
TV-18H
1
8-Kilowatt VHF
High Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Automatic power control
IF
is a
standard feature
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers
Solid -state control circuits
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control systems
Compact design, with excellent accessibility
Pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy
installation
131
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-18H
provide the finest color performance and
sound fidelity available today. As no
envelope delay correction or adjustments
are required for the sideband filter,
stability, reliability and color quality are
greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment,
power output control and amplifier tuning
are straightforward and uncomplicated,
while design simplicity and conservatively
rated components assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum maintenance.
transmitter employs a single -ended
visual PA (8916 tetrode), and DC filaments
in every stage for an excellent signal -tonoise ratio.
The
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND
(TSB) FILTER
filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wove design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
previous VSB filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear phase characteristic and requires no group delay correction or tuning.
The Harris solid -state sideband
Additionally, the TSB filter has steep skirts
and high attenuation outside the channel
passband for excellent VSB wave shaping.
Ultra- linear driver cabinet with solid -state IPA
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter.
SOLID -STATE
The Harris TV -18H features a solid-state
IPA to greatly enhance reliability and
reduce tuning requirements, with a com-
pact cabinet configuration.
This advanced high -bond VHF -TV transmit-
ter requires only one aural and two visual
tubes to provide an 18- kilowatt visual and
a 3.6- kilowatt aural output. Under normal
operating conditions, the quick -heat tubes
permit transmitter turn -on within 20 seconds. A circulator between the visual
stages minimizes retuning requirements
after a tube change.
Surface acoustic wave technology is applied to vestigial sideband filtering in the
visual exciter. The Transversal SideBand
(TSB) filter displays a near -ideal bandpass
function for CCIR Systems "M" (FCC) and
"B" bandwidths. This, combined with the
filter's true linear phase characteristic, offers excellent reproduction of pulse
waveforms and encoded color information
without adjustment.
solid -state IPA contains broadband
so that periodic bandpass adjustment is not required -and it is fully
protected against damage caused by
overloads or load variations. For added
transmitter protection at turn on, RF drive is
brought up to operating level over a one to
two second interval, which permits DC
voltage stabilization before full RF drive
application to power amplifiers. The IPA is
fully metered for monitoring and maintenance, while excellent cooling helps
maintain long transistor life.
The
amplifiers,
SUPERB
COLOR
PERFORMANCE
addition to the solid -state IPA and the
filter, Harris' TV -18H incorporates such
state -of- the-art features as IF (intermediate
frequency) Modulation, true linear operation of power amplifiers, and solid-state
visual and aural exciter/modulators, to
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The Harris solid -state MCP -1V visual ex-
citer /modulator is an independent, self contained unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output can be varied up to one watt with a
single front panel control, or from a remote
location, without retuning of any kind.
The exciter is mounted in a pull -out drawer
and may be operated outside the main
transmitter for test purposes. A switch and
meter mounted on the front panel permit
monitoring exciter parameters. Power and
video gain controls are motor driven with
manual override provision to permit both
local and remote adjustment.
In
TSB
132
www.americanradiohistory.com
great reliability and
stability, excellent frequency response, and
truest color quality. It is designed for
The MCP -1V provides
minimum maintenance and set -up time,
and for remote control and unattended
TV-18 H
operation. This is all made possible through
the use of the latest design techniques, including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
aural exciter /modulator is a
solid-state, self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning. It is mounted in a pull -out drawer, and
may be operated with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The Harris
INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY
(IF) MODULATION
trots are motor driven and the necessary
remote control sampling points are built -in
on accessible terminal boards. Today, Harris TV transmitters are being successfully
operated worldwide with a variety of
remote control systems.
AUTOMATIC
POWER
CONTROL
Automatic gain control of all RF amplifier
stages, in conjunction with the exciters'
automatic power control, insures essentially
constant power output, even with variations in line voltages. This feature is standard in the TV -18H.
aural exciters have their
own independent, solid -state regulated
power supplies.
STABILITY
cels in electrical performance,
a solid -state IPA
and simplicity of operation.
the TV -18H the visual and aural exciters
generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
"on channel" output frequency.
In
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low -level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the color signal is a
faithful reproduction of the signal applied
to the transmitter input.
Vacuum tube filaments in the visual and
aural transmitters are operated from DC
power supplies to maximize the output
signal -to -noise ratio. Grid and screen supplies are 100% solid state.
The visual and
One of the important features of the TV18H is its true low -level IF Modulation,
which offers a top quality picture, and ex-
reliability
aural PAs exhibits very low ripple content.
It is designed for excellent regulation and
low video impedance for optimum picture
performance. In addition, for ease of
maintenance, this power supply, including
transformer and solid -state rectifiers, is
housed in a single assembly, mounted externally from the transmitter. Routine
maintenance access is provided by a
removable panel.
One factor assuring
RF stability is the use of
and conservatively rated
Type 8988, 8807 and 8916 ceramic
tetrodes operating as VHF linear amplifiers. These amplifier stages operate in a
common grid and screen configuration and
tube neutralization is not required.
EXCELLENT
COOLING SYSTEM
The cooling system of the TV -18H is quiet
and efficient, and employs direct drive
blowers, with the motors fully protected by
automatic reset devices.
POWER SUPPLIES
The HV power supply
for the visual and
EASE OF
MAINTENANCE
Convenient access to components is
provided, permitting the transmitter to be
easily maintained. Visual and aural exciters
slide out and can operate independently
from the transmitter outside the cabinet.
Various exciter circuits, such as oscillators,
modulators and processing circuitry, are of
modular construction and can be removed
for maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter functions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for easy access during maintenance.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Solid -state memory, timing and logic circuits offer complete and foolproof control
of all transmitter functions. Built -in memory
circuitry enables the entire transmitter to
return to the air automatically in the state it
was operating prior to an AC power inter-
ruption.
AGC SAMPLE
MCP
VISUAL
EXCITER
MODULATOR
control logic, in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is
also used to visually indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the
transmitter system. These indicator lights allow isolation of circuit faults, and are easily
remoted.
SOLID STATE
IPA
AMPLIFIER
PA
HARMONIC
8988
8916
FILTER
Iv
HV
POWER
SUPPLy
HV POWER
SUPPLy
18
kW
The
POWER
SUPPLY
AURAL
EXCITER
MODULATOR
-
CABINET
SOLID STATE
PA
HARMONIC
IPA
8807
FILTER
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
)
3 6 LL,,,
AGC SAMPLE
TV -18H BLOCK DIAGRAM
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and ATS. The ppwer con133
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV -18H SPECIFICATIONS
FCC (System
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
"M ")
kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'A EIA standard.
174 -216 MHz (Channels 7 -13).
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
-42 dB or better
-3.58 MHz
-26 dB or better
-1.25 MHz and lower
±0.5 dB
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
0 dB reference
Carrier
±0.5 dB
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
-30 dB or better
+4.75 MHz and higher
18
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
±0.75 dB.
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K- FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY,
± 1° or better.
-55 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
21 2 %, 12.51 less than 5% baseline disturbance.
VIDEOINPUT:'
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION (noise):
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE,
15 kHz and 250 kHz:
75 ohm system.
dB.
1% or better.
3% or better.
±3° or better.
1.0 dB or better.
CCIR (System
"B ")
kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/4" EIA standard.
174 -230 MHz (Bond Ill).
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
-30 dB or better
-4.43 MHz
-26 dB or better
-1.25 MHz
18
-3
MHz
MHz
+0.5,
dB
+0.5, -1 dB
+0.5, -0.5 dB
+1.5 MHz
+3.0 MHz
+4.43 MHz
+5.0 MHz
+5.5 MHz
±0.75 dB.
Reference
±0.5 dB
+0.5,
dB
+0.5, -2.5 dB
dB or better
-0.75
-0.50
Carrier
-1
-26
1% or better.
3% or better.
± 3°
Amplitude dev. smin /s max better than 0.85 mod.
with signal No. 3 CCIR, from 10% to 85% in
to 5 MHz.
frequency range
±1° or better.
-50 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 201 3% or better.
up to 4.5 MHz: ±50 ns.
from 4.5 MHz to 4.8 MHz: ±100 ns.
(measured with Nyquist demodulator meeting ARD
specifications.)
1
± 40 ns.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
± 30 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
± 60 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
(Not applicable).
(Not applicable).
±75
3.6 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/4" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE,
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre -emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis
with ±25 kHz deviation.
--55
60 dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
(Not applicable).
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:'
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:"
±250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
-10° to
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
+50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft.
97.3" W
x
31.5"
72" H. Weight: 3235 lbs. Power
24" D x 60.4" H. Weight: 950 lbs.
D x
supply: 36" W
x
input: 208/240 volts, ± 11 volts, 3 phase,
50/60 Hz. Power consumption (approx.): 55 kVA,
black picture, 10% aural; 46.8 kVA, overage picture (50% APL), 10% aural; 59 kVA, black picture at 20% aural; 50.2 kVA, overage picture of
20% aural.
Power
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE
WITHOUT NOTICE.
ns
-10%
±100ns+ 11%
400 -1000 ns ±3% for
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
--40
75 ohm system.
80 dB.
dB or better with ref. to
-80
±50
±200
LF
kHz dev.
ns
±400-1000
variation.
+7%
ns ±5%
Up to 3.6 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'A" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±50 kHz.
600 ohms.
50 microseconds ±5 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
Less than 1% from 30 to 15,000 Hz with ±50 kHz
dev. (Less thon twice measured amount at 70 kHz
--55
deviation).
60 dB or better rel. to ±50 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
-40 dB or better.
±250
Hz.
-10°
to +50 °C.
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Seo level to 2286 meters.
247.1 cm W x 80 cm D x 183 cm H. Weight 1,470 Kg.
Power supply: 91.5 cm W x 61 cm D x 153.4 cm H.
Weight: 432 Kg.
Power input: 380/415 volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power
consumption (approx.): 63.8 kVA, black picture,
10% aural; 54.3 kVA, average picture (50%
APL), 10% aural; 68.4 kVA, black picture at 20%
aural; 58.2 kVA, average picture of 20% aural.
After initial aging of 60 days.
' Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% =peak of sync.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
' Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
o After de- emphasis.
' Rel. to 100% AM modulation at ±50 kHz deviation.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC), 5.5 (CCIR) from the visual carrier.
s
s
ORDERING INFORMATION
standards service, Channels 7 -13, with operating tubes, transistors, ICs, solid state rectifiers, crystals, required pre- correction circuitry, low -level vestigial sideband filter, harmonic and color notch filTV -18H, 18 kW VHF -TV
transmitter for
FCC
ters
TV -18H 18 kW VHF -TV
ped as above
JR
2M 180
HARRIS COPRORATION
transmitter for
CCIR System
"B" service, 174 -230 MHz (Band III), 380/415 volts, 50/60 Hz, equip-
1980
994 -8497 -001
994 -8497 -003
ADO
134
www.americanradiohistory.com
548 PTD
IN
U S A
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCESSING
TV -10H
10- Kilowatt CCIR Band Ill
Color Television Transmitter
The Harris TV -10H, ten -kilowatt CCIR Band Ill color TV transmitter,
is designed specifically for use in CCIR Systems "B" and "M" -with
many features of particular interest to international broadcasters.
solid -state IPA /three-tube design greatly enhances reliability,
reduces tuning requirements and allows an unusually compact cabinet
configuration. With its reduced floor space requirements, and full front
access to all normally serviced components, the TV -10H is ideal for
installation in small quarters, such as a TV transmitter shelter.
The
Surface acoustic wave technology is applied to vestigial sideband
filtering in the visual exciter, so that the Transversal SideBand (TSB)
filter displays a near -ideal bandpass function for CCIR Systems "B"
and "M" bandwidths. This, combined with the filter's true linear
phase characteristic, offers excellent pulse and color transmissions
without adjustment.
The solid -state IPA contains broadband amplifiers, so no tuning is
required -and it is fully protected against
damage caused by overloads or load variations. Gradual (1 to 2 seconds) RF turn -on
permits DC voltage stabilization before RF
drive application to power amplifiers, for
added transmitter protection. The IPA is
fully metered for monitoring and maintenance, while excellent cooling helps maintain long transistor life.
SUPERB
PERFORMANCE
addition to the solid -state IPA and the
TSB filter, Harris' TV -10H incorporates such
state -of- the -art features as IF (intermediate
In
frequency) Modulation, true linear operation of power amplifiers, and solid -state
visual and aural exciter /modulators, to
provide the finest color performance and
sound fidelity available today. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments are
required for the sideband filter, stability,
reliability and color quality are greatly
enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power
output control and amplifier tuning are
straightforward and uncomplicated, while
design simplicity and conservatively rated
components assure long -term "hands -off"
operation and minimum maintenance.
transmitter employs a single -ended
visual PA (8807 tetrode) for low power
consumption, and DC filaments in the
visual stage for improved signal -to-noise
ratio.
The
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
FILTER
The Harris solid -state sideband filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF
frequency, rather than "on frequency" at
the full output power of the transmitter.
Unlike previous VSB filters, which require
from 600 to 1000 nsec of group delay
correction, and many adjustments, the TSB
filter has an inherent linear phase characteristic and requires no group delay correction. Other VSB filters need 6 to 12
tuning controls, while the Harris TSB filter
needs no tuning controls, as it requires no
tuning adjustments -ever!
Additionally, the TSB filter has steeper
skirts and higher attenuation outside the
channel passband for improved VSB wave
shaping.
Only
11/2
square inches in size, the TSB
a PC board in the
filter is mounted on
visual exciter.
SOLID -STATE
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The Harris solid -state MCP-1V visual ex135
www.americanradiohistory.com
citer /modulator is an independent, selfcontained unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power output can be varied up to one watt with
a single front panel control, or from a remote location, without retuning of any kind.
The exciter is mounted in a pull -out drawer
and may be operated outside the main
transmitter for test purposes. A switch and
meter mounted on the front panel permit
monitoring exciter parameters. Power and
video gain controls are motor driven with
manual override provision.
The MCP -1V provides great reliability and
stability, excellent frequency response, and
truest color quality. It is also designed for
minimum maintenance and set -up time, and
for remote control and unattended operation. This is all made possible through the
use of the latest design techniques, including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self- contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel,
or by remote control, with no need for retuning. It is mounted in a pull -out drawer,
and may be operated with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The
INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY (IF)
MODULATION
One of the features of the TV -10H is its
true low -level IF Modulation, which offers
a top quality picture, and excels in electrical performance, reliability and simplicity
of operation.
the TV -10H the visual and aural exciters generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
In
"on channel" output frequency.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an ex-
tremely linear broadband diode ring modulator, low -level sideband filtering and very
linear broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithful reproduction of the
signal applied to the transmitter input.
maintained without an emergency power
source during power failures.
The control logic and protective circuitry,
in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is also used to visually indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the transmitter system.
These indicator lights allow isolation of
circuit faults, and are easily remoted.
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and unattended operation.
The power controls are motor driven and
the necessary remote control sampling
points are built -in on accessible terminal
boards.
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide in an unattended mode, with and without remote
control access. In addition, Harris' transmitter design is consistent with anticipated
automatic transmitter needs in the future.
EXCELLENT
COOLING SYSTEM
The cooling system of the TV -10H is quiet
and efficient, and employs a direct drive
blower, with the motor fully protected by
automatic reset devices. Tube manufacturers' recommendations are met or exceeded at altitudes up to 3000 meters,
enhancing tube life without power derating.
POWER SUPPLIES
The HV power supply is a 3 -phase choke
input supply, exhibiting very low ripple
content. It is designed for excellent regulation and low video impedance for optimum
picture performance. This power supply,
including transformer and solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a single assembly,
mounted externally from the transmitter.
Routine maintenance access is provided
by a removable panel.
Vacuum tube filaments in the visual transmitter are operated from DC power supplies to maximize the output signal -to -noise
ratio. Grid and screen supplies use solid state regulators.
The visual and aural exciters have their
own independent, solid -state regulated
power supplies.
AUTOMATIC
POWER CONTROL
Automatic gain control of all RF amplifier
stages, in conjunction with the exciters'
automatic power control, insures essentially constant power output, even with variations in line voltages. This feature is standard in the TV -10H.
STABILITY
One factor assuring RF stability is the use
of a solid -state IPA and conservatively
rated Type 8988 and 8807 ceramic tetrodes
operating as VHF linear amplifiers. These
amplifier stages operate in a common grid
and screen configuration and tube neutralization is not required.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
Total front access to components is provided, permitting the transmitter to be installed against a wall. Visual and aural
exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside the
cabinet. Various exciter circuits, such as
oscillators, modulators and processing
circuitry, are of modular construction and
can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter functions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for convenient access during
maintenance.
OLIC$.4TATE
EXCITER
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Solid -state memory, timing and logic cirCMOS IC's for design
simplicity and enhanced reliability -offer
complete and foolproof control of all transmitter functions. Built -In memory circuitry
enables the entire transmitter to return to
the air automatically in the stage it was
operating prior to a partial or full power
failure. The memory is continuous, and Is
cuits- employing
SOLICTST A TE
FILTER
TV -10H BLOCK DIAGRAM
136
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV -10H SPECIFICATIONS
CCIR System M, 525 Lines, 60 Hz (FCC Type)
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white plc.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
13 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output
connector: 31/4" EIA standard. (FCC Channels
174 -216 MHz.
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2%.
-3.58 MHz
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
-42
-26
dB or better
dB or better
+0 5 dB
0 dB reference
+05 dB
-30 dB or better
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
±0.75 dB.
0 %.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:=
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASEN
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
2t K FACTOR:
12.51 GAIN & DELAY RESPONSE:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
7 -13).
3% or better.
10% or better.
1° or better.
55 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2% maximum.
5% Total Baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
±40 ns
at 3.58 MHz:
±30 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
±60 ns
t
-
(referenced to standard curve -FCC)
75 ohm system.
VIDEO INPUT:%
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
-80
dB.
±3° or less relative to blanking.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
1.3 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector:
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
Vs"
EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
microseconds.
± 0.5 dB rel. to pre -emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with ± 25 kHz deviation.
60 dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
-46 dB or better relative to ±25 kHz deviation.
±250 Hz.
Power input: 208/240 Volts, .11 Volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Typical power
consumption: 30 kVA, black picture; 27 kVA, average picture.
Power factor: .97 typical.
75
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:°
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
-
SERVICE CONDITIONS
-10°
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
to +50° C (14° to 122° F).
to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 10,000 feet (3048 meters).
Transmitter cabinet: 71 in. W x 32.3 in. D x 71.7 in. H.
(180 cm x 82 cm x 182 cm).
Weight: 1,874 lbs. (850 kg).
Power supply: 48 in. W x 24 in. D x 60.7 in. H. (122 cm x 61 cm
Weight: 1,477 lbs. (670 kg).
0
x
153 cm).
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
'After initial aging of 60 days.
'Pedestal set to 50 IRE Units carrier plus 200 kHz set to 0 dB reference. Sweep amplitude set to 20 IRE units peak to peak. Pedestal varied
from 20 to 80 IRE units.
'Maximum variation of sub-carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
'Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10%. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10%
peak to peak.
-30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
'Rel. to 100% AM modulation at ±50 kHz deviation.
,Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC), 5.5 MHz (CCIR) from the visual carrier.
'Bridging, loop through input with
ORDERING INFORMATION
"M" service, 174 -218 MHz 208/240 volts, 60 Hz, with
operating tubes, transistors, IC's, solid -state rectifiers, crystals, required pre -correction circuitry, low
level sideband filter, harmonic filters
TV -10H 10 kW VHF -TV transmitter for CCIR System
994-8224-003
137
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV -10H SPECIFICATIONS
CCIR System B, 625 Lines, 50 Hz
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
COLOR SYSTEM:
TYPE MODULATION:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
VIDEO INPUT IMPEDANCE:'
VIDEO INPUT LEVEL:
RF OUTPUT:
AM NOISE:'
HUM AND LOW FREQUENCY:
PERIODIC NOISE 10 kHz to 5.2 MHz:
TOTAL RANDOM AND PERIODIC NOISE
UN WEIGHED:
MODULATION CAPABILITY:
RF POWER OUTPUT VARIATION:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VARIATION:,
LUMINANCE NONLINEARITY:'
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN!
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
2t K FACTOR:
201 GAIN 6 DELAY RESPONSE:
CHROMANANCE INTERMODULATION:s
BLANKING VARIATION:
FIELD FREQUENCY SQUARE WAVE TILT:
INCIDENTAL PHASE MODULATION:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
CARRIER STABILITY:
HARMONIC RADIATION:
10 kW.
PAL, SECAM.
A5C negative.
174 -230 MHz, Band Ill, Channels E5 -E12.
75 ohms.
.7 to 2.0 volts, peak to peak, sync. negative.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/4" EIA, flanged with unflanged adapter.
-60
dB or better peak to peak.
peak to peak.
- 40 dB
- 55
dB RMS or better.
0%, sync equal to 100%.
Less than 2% total variation for pedestal levels 10% to 75% of sync.
Less than .0.75 dB.
10% or better.
- 4.43
-30 dB
-22 dB
MHz
MHz
-0.75 MHz to 5.5 MHz
+5.5 MHz
3% or better.
- 1.25
+0
5
-22
dB
dB
±1° or better.
2% maximum.
5% or less total baseline disturbance.
Less than 2% total distortion.
Less than 2% total variation.
Less than 2% total variation.
± 3` or less relative to blanking.
Complies with system requirements.
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
80 dB or better below sync peak.
-
AURAL PERFORMANCE
TYPE OF EMISSION:
POWER OUTPUT:
CARRIER STABILITY:
FM.
1 kW at diplexer output.
± 250 Hz (for 30 days relative to frequency offset from 5.5 MHz
visual carrier).
50 ohms output connector: 31/4" EIA, flanged with unflanged adapter.
600 ohms, balanced.
0 to +12 dBm.
RF OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
AUDIO DISTORTION:
±50 kHz.
±.5 dB relative to
50 microsecond pre- emphasis.
Less than 1% from 30 to 15,000 Hz with 50 kHz deviation: less than 2%
for ± 70 kHz deviation.
55 dB or better relative to 100% modulation.
60 dB or better relative to ±50 kHz deviation.
Less than 1% relative to 100% AM modulation from 30 to 15,000 Hz
with ± 50 kHz deviation.
46 dB or better relative to ±50 kHz deviation.
± 250 Hz.
Power Input: 380/415 volts, ±18 volts, 50 Hz. Typical power
consumption; 30 kVA, Black picture; 26 kVA Average picture.
Power factor: .97 typical.
-
AM NOISE:
FM NOISE:
-
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:
-
INTERCARRIER NOISE:
FREQUENCY STABILITY:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
- 10" to +50°
C (14° to 122° F).
to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 3048 meters (10,000 feet).
Transmitter cabinet: 180 cm W x 82 cm D x 182 cm H.
(71" x 32.3" x 71.7 ").
Weight: 850 kg (1,874 lbs.).
Power supply: 122 cm W x 61 cm D x 153 cm H. (48" x 24"
Weight: 670 kg (1,477 lbs.).
0
x
60.7 ").
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
'Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to5.5 MHz.
,Noise measured with respect to black to white transition.
'Pedestal set to 42% of sync, carrier plus 200 kHz set to 0 dB reference. Sweep amplitude set to 20 IRE units peak to peak. Pedestal varied from 15 to 65%
'Measured with a 5 step riser signal. Test signal No. 3 CC!R REC 421 -3.
"-Measured with a three level chromanance signal with constant pedestal level.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TV-10H 10 kW VHF -TV transmitter for CCIR System "B" service, 174-230 MHz (Band III), 380/415 volts,
50 Hz, with operating tubes, transistors, IC's solid -statt rectifiers, crystals, required pre-correction circuitry,
low level sideband filter, harmonic filters
RP-3M -180
C
994-8224-001
ADV. 561 PTO. IN U.S.A.
Harns Corporation 1980
138
www.americanradiohistory.com
rif
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HHANDIING
BTD- 50L2
50- Kilowatt Dual
VHF Low Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Two independent, complete 25- kilowatt transmitters
for total redundancy and on- the -air reliability
"Hot" standby exciters, modulators and sideband
filter
Harris' Dualtran output switching system allows parallel, single transmitter or alternate /main operation
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filters -no
group delay, no tuning adjustments required
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for
superb color and sound reproduction
IF
Latest design for unattended operation
Simple solid -state logic control
DC
filaments on directly heated cathodes
Less
maintenance
Modular pre -wired cabinets for easiest installation
139
www.americanradiohistory.com
front view, doors off- showing the two independent 25watt transmitters and the center control cabinet.
BTD -5012,
TOTAL REDUNDANCY FOR
COMPLETE RELIABILITY
Harris BTD -50L2, 50- kilowatt dual
low band VHF TV transmitter, is designed
for television broadcasters who want the
utmost in reliability and performance
with the flexibility for remote control operation, attended operation or unattended /computer operation. This dual
transmitter consists of two completely independent 25- kilowatt transmitters operating in parallel, combined through the
Harris unique- design Dualtran RF switching system.
The
-
With the BTD -50L2 you get two aural
exciter /modulators, two visual exciter/
modulators, two TSB filters, two visual
and aural IPA's, two visual and aural
PA's, and two HV power supplies -in
short, total redundancy! Complete reliability!
The Dualtran switching system is factory
assembled in one cabinet, and can interface with either a hybrid or a notch
diplexer.
(intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low -level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
combine to provide outstanding color and
sound fidelity. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments are required for
IF
the solid -state Transversal SideBand
filter(s), stability, reliability and color
quality are greatly enhanced.
Frequency adjustment, power output
control and amplifier tuning are straightforward and uncomplicated, while design simplicity and conservatively rated
components in the BTD -50L2 assure longterm "hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance. DC filaments in the visual
and aural stages provide improved
signal -to -noise ratios.
is FCC type accepted,
and complete factory power testing assures performance to specifications.
Transmitters A and B combined to the
station loads (test mode).
The switching operation from one mode
to any other mode requires
three seconds.
less than
The transmitter
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING. In the event
of a malfunction of one -half of the parallel combination, the Harris BTD -50L2
offers automatic and instantaneous reduction to one -fourth authorized power.
This function will occur without interruption of the carrier. With the touch
of a button, half -power operation is
achieved in less than three seconds.
Visual and aural exciters are connected
in a hot standby condition, and will automatically switch in less than 10 milliseconds in case of failure in either unit. In
all modes, aural follows visual for simplified logic control and reliable operation.
OPERATING VERSATILITY. Four modes
of operation may be obtained electrically by means of control pushbuttons on
the output switcher; by control buttons
on the transmitter control panel; or by
remote control. These are:
Transmitters A and B combined and
diplexed to the antenna (normal operating mode).
Transmitter A diplexed to the antenna
and transmitter B to the station loads
(alternate /main or emergency opera-
tion).
Transmitter B diplexed to the antenna
and transmitter A to the station loads
(alternate /main or emergency operation).
140
www.americanradiohistory.com
When using a notch diplexer, three other
operating modes may be selected manually by changing links on the Dualtran
output switching cabinet: transmitters A
and B combined and diplexed to the station loads; transmitter A diplexed into
station loads; and transmitter B diplexed
into station loads.
CONTROL CABINET. The RF Phasing and
Control Panel and the Automatic Exciter/
Modulator Switcher are standard equipment with the BTD -50L2, and are located in a control cabinet that is typically
placed between the two independent 25kilowatt transmitters. The cabinet is the
same height as the transmitters, and the
same color, to provide a pleasing installation. All adjustments for dual operation may be made at this cabinet.
Harris exciter /modulators, with IF
Modulation, allow phasing of transmitters for dual operation to be accomplished simply and reliably at low power
The
levels from the RF Phasing and Control
Panel. In addition to phasing control, the
panel has provisions for monitoring total
combined aural power and total combined visual power in forward and reflected modes.
The Automatic Exciter /Modulator Switch er is also a standard part of the con-
trol cabinet, and allows for either manual
or automatic selection of exciters.
o
CONTROL CABINET OPTIONS. An optional System Control Panel can be used
to control the transmitter system from the
control cabinet or from an adjacent
room. Controls include: transmitter on/
off; output switcher mode select; exciter/
modulator mode select; transmitter power
raise /lower; and power metering.
Another option, the Input Patch Panel,
provides additional flexibility by bypassing all of the inout switching coaxial relays for single transmitter operation, or
for maintenance and testing. Coaxial cables allow patching from any aural or
visual exciter to any aural or visual transmitter IPA input. The low -level RF flow
is shown on the front of the panel for
ease of operation.
Input Bypass Switcher is a valuable option where the dual transmitter is
operating at reduced power in the combined mode, and it is desired to return
to full power of one transmitter when operating in the single transmitter mode.
The RF Input Bypass Switcher does this
automatically, and can be disabled by a
switch or returned to manual control.
The
RF
Auxiliary, remotely switched correction
circuits for differential phase and differential gain are available to optimize
operation
in a
single transmitter mode.
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
FILTER
The Harris solid -state sideband
filter
is
advanced surface acoustic wave
design, and shapes visual sidebands at
the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the full output power of the
VSB
transmitter. Unlike conventional
filters, the TSB filter has an inherent
linear phase characteristic, which means
that it requires no group delay correction. A conventional VSB filter requires
from 600 to 1,000 nsec of group delay
correction, and many adjustments -the
TSB filter requires no correction or adVSB
justments -ever!
A conventional
filter needs 6 to 12 tuning controls-the
TSB filter needs no tuning controls, as it
requires no tuning adjustment -eyed
an
In addition, the TSB filter has steeper
skirts and higher attenuation outside the
channel passband for improved VSB
wave shaping.
Only
filter
square inches in size, the TSB
is mounted on a PC board in the
visual exciter(s).
112
ADVANCE -DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The Harris solid -state MCP visual
modulator
is
an
The MCP visual exciter /modulator (one in each of the two 25kilowatt transmitters included in the BTD -5012) is a solid -state,
independent
self- contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris'
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter,
and measures only 1,2 square inches.
TSB
filter (right)
tained unit which provides a fully processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output can be varied up to one watt with
a single front panel control, or from a remote location, without retuning of any
kind.
The master oscillator is located in the
visual exciter in a proportional controlled
oven, and master oscillator frequency
can be varied ±500 Hz. With one control
the station engineer can make precise
frequency adjustments to both the visual
and aural carriers. Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in
the visual exciter in a proportional controlled oven. Visual modulation takes
place at 37.0 MHz. Sidebands are filtered
by the Harris TSB filter, which may be
bypassed easily for transmitter tuning
and maintenance.
is mounted in a pullout drawer and may be operated outside
the main transmitter for test purposes. A
switch and meter mounted on the front
panel permit monitoring exciter parameters. Power and video gain controls are
motor driven with manual override provision.
The visual exciter
independent, self -con-
The aural exciter /modulator
is mounted
drawer, and may be operated with the drawer extended for test
purposes. The exciter has been designed
for remote control and unattended operation.
in a pull -out
IF
MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
BTD -50L2 is its true low -level IF Modulation, which offers a top quality picture,
and excels in electrical performance, reliability and simplicity of operation.
In the BTD -50L2 the visual and aural exciters generate fully modulated low -level
IF signals. The output of a common crystal controlled reference oscillator is used
to raise the individual IF signal to the
desired "on channel" output frequency.
The Harris visual exciter /modulator pro-
As it occurs at much lower power levels
vides great reliability and stability, excellent frequency response, and truest
color quality. It is also designed for minimum maintenance and set -up time, and
for remote control and unattended operation. This is all made possible through
the use of the latest design techniques, including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
than conventional designs, intermediate
frequency modulation needs fewer circuits to produce a fully processed, quality picture signal. Less than one volt of
video signal is needed to modulate the
RF carrier.
The Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self- contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel,
or by remote control, with no need for
retuning.
exciter/
is then translated to the
desired "on channel" signal through stacircuitry
frequency
determining
ble
housed in a proportional controlled oven
in the visual exciter. A digital phase locked loop is also used to guarantee absolute frequency stability.
This information
Audio information is used to modulate a
direct FM 32.5 MHz carrier derived from
the master oscillator in the visual exciter.
The Harris ring modulator design permits
modulation percentages to approximately
2% without compromising transmitter performance -and eliminates most pre -distortion circuitry. This results in exceptional
color performance and nearly perfect
signal linearity. Even such colors as highly saturated yellow and cyan are faithfully reproduced with IF Modulation.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an ex-
tremely
linear
broadband
diode
ring
141
www.americanradiohistory.com
modulator, low -level sideband filtering
and very linear broadband amplifiers,
the broadcast signal is a faithful reproduction of the signal applied to the
transmitter input. IF Modulation results
in low incidental phase noise, and the
elimination of many transmission problems at their source. This means that no
half -way measures -such as numerous
correction, compensation and feedback
circuits -are required to eliminate the
effects of these problems later on.
normal AC control functions, is also used
to visually indicate, through indicator
lights, the operating status of the transmitter system. These indicator lights allow easy isolation of circuit faults.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
The BTD- 50L2's built -in memory circuitry
enables the entire transmitter to return
to the air automatically in the stage it
operating immediately prior to a
partial or full power failure. When the
transmitter returns to "on- air ", status
lights provide visual indication of any
was
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter functions is achieved through
the use of solid -state memory, timing and
logic circuits. A self -charging emergency
power source is provided to maintain
control logic memory during periods of
power line failure.
The solid -state control logic and protec-
tive circuitry, in addition to commanding
remote control and unattended operation. The power controls are motor driven and the necessary remote control
sampling points are built -in on accessible
terminal boards. High and low power
switching functions may also be remote
controlled.
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide in an
unattended mode, with and without remote control access. In addition, Harris'
transmitter design is consistent with anticipated automatic transmitter needs in
the future.
malfunctions caused by the outage.
POWER SUPPLIES
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
The HV power supplies are multi -phase,
full wave rectifying systems exhibiting
very low ripple content prior to output
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
filtering. They are designed for excellent regulation and low video impedance
for optimum picture performance. Each
power supply, including transformer and
solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a single
assembly, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access
is provided by a removable panel.
Directly heated vacuum tube filaments
are fed with DC to maximize the output
signal -to -noise ratio. Grid and screen
supplies use solid -state regulators.
The 1300 -watt driver cabinets have independent solid -state HV power supplies,
and the visual and aural exciters have
their own independent, solid-state, regulated power supplies.
MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
EASE OF
Total transmitter component accessibility
is provided, front and back. Visual and
aural exciters slide out and can operate
independently from the transmitter outside the exciter /driver cabinet. Various
exciter circuits, such as oscillators, modulators and processing circuitry, are of
modular construction and can be removed
for maintenance or replacement.
All adjusments for dual
transmitter operation
may be made from the
center control cabinet of
the BID-501.2. An RF
Phasing and Control
Panel and an Automatic
Exciter /Modulator
Switcher are standard
equipment in the cabinet
-and
several optional
control panels are
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for convenient access during
maintenance. A complete system of overload indicators is also provided in each
cabinet for monitoring transmitter operation. In the event of a transmitter malfunction, an examination of the indicators
will locate the problem area.
available.
The transmitter has been built in a modular fashion so that cabinets may be
separated into convenient, easy -to- handle
sub -assemblies to facilitate installation.
142
www.americanradiohistory.com
1.1
SS
c-7
VIS
MOP
I
;
040
-jtII-
1.
1L
GC
MCI
MOO
Oµ
e
.11
tIL
t.9
-.:.,
RF
Ill"
HIGH)
POWER
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
I40i"
o
ryo
FLOW BTD -50L2 WITH HYBRID DIPLEXER
POWER
EE
OUTPUT
SWITCNEE
ú
l
DC
HIGH)
I40í
HIGH)
_L
l
AUfAI
AURAL
PA
PA
Ill" HIGH)
-IINPUT
SWIMMER
DRIVER
VISUAL
PA
AURAL
DRIVER
IA
ll
,
--L.
[
BTD -50L2 FLOOR PLAN
143
www.americanradiohistory.com
BTD -50L2 SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:t
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
50 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector:
54 -88 MHz (Channels 2 -6).
±250
3% or
Hz (maximum
less.
31/4
EIA standard.
variation over 30 days).
than 2 %.
MHz
MHz and lower
Carrier to 0.75 MHz
Less
-3.58
-1.25
-42
-26
K- FACTORS:
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
4-0.75 dB.
3% or better.
3% or better.
0.5 dB or better.
+1° or better.
55 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
.05
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:2
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:2
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:4
dB or better
dB or better
±0.5 dB
0 dB reference
±0.5 dB
-30
dB or better
-
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
to 2.1
MHz:
at 3.58 MHz:
±
±
±
40 ns
30 ns
70 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
(referenced to standard curve -FCC)
VIDEO INPUT:2
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION (noise):
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE, 15 kHz and 250 kHz:
75 ohm system.
dB.
-80
(Not applicable).
(Not applicable).
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE- EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE.
AM NOISE:6
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:8
10 kW at
diplexcr output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'4" EIA Std.
+10 dBM, 4-2 dB.
+25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre -emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with
dB or better rel. to +25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
-60
±25
kHz deviation.
(Not applicable).
-250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
t
2
3
4
s
6
-10°
0 to
to 450 °C (14° to 122 °F).
95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft.
Transmitters (2): Each 941/2"W x 31'/2"D x 72 "H.
Weight, each 2195 lbs.
Input Switcher Cabinet (1): 22Vs "W (without side panels) x 2444 "D (with
front and rear doors) x 72 "H. Weight, 300 lbs. RF Output Switcher (1):
48 "W x 34 "D x 72 "H. Weight, 1350 lbs. Power Supplies (2): Each 48 "W
x 24 "D x 604 "H. Weight, each 1475 lbs.
Power input: 208/240 Volts, ±11 Volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption: 114 kVA, black picture; 98 kVA, average picture. Power factor: .97 typical.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% = peak of sync.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
Rel. to 100% AM modulation at ±50 kHz deviation.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
BTD -50L2 50 kW VHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 2-6, with
operating tubes, transistors,
IC's, solid -state rectifiers, crystals, required pre- correction circuitry, low -level vestigial sideband filter, harmonic and
color notch filters
SPCO-3M-377
994 -8039 -001
ADV. 479 PTD. IN U.S.A.
144
www.americanradiohistory.com
Two independent, complete 18- kilowatt transmitters for
total redundancy
HARRIS
"Hot" standby exciters, modulators and sideband filter
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANOI ING
Harris' Dualtran output switching system allows parallel,
single transmitter or alternate main operation
More than a two -to -one improvement in color performance specifications
BTD-36L2
36- Kilowatt Dual
VHF Low Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter(s) -no
group delay correction, no tuning adjustments required
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for superb
color and sound reproduction
IF
Latest design for unattended operation
Simple solid -state logic control
DC
Less
filaments on directly heated cathodes
maintenance
Modular pre -wired cabinets for low -cost installation
145
www.americanradiohistory.com
TOTAL REDUNDANCY FOR
COMPLETE RELIABILITY
The Harris BTD-36L2, 36- kilowatt dual low
band VHF TV transmitter, is designed for
television broadcasters who want the utmost in reliability and performance -with
the flexibility for remote control operation,
attended operation or unattended /computer operation. This dual transmitter consists of two completely independent 18kilowatt transmitters operating in parallel,
combined through the Harris unique -design
Dualtran RF switching system.
With the BTD -36L2 you get two aural exciter /modulators, two visual exciter/
modulators, two TSB filters, two visual and
aural IPA's, two visual and aural PA's, and
two HV power supplies -in short, total
redundancy! Complete reliability!
The Dualtran switching system is factory
assembled in one cabinet, and can interface with either a hybrid or a notch diplexer.
(intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low -level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
are employed to provide outstanding color
and sound fidelity. In the MCP-1V visual exciter/modulator, Harris has combined IF
Modulation and Transversal SideBand
filtering to achieve better than two -to -one
improvements in the important color
parameters of differential phase, differential gain and frequency response!
IF
Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are straight -
forward and uncomplicated, while design
simplicity and conservatively rated components in the BTD -36L2 assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance. DC filaments in the visual
and aural stages provide improved signal to -noise ratios.
transmitter is FCC type accepted, and
complete factory power testing assures performance to specifications.
The
(alternate /main
tion).
or emergency opera-
Transmitter B diplexed to the antenna
and transmitter A to the station loads
(alternate /main or emergency operation).
Transmitters A and B combined to the
station loads (test mode).
operation from one mode to
any other mode requires less than three
seconds.
The switching
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING. In the event of
a malfunction of one -half of the parallel
combination, the Harris BTD -36L2 offers
automatic and instantaneous reduction to
one -fourth authorized power. This function
will occur without interruption of the
carrier. With the touch of a button, half power operation is achieved in less than
three seconds.
Visual and aural exciters are connected in
a hot standby condition, and will automatically switch in less than 10 milliseconds in case of failure in either unit. In
all modes, aural follows visual for simplified logic control and reliable operation.
OPERATING VERSATILITY. Four modes of
operation may be obtained electrically by
means of control pushbuttons on the output
switcher; by control buttons on the
transmitter control panel; or by remote
control. These are:
Transmitters A and
B
combined
and
diplexed to the antenna (normal
operating mode).
Transmitter A diplexed to the antenna
and transmitter B to the station loads
146
www.americanradiohistory.com
When using a notch diplexer, three other
operating modes may be selected manually
by changing links on the Dualtran output
switching cabinet: transmitters A and B
combined and diplexed to the station
loads; transmitter A diplexed into station
loads; and transmitter B diplexed into station loads.
CONTROL CABINET. The RF Phasing and
Control Panel and the Automatic Exciter /Modulator Switcher are standard
equipment with the BTD -36L2, and are
located in a control cabinet that is typically
placed between the two independent 18kilowatt transmitters. The cabinet is the
same height as the transmitters, and the
same color, to provide a pleasing installation. All adjustments for dual operation
may be made at this cabinet.
Harris exciter /modulators, with IF
Modulation, allow phasing of transmitters
for dual operation to be accomplished
simply and reliably at low power levels
from the RF Phasing and Control Panel. In
addition to phasing control, the panel has
provisions for monitoring total combined
The
aural power and total combined visual
power in forward and reflected modes.
The Automatic Exciter /Modulator Switcher
is also a standard part of the control
cabinet, and allows for either manual or
automatic selection of exciters.
CONTROL CABINET OPTIONS.
op-
An
tional System Control Panel can be used to
control the transmitter system from the control cabinet or from an adjacent room.
Controls include: transmitter on /off; output
switcher mode select; exciter /modulator
mode select; transmitter power raise /lower;
and power metering.
Another option, the Input Patch Panel,
provides additional flexibility by bypassing
all of the input switching coaxial relays for
single transmitter operation, or for
maintenance and testing. Coaxial cables
allow patching from any aural or visual exciter to any aural or visual transmitter IPA
input. The low -level RF flow is shown on the
front of the panel for ease of operation.
The RF Input Bypass Switcher is a
valuable
option where the dual transmitter is
operating at reduced power in the combined mode, and it is desired to return to
power of one transmitter when
operating in the single transmitter mode.
The RF Input Bypass Switcher does this
automatically, and can be disabled by a
switch or returned to manual control.
full
Auxiliary, remotely switched correction circuits for differential phase and differential
gain are available to optimize operation in
a single transmitter mode.
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
FILTER
The Harris solid -state sideband
filter
is
an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
older VSB filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear phase characteristic, which
means that it requires no group delay correction. A conventional VSB filter requires
from 600 to 1000 nsec of group delay correction, and many adjustments -the TSB
filter requires
no correction or adjustments -ever! A conventional VSB filter
needs 6 to 12 tuning controls -the TSB
filter needs no tuning controls, as it requires
no tuning adjustment -ever!
In
addition, the
TSB
filter has steeper skirts
and higher attenuation outside the channel
passband for improved VSB wave shaping.
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter(s).
The MCP-1V visual exciter /modulator (one in each of the two 18kilowatt transmitters included in the BTD -3612) is a solid- state, independent self- contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris' TSB
filter (right) is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter, and
measures only 1'h square inches.
ADVANCED -DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
color performance MCP-1V visual exciter /modulator
is an
independent, self -contained unit
which provides a fully processed onchannel signal. Combining IF Modulation
and recent breakthroughs in filtering
technology, the MCP-1V offers the best
color performance specifications ever
offered in VHF -TV transmitting equipment!
The Harris solid -state maximum
aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning.
The Harris
Power output of the visual exciter/
modulator can be varied with a single front
panel control, or from a remote location,
without retuning of any kind.
Audio information is used to modulate a
direct FM 32.5 MHz carrier derived from
the modulated oscillator in the aural exciter. This information is then translated to
the desired "on channel" signal through
stable frequency determining circuitry
housed in a proportional controlled oven in
the visual exciter. A digital phase -locked
loop is also used to guarantee absolute
frequency stability.
The master oscillator is located in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled oven,
The aural exciter /modulator is mounted in
a pull -out drawer, and may be operated
and master oscillator frequency can be
varied ±500 Hz. With 'one control the station engineer can make precise frequency
adjustments to both the visual and aural
carriers. Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in the visual exciter
in a proportional controlled oven. Visual
modulation takes place at 37.0 MHz.
Sidebands are filtered by the Harris TSB
filter, which may be bypassed easily for
transmitter tuning and maintenance.
with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The exciter has been designed for remote
control and unattended operation.
pullout
drawer and may be operated outside the
main transmitter for test purposes. A switch
and meter mounted on the front panel permit monitoring exciter parameters. Power
and video gain controls are motor driven
with manual override provision.
The visual exciter is mounted in a
The Harris visual exciter /modulator pro-
vides great reliability and stability, excellent frequency response, and truest color
quality. It is also designed for minimum
maintenance and set -up time, and for
remote control and unattended operation.
This is all made possible through the use of
the latest design techniques, including
Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
IF
MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
BTD -3612 is its true low -level IF Modulation, which offers a top quality picture, and
excels in electrical performance, reliability
and simplicity of operation.
In the BTD -3612 the visual and aural exciters generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
on channel" output frequency.
As it occurs at much lower power levels
than other designs, intermediate frequency
modulation needs fewer circuits to produce
a fully processed, quality picture signal.
Less than one volt of video signal is needed
to modulate the RF carrier.
modulator design permits
modulation percentages to approximately
2% without compromising transmitter performance -and eliminates most pre The Harris ring
147
www.americanradiohistory.com
distortion circuitry. This results in exceptional color performance and nearly
perfect signal linearity. Even such colors as
highly saturated yellow and cyan are
faithfully reproduced with IF Modulation.
the use of solid -state memory, timing and
logic circuits. A self- charging emergency
power source is provided to maintain control logic memory during periods of power
line failure.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
The solid -state control logic and protective
circuitry, in addition to commanding nor-
low-level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithful reproduction of the
signal applied to the transmitter input. IF
Modulation results in low incidental phase
noise, and the elimination of many
transmission problems at their source. This
means that no half -way measures -such as
numerous correction, compensation and
feedback circuits -are required to eliminate the effects of these problems later on.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter functions is achieved through
mal AC control functions, is also used to
visually indicate, through indicator lights,
the operating status of the transmitter
system. These indicator lights allow easy
isolation of circuit faults.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
BTD- 36L2's built -in memory circuitry
enables the entire transmitter to return to
the air automatically in the stage it was
operating immediately prior to a partial or
full power failure. When the transmitter
returns to "on-air ", status lights provide
visual indication of any malfunctions caused
by the outage.
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and unattended operation.
The power controls are motor driven and
the necessary remote control sampling
points are built -in on accessible terminal
boards. High and low power switching
functions may also be remote controlled.
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide in an unattended mode, with and without remote
control access. In addition, Harris' transmitter design is consistent with anticipated
automatic transmitter needs in the future.
The
POWER SUPPLIES
The HV power supplies are multi -phase, full
wave rectifying systems exhibiting very low
ripple content prior to output filtering. They
are designed for excellent regulation and
low video impedance for optimum picture
performance. Each power supply, including
transformer and solid -state rectifiers, is
housed in a single assembly, mounted externally from the transmitter. Routine maintenance access is provided by a removable
panel.
Directly heated vacuum tube filaments are
fed with DC to maximize the output signal to -noise ratio. Grid and screen supplies use
solid -state regulators.
1300 -watt driver cabinets have independent solid -state HV power supplies,
and the visual and aural exciters have their
own independent, solid- state, regulated
power supplies.
The
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
Total transmitter component accessibility is
provided, front and back. Visual and aural
exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside
the exciter /driver cabinet. Various exciter
circuits, such as oscillators, modulators and
processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter funcAll adjustments for dual
transmitter operation
may be made from the
center control cabinet of
the BTD -3614. An RF
Phasing and Control
Panel and an Automatic
Exciter /Modulator
Switcher are standard
equipment in the cabinet
-and several optional
control panels are
available.
148
www.americanradiohistory.com
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for convenient access during
maintenance. A complete system of
overload indicators is also provided in each
cabinet for monitoring transmitter operation. In the event of a transmitter malfunction, on examination of the indicators will
locate the problem area.
transmitter has been built in a modular
fashion so that cabinets may be separated
into convenient, easy -to- handle subassemblies to facilitate installation.
The
O
0.004.t
-1 I.
Li- i
vi
:;
.10
011
IN( m00
r
-o-140
1
0111C 1000
It
r -34-roo1*
t)
0,0
!
tl
0000(
5100
Ea<
00
Olt
10/0
Otr
U
INC
6
.000
IA 0
01.
r -434'14,
I.( 000
0,001l
II(0111
41010.
000
ttttt
COWS..
41)
kik
Od i
>
Of
1.101.010.
[0010.
(OW.
001
1)1000,040,11
010.0 nt 4
00
OAD
<0011ac1
RF
FLOW BTD-36L2 WITH HYBRID DIPLEXER
T
POWER
RF
SUPPLY
OUTPUT
SWITCHER
(60h" HIGH)
24"
POWER
SUPPLY
(60V." HIGH)
(72" HIGH)
1----36
AURAL
VISUAL
DRIVER
PA
PA
(72" HIGH)
NV)"
INPUT
SWITCHER
224"
DRIVER
VISUAL
AURAL
PA
PA
T
--I
31'7"
94)7"
BTD-36L2 FLOOR PLAN
149
www.americanradiohistory.com
BTD -36L2 SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
36 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/e EIA standard.
54 -88 MHz (Channels 2 -6).
+250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Block to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
3% or less.
thon 2 %.
MHz
MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
Less
-42 dB or better.
-26 dB or better.
-3.58
-1.25
+0.5 dB.
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
+0.75 dB.
3% or better.
3% or better.
0.5 dB or better.
± 1° or better.
-53 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K -FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT:
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
± 40 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
± 30 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
± 60 ns.
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION (noise):
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE, 15kHz and 250 kHz:
(Not applicable).
(Not applicable).
0 dB reference.
±0.5 dB.
-30 dB or better.
-80 dB.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:°
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:°
7.2 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/e" EIA Std.
+10 dBM, +2 dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre -emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with
dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
-60
±25 kHz deviation.
(Not applicable).
+250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
-10°
to +50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft.
Transmitters (2): Each 941/2"W e 311/2"D x 72 "H. Weight, each 2195 lbs. Input
Switcher Cabinet (1): 221/2 "W (without side panels) x 241/4"D (with front and
rear doors) x 72 "H. Weight, 300 lbs. RF Output Switcher (1): 48 "W x 34 "D x
72 "H. Weight, 1350 lbs. Power Supplies (2): Each 36 "W x 24 "D x 601/4 "H.
Weight, each 950 lbs.
Power input: 208/240 Volts, +11 Volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption:
86 kVA, black picture; 72 kVA, average picture. Power factor: .97 typical.
After initial aging of 60 days.
' Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% =peak of sync.
' Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
r Rel. to 100% AM modulation at +50 kHz deviation.
2
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
BTD -36L2 36 kW dual VHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 2 -6, with operating tubes, semi -conductors,
crystals, VSB filter, harmonic and color notch filters, input and output switchers
JK 3
5M 777
994- 8037 -001
ADV
150
www.americanradiohistory.com
504 PTD
IN
U S A
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS ANO
INFORMATION HANDLING
More than a two -to -one improvement in color performance specifications
BT -35L2
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter -no
group delay correction, no tuning adjustments required
35- Kilowatt VHF
Low Band
IF Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for
superb color and sound reproduction
Color Television
Transmitter
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
Latest design for unattended operation
Low power consumption
Solid -state control logic
DC filaments on
directly heated cathodes
Less maintenance
Modular, pre -wired cabinets for easiest installation.
151
www.americanradiohistory.com
Ina
M
s.
BT -35L2,
Harris' BT -35L2 is the most advanced
35 kilowatt low band VHF television
transmitter on the market. Designed
to meet the high performance stan-
dards demanded by today's discriminating broadcaster, this transmitter incorporates the latest state -ofthe -art features, such as Harris' solid state Transversal
filter.
IF
SideBand
(TSB)
(intermediate frequency) Modula-
tion, low -level sideband filtering, true
linear operation of power amplifiers
and solid -state visual and aural exciter /modulators combine to provide
outstanding color and sound fidelity.
As no envelope delay correction or
adjustments are required for the VSB
filter, stability, reliability and color
quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output
control and amplifier tuning are
straightforward and uncomplicated,
while design simplicity and conservatively rated components in the BT35L2 assure long -term "hands -off"
operation and minimum maintenance.
Parallel visual PA's (8807's) provide
for redundancy in operation and excellent cancellation of antenna and
transmission line reflections. DC fila-
ments in the visual and aural stages
provide improved signal -to -noise
ratios.
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
FILTER
The Harris solid -state VSB filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave
design, and shapes visual sidebands
at the IF frequency, rather than on
frequency" at the full output power of
the transmitter. Unlike previous VSB
filters, the TSB filter has an inherent
linear phase characteristic, which
means that it requires no group delay
correction. Formerly, VSB filters required from 600 to 1,000 nsec of
group delay correction, and many
adjustments -the TSB filter requires
no correction or adjustments -ever!
Previous VSB filters needed 6 to 12
tuning controls -the TSB filter needs
no tuning controls, as it requires no
tuning adjustment -ever!
addition, the TSB filter has steeper
skirts and higher attenuation outside
the channel passband for improved
VSB wave shaping.
In
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the
TSB filter is mounted on a PC board
in the visual exciter.
SOLID -STATE
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The
The BT -35L2 consists of a 1.3- kilowatt
exciter /driver; an aural power
amplifier; a visual driver; and two 18-
kilowatt visual
cepted, and meets or exceeds CCIR
specifications (furnished on request).
power amplifiers.
There are two external HV power supplies. The transmitter is FCC type ac-
Harris solid -state visual
exciter /modulator is an independent,
self- contained unit which provides a
fully processed on- channel picture
signal. Power output can be varied up
to one watt with a single front panel
control, or from a remote location,
152
www.americanradiohistory.com
front doors removed
without retuning of any kind.
The master oscillator is located in the
visual exciter in a proportional controlled oven, and master oscillator frequency can be varied ±500 Hz. With
one control the station engineer can
make precise frequency adjustments
to both the visual and aural carriers.
Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled
oven. Visual modulation takes place
at 37.0 MHz. Sidebands are filtered by
the Harris TSB filter, which may be
bypassed easily for transmitter tuning
and maintenance.
The visual exciter is mounted in a
pull -out drawer and may be operated
outside the main transmitter for test
purposes.
A switch and meter
mounted on the front panel permit
monitoring exciter parameters. Power
and video gain controls are motor
driven with manual override provi-
sion.
The Harris visual exciter /modulator
provides great reliability and stability,
excellent frequency response, and
truest color quality. It is also designed
for minimum maintenance and set -up
time, and for remote control and unattended operation.
The Harris aural exciter /modulator is
a solid- state, self- contained unit
which furnishes a fully processed
aural signal at a level up to 10 watts.
Power output can be set with a single
knob on the front panel, or by remote
control, with no need for retuning.
Audio information is used to modulate
direct FM 32.5 MHz carrier derived
from the modulated oscillator in the
aural exciter. This information is then
translated to the desired "on channel"
a
signal through stable frequency
determining circuitry housed in a
proportional controlled oven in the
visual exciter. A digital phase -locked
loop is also used to guarantee absolute frequency stability.
The aural exciter /modulator is
mounted in a pull -out drawer, and
may be operated with the drawer extended for test purposes. The exciter
has been designed for remote control
and unattended operation.
IF MODULATION
One of the most important features of
the BT -35L2 is its true low -level IF
(intermediate frequency) Modulation,
which offers a top quality picture, and
excels in electrical performance,
reliability and simplicity of operation.
Due to the low -level techniques,
which include the use of devices such
as an extremely linear broadband
diode ring modulator, low -level side band filtering and very linear broadband amplifiers, the broadcast signal
is a faithful reproduction of the signal
applied to the transmitter input. IF
Modulation results in low incidental
phase noise, and the elimination of
many transmission problems at their
source. This means that no half -way
measures -such as numerous correction, compensation and feedback
circuits -are required to eliminate the
effects of these problems later on.
SOLID-STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter functions is achieved
through the use of solid -state
memory, timing and logic circuits. A
AURAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
self- charging emergency
power
source is provided to maintain control
logic memory during periods of
power line failure. The solid -state
control logic and protective circuitry,
in addition to commanding normal AC
control functions, is also used to
visually indicate, through indicator
lights, the operating status of the
transmitter system. These indicator
lights allow easy isolation of circuit
faults.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
The BT- 35L2's built-in memory circuitry enables the entire transmitter to
return to the air automatically in the
state it was operating immediately
prior to a partial or full power failure.
When the transmitter returns to "onair", status lights provide visual indication of any malfunctions caused
by the outage.
supply, including transformer and
solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a
single assembly, mounted externally
from the transmitter. Routine maintenance access is provided by a removable panel.
Directly heated vacuum tube filaments are fed with DC to maximize
the output signal -to -noise ratio. Grid
and screen supplies use solid -state
regulators.
The 1300 -watt driver cabinet has an
independent solid -state HV power
supply, and the visual and aural exciters have their own independent,
solid- state, regulated power supplies.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring
circuits have been designed specifically for remote control and unattended operation. The power controls are motor driven and the necessary remote control sampling points
are built -in on accessible terminal
Also, Harris' transmitter
design is consistent with anticipated
automatic transmitter needs in the
future.
boards.
POWER SUPPLIES
The HV power supplies are multiphase, full wave rectifying systems
exhibiting very low ripple content
prior to output filtering. They are
designed for excellent regulation and
low video impedance for optimum
picture performance. Each power
Total transmitter component accessibility is provided, front and back.
Visual and aural exciters slide out and
can operate independently from the
transmitter outside the exciter /driver
cabinet. Various exciter circuits, such
as oscillators, modulators and processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for
maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters
are used to monitor required transmitter functions. Meter panels are of
double- hinged construction for convenient access during maintenance. A
complete system of overload indicators is also provided in each
cabinet for monitoring transmitter
operation. In the event of a transmitter
malfunction, an examination of the indicators will locate the problem area.
The transmitter has been built in a
modular fashion so that cabinets may
be separated into convenient, easy to- handle sub -assemblies to facilitate
installation.
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER
HARMONIC
8122
8792
8807
FILTER
7KW
AURAL
POWER
SUPPLY
1
POWER
SUPPLY
AMPLIFIER
8807
VISUAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
AMPLIFIER
7219
8177
AMPLIFIER
POWER
POWER
HARMONIC
8806
SPLITTER
COMBINER
FILTER
POWER
AMPLIFIER
SUPPLY
8807
COLOR
NOTCH
FILTER
35KW
VISUAL
BT -35L2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
153
BT -35L2 SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
FCC
35 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/2 EIA standard.
54 -88 MHz (Channels 2 -6).
±250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
-3.58 MHz
-42 dB or better
-1.25 MHz and lower
26 dB or better
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
-0
5
dB
0 dB reference
-0.5 dB
-30 dB
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
±0.75 dB.
3% or better.
3% or better.
1.0 dB or better
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
1° or better.
-53 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2%, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
-40 ns
or better
*_
at 3.58 MHz:
-30ns
at4.18MHz:
c60ns
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
VIDEO INPUT:'
75 ohm system.
HARMONIC RADIATION:
-80 dB.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE- EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
7kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/2" EIA Std.
10dBm, *2dB.
x 25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
-0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15.000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis
with x 25 kHz deviation.
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:'
-60 dB or better rel. to t 25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
FREQUENCY STABILITY:,
±250 Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
-10° to +50°C (14° to
122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft.
157'/ "W x 311/2'D x 72 "H. Weight: 4,415 lbs. Power
Supplies (2): each 36 "W x 24 "D x 60"11.
Weight each: 950 lbs.
Power input: 208/230/380 volts, ± 11 volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz.
Power consumption: 82 kVA, black picture; 68 kVA,
average picture. Power factor; .95 typical.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
'
After initial aging of 60 days.
' Measured at 65% and
' Maximum variation of
'
7
15% of modulation. Reference 100% = peak of sync.
sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub -Carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub-carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10%. Sub carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
Alter de- emphasis.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz from the visual carrier.
ORDERING INFORMATION
BT-35L2 35 kW VHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 2 -6, with operating tubes, semiconductors, crystals, VSB filter, color notch filter and harmonic filters
CP-1M-1278
994- 8032 -001
ADV. 530 PTD. IN U.S.A
154
www.americanradiohistory.com
Advanced Transversal SideBand filter
delay, no tuning adjustments required
HARRIS
- no
group
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for
superb color and sound reproduction
IF
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
Latest design for unattended operation
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
BT -25L2
25- Kilowatt VHF
Low Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Low power consumption
Simple solid -state logic control
DC
Less
filaments on directly heated cathodes
maintenance
Modular, pre -wired cabinets for easiest installation
o
www.americanradiohistory.com
0
o-
oo.
p_
-
C-
C
Ó
-
.
C:-
--
:
,
a
BT -25L2,
UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE
Harris' BT -25L2 is the most advanced 25kilowatt low band VHF television transmitter on the market. Designed to meet
the high performance standards demanded by today's discriminating broadcaster, this transmitter incorporates the
latest state -of- the -art features, such as
Harris' solid -state Transversal SideBand
(TSB) filter.
(intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low -level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
combine to provide outstanding color and
sound fidelity. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments are required for
the VSB filter, stability, reliability and
color quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are straightforward and uncomplicated, while design
simplicity and conservatively rated comIF
ponents in the BT -25L2 assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance.
Low power consumption and a more compact transmitter design result from the
use of a single ended visual PA (8916
tetrode). DC filaments in the visual and
aural stages provide improved signal -tonoise ratios.
BT -25L2 consists of a 1.3 kilowatt
exciter /driver, an aural power amplifier,
a visual power amplifier, and an external
HV power supply. It is FCC type accepted, and meets or exceeds CCIR specifications. Complete factory testing assures
performance to specifications.
The
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
vanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF
frequency, rather than "on frequency"
at the full output power of the transmitter. Unlike conventional VSB filters, the
TSB filter has an inherent linear phase
characteristic, which means that it requires no group delay correction. A conventional VSB filter requires from 600 to
1000 nsec of group delay correction, and
many adjustments-the TSB filter requires
no correction or adjustments -ever! A
conventional VSB filter needs 6 to 12
tuning controls -the TSB filter needs no
tuning controls, as it requires no tuning
adjustment ever!
In addition, the TSB filter has steeper
skirts and higher attenuation outside the
channel passband for improved VSB
wave shaping.
Only
filter
FILTER
The Harris solid -state VSB
front view, doors off.
filter
is
an ad-
156
www.americanradiohistory.com
square inches in size, the TSB
mounted on a PC board in the
visual exciter.
11/2
is
ADVANCE -DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
exciter/
modulator is an independent, self -contained unit which provides a fully proThe Harris solid -state MCP visual
cessed on- channel picture signal. Power
output can be varied up to one watt with
a single front panel control, or from a re-
mote location, without retuning of any
kind.
The master oscillator is located in the visual exciter in a proportional controlled
oven, and master oscillator frequency can
be varied ±500 Hz. With one control the
station engineer can make precise frequency adjustments to both the visual
and aural carriers. Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in
the visual exciter in a proportional controlled oven. Visual modulation takes
place at 37.0 MHz (38.9 MHz for CCIR
B). Sidebands are filtered by the Harris
TSB filter, which may be bypassed easily
for transmitter tuning and maintenance.
The visual exciter is mounted in a pull-
out drawer and may be operated outside the main transmitter for test purposes. A switch and meter mounted on
the front panel permit monitoring exciter
parameters. Power and video gain controls are motor driven with manual override provision.
The Harris visual exciter /modulator pro-
vides great reliability and stability, excellent frequency response, and truest
color quality. It is also designed for minimum maintenance and set -up time, and
for remote control and unattended operation. This is all made possible through
the use of the latest design techniques,
including Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
The Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self- contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at
a level up to 10 watts. Power output can
be set with a single knob on the front
panel, or by remote control, with no need
for retuning.
Audio information is used to modulate a
direct FM 32.5 MHz (33.4 MHz for CCIR B)
carrier derived from the modulated oscillator in the aural exciter. This information is then translated to the desired "on
channel" signal through stable frequency
determining circuitry housed in a proportional controlled oven in the visual exciter. A digital phase -locked loop is also
used to guarantee absolute frequency
stability.
The aural exicter /modulator is mounted
in a pull -out drawer, and may be oper-
ated with the drawer extended for test
purposes. The exciter has been designed
for remote control and unattended operation.
visual exciter /modulator (above) is a solid- state, independent, self-contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris' advanced
TSB filter (right) is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter, and
measures only 1,2 square inches.
The MCP
IF
MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
BT -25L2 is its true low -level IF Modulation, which offers a top quality picture,
and excels in electrical performance, reliability and simplicity of operation.
aural exciters generate fully modulated low -level
IF signals. The output of a common crystal controlled reference oscillator is used
to raise the individual IF signal to the desired "on channel" output frequency.
In the BT -25L2 the visual and
As it occurs at much lower power levels
than conventional designs, intermediate
frequency modulation needs fewer circuits to produce a fully processed, quality
picture signal. Less than one volt of video
signal is needed to modulate the RF
carrier.
The Harris ring modulator design permits
modulation percentages to approximate-
ly 2% without compromising transmitter
performance -and eliminates most pre distortion circuitry. This results in exceptional color performance and nearly perfect signal linearity. Even such colors as
highly saturated yellow and cyan are
faithfully reproduced with IF Modulation.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring
modulator, low -level sideband filtering
and very linear broadband amplifiers,
the broadcast signal is a faithful reproduction of the signal applied to the transmitter input. IF Modulation results in low
incidental phase noise, and the elimination of many transmission problems at
their source. This means that no half -way
measures -such as numerous correction,
compensation and feedback circuits -are
required to eliminate the effects of these
problems later on.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter functions is achieved through
the use of solid -state memory, timing and
logic circuits. A self- charging emergency
power source is provided to maintain control logic memory during periods of
power line failure.
The solid -state control logic and protec-
tive circuitry, in addition to commanding
normal AC control functions, is also used
to visually indicate, through indicator
lights, the operating status of the transmitter system. These indicator lights allow easy isolation of circuit faults.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
BT- 25L2's built -in memory circuitry
enables the entire transmitter to return
to the air automatically in the stage it
was operating immediately prior to a
partial or full power failure. When the
transmitter returns to "on- air ", status
lights provide visual indication of any
malfunctions caused by the outage.
The
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering anc monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and unattended operation. The power controls are motor driven
and the necessary remote control sampling points are built -in on accessible
terminal boards.
157
www.americanradiohistory.com
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide in an unattended mode, with and without remote
control access. In addition, Harris' transmitter design is consistent with anticipated
automatic transmitter needs in the future.
of overload indicators is also provided in
each cabinet for monitoring transmitter
operation. In the event of a transmitter
malfunction, an examination of the indicators will locate the problem area.
The transmitter has been built in a mod-
ular fashion so that cabinets may be
separated into convenient, easy -to- handle
sub -assemblies to facilitate installation.
Additionally, the compact design of the
minimizes space requirements in
the transmitter building.
BT -25L2
EXCITER /DRIVER
CABINET
The exciter /driver
cabinet is an entire
1300 -watt transmitter and can be used as
such should it be desirable. This feature
is most valuable during an emergency
when the whole cabinet can be operated
from a 5- kilowatt, 3- phase, 230 -volt generator.
POEM
.10.4
0 0 0
STABILITY
One factor assuring
NIS
stability
O
the use
of conservatively-rated Type 8792 and
8916 ceramic tetrodes operating as VHF
linear amplifiers. The amplifier stages operate in a common grid and screen configuration and tube neutralization is not
RF
is
Mal MVO=
required.
POWER SUPPLIES
NNW
MI
wWe
The HV power supply
is a multi -phase,
wave rectifying system exhibiting
very low ripple content prior to output
filtering. It is designed for excellent regulation and low video impedance for optimum picture performance. This power
supply, including transformer and solid state rectifiers, is housed in a single assembly, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access
is provided by a removable panel.
W e
'W.
full
i
r:
m
y
Visual and aural exciter /modulators and IPA.
Directly heated vacuum tube filaments
are fed with DC to maximize the output
signal -to -noise ratio. Grid and screen
supplies use solid -state regulators.
The 1300 -watt driver cabinet has an in-
dependent solid -state HV power supply,
and the visual and aural exciters have
their own independent, solid-state, regulated power supplies.
MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
EASE OF
Total transmitter component accessibility
is provided, front and bock. Visual and
aural exciters slide out and can operate
independently from the transmitter outside the exciter /driver cabinet. Various
exciter circuits, such as oscillators, modulators and processing circuitry, are of
modular construction and can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
RF
monitoring, metering and status light system.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter
functions. Meter panels are of double hinged construction for convenient access
during maintenance. A complete system
158
www.americanradiohistory.com
_
MCP
VISUAL
7759
5122
EXCITER
MODULATOR
.MONIC
6R
A
_J
< If kW
COLOR
NOTCH
FILLER
Vv2
PS
.L
<
RMONIC
HOER
EXCITER
5
kW
MODERATOR
BT -25L2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
BT
-25L2
FLOOR PLAN
POWER SUPPLY
24"
(6015" HIGH)
48"
\
_DOOR SWING (TYP.)
31"
93'2"
31'2"
DRIVER
VISUAL
AMPLIFIER
(72" HIGH)
AURAL
AMPLIFIER
31"
9412"
159
www.americanradiohistory.com
BT -25L2 SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
CCIR (System
FCC
25 kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/2" EIA standard.
54 -88 MHz (Channels 2 -6).
+250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
21
3% or
3% or
Less
Carrier
_
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
__
_
_
_
_
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:2
±0.75
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
dB or better
dB or better
±0.5 dB
0 dB reference
±0.5 dB
_
dB or better
-30
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:3
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
0.5 dB or better.
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:4
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
+1°
±0.75
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:6
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:?
FREQUENCY STABILITY:
-3
-1
_
_
_
_
_
Reference
±0.5 dB
_ _
_
_
+0.5, -1 d8
+0.5, -2.5 dB
-26
dB or better
dB.
1
+1°
up to 4.5 MHz: +50 ns.
from 4.5 MHz to 4.8 MHz: ±100 ns.
(measured with Nyquist demodulator meeting ARD
specifications).
75 ohm system.
-
-80
-40
(Not applicable).
(Not applicable).
dB.
dB or better with ref. to
+50 kHz dev.
+75 ns -10%
±200 ns +7%
±100 ns +11%
±400.1000 ns +5%
400 -1000 ns +3% for LF variation
kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/2" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
+25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
+0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30. 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis
with +25 kHz deviation.
5
60 dB or better rel. to +25 kHz dev.
55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
Up to 5 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3')" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, +2 dB.
+50 kHz.
600 ohms.
50 microseconds +5 microseconds.
+0.5 dB rel. to pre -emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
Less than 1% from 30 to 15,000 Hz with ±50
kHz dev. (Less than twice measured amount at
70 kHz deviation).
-60 dB or better rel. to ±50 kHz dev.
55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
-40 dB or better.
-
(Not applicable).
±250
dB or better
dB or better
+0.5,
dB
____ +0.5,
dB
+0.5, -0.5 dB
frequency range to 5 MHz.
or better.
-40 dB pp below black to white transition.
2t 2 %, 20t 3% or better.
or better.
-55 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
+40 ns
at 3.58 MHz:
+30 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
+60 ns
(referenced to standard curve -FCC)
75 ohm system.
80 dB.
--
-30
-26
3% or better.
3% or better.
Amplitude dev. smin /s max better than 0.85 mod.
with signal No. 3 CCIR, from 10% to 85% in
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
Carrier
+1.5 MHz
+3.0 MHz
+4.43 MHz
__
_
+5.0 MHz
+5.5 MHz
dB.
3% or better.
3% or better.
VIDEO INPUT:5
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION (noise):
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE,
15 kHz and 250 kHz:
_
less.
than 2 %.
-4.43 MHz
-1.25 MHz
-0.75 MHz
-0.50 MHz
Less
-42
-26
___
kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/2" EIA standard.
54 -68 MHz (Channels 3 and 4, Band 1).
+250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
less.
than 2 %.
-3.58 MHz
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
"B ")
Hz.
±250
Hz.
-10°
to
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
-10°
to +50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft.
941/2"W x 311/2"D x 72 "H. Weight: 2195 lbs.
Power supply: 48 "W x 24 "D x 60% "H.
Weight: 1475 lbs.
Power input: 208/240 Volts,
11 Volts, 3 phase,
50/60 Hz. Power consumption: 57 kVA, black
±
picture; 49 kVA, average picture. Power factor:
.96 typical.
2
3
4
3
6
z
e
0 to
-
50 °C.
95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 2400 meters.
240cm W x 80cm D x 183cm H. Weight: 998 kg.
Power supply: 122cm W x 61cm D x 153cm H.
Weight: 670 kg.
Power input: 380/415 Volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz.
Power consumption: 53 kVA, black picture; 45
kVA, average picture (10:1 vision to sound ratio). Power factor: .96 typical.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% = peak of sync.
Maximum variation of sub-carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub-carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub- carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de-emphasis.
Rel. to 100% AM modulation at +50 kHz deviation.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC), 5.5 MHz (CCIR) from the visual carrier.
ORDERING INFORMATION
BT-25L2
25 kW VHF-TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 2-6, with operating tubes, transistors, IC's,
solid -state rectifiers, crystcls, required pre -correction circuitry, low -level vestigial sideband filter, harmonic and color
notch filters
kW VHF -TV transmitter for CCIR System "B" service, 54 to 68
equipped as above
BT -25L2 21
MHz
[Band IL
CP-1 .5M-977
994. 8030 -001
380/415 volts, 50/60 Hz,
994 -8030-003
ADV. 472 PTD. IN U.S.A.
160
www.americanradiohistory.com
rji
w
HARRIS
(:OMMIINI(,4tIONti ANO
INFORMATION
KAMIIN(:
More than a two -to -one improvement in color performance specifications
Advanced Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter -no group
delay correction, no tuning adjustments required
Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for superb
color and sound reproduction
IF
BT-18L2
18- Kilowatt VHF
Low Band
Color Television
Transmitter
Latest design for unattended operation
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
Low power consumption
Simple solid -state logic control
DC
Less
filaments on directly heated cathodes
maintenance
Modular, pre -wired cabinets for easiest installation
161
www.americanradiohistory.com
N
UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE
Incorporating the latest state -of- the -art
features, such as Harris' solid -state Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter, the BT -1812 is
the most advanced VHF -TV transmitter on
the market in its power range.
Designed to meet the high performance
standards demanded by today's discriminating broadcaster, Harris' BT -18L2
employs IF (intermediate frequency)
Modulation, low -level sideband filtering,
true linear operation of power amplifiers
and solid -state visual and aural exciter /modulators to provide outstanding
color and sound fidelity. In the MCP -1V
visual exciter /modulator, Harris has combined IF Modulation and Transversal
SideBand filtering to achieve better than
two -to -one improvements in the important
color parameters of differential phase,
differential gain and frequency response!
Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are straight-
forward and uncomplicated, while design
simplicity and conservatively rated components in the transmitter assure long -term
"hands -off" operation and minimum
maintenance.
Low power consumption and a more com-
pact transmitter design result from the use
of a single ended visual PA (8807 tetrode).
DC filaments in the visual and aural stages
provide improved signal -to -noise ratios.
of a 1.3 kilowatt exciter /driver, an aural power amplifier, a
visual power amplifier, and an external HV
power supply. It is FCC type accepted, and
meets or exceeds CCIR specifications.
Complete factory testing assures performance to specifications.
The BT -1812 consists
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
FILTER
The Harris solid -state vestigial sideband
is an advanced surface acoustic wave
design, and shapes visual sidebands at the
filter
162
www.americanradiohistory.com
IF
frequency, rather than "on frequency" at
the full output power of the transmitter.
Unlike conventional filters, the TSB filter
has an inherent linear phase characteristic,
which means that it requires no group
delay correction. An older model filter requires from 600 to 1000 nsec of group
delay
correction,
and
many
adjust-
ments -the TSB filter requires no correction
or adjustments -ever! A conventional filter
needs 6 to 12 tuning controls -the TSB
filter needs no tuning controls, as it requires
no tuning adjustment ever!
addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts
and higher attenuation outside the channel
passband for improved wave shaping.
In
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter.
ADVANCED -DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER -MODULATORS
The Harris solid -state maximum color per-
formance MCP-1V visual exciter /modulator
independent, self-contained unit
is an
which provides a fully processed onchannel signal. Combining IF Modulation
and recent breakthroughs in filtering
technology, the MCP-1V offers the best
color performance specifications ever
offered in VHF -TV transmitting equipment!
Power output of the visual exciter/
modulator can be varied with a single front
panel control, or from a remote location,
without retuning of any kind.
oscillator is located in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled oven,
and master oscillator frequency can be
varied ±500 Hz. With one control the station engineer can make precise frequency
adjustments to both the visual and aural
carriers. Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in the visual exciter
in a proportional controlled oven. Visual
modulation takes place at 37.0 MHz (38.9
MHz for CCIR B). Sidebands are filtered by
the Harris TSB filter, which may be bypassed easily for transmitter tuning and
maintenance.
The master
The MCP -1V visual exciter /modulator (above) is o solid -state, independent, self- contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris' advanced TSB filter (right) is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter, and measures only 11/2 square inches.
IF
The visual exciter is mounted in a pull -out
drawer and may be operated outside the
main transmitter for test purposes. A switch
and meter mounted on the front panel permit monitoring exciter parameters. Power
and video gain controls are motor driven
with manual override provision.
The Harris visual exciter /modulator provides great reliability and stability, ex-
cellent frequency response, and truest color
quality. It is also designed for minimum
maintenance and set -up time, and for
remote control and unattended operation.
This is all made possible through the use of
the latest design techniques, including
Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to 10 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning.
The Harris
Audio information is used to modulate a
direct FM 32.5 MHz (33.4 MHz for CCIR B)
carrier derived from the modulated oscillator in the aural exciter. This information is then translated to the desired "on
channel" signal through stable frequency
determining circuitry housed in a proportional controlled oven in the visual exciter.
A digital phase -locked loop is also used to
guarantee absolute frequency stability.
aural exciter /modulator is mounted in
pull -out drawer, and may be operated
with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The exciter has been designed for remote
control and unattended operation.
The
a
MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
BT -18L2 is its true low -level IF Modulation,
which offers a top quality picture, and excels in electrical performance, reliability
and simplicity of operation.
In the BT -18L2 the visual and aural exciters
generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
"on channel" output frequency.
feedback circuits -are required to eliminote the effects of these problems later on.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter functions is achieved through
the use of solid -state memory, timing and
logic circuits. A self -charging emergency
power source is provided to maintain control logic memory during periods of power
line failure.
The solid -state control logic and protective
As it occurs at much
lower power levels
than older designs, intermediate frequency
modulation needs fewer circuits to produce
a fully processed, quality picture signal.
Less than one volt of video signal is needed
to modulate the RF carrier.
circuitry,
modulator design permits
modulation percentages to approximately
2% without compromising transmitter per forrhance -and eliminates most predistortion circuitry. This results in exceptional
color performance and nearly perfect
signal linearity. Even such colors as highly
saturated yellow and cyan are faithfully
reproduced with IF Modulation.
AUTOMATIC
The Harris ring
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low -level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithful reproduction of the
signal applied to the transmitter input. IF
Modulation results in low incidental phase
noise, and the elimination of many
transmission problems at their source. This
means that no half -way measures -such as
numerous correction, compensation and
in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is also used to
visually indicate, through indicator lights,
the operating status of the transmitter
system. These indicator lights allow easy
isolation of circuit faults.
RECYCLING
built -in memory circuitry enables the entire transmitter to return to the
air automatically in the state it was operating immediately prior to a partial or
full power failure. When the transmitter returns to "on- air ", status lights provide visual
indication of any malfunctions caused by the
The BT- 18L2's
outage.
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering artd monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and unattended operation.
The power controls are motor driven and
the necessary remote control sampling
points are built -in on accessible terminal
boards.
163
www.americanradiohistory.com
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide in an unattended mode, with and without remote
control access. In addition, Harris' transmitter design is consistent with anticipated
automatic transmitter needs in the future.
cabinet for monitoring transmitter operation. In the event of a transmitter malfunction, an examination of the indicators will
locate the problem area.
The
transmitter has been built
in a
modular
fashion so that cabinets may be separated
into convenient, easy -to- handle subassemblies to facilitate installation. Additionally, the compact design of the BT18L2 minimizes space requirements in the
transmitter building.
EXCITER /DRIVER
CABINET
exciter /driver cabinet is an entire
1300 -watt transmitter and can be used as
such should it be desirable. This feature is
most valuable during an emergency when
the whole cabinet can be operated from a
5- kilowatt, 3- phase, 230 -volt generator.
The
MP
STABILITY
MY.
11100n1
o
.
o
o
,`
0 0 0
i I.
:'y
': \
INN
POWER SUPPLIES
-
Mt wvw
®
Visual and aural exciter /modulators and IPA.
Directly heated vacuum tube filaments are
fed with DC to maximize the output signal to -noise ratio. Grid and screen supplies use
solid -state regulators.
driver cabinet has an independent solid -state HV power supply,
and the visual and aural exciters have their
own independent, solid- state, regulated
power supplies.
The 1300 -watt
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
Total transmitter component accessibility is
provided, front and back. Visual and aural
exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside
the exciter /driver cabinet. Various exciter
circuits, such as oscillators, modulators and
processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for
maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for convenient access during
maintenance. A complete system of
overload indicators is also provided in each
i'.
..
The HV power supply is a multi -phase, full
wave rectifying system exhibiting very low
ripple content prior to output filtering. It is
designed for excellent regulation and low
video impedance for optimum picture performance. This power supply, including
transformer and solid -state rectifiers, is
housed in a single assembly, mounted externally from the transmitter. Routine
maintenance access is provided by a
removable panel.
ww
win
MOW
One factor assuring RF stability is the use of
conservatively -rated Type 8792 and 8807
ceramic tetrodes operating as VHF linear
amplifiers. These amplifier stages operate
in a common grid and screen configuration
and tube neutralization is not required.
not
The aural exciter modulator is a solid-state, self- contained unit.
164
www.americanradiohistory.com
Q
MCP
VISUAL
I.P A.
7289
8122
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
L_
AURAL
P.S
AMPLIFIER
P A.
8792
8807
_J
COLOR
NOTCH
FILTER
18
kW
P.S.
P.
IPA
EXCITER
MODULATOR
HARMONIC
8122
P.A.
HARMONIC
8807
FILTER
36 kW
BT-1 8L2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
BT -18L2
FLOOR PLAN
POWER SUPPLY
(60%" HIGH)
36"
-
24"
DOOR SWING (TYP.)
31"
931"
31
VISUAL
DRIVER
AMPLIFIER
(72" HIGH)
AURAL
AMPLIFIER
31"
94'1"
165
www.americanradiohistory.com
BT-18L2
SPECIFICATIONS
CCIR (System
FCC
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
18
kW peak.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/e EIA standard.
54 -88 MHz (Channels 2 -6).
1250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2 %.
dB or better
-3.58 MHz
-26 dB or better
-1.25 MHz and lower
10.5 dB
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
0 dB reference
Carrier
10.5 dB
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
-30 dB or better
+4.75 MHz and higher
-42
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:,
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:,
UNEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
10.75 dB.
3% or better.
3% or better.
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
11°
0.5 dB or better.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/e" EIA standard.
54 -68 MHz (Channels 3 and 4, Band 1).
1250 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
less thon 2 %.
-30 dB or better
-4.43 MHz
-26 dB or better
-1.25 MHz
+0.5,
dB
-0.75 MHz
+0.5,
dB
-0.50 MHz
-3
-1
-80
dB.
(Not applicable).
(Not applicable).
+0.5,
-0.5
dB
Reference
10.5 dB
+0.5,
dB
+0.5, -2.5 dB
dB or better
Carrier
+1.5 MHz
+3.0 MHz
-1
+4.43 MHz
+5.0 MHz
-26
+5.5 MHz
10.75 dB.
3% or better.
3% or better.
Amplitude dev.'min,'max better than 0.85 mod. with
signal No. 3 CCIR, from 10% to 85% in frequency ronge
or better.
-53 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 5% baseline disturbance.
±40 ns
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
130 ns
at 3.58 MHz:
160 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
VIDEO INPUT:'
HARMONIC RADIATION:
INTERCARRIER PHASE MODULATION (noise):
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE,
15 kHz and 250 kHz:
"B")
15 kW peak.
1
to 5 MHz.
±1° or better.
-53
dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 20t 3% or better.
up to 4.5 MHz: 150 ns.
from 4.5 MHz to 4.8 MHz; 1100 ns.
(measured with Nyquist demodulator meeting ARD
specifications).
75 ohm system.
80 dB.
dB or better with ref. to 150 kHz dev.
--40
175
ns
-10%
1100ns+ 11%
400 -1000 ns 13% for
1200 ns +7%
1400-1000 ns 15%
lF variation.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
3.6 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 31/2" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, 12 dB.
±25 kHz.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
10.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30-15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphosis
with 125 kHz deviation.
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
-60
-55
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:'
SYNCHRONOUS AM NOISE:'
FREQUENCY STABILITY:,
dB or better rel. to 125 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
(Not applicable).
1250
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
-60
-55
dB or better rel. to 150 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
40 dB or better.
1250 Hz.
-
to +50 °C (14° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft.
941/2"W x 31'1 "D x 72 "H. Weight: 2195 lbs.
Power supply: 36 "W x 24 "D x 6039 "H.
Weight: 950 lbs.
-10°
Power input: 208/240 Volts, 111 Volts, 3 phase,
50/60 Hz. Power consumption: 43 kVA, black picturc; 36 kVA, average picture. Power factor: .97
Power input: 380/415 Volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz.
Power consumption: 43 kVA, black picture; 36
kVA, average picture (10:1 vision to sound ratio).
Power factor: .97 typical.
-10°
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
Up to 3.6 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/e" EIA Std.
+10 dBm, 12 dB.
150 kHz.
600 ohms.
50 microseconds 15 microseconds.
10.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
Less than 1% from 30 to 15,000 Hz with 150 kHz
dev. (less than twice measured amount at 70
kHz deviation).
to +50 °C.
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 2400 meters.
240cm W x 80cm D x 183cm H. Weight: 998 kg.
Power supply: 92cm W x 61cm D x 153cm H.
Weight: 430 kg.
typical.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% = peak of sync.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- Carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
Rel. to 100% AM modulation at 150 kHz deviation.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz (FCC), 5.5 MHz (CCIR) from the visual carrier.
ORDERING INFORMATION
standards service, Channels 2 -6, with operating tubes, transistors, IC's, solid state rectifiers, crystals, required pre -correction circuitry, low -level vestigial sideband filter, harmonic and color notch
filters
BT -18L2 15 kW VHF -TV transmitter for CCIR System "B" service, 54 to 68 MHz [Band II, 380/415 volts, 50/60 Hz,
equipped as above
BT -18L2 18kW VHF -TV
transmitter for
FCC
994- 8028 -001
994 -8028 -003
ADV. 500 PTD. IN U.S.A.
1K -33M -777
166
www.americanradiohistory.com
1
TRANSVERSAL SIDEBAND FILTER. The Harris solid -state
vestigial sideband filter is an advanced surface acoustic wave
design, and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather
than on frequency" at the full output power of the transmitter.
Unlike conventional filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear
phase characteristic, which means that it requires no group
delay correction. A conventional filter requires from 600 to 1000
nsec of group delay correction, and many adjustments -the
TSB filter requires no correction or adjustments -ever! A
conventional filter needs 6 to 12 tuning controls -the TSB filter
needs no tuning controls. As no envelope delay correction or
adjustments are required, color quality, stability and reliability
are greatly enhanced. The TSB filter also offers great
temperature stability, and is unaffected by aging.
W
HARRIS
o
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
wp-1v
VHF -TV Visual
addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts and higher
attenuation outside the channel passband for improved wave
shaping.
In
Exciter/ Modulator
More
than a two -to -one
performance specifications
improvement
in
color
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the filter is mounted on
board in the MCP-1V.
a PC
TSB (Transversal SideBand) filter requires no group
delay correction, no adjustments -only 11/2 Inches
IF MODULATION. The refined IF Modulation techniques used in
the MCP-1V offer inherently low values in differential phase and
differential gain without the use of complex precorrection or
Exciter interfaces with all Harris' VHF IF Modulation
transmitters
feedback circuits. Additional gain and phase corrector boards
may be plugged into the exciter to permit optimum performance
at either of two transmitter power levels.
square
Excellent reliability and stability
Easy serviceability
With the introduction of the MCP-1V visual exciter /modulator,
Harris presents the television industry with the best color
performance specifications ever offered in VHF -TV transmitting
equipment! This dramatic advancement in color performance is
made possible through the use of IF Modulation, pioneered in
the United States by Harris, and through the use of recent breakthroughs in filtering technology. In the MCP -1V, Harris has
combined IF Modulation and Transversal SideBand filtering to
achieve better than two -to -one improvements in the important
color parameters of differential phase, differential gain and
frequency response.
INDEPENDENT, SELF -CONTAINED UNIT. The maximum color
performance MCP -1V is an independent, self- contained unit
which provides a fully processed on- channel picture signal.
Power output can be varied up to one watt with a single front
panel control with no adjustment of transmitter tuning controls.
The exciter is mounted in a pull -out drawer, and may be
operated outside the main transmitter for test purposes. It is
designed for minimum maintenance and set -up time, and for
remote control and unattended operation.
The
MCP -1V is standard
in
all
of Harris' L2 and
H2
TV
transmitters -and interfaces easily with any Harris VHF IF
Modulation transmitter. See the reverse side for specifications
and ordering information.
www.americanradiohistory.com
VISUAL
CARRIER
FREQUENCY
.1.25 MHz
MHz
p
de
-20
de
1
4.75 MHz
-
_
MHz
0
M
m
U
-20 de
-35 de
1
25 MHz
44.76 MHz
VISUAL
CARRIER
FREQUENCY
-40
MODULATING FREQUENCY(MHz)
xR ANO 40 x FACTOR
16uset IT PINS!
Waveforms of 12.51, 2t and window pulses showing response through
the MCP -1V visual exciter.
Sideband response of MCP -1V exciter (in blue) showing Improvement
over typical response of older exciters (shown in gray).
MCP -1V SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
CCIR (System "B ")
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
One watt peak of sync.
One watt peak of sync.
ohms unbalanced. Output connector: BNC.
Channels 2 -6 (54 -88 MHz) or Channels 7 -13 (174-
t
50 ohms unbalanced. Output Connector: BNC.
Band I: E3-E4 (54 -68 MHz) or Band III: E5 -E11
(174 -223 MHz).
250 Hz (maximum variation per month).
1% or less.
1% or less.
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
Carrier
Carrier to +4.20 MHz
+ 4.75 MHz and higher
1% or less.
1% or less.
-1 .25 MHz and lower
+ 1.5 MHz to -0.75 MHz
+ 1.5 MHz
+ 1.5 MHz to 5.0 MHz
+ 5.5 MHz and higher
50
CARRIER STABILITY:
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white
1
plc.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT lover one frames:
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:3
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:4
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT: 5
HARMONIC RADIATION
6
2
216 MHz).
250 Hz (maximum variation per month).
-30 dB
±0.5 dB
0 dB
reference
± 0.5 dB
-30 dB
± 0.25 dB.
3% or better.
3% maximum.
0.5 dB or better.
±1
-30 dB
±0.5dB
0 dB
reference
±0.5
dB
-30dB
±0.25 dB.
3% or better.
3% maximum.
Amplitude dev. smin /5 max. better than 0.5 dB
mod. with signal No. 3 CCIR, from 10% to 85%
in frequency range 1 to 5 MHz.
±1
maximum.
maximum.
-58 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2%, 12.51 less than 5% baseline disturbance.
± 40 ns
0.5 to 2.1 MHz:
at 3.58 MHz:
± 30 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
± 60 ns
-40 dB pp below black to white
2t 2 %, 201 3% or better.
± 50 ns
0.5 to 4.5 MHZ:
(referenced to standard curve -FCC)
75 ohm, terminated.
-20 dB.
ARD specifications).
-10' to +60' C (14' to 140' F).
to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 10,000 teer.
24" W x 22" D x 5.25" H. Weight: 38 lbs.
-10 to
4.5 to 4.8 MHZ:
transition.
±100 ns
(measured with Nyquist demodulator meeting
75
ohm, terminated.
-20 dB.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
1
2
3
4
6
6
0
105-125 VAC or 210 -250 VAC, 50 /60 Hz. Power
consumption: 150 VA maximum.
+
60' C.
to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 3000 meters.
61 cm W x 55.9 cm D x 13.3 cm H. Weight: 17.3
kg.
105 -125 VAC or 210 -250 VAC, 50 /60 Hz. Power
0
consumption: 150 VA maximum.
Alter initial aging of 60 days.
Measured al 10% and 90% APL relative to reponea at 50% APL.
Maximum variation of sub-carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% ofmod. Sub-carder mod.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier plea. with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75%
-30 dB or better return loss up to 5.0 MHz.
The MCP -1V Exciter does not provide sufficient uleclwity In the exciter alone to meet
used ina Harris IF modutated transmitter, FCC and CCIR performance requirements In thew
percentage: 10% peak to peak.
to 10 %. Sub-carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
FCC and CCIR transmitter specifications for -3.58 MHz suppression or harmonic radiation
areas will be met or exceeded.
However, when the MCP-1V is
ORDERING INFORMATION
MCP-1V visual exciter/ modulator for FCC standards service, Channels 2 -6
MCP -1V retrofit visual exciter /modulator for FCC standards service, Channels 2 -6
MCP -1V visuel exciter/modulator for FCC standards service, Channels 7 -13
MCP -1V retrofit visual exciter/ modulator for FCC standards service, Channels 7 -13
MCP -1V visual exciter/ modulator for CCIR System "B" service, Bend (54 -68 MHz)
MCP-1V visual exciter/ modulator for CCIR System "B" service, Band III (174 -223 MHz)
Precise Frequency Control (optional)
Phase Corrector PC Board (optional)
Gain Corrector PC Board (optional)
Automatic Exciter/ Modulator Swltcher (optional)
RAK -96 basic rack (24 ") for mounting backup exciter, automatic exciter 'twitcher
Side panel kit for RAK -96. Includes two panels In Harris' white finish
Front trim kit for RAK -96. Trim In brushed aluminum with Harris' blue Insert
Door handle with lock for rear door of RAK -96
I
994 -7861 -002
994 -8136 -001
994 -7861 -003
994 -8135 -001
994- 7861 -005
994- 7861 -006
994 -6760 -001
992- 4717 -001
992 -4718 -001
994 -7016 -001
448- 0636 -000
448- 0589 -000
448- 0637 -000
448- 0559 -000
ADV. 502 PTD. IN U.S.A
CP-3 5M-677
168
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCF SSING
Advanced Transversal SideBand filter -no group
delay, no tuning adjustments required
TV-110U
110- Kilowatt UHF
Color Television
Transmitter
Highly linear IF Modulation of the visual and aural
carriers for superior color and sound reproduction
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control
systems
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
High- efficiency 5- cavity klystrons (Ch.
14 -51)
Mod Anode Pulser for increased transmitter efficiency (Ch. 14 -51)
Simple solid -state logic control
Modular pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy
installation
169
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS' TV -110U PROVIDES SUPERB COLOR QUALITY,
LONG -TERM RELIABILITY
modulator can be varied with
a single front
panel control, or from a remote location, without retuning of any kind.
The master oscillator is located in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled oven, and
master oscillator frequency can be varied
500 Hz. With one control the station engineer can make precise frequency adjustments to both the visual and aural carriers.
Actual frequency determining circuitry is also
contained in the visual exciter in a proportional controlled oven. Visual modulation
takes place at 37.0 MHz (38.9 MHz for CCIR
B). Sidebands are filtered by the Harris TSB
filter, which may be bypassed easily for
transmitter tuning and maintenance.
M
M
UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE. Harris'
TV -110U is the most advanced 110- kilowatt
UHF television transmitter on the market. Designed to meet the high performance
standards demanded by today's discriminating broadcaster, this transmitter incorporates the latest state -of- the -art features,
such as Harris' solid -state Transversal
SideBand (TSB) filter.
IF (intermediate frequency) Modulation, low level sideband filtering, true linear operation
of power amplifiers and solid -state visual and
aural exciter /modulators combine to provide
outstanding color and sound fidelity. As no
envelope delay correction or adjustments are
required for the sideband filter, stability, reliability and color quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are
straightforward and uncomplicated, while
design simplicity and conservatively rated
components in the TV -110U assure longterm "hands-off" operation and minimum
maintenance.
The three five -cavity, vapor -cooled klystrons
employed as visual and aural amplifiers in
the TV -110U require less than one watt of
drive power each to develop full power output. The klystrons are housed in separate
cabinets, containing identical control logic,
magnetic supplies and overload sensors.
and operate independently of one another.
Installation or replacement can be accomplished rapidly by one man. Except for the
klystrons, the transmitters are totally solid
state for stable operation and highest
power of the transmitter. Unlike other VSB
filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear
phase characteristic, which means that it requires no group delay correction. Other VSB
filters require from 600 to 1000 nsec of group
delay correction, and many adjustments
the TSB filter requires no correction or
adjustments -ever! Other VSB filters need 6
to 12 tuning controls -the TSB filter needs no
tuning controls, as it requires no tuning
adjustment -ever!
-
In addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts
and higher attenuation outside the channel
passband for improved VSB wave shaping.
Only 11/2 square inches in size. the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual
exciter.
ADVANCED -DESIGN VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS. The Harris solid state MCP -1U visual exciter /modulator is an
independent, self- contained unit which provides a fully processed on- channel picture
signal. Power output of the visual exciter/
r-
---á
The visual exciter is mounted in a pull -out
drawer and may be operated outside the
main transmitter for test purposes. A switch
and meter mounted on the front panel permit
monitoring exciter parameters. Power and
video gain controls are motor driven with
manual override provision.
The Harris visual exciter /modulator provides
great reliability and stability. excellent frequency response, and truest color quality. It
is also designed for minimum maintenance
and set -up time, and for remote control and
unattended operation.
The Harris aural exciter /modulator is a solid state self- contained unit which furnishes a
fully processed aural signal at a level up to 5
watts. Power output can be set with a single
knob on the front panel, or by remote control,
with no need for retuning.
The aural exciter /modulator is mounted in a
pull -out drawer, and may be operated with
the drawer extended for test purposes. The
exciter has been designed for remote control
and unattended operation.
--
{
RO
E.A
TC. OWL
XE
MUAL
MO COL OM
ROTC.
TER
OMIR
STRON
FIER
AYR
MOO MODE
PUL
R
reliability.
POWER
vISUAL
KOITER
MODULATOR
TRANSVERSAL SIDEBAND (TSB) FILTER.
The Harris solid -state sideband filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design, and
shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency,
rather than "on frequency" at the full output
KL
WOO
NCOE
MUL SEA
170
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV 110U BLOCK DIAGRAM
IF MODULATION. One of the most important
features of the TV -110U is its true low -level
IF Modulation, which offers a top quality
picture, and excels in electrical performance,
reliability and simplicity of operation.
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use cf devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator. low -level sideband filtering and very
linear broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithfLl reproduction of the signal
applied to the transmitter input. IF Modulation results in low incidental phase noise.
and the elimination of many transmission
problems at their source. This means that no
half -way measures -such as numerous correction, compensation and feedback circuits -are required to eliminate the effects
of these problems later.
SOLID -STATE CONTROL LOGIC. Complete and foolproof control of all transmitter
functions is ach eyed through the use of
solid -state memory, timing and logic circuits. A self- charging emergency power
source is provided to maintain control logic
memory during periods of power line failure.
The solid -state control logic and protective
circuitry, in addition to commanding normal
AC control functions, is also used to visually
indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the transmitter system. These
indicator lights allow easy isolation of circuit
faults.
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING. The TV- 11011's
built -in memory circuitry enables the entire
transmitter to return to the air automatically in
the state it was operating immediately prior to
a partial or full power failure. When the transmitter returns to "on- air ", status lights provide visual indication of any malfuctions
caused by the outage.
MOD ANODE PULSER. The Mod Anode
Pulser provides a means of operating the
High Efficiency Klystrons at reduced beam
current during the video portion of the signal,
and high beam current during sync. This feature provides a significant reduction in transmitter input power requirements. The Mod
Anode Pulser is generally used only with
High Efficiency Visual Klystrons.
HEAT EXCHANGERS. Each of the two unitized heat exchangers employed in the TV110U contains a cooling core, blower and
motor, circulating pump, spare pump, storage tank and control devices. The cooling
system is a departure from conventional designs which use individual components
which must be installed separately.
HV POWER SUPPLIES. There are two HV
power supplies, which are multi -phase, full
wave rectifying systems exhibiting very low
ripple content prior to output filtering. They
are designed for excellent regulation. Each
power supply, including transformer and
solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a single
assembly mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access is
provided by a removable panel.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE AND INSTALLATION. Total transmitter component accessibility is provided, front and back. Visual and
aural exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside the
exciter /driver cabinet.
Various exciter
circuits such as oscillators. modulators and
processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
TRANSMITTER CONFIGURATION. The TV110U consists of: a visual amplifier (which
can become an aural amplifier with the touch
REMOTE CONTROL, UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION. All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for remote control and
automatic operation. The power controls are
motor driven and the necessary remote control sampling points are built -in on accessible
terminal boards. In addition, Harris' transmitter design is consistent with anticipated automatic transmitter needs in the future
KLYSTRONS. High gain klystrons, containing five internal cavities, amplify the exciter
outputs to the proper power levels. The
klystrons are vapor cooled, and are mounted
in special assemblies which pivot to allow
easy installation. A klystron carriage is
provided.
of a button in an emergency -an optional
feature); a control cabinet containing exciters, plus splitting, phasing and balance
networks; a second visual amplifier; a second
control cabinet which can be used to mount
optional spare exciters; and an aural amplifier. The transmitter has been built in a
modular fashion so that cabinets may be
separated into convenient, easy -to- handle
sub -assemblies to facilitate installation.
DIPLEXER /RF SYSTEM. The standard TV110U is supplied with a waveguide assembly
that includes the visual combiner, notch diplexer and color notch filter. This assembly is
factory tested and optimized to provide excellent performance and easy installation.
To provide flexibility during abnormal conditions (such as a klystron failure), an optional
Unitized RF System is available. In addition
to the waveguide combiner, diplexer and
color notch filter, the Unitized RF System
contains coax and waveguide switches and
patch panels.
This switching system permits bypassing the
combiner to increase the visual output power
from 25% to 50% with only one visual klystron operating. This system also provides
the capability of using one of the visual
klystrons for aural service. All switches are
motorized and can be operated by remote
control. Dummy loads and patch panels permit testing of any individual klystron and the
combined output of all three klystrons.
The entire Unitized RF System is factory assembled, tested and optimized to one
channel.
The Unitized RF System provides maximum
utilization of the flexibility and redundancy
inherent in the TV -110U, providing maximum power and performance at all times.
TV- 11OU
UNITIZED RF SYSTEM
WVE GU IDE
DIPLE RER
WAVEGUDE
VISUAL
COMBINER
MOTORIZED W AVEGUIDE
SWITCH
AND
COLOR NOTCH
FILTER
COAX SWITCHES
POMI
PA T CH PANE
VISUAL
INPUT
OUTPUT
FROM
VISUAL
Vt
WAVEGUIDE
PATCH
PANEL
AURAL
INPUT
TEST
LOAD
FROM
VISVAUR
FROM
AURAL
h
171
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV -110U SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:1
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE: (Measured at output
of diplexer and color notch filter)
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:2
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:3
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:4
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE-RATIO:
K- FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT:6
HARMONIC RADIATION:
FCC
110 kW peak.
From cabinet: 6 -'h" EIA flanged, 50 ohm (Channels 14 -51) Waveguide
(Channels 52 -69). Output to antenna: Waveguide (Channels 14 -69).
470-806 MHz (Channels 14 -69).
+500 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2%.
-3.58 MHz
-1.25 MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
-42 dB or better
-20 dB or better
- 0.5 dB
0 dB reference
- 0.5 dB.-2 0 dB
-30 dB or better
Cartier
Carrier to +4.18 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
±0.75 dB.
1% or better.
0.5 dB or better.
1.0 dB or better.
Y4° or better.
-50 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
21 2%, 12.51 less than 10% baseline disturbance.
40 ns.
05 to 2.1 MHz:
_ 30 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
at 4.18 MHz
+60 ns.
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
-80 dB
'
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT INPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:6
FREQUENCY STABILITY:7
22 kW at diplexer output (Channels 14 -51). 11 kW at diplexer output (Channels
52 -69).
50 ohms. Output connector: 6 -1/4" EIA standard (from cabinet).
+10dBm. +2 dB.
+ 25 kHz for 100% modulation
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
+0.5 dB rel. to pre-emphasis (30- 15.000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with
-59 dB or better rel. to + 25 kHz deviation.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
25 kHz deviation
+500 Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
+2° C to +50°
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
183 cm H). Note: hoods and
D x 72" H. (400 cm W x 160 cm D
Transmitter cabinet: 1571/4" W x
steam weirs are higher than cabinet (height varies with channel). Approximate weight: 6500 lbs. (2948
C (36° to 122° F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea Level to 7500 ft. (2286 meters).
kg).
Power supplies (2): each 73" W x 62" D x 58" H. (185 cm W x 157 cm D
weight: each 7450 lbs. (3380 kg.).
Heat exchangers (2): each 96" W x 48" D x 79" H (plus ducting)
cm H). Approximate weight: each 4,000 lbs. (1815 kg.).
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:6
150 cm H). Approximate
(244 cm W
122 cm D
201
Power input: 440 /460/480 volts, 3 phase. 50 /60 Hz. Power consumption (typical) Channels 14 -51329 kW (10% aural), 377 kW (20% aural); Channels 52- 69-465 kW (10% aural) Power factor better
than 90%.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15 % of modulation. Reference 100% peak of sync.
3 Maximum variation of sub -camer amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub -carrier mod percentage. 10% peak to peak
4 Maximum variation of sub -carnet phase with respect to burst for mod percentage from 7°' to 10% Sub -career mod percentage l0°' peak to peak
5 Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz
6 After de- emphasis.
7 Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz from the visual carrier.
8 With pulser (Channels 14 -51) consult Harns for Ch. 52 -69 pulsar applications
1
2
ORDERING INFORMATION
TV -110U 110 KW UHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 14-51, with operating klystrons, semi -conductors, crystals, VSB filter,
994- 8460-001
Mod Anode Pulser, harmonic and color notch filters, notch displexer
994-8008 -001
TV- 110UA, as above except without Mod Anode Pulser, for Channels 14 -69
For optional Unitized RF System contact Harris.
CP -3M -180
c
ADV. 546A PTD. IN USA
Harris Corporation 1980
172
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCA SIAM ï
Advanced Transversal SideBand filter -no gro
delay, no tuning adjustments required
Highly linear IF Modulation of the visual and our
carriers for superior color and sound reproduction
TV-60U
60- Kilowatt UHF
Color Television
Transmitter
Easily interfaced
systems
with
ATS
and
remote control
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
High -efficiency 5 -cavity klystrons (Ch. 14 -51)
Mod Anode Pulser for increased transmitter efficiency
(Ch. 14 -51)
Simple solid -state logic control
Modular pre -wired cabinets
installation
www.americanradiohistory.com
for fast and
easy
HARRIS' TV -60U PROVIDES SUPERB COLOR QUALITY,
LONG -TERM RELIABILITY
UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE
Harris' TV -60U is the most advanced 60kilowatt UHF television transmitter on the
market. Designed to meet the high performance standards demanded by today's discriminating broadcaster, this transmitter incorporates the latest state -of- the -art features, such as Harris' solid -state Transversal
SideBand (TSB) filter.
IF (intermediate frequency) Modulation, low -
level sideband filtering, true linear operation
of power amplifiers and solid -state visual and
aural exciter /modulators combine to provide
outstanding color and sound fidelity. As no
envelope delay correction or adjustments are
required for the sideband filter, stability, reliability and color quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output control and amplifier tuning are
straightforward and uncomplicated, while
design simplicity and conservatively rated
components in the TV -60U assure long -term
"hands-off"
operation
and
minimum
maintenance.
The three five -cavity, vapor -cooled klystrons
employed as visual and aural amplifiers in
the TV -60U require less than one watt of
drive power each to develop full power output. The klystrons are housed in separate
cabinets, containing identical control logic.
magnetic supplies and overload sensors,
and operate independently of one another.
Installation or replacement can be accomp-
lished rapidly by one man. Except for the
klystrons, the transmitters are totally solid
state for stable operation and highest
reliability.
ADVANCED -DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
The
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB) FILTER
The Harris solid -state sideband filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design, and
shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency.
rather than "on frequency' at the full output
power of the transmitter. Unlike other VSB
filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear
phase characteristic, which means that it requires no group delay correction. Other VSB
filters require from 600 to 1000 nsec of group
delay correction, and many adjustments
the TSB filter requires no correction or
adjustments -ever! Other VSB filters need 6
to 12 tuning controls -the TSB filter needs no
tuning controls, as it requires no tuning
-
adjustment -ever!
addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts
and higher attenuation outside the channel
passband for improved VSB wave shaping.
In
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual
exciter.
174
www.americanradiohistory.com
Harris
solid -state
MCP -1U
visual
exciter /modulator is an independent. self contained unit which provides a fully processed on- channel picture signal. Power output
of the visual exciter /modulator can be varied
with a single front panel control, or from a
remote location, without retuning of any kind.
The master oscillator is located in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled oven, and
master oscillator frequency can be varied
500 Hz. With one control the station engineer can make precise frequency adjustments to both the visual and aural carriers.
Actual frequency determining circuitry is also
contained in the visual exciter in a proportional controlled oven. Visual modulation
takes place at 37.0 MHz (38.9 MHz for CCIR
B). Sidebands are filtered by the Harris TSB
filter, which may be bypassed easily for
transmitter tuning and maintenance.
The visual exciter is mounted in a pull -out
drawer and may be operated outside the
main transmitter for test purposes. A switch
and meter mounted on the front panel permit
monitoring exciter parameters. Power and
video gain controls are motor driven with
manual override provision.
The Harris visual exciter /modulator provides
great reliability and stability, excellent fre-
quency response, and truest color quality. It
is also designed for minimum maintenance
and set -up time, and for remote control and
unattended operation.
o
The Harris aural exciter /modulator is a solid state self- contained unit which furnishes a
fully processed aural signal at a level up to .5
watts. Power output can be set with a single
knob on the front panel, or by remote control,
with no need for retuning.
The aural exciter /modulator is mounted in a
pull -out drawer, and may be operated with
the drawer extended for test purposes. The
exciter has been designed for remote control
and unattended operation.
IF MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
TV -60U is its true low -level IF Modulation,
which offers a top quality picture, and excels
electrical performance, reliability and simplicity of operation.
in
o
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator, low -level sideband filtering and very
linear broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithful reproduction of the signal
applied to the transmitter input. IF Modulation results in low incidental phase noise,
and the elimination of many transmission
problems at their source. This means that no
half -way measures -such as numerous correction, compensation and feedback circuits -are required to eliminate the effects
of these problems later.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all transmitter functions is achieved through the use
of solid -state memory, timing and logic
circuits. A self- charging emergency power
source is provided to maintain control logic
memory during periods of power line failure.
immediately prior to a partial or full power
failure. When the transmitter returns to "onair", status lights provide visual indication of
any malfuctions caused by the outage.
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits
have been designed specifically for remote
control and automatic operation. The power
controls are motor driven and the necessary
remote control sampling points are built -in on
accessible terminal boards. In addition, Harris' transmitter design is consistent with anticipated automatic transmitter needs in the
age tank and control devices. The cooling
system is a departure from conventional designs which use individual components
which must be installed separately.
HV POWER SUPPLY
The unitized HV power supply is a multiphase, full wave rectifying system exhibiting
very low ripple content prior to output filtering. It is designed for excellent regulation.
The power supply, including transformer and
solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a single
assembly, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access is
provided by a removable panel.
future.
KLYSTRONS
High gain klystrons, (Ch. 14 -51), containing
five internal cavities, amplify the exciter outputs to the proper power levels, The klystrons are vapor cooled, and are mounted in
special assemblies which pivot to allow
easy installation. A klystron carriage is
provided.
MOD ANODE PULSER
The Mod Anode Pulser provides a means of
operating the High Efficiency Klystrons at reduced beam current during the video portion
of the signal, and high beam current during
sync. This feature provides a significant reduction in transmitter input power requirements. The Mod Anode Pulser is generally
used only with High Efficiency Visual
Klystrons.
HEAT EXCHANGER
The unitized heat exchanger employed in the
TV -60U contains a cooling core, blower and
motor, circulating pump, spare pump, stor-
The solid -state control logic and protective
circuitry, in addition to commanding normal
AC control functions, is also used to visually
indicate, through indicator lights, the operating status of the transmitter system. These
indicator lights allow easy isolation of circuit
faults.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
Total transmitter component accessibility is
provided, front and back. Visual and aural
exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside the
exciter /driver cabinet. Various exciter
circuits such as oscillators, modulators and
processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
TRANSMITTER CONFIGURATION
The TV -60U consists of: a visual amplifier
(which can become an aural amplifier with
the touch of a button in an emergency); a
control cabinet containing exciters, plus
splitting, phasing and balance networks; a
second visual amplifier; a second control
cabinet which can be used to mount optional
spare exciters; and an aural amplifier. The
transmitter has been built in a modular fashion so that cabinets may be separated into
convenient, easy -to- handle sub -assemblies
to facilitate installation.
1071910.111741.
á,,.....
YAM
H
d....
-
AUTOMATIC RECYCLING
The TV -60U's buil-in memory circuitry enables the entire transmitter to return to the air
automatically in the state it was operating
TV -60U BLOCK DIAGRAM
175
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-60U SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:1
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE: (Measured at output
of diplexer and color notch filter)
60 kW peak.
From cabinet: 3 -1/e" EIA flanged (Channels 14 -51), 61ís" EIA flanged
(Channels 52 -69). Output to antenna: 61/4", 50 ohm, EIA flanged.
470 -806 MHz (Channels 14 -69).
±500 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less than 2%.
-3.58 MHz
-42 dB or better
-1.25 MHz and lower
-20 dB or better
Camer to -0.75 MHz
+0.5 dB
Carrier
Carrier to +4.18 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:2
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:3
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:4
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE-RATIO:
K- FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT:5
HARMONIC RADIATION:
0 dB reference
+0.5 dB, -2.0 dB
-30 dB or better
±0.75 dB.
1% or better.
0.5 dB or better.
1.0 dB or better.
+4° or better.
-50 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2%, 12.5t less than 10% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
+40 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
+30 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
+60 ns,
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
-80 dB
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT INPEDANCE:
PRE- EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE:6
FREQUENCY STABILITY:7
12 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3V5" EIA standard (from cabinet).
+10dBm, ±2 dB.
±25 kHz for 100% modulation
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
± 0.5 dB rel. to pre -emphasis (30- 15.000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with 25 kHz deviation
-59 dB or better rel. to + 25 kHz deviation.
-55 dB relative to 100"í modulation.
± 500 Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
+2° C to +50° C (36° to 122° F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft. (2286 meters).
Transmitter cabinet: 1571/z" W x 63" D x 72" H. (400 cm W
160 cm D x 183 cm H). Note: hoods and
steam weirs are higher than cabinet (height varies with channel). Approximate weight: 6500 lbs. (2948
kg.).
Power supply: 73" W x
7450 lbs. (3380 kg.).
D x 58" H. (185 cm W x 157 cm D
x
150 cm H). Approximate weight
Heat exchanger: 96" W x 48" D x79" H (plus ducting). (244 cm W * 122 cm D
mate weight: 4,000 lbs. (1815 kg.).
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:8
x 201 cm H).
Approxi-
Power input: 440 /460/480 volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption (typical) 215 kW (10% aural).
236 kW (20% aural). Power factor: better than 90%.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100% = peak of sync.
3 Maximum vanation of sub -carner amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub -carrier mod percentage 10°° peak to peak.
4 Maximum vanation of sub-carrier phase with respect to burst for mod percentage from 75% Io 10°° Sub -carrier mod. percentage. 10% peak to peak
5 Bridging. bop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz
6 After de- emphasis.
7 Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz from the visual carver
8 With pulser (Channels 14.51): consult Harris for Ch. 52 -69 pulser applications
1
2
ORDERING INFORMATION
TV-60U 60 KW UHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 14 -51, with operating klystrons, semi- conductors, crystals, VSB filter,
Mod Anode Pulser, harmonic and color notch filters, notch displexer
994- 8459-001
TV-6OUA, as above except without Mod Anode Pulser, for Channels 14-69
994-8007 -001
CP 2M-180
c
Harris Corporation 1980
ADV 550 PTO. IN USA
176
www.americanradiohistory.com
Advanced Transversal SideBand filter -no group delay,
no tuning adjustments required
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
Highly linear IF Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for superior color and sound reproduction
NOMA TON IMOas.o
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control systems
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
TV-55U
High- efficiency 5- cavity klystrons (Ch. 14 -51)
55- Kilowatt UHF
Color Television
Transmitter
Mod Anode Pulser for increased transmitter efficiency
(Ch. 14 -51)
Simple solid -state logic control
Modular pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy installation
177
www.americanradiohistory.com
UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE
Harris' TV -55U
is
the most advanced 55-
kilowatt UHF television transmitter on the
market. Designed to meet the high performance standards demanded by today's
discriminating broadcaster, this transmitter
incorporates the latest state -of- the -art
features, such as Harris' solid -state
Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter.
IF (intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low -level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
combine to provide outstanding color and
sound fidelity. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments ore required for the
sideband filter, stability, reliability and
color quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output control
and amplifier tuning are straightforward
and uncomplicated, while design simplicity
and conservatively rated components in the
TV -55U assure long -term "hands -off"
operation and minimum maintenance.
The two five -cavity, vapor -cooled klystrons
employed as visual and aural amplifiers in
the TV -55U require less than one watt of
drive power each to develop full power
output. The klystrons are housed in
separate cabinets, containing identical control logic, magnetic supplies and overload
sensors, and operate independently of one
another. Installation or replacement can be
accomplished rapidly by one man. Except
for the klystrons, the transmitters are totally
solid state for stable operation and highest
reliability.
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
inherent linear phase characteristic,
which means that it requires no group
delay correction. A conventional VSB filter
requires from 600 to 1000 nsec of group
an
delay
correction,
and
many
adjust-
ments -the TSB filter requires no correction
or adjustments -ever! A conventional VSB
filter needs 6 to 12 tuning controls-the
TSB filter needs no tuning controls, as it
requires no tuning adjustment -ever!
addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts
and higher attenuation outside the channel
passband for improved VSB wave shaping.
In
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter.
FILTER
filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
conventional VSB filters, the TSB filter has
The Harris solid -state sideband
178
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADVANCED -DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
Harris solid -state MCP visual exciter /modulator is an independent, selfThe
contained
unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output of the visual exciter/ modulator can
be varied with a single front panel control,
or from a remote location, without retuning
e ,:
.-:
..`
.
.
f
kt
-.
of any kind.
I
o
The master oscillator is located in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled oven,
and master oscillator frequency can be
varied ±500 Hz. With one control, the station engineer can make precise frequency
adjustments to both the visual and aural
carriers. Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in the visual exciter
in a proportional controlled oven. Visual
modulation takes place at 37.0 MHz (38.9
MHz for CCIR B). Sidebands are filtered by
the Harris TSB filter, which may be bypassed easily for transmitter tuning and
maintenance.
The visual exciter is mounted in a pull -out
drawer and may be operated outside the
main transmitter for test purposes. A switch
and meter mounted on the front panel permit monitoring exciter parameters. Power
and video gain controls are motor driven
with manual override provision.
Harris visual exciter /modulator provides great reliability and stability, excellent frequency response, and truest color
quality. It is also designed for minimum
maintenance and set -up time, and for
remote control and unattended operation.
This is all made possible through the use of
the latest design techniques, including
Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
The
Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to .5 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning.
The
Audio information is used to modulate a
direct FM 32.5 MHz (33.4 MHz for CCIR B)
carrier derived from the master oscillator in
the visual exciter. This information is then
translated to the desired "on channel"
signal through stable frequency determining circuitry housed in a proportional
controlled oven in the visual exciter. A
digital phase -locked loop is also used to
guarantee absolute frequency stability.
aural exciter /modulator is mounted in
a pull -out drawer, and may be operated
with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The exciter has been designed for remote
control and unattended operation.
The
IF
MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
TV -55U is its true low -level IF Modulation,
L.I
I
Ltt\
ENE
7;4''
-
The MCP -ÌU visual exciter ,modulator (above) is a solid- state,
independent self -contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris'
advanced TSB filter (right) is mounted on a PC board in the
visual exciter, and measures only 1' inches square.
which offers a top quality picture, and excels in electrical performance, reliability
and simplicity of operation.
In the TV-5511 the visual and aural exciters
generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
"on channel" output frequency.
As
it occurs at much lower power levels
than conventional designs, intermediate
frequency modulation needs fewer circuits
to produce a fully processed, quality picture signal. Less than one volt of video
signal is needed to modulate the RF carrier.
modulator design permits
modulation percentages to approximately
1% without compromising transmitter
performance -and eliminates most pre distortion circuitry. This results in exceptional color performance and nearly
perfect signal linearity. Even such colors as
highly saturated yellow and cyan are
faithfully reproduced with IF Modulation.
The Harris ring
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low -level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithful reproduction of the
signal applied to the transmitter input. IF
Modulation results in low incidental phase
noise, and the elimination of many
transmission problems at their source. This
means that no half -way measures -such as
numerous correction, compensation and
feedback circuits -are required to eliminate the effects of these problems later on.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter functions is achieved through
the use of solid -state memory, timing and
logic circuits. A self -charging emergency
power source is provided to maintain control logic memory during periods of power
line failure.
The solid -state control logic and protective
circuitry,
in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is also used to
visually indicate, through indicator lights,
the operating status of the transmitter
system. These indicator lights allow easy
isolation of circuit faults.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
TV -55U's built -in memory circuitry
enables the entire transmitter to return to
the air automatically in the state it was
operating immediately prior to a partial or
full power failure. When the transmitter
returns to "on- air ", status lights provide
visual indication of any malfunctions caused
by the outage.
The
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and automatic operation.
The power controls are motor driven and
the necessary remote control sampling
points are built-in on accessible terminal
boards.
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide with and
without remote control. In addition, Harris'
transmitter design is consistent with antici179
www.americanradiohistory.com
pated automatic transmitter needs in the
future.
tion, an examination of the indicators will
locate the problem area.
KLYSTRONS
The transmitter has been built in a modular
fashion so that cabinets may be separated
into
convenient, easy -to- handle subassemblies to facilitate installation. Additionally, the compact design of the TV55U minimizes space requirements in the
transmitter building.
High gain klystrons, containing five internal
cavities, amplify the exciter outputs to the
proper power levels. The klystrons are
vapor cooled, and are mounted in special
assemblies which pivot to allow easy installation. A klystron carriage is provided.
MOD ANODE PULSER
The mod anode pulser provides a means of
operating High Efficiency Klystrons at
reduced beam current during the video
portion of the signal, and high beam current during sync. This feature provides a
significant reduction in transmitter input
power requirements. The mod anode pulser
is generally used only with High Efficiency
e
Visual Klystrons.
HEAT EXCHANGER
The aural exciter /modulator is a solid -state, self -contained unit.
The unitized heat exchanger employed in
the TV -55U contains the cooling core,
blower and motor, circulating pump, spare
pump, storage tank and control devices.
The cooling system is a departure from conventional designs which use individual components which must be installed separately.
ffrx
HV POWER SUPPLY
The HV power supply is a multi -phase, full
wave rectifying system exhibiting very low
ripple content prior to output filtering. It is
designed for excellent regulation. This
power supply, including transformer and
solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a single
assembly, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access is
provided by a removable panel.
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
Total transmitter component accessibility is
provided, front and back. Visual and aural
exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside
the exciter /driver cabinet. Various exciter
circuits, such as oscillators, modulators and
processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
NIMENBINEMEE
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for convenient access during
maintenance. A complete system of
overload indicators is also provided in each
cabinet for monitoring transmitter operation. In the event of a transmitter malfunc-
TV -55U, rear
180
www.americanradiohistory.com
view.
AURAL
KLYSTRON
AMPLIFIER
AURAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
HARMONIC
FILTER
HEAT
POWER
EXCHANGER
SUPPLY
VISUAL
KLYSTRON
AMPLIFIER
VISUAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
DIPLEXER AND COLOR
55KW VISUAL
11KW AURAL
NOTCH FILTER
OUTPUT
WAVE GUIDE NOTCH
HARMONIC
FILTER
BLOCK DIAGRAM TV-55U
30.0"
MIN.
-
(1219mm)
(762mm)
MIXING LOUVERS
(MOTOR DRIVEN:
TEMP. CONTROLLED)
INPUT
PLENUM
14
HEAT
WAVEGUID DIPLEXER
WITH COLOR NOTCH FILTER
EXCHANGER
INPUT LOUVERS
(HEAT
(DIPLEXER SUSPENDED FROM
EXCHANGER
78.0" HIGH
(1981mm) LESS
96.0'_
OUTPUT PLENUM) (2438mm)
PATCH
PANEL
(SUSPENDED
FROM
POWER SUPPLY
5825" (1480mm)
Al
HIGH
CEILING)
HOOD AND
PLENUM ACCESS
DOOR
IL
11
62 0"
(1575mm)
BEAM SUPPLY
(MOUNTED OUTSIDE ON
CONCRETE PAD)
73.0"
STEAM WEIR
HIGHER THAN
CABINET
(HEIGHT VARIES
-.
ALLOW 10 FT (3048mm)
BEHIND XMTR FOR
TUBE REMOVAL
l
000
00
4
LINE
24.0"
(61+ m)
FT.
(6
MI
MIN
ROLL- AROUND
KLYSTRON
CHANGE d
STORAGE
CARRIAGE
CABINET 72.0"
HIGH
(I829mm)
21
C
WITH
CHANNEL)
24.0"
CONTROL
CABINET
(1854mm)
CEILING)
Ad
63.0"
VISUAL
IL CAB NET
CONTROL
CABINET
AMPLIFIER
CABINET
48.0" HIGH
(2438mm)
AURAL
AMPLIFIER
CABINET
(1219mm)
TV -55U
TRANSMITTER
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
ITEMS IN BLUE SUSPENDED FROM CEILING
33.0 "MIN
(838mm)
94.5"
(2400mm)
38
'4
(91Amm)
MINIMUM RECOMMENDED CEILING HEIGHT:
10 FT.-11 IN. (3.3M)
22FT.
(6.7M)
MIN.
TYPICAL EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
TV -55U TRANSMITTER
181
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV -55U SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one fram):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE: (measured at output
of diplexer and color notch filter)
55 kW peak.
From cabinet: 6 -'4" EIA flanged (Channels 14 -51). Waveguide
(Channels 52 -69). Output to antenna: 6 -'Vs ", 50 ohm, EIA flanged (Channels 14 -69).
470 -806 MHz (Channels 14 -69).
+500 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
less than 2 %.
-42
-20
-3.58
-1.25
MHz
MHz and lower
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
dB or better
dB or better
+0.5 dB
0 dB reference
+0.5 dB,
dB
dB or better
Carrier
Carrier to +4.18 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K- FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT:
°
±0.75 dB.
1% or better.
0.5 dB or better.
1.0 dB or better.
+40 or better.
dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less thon 10% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
+ 40 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
± 30 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
+ 60 ns.
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
75 ohm system.
-50
-80
HARMONIC RADIATION:
-2.0
-30
dB.
AURAL PERFORMANCE
kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'/I" EIA standard (from cabinet).
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
11
+10dBm,+2dB.
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
±25 kHz.
AM NOISE:'
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
+0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less aber 75 microseconds de- emphasis with
dB or better rel. to +25 kHz dev.
dB relative to 100% modulation.
FREQUENCY STABILITY:'
±500
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
-59
-55
±25 kHz deviation.
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
+2 °C to +50 °C (36° to
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
941/2" W
122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Sea level to 7500 ft. (2286 meters).
x 63" D x 72" H (240cm W z 160cm D x 183cm H). Weight: 4100 lbs.
(1864 kg.). Power supply: 73" W x 62" D x 58'4" H (185cm W x 157cm D x
148cm H). Weight: 7450 lbs. (3380 kg.).
Heat exchanger: 96" W x 48" D
Weight: 4000 lbs. (1816 kg.).
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:'
x
78"
H
(244cm W
x
122cm D
x
198cm H).
Power input: 440/460/480 volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption
(typical): (Channels 14 -51)- 169 kW (10% aural), 185 kW (20% aural);
(Channels 52 -69) -249 kW (10% aural), 269 kW (20% aural). Power factor: better than 90 %.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
Aher initial aging of 60 days.
' Measured of 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100 % =peak of sync.
' Maximum variation of sub- carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
' Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
r
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
'
o
'
°
After de- emphasis.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz from the visual carrier.
With pulser (Channels 14 -51); consult Harris for Ch. 52 -69 pulser applications.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TV -55U 55 kW UHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 14 -51, with operating klystrons, semiconductors,
crystals, Mod Anode Pulse', VSB filter, harmonic and color notch filters, notch diplexer
TV -55UA, as above except without Mod Anode Pulser, for Channels 14.69
JK -2M -180
©HARRIS CORPORATION 1980
994 -8458 -001
994- 8006 -001
ADV. 551 PTD. IN U.S.A.
182
www.americanradiohistory.com
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INronnAATON
RbCJIbNO
Advanced Transversal SideBand filter -no group delay,
no tuning adjustments required
Highly linear IF Modulation of the visual and aural carriers for superior color and sound reproduction
Easily interfaced with ATS and remote control systems
TV -30U
30- Kilowatt UHF
Color Television
Transmitter
Outstanding long -term stability and reliability
High- efficiency 5- cavity klystrons (Ch. 14 -51)
Mod Anode Pulser for increased transmitter efficiency
(Ch. 14 -51)
Simple solid -state logic control
Modular pre -wired cabinets for fast and easy installation
183
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV-30U
UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE
Harris' TV -30U
is
the most advanced 30-
kilowatt UHF television transmitter on the
market. Designed to meet the high performance standards demanded by today's
discriminating broadcaster, this transmitter
incorporates the latest state -of- the -art
features, such as Harris' solid -state
Transversal SideBand (TSB) filter.
(intermediate frequency) Modulation,
low -level sideband filtering, true linear
operation of power amplifiers and solid state visual and aural exciter /modulators
combine to provide outstanding color and
sound fidelity. As no envelope delay correction or adjustments are required for the
sideband filter, stability, reliability and
color quality are greatly enhanced. Frequency adjustment, power output control
and amplifier tuning are straightforward
and uncomplicated, while design simplicity
and conservatively rated components in the
TV -30U assure long -term "hands -off"
operation and minimum maintenance.
IF
The two five- cavity, vapor -cooled klystrons
employed as visual and aural amplifiers in
the TV -30U require less than one watt of
drive power each to develop full power
output. The klystrons are housed in
separate cabinets, containing identical control logic, magnetic supplies and overload
sensors, and operate independently of one
another. Installation or replacement can be
accomplished rapidly by one man. Except
for the klystrons, the transmitters are totally
solid state for stable operation and highest
reliability.
TRANSVERSAL
SIDEBAND (TSB)
an inherent linear phase characteristic,
which means that it requires no group
delay correction. A conventional VSB filter
requires from 600 to 1000 nsec of group
delay correction, and many adjustments -the TSB filter requires no correction
or adjustments -ever! A conventional VSB
filter needs 6 to 12 tuning controls-the
TSB filter needs no tuning controls, as it
requires no tuning adjustment -ever!
In addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts
and higher attenuation outside the channel
passband for improved VSB wave shaping.
Only 11/2 square inches in size, the TSB filter
is mounted on a PC board in the visual exciter.
FILTER
filter is an
advanced surface acoustic wave design,
and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather than "on frequency" at the
full output power of the transmitter. Unlike
conventional VSB filters, the TSB filter has
The Harris solid -state sideband
184
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADVANCED- DESIGN
VISUAL AND AURAL
EXCITER /MODULATORS
Harris solid -state MCP visual exciter /modulator is an independent, selfThe
TV-30U
unit which provides a fully
processed on- channel picture signal. Power
output of the visual exciter/ modulator can
be varied with a single front panel control,
or from a remote location, without retuning
of any kind.
contained
The master oscillator is located in the visual
exciter in a proportional controlled oven,
and master oscillator frequency can be
varied ±500 Hz. With one control, the station engineer can make precise frequency
adjustments to both the visual and aural
carriers. Actual frequency determining circuitry is also contained in the visual exciter
in a proportional controlled oven. Visual
modulation takes place at 37.0 MHz (38.9
MHz for CCIR B). Sidebands are filtered by
the Harris TSB filter which may be bypassed easily for transmitter tuning and
maintenance.
The visual exciter is mounted in a pull -out
drawer and may be operated outside the
main transmitter for test purposes. A switch
and meter mounted on the front panel permit monitoring exciter parameters. Power
and video gain controls are motor driven
with manual override provision.
Harris visual exciter /modulator provides great reliability and stability, excellent frequency response, and truest color
quality. It is also designed for minimum
maintenance and set -up time, and for
The
remote control and unattended operation.
This is all made possible through the use of
the latest design techniques, including
Harris' solid -state TSB filter.
Harris aural exciter /modulator is a
solid -state self -contained unit which furnishes a fully processed aural signal at a
level up to .5 watts. Power output can be
set with a single knob on the front panel, or
by remote control, with no need for retuning.
The
Audio information is used to modulate a
direct FM 32.5 MHz (33.4 MHz for CCIR B)
carrier derived from the modulated oscillator in the aural exciter. This information is then translated to the desired "on
channel" signal through stable frequency
determining circuitry housed in a proportional controlled oven in the visual exciter.
A digital phase -locked loop is also used to
guarantee absolute frequency stability.
aural exciter /modulator is mounted in
pull -out drawer, and may be operated
with the drawer extended for test purposes.
The exciter has been designed for remote
control and unattended operation.
The
a
IF
MODULATION
One of the most important features of the
TV -30U is its true low -level IF Modulation,
The MCP -1U visual exciter /modulator (above) is a solid -state,
independent, self -contained "on- channel" signal source. Harris'
advanced TSB filter (right) is mounted on a PC board in the
visual exciter, and measures only
11/2
inches square.
which offers a top quality picture, and excels in electrical performance, reliability
and simplicity of operation.
the TV -30U the visual and aural exciters
generate fully modulated low -level IF
signals. The output of a common crystal
controlled reference oscillator is used to
raise the individual IF signal to the desired
on channel" output frequency.
In
at much lower power levels
than conventional designs, intermediate
frequency modulation needs fewer circuits
to produce a fully processed, quality picture signal. Less than one volt of video
signal is needed to modulate the RF carrier.
As it occurs
modulator design permits
modulation percentages to approximately
1% without compromising transmitter
performance -and eliminates most pre distortion circuitry. This results in exceptional color performance and nearly
perfect signal linearity. Even such colors as
highly saturated yellow and cyan are
faithfully reproduced with IF Modulation.
The Harris ring
Due to the low -level techniques, which include the use of devices such as an extremely linear broadband diode ring modulator,
low -level sideband filtering and very linear
broadband amplifiers, the broadcast
signal is a faithful reproduction of the
signal applied to the transmitter input. IF
Modulation results in low incidental phase
noise, and the elimination of many
transmission problems at their source. This
means that no half -way measures -such as
numerous correction, compensation and
feedback circuits -are required to eliminate the effects of these problems later on.
SOLID -STATE
CONTROL LOGIC
Complete and foolproof control of all
transmitter runctions is achieved through
the use of solid -state memory, timing and
logic circuits. A self -charging emergency
power source is provided to maintain control logic memory during periods of power
line failure.
The solid-state control logic and protective
circuitry, in addition to commanding normal AC control functions, is also used to
visually indicate, through indicator lights,
the operating status of the transmitter
system. These indicator lights allow easy
isolation of circuit faults.
AUTOMATIC
RECYCLING
TV -30U's built -in memory circuitry
enables the entire transmitter to return to
the air automatically in the state it was
operating immediately prior to a partial or
full power failure. When the transmitter
returns to "on- air ", status lights provide
visual indication of any malfunctions caused
by the outage.
The
REMOTE CONTROL,
UNATTENDED AND
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All control, metering and monitoring circuits have been designed specifically for
remote control and automatic operation.
The power controls are motor driven and
the necessary remote control sampling
points are built -in on accessible terminal
boards.
Today, Harris TV transmitters are being
operated successfully worldwide with and
without remote control. In addition, Harris'
transmitter design is consistent with antici185
TV-30U
pated automatic transmitter needs in the
future.
tion, an examination of the indicators will
locate the problem area.
KLYSTRONS
The transmitter has been
High gain klystrons, containing five internal
cavities, amplify the exciter outputs to the
proper power levels. The klystrons are
vapor cooled, and are mounted in special
assemblies which pivot to allow easy installation. A klystron carriage is provided.
built in a modular
fashion so that cabinets may be separated
into
convenient, easy -to- handle subassemblies to facilitate installation. Additionally, the compact design of the TV30U minimizes space requirements in the
transmitter building.
MOD ANODE PULSER
The mod anode pulser provides a means of
operating High Efficiency Klystrons at
reduced beam current during the video
portion of the signal, and high beam current during sync. This optional feature
provides a significant reduction in transmitter input power requirements. The mod
anode pulser is generally used only with
High Efficiency Visual Klystrons.
HEAT EXCHANGER
The aural exciter /modulator is a solid -state, self-contained unit.
The unitized heat exchanger employed in
the TV -30U contains the cooling core,
blower and motor, circulating pump, spare
pump, storage tank and control devices.
The cooling system is a departure from conventional designs which use individual components which must be installed separately.
HV POWER SUPPLY
The HV power supply is a multi -phase, full
wave rectifying system exhibiting very low
ripple content prior to output filtering. It is
designed for excellent regulation. This
power supply, including transformer and
solid -state rectifiers, is housed in a single
assembly, mounted externally from the
transmitter. Routine maintenance access is
provided by a removable panel.
MAINTENANCE
AND INSTALLATION
EASE OF
Total transmitter component accessibility is
provided, front and back. Visual and aural
exciters slide out and can operate independently from the transmitter outside
the exciter /driver cabinet. Various exciter
circuits, such as oscillators, modulators and
processing circuitry, are of modular construction and can be removed for maintenance or replacement.
Easy -to -read, eye -level 4 -inch meters are
used to monitor required transmitter func-
tions. Meter panels are of double- hinged
construction for convenient access during
maintenance. A complete system of
overload indicators is also provided in each
cabinet for monitoring transmitter operation. In the event of a transmitter malfunc-
TV -30U
186
www.americanradiohistory.com
rear view
AURAL
KLYSTRON
AMPLIFIER
AURAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
HARMONIC
FILTER
HEAT
POWER
EXCHANGER
SUPPLY
VISUAL
KLYSTRON
AMPLIFIER
VISUAL
EXCITER/
MODULATOR
WAVE GUIDE NOTCH
<
DIPLEXER AND COLOR
30KW VISUAL
6KW AURAL
OUTPUT
NOTCH FILTER
HARMONIC
FILTER
BLOCK DIAGRAM TV -30U
30 0
MIN
48 0
-
(1219mm)
1762mm
MIXING LOUVERS'
(MOTOR DRIVEN
TEMP CONTROLLED)
INPUT
PLENUM
HEAT
WAV GUIDE DIP EXER
WITH COLOR NOTCH FILTER
EXCHANGER
INPUT LOUVERS'
¡HEAT
IDIPL XER SUSPENDED FROM
EXCHANGER
78 0" HIGH
1981mm1 LESS
CEILING)
96 0'
OUTPUT PLENUM) (2438mm(
POWER SUPPLY
51.0" (1295mm1
HIGH
(SUSPENDED
FROM
HOOD AND
CEILING)
STEAM WEIR
HIGHER THAN
PLENUM ACCESS'
DOOR
(1194mm)
BEAM SUPPLY
(MOUNTED OUTSIDE ON
CONCRETE PAD)
V
240"
(610mm1
CONTROL
CABINET
63.0"
(1600mm)
L4
00
24 0"
(ólOmm)
$
I
ROLL. AROUND
KLYSTRON
CHANGE &
CHANNEL/
6
VISUAL
AMPLIFIER
CABINET
CAB NET
48 0 HIGH
¡1219mm1
I11
12832mm
STORAGE
CARRIAGE
;1710
CABINET
HIGH
(1829mm1
M)
MIN
0
(HEIGHT VARIES
WITH
1
LINE
FT
6
1`0 0 0
CABINET
47 0"
21
ALLOW 10 FT 13048mm)
BEHIND XMTR FOR
TUBE REMOVAL
PATCH
PANEL
CONTROL
CABINET
0"
12438mm)
AURAL
AMPLIFIER
CABINET
TV 30U
TRANSMITTER
33 0 'MIN
11838m(6(
)
'CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
ITEMS IN BLUE SUSPENDED FROM CEILING
MINIMUM RECOMMENDED CEILING HEIGHT
10 FT .11 IN
94 5'
12400mm)
1
380
91amm
4
(33M)
22FT
(6 7M)
MIN
TYPICAL EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
TV -30U TRANSMITTER
187
www.americanradiohistory.com
TV -30U SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:'
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER (Black to white pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT (over one frame):
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE (Measured at output
of diplexer and color notch filter):
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:'
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN:'
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:'
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K- FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT:'
HARMONIC RADIATION:
30 kW peak.
From cabinet: 3 -'W' EIA flanged (Channels 14 -51). 6'/s" EIA flanged
(Channels 52 -69). Output to antenna: 6 -1/2", 50 ohm, EIA flanged.
470 -806 MHz (Channels 14 -69).
±500 Hz (maximum variation over 30 days).
3% or less.
Less
than 2 %.
-3.58
-1.25
-42 dB or better
-20 dB or better
Cornier
0 dB reference
+0.5 dB,
dB
MHz
MHz and lower
Cornier to -0.75 MHz
±0.5 dB
-2.0
-30 dB or better
Carrier to +4.18 MHz
+4.75 MHz and higher
±0.75 dB.
1% or better.
0.5 dB or better.
1.0 dB or better.
±4° or better.
50 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %, 12.5t less than 10% baseline disturbance.
.05 to 2.1 MHz:
± 40 ns.
at 3.58 MHz:
± 30 ns.
at 4.18 MHz:
± 60 ns.
(referenced to standard curve -FCC).
-
75 ohm system.
dB.
-80
AURAL PERFORMANCE
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
AUDIO INPUT:
FREQUENCY DEVIATION:
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
PRE -EMPHASIS:
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
DISTORTION:
FM NOISE:
AM NOISE,.
FREQUENCY STABILITY:'
6 kW at diplexer output.
50 ohms. Output connector: 3'h" EIA standard (from cabinet).
+10 dBm, ±2 dB.
±25 kHz for 100% modulation.
600 ohms.
75 microseconds.
±0.5 dB rel. to pre- emphasis (30- 15,000 Hz).
0.5% or less after 75 microseconds de- emphasis with ±25 kHz deviation.
-59 dB or better rel. to ±25 kHz dev.
-55 dB relative to 100% modulation.
±500
Hz.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
+2 °C to +50 °C (36° to 122 °F).
0 to 95% relative humidity.
Seo level to 7500 ft. (2286 meters).
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
94'h" W
x 63" D x 72" H (240cm W x 160cm D x 183cm H). Weight: 4100 lbs.
(1864 kg.). Power supply: 63" W x 47" D x 51" H (160cm W x 119cm D x
130cm H). Weight: 4700 lbs. (2133 kg.).
Heat exchanger: 96" W x 48" D
Weight: 4000 lbs. (1816 kg.).
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:°
'
'
'
'
s
o
'
'
x
78"
H
(244cm W
x
122cm D
x
198cm H).
Power input: 440/460/480 volts, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption
(typical): 146 kW (20% aural); 137 kW (10% aural) Channels 14 -69. Power
factor: better than 90 %.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
After initial aging of 60 days.
Measured at 65% and 15% of modulation. Reference 100%= peak of sync.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peek.
Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod. percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub- carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
Bridging, loop through input with -30 dB or better return loss up to 5.5 MHz.
After de- emphasis.
Relative to frequency offset by 4.5 MHz from the visual carrier,
Optional pulser reduces power consumption approximately 16 kW.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TV -30ÚA, 30 kW UHF -TV transmitter for FCC standards service, Channels 14-69,
crystals, VSB filter, harmonic and color notch filters, notch diplexer
TV -30U, as above except with Mod Anode Pulser, for Channels 14 -51
JK -2M -180
with operating klystrons, semiconductors,
©HARRIS CORPORATION 1980
994 -8004 -001
994 -8485 -001
ADV. 552 PTD. IN U.S.A.
188
www.americanradiohistory.com
TRANSVERSAL SIDEBAND FILTER. The Harris solid -state
vestigial sideband filter is an advanced surface acoustic wave
design, and shapes visual sidebands at the IF frequency, rather
than on frequency" at the full output power of the transmitter.
Unlike conventional filters, the TSB filter has an inherent linear
phase characteristic, which means that it requires no group
delay correction. A conventional filter requires from 600 to 1000
nsec of group delay correction, and many adjustments -the
TSB filter requires no correction or adjustments -ever! A
conventional filter needs 6 to 12 tuning controls -the TSB filter
needs no tuning controls. As no envelope delay correction or
adjustments are required, color quality, stability and reliability
are greatly enhanced. The TSB filter also offers great
temperature stability, and is unaffected by aging.
W
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
MCP-1U
UHF -TV Visual
In addition, the TSB filter has steeper skirts and higher
attenuation outside the channel passband for improved wave
shaping.
Exciter/Modulator
than a two -to -one
performance specifications
More
improvement
in
color
TSB (Transversal SideBand) filter requires no group
delay correction, no adjustments -only 11/2 inches
square
Exciter interfaces with all Harris' UHF IF Modulation
transmitters
Excellent reliability and stability
Easy serviceability
With the introduction of the MCP -1U visual exciter /modulator,
Harris presents the television industry with the best color
performance specifications ever offered in UHF -TV transmitting
equipment! This dramatic advancement in color performance is
made possible through the use of IF Modulation, pioneered in
the United States by Harris, and through the use of recent breakthroughs in filtering technology. In the MCP -1U, Harris has
combined IF Modulation and Transversal SideBand filtering to
achieve better than two -to -one improvements in the important
color parameters of differential phase, differential gain and
frequency response.
Only 1'/2 square inches in size, the filter is mounted on
board in the MCP -1U.
a PC
IF MODULATION. The refined IF Modulation techniques used in
the MCP -1 U offer inherently low values in differential phase and
differential gain without the use of complex precorrection or
feedback circuits.
INDEPENDENT, SELF -CONTAINED UNIT. The maximum color
performance MCP -1 U is an independent, self- contained unit
which provides a fully processed on- channel picture signal.
Power output can be varied up to one watt with a single front
panel control with no adjustment of transmitter tuning controls.
a pull -out drawer, and may be
operated outside the main transmitter for test purposes. It is
designed for minimum maintenance and set -up time, and for
remote control and unattended operation.
The exciter is mounted in
The MCP-1U is standard in all of Harris' "U2" series of TV
transmitters -and interfaces easily with any Harris UHF IF
Modulation TV transmitter. See the reverse side for
specifications and ordering information.
www.americanradiohistory.com
0
es
i
aus
2u
-1.25 MHz
VISUAL
CARRIER
FREOt1ENC
G
75
s
MN:
,
MODULATING FREQUENCY MHz
2e MIO
Sideband response of MCP -1U exciter (in blue) showing Improvement
over typical response of older exciters (shown in gray).
411 a
14444C IT
FACTOR
MAU
Waveforms of 12.51, 2t and window pulses showing responses through
the MCP-1U visual exciter.
MCP -1U SPECIFICATIONS
VISUAL PERFORMANCE
CCIR (System "G ")
FCC
POWER OUTPUT:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
FREQUENCY RANGE:
CARRIER STABILITY:1
REG. OF RF OUTPUT POWER, Black to while
0.75 watt peak of sync.
0.75 watt peak of sync.
ohms unbalanced. Output connector: BNC.
Channels 14 -69 (470 -806 MHz).
± 500 Hz (maximum variation per month).
50 ohms unbalanced. Output connector: BNC.
Bands IV 8 V: E21 -E68 (470 -806 MHz).
pic.):
VARIATION OF OUTPUT lover one framer:
VISUAL SIDEBAND RESPONSE:
1% or less.
1% or less.
-1.25 MHz and lower
1% or less.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE VS. BRIGHTNESS:
VISUAL MODULATION CAPABILITY:
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN :3
LINEARITY (LOW FREQUENCY):
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE:4
SIGNAL -TO -NOISE RATIO:
K FACTORS:
EQUIVALENT ENVELOPE DELAY:
VIDEO INPUT:
HARMONIC RADIATION
2
50
Carrier to -0.75 MHz
Carrier
Carrier to + 4.20 MHz
+ 4.75 MHz and higher
0.25 dB.
3% or better.
3% maximum.
0.5 dB or better.
±
-30 dB
± 0.5 dB
0
dB reference
+ 0 5 dB
-30 dB
500 Hz (maximum variation per month).
1% or less.
-1.25 MHz and lower
+ 1.5 MHz to -0.75 MHz
+ 1.5 MHz
+1.5MHzto5.OMHz
-30 dB
±0.5dß
0
dB reference
!0.5dß
5.5 MHz and higher
-30 dB
0.25 dB.
3% or better.
3% maximum.
Amplitude dev. s min/ s max. better than 0.5 dB
mod. with signal No. 3 CCIR, from 10% to 85%
in frequency range
to 5 MHz.
+
±
1
maximum.
-58 dB or better (RMS) below sync level.
2t 2 %. 12.51 less than 5% baseline disturbance.
0.5 to 2.1 MHz: ± 40 ns
at 3.58 MHZ:
±30 ns
± 60 ns
at 4.18 MHz:
(referenced to standard curve-FCC)
75 ohm, terminated.
2°
-20 dB.
6
2
± 2' maximum.
-40 dB pp below black to white transition.
2t 2 %, 20t 3% or better.
0.5 to 4.5 MHz:
±50 ns
4.5 to 4.8 MHz: ±100 ns
(measured with Nyquist demodulator meeting
ARD specifications).
75
ohm, terminated.
-20 dB.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:
AMBIENT HUMIDITY RANGE:
ALTITUDE:
PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS:
-10 to +60 (14 to 140F).
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
105 -125 VAC or 210 -250 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Power
consumption: 150 VA maximum.
0 to 95%
-10' to
relative humidity.
+ 60° C.
0 to 95%
Sea level to 10,000 feet.
24" W x 22" D x 5.25" H. Weight: 38 lbs.
relative humidity.
Sea level to 3000 meters.
61 cm W x 55.9 cm D x 13.3 cm H.
Weight: 17.3
kg.
105 -125 VAC or 210 -250 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Power
consumption: 150 VA maximum.
After miliel aging of 60 days.
Measured at 10% and 90% APL relative to 50% APL.
3 Maximum variation at sub -carrier amplitude from 75% to 10% of mod. Sub -carrier mod. percentage. 10% peak to peak.
4 Maximum variation of sub -carrier phase with respect to burst for mod percentage from 75% to 10 %. Sub -carrier mod. percentage: 10% peak to peak.
6 -30 dB or batter return loss up to 5.0 MHz.
6 The MCP .1U excitar does not provide sufficient selectivity in the exciter alone to meet FCC and CCIR transmitter specifications for -3.58 MHz suppression or harmonic radiation. However.
used ina Harris IF modulated transmitter, FCC and CCIR performance requirements In these areas will be met or exceeded
1
2
hen the MCP -1U is
ORDERING INFORMATION
MCP-1U visual exciter /modulator for FCC
standards service, Channels
14 -69
retrofit visual exciter/ modulator for FCC standards service, Channels 14 -89
MCP -11.1 visual exciter /modulator for CCIR System "G" service, Bands IV & V (E21 -E68)
Automatic exciter/ modulator switcher optional)
RAK -96 basic rack 24") for mounting backup exciter, automatic exciter twitcher
Side panel kit for RAK -96. Includes two panels In Harris' white finish
Front trim kit for RAK -96. Trim in brushed aluminum with Harris' blue Insert
MCP-111
l
Door handle with lock for rear door of RAK -96
CP-3.5M-677
994 -8003 -001
994 =8137 -001
994- 8003 -002
994 -7076 -001
446- 0636 -000
448- 0589 -000
448- 0637 -000
448- 0559 -000
ADV. 503 PTD. IN U.S.A.
190
www.americanradiohistory.com
the required power levels. Each dipole is mechanically supported and fed from special baluns for both vertical and
horizontal polarization. Because of their independent nature,
either the horizontal or both sets of elements may be driven
to provide horizontal or circular polarization. In addition, the
baluns provide DC ground potential to each dipole element
for lightning protection for antenna and transmitter.
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Radomes are standard with the CPV, and eliminate the need
for electrical deicing in virtually all environments. This can
result in substantial savings each year in electrical heating
costs
addition to the initial savings in not having to purchase heater elements, transformers and wiring.
CPV
CIRCULARLY POLARIZED
TELEVISION ANTENNA
-in
AXIAL RATIO. The CPV has superb axial ratio characteristics
as a direct result of the precise tailoring of the radiated
pattern of the vee dipoles. Axial ratio, the ratio of the major
and minor axes of the polarization elipse, critically defines
the quality of a radiating element. When circularly polarized
receiving antennas are used by the viewer, reflected signals
are attenuated, thereby reducing ghosting effects.
Tower loading comparable to Batwing and traveling
wave antennas
Top mount design
VERTICAL PATTERN. Vertical pattern contouring to introduce
beam tilt and null fill may be provided by means of standard
phase distribution techniques-such as those used in many
successful Batwing installations. Control of the vertical pattern is accomplished with no degradation of the axial ratio.
Therefore, contoured vertical patterns are available much the
same as in conventional horizontally polarized TV antennas.
Excellent axial ratio -reduces ghosting effects
High power handling capabilities
Requires no electrical deicing
Superb horizontal circularity
Excellent control of vertical pattern
HORIZONTAL CIRCULARITY. For omnidirectional stations,
the shape of the horizontal pattern will vary from omni by
less than ±2 dB. Stations employing directional arrays will
find one of the several patterns available to be ideally suited
to their specific need.
Horizontal plane pattern directional capability
Antenna elements are at DC ground potential for
lightning protection
Harris' new circularly polarized television broadcast antenna, the
CPV, features a top mount design with windloading specifications
comparable to Batwing and traveling wave antennas. Now a
broadcaster may simply replace his present antenna with a CPV
with only minor modifications to his tower!
-
addition to its outstanding mechanical specifications, the CPV
antenna also features excellent circularity (standard omnidirectional pattern varies less than ±2 dB); low axial ratio (less than
2 dB); VSWR less than 1.05:1 at visual carrier and below 1.1:1
over each channel; directional horizontal pattern capability; and
a variety of vertical patterns that may be tailored to specific
coverage requirements. Harris has spent years in research and
development of the CP concept for TV broadcasting, so that the
current design now combines optimum circularly polarized performance with all of the regular features of the Harris line of
television antennas.
In
With the Harris CPV, picture quality may be improved through
ghost reduction. Also, increased signal -to -noise ratios may be
achieved whether the viewer uses a CP receiving antenna, conventional rabbit ears or an ordinary outside receiving antenna.
DESIGN. Each bay of the CPV consists of three crossed vee
dipoles mounted at 120° intervals around a vertical mast. These
dipoles are separated by three vertical grids which isolate the
vee dipoles and provide horizontal beam shaping. Each set of
crossed dipoles is fed in phase quadrature to produce rotating RF
energy. The signal emanating from each set of dipoles is considered right hand circular when the field rotation is clockwise
as viewed in the direction of propagation.
The Harris CPV is available with power ratings up to 100 kilowatts, and a special wideband flat dipole is used to safely handle
www.americanradiohistory.com
Preliminary mechanical specifications for typical CPV models
are shown in the charts below. These values are based on a 50
lb. /sq. ft. EIA wind. From the comparisons listed below each
chart, it is apparent that, bay for bay, the tower loading of the
CPV Low Band -gain 2.7 per polarization (allows for 15%
CHANNEL
NO. OF
2
6
3
6
4
6
5
6
6
6
BAYS
CPV is usually below that of the Batwing. Also, tower loading of
the CPV is below that of the corresponding traveling wave an-
tenna in most cases.
null fill)
HEIGHT
(FEET)
RAD. CENTER
(FEET)
SHEAR
(LBS.)
MOMENT
(FT.-LBS.)
WEIGHT
(LBS.)
100.5
95.0
82.9
76.8
71.5
47.3
44.8
38.2
35.8
33.3
10,200
9,235
7,625
6,675
6,280
388,170
334,500
236,160
191,975
166,950
17,800
16,900
12,500
11,320
10,100
(For a six -bay Bales ng for Channels 2-3, the overturn moment is 335,720 IL -lbs., and the weight is 16,900 lbs. For
ft-lbs., and the weight Is 12,000 lbs.)
a
six-bay Batwing for Channels 48, the overturn moment is 229,180
CPV High Band -gain 5.7 per polarization (allows for 15% null fill)
CHANNEL
NO. OF
BAYS
7
12
8
12
12
12
12
12
12
9
10
11
12
13
HEIGHT
(FEET)
RAD. CENTER
(FEET)
SHEAR
(LBS.)
MOMENT
(FT.-LBS.)
WEIGHT
(LBS.)
70.3
70.3
66.2
66.2
61.9
61.9
61.9
33.7
33.7
31.6
31.6
29.5
29.5
29.5
4,965
4,952
4,698
4,673
4,394
4,372
4,353
156,592
156,156
139,000
138,810
121,426
120,779
120,210
8,553
8,543
7,459
For a 12 -bay Batwing for Channels 7 -13, the overturn moment is 151,300 It.-lbs., and the weight is 12,200 lbs. For
ft: lbs. with slot covers, and 187,000 ft.-lbs. with radomes.)
Is 144,400
W.
CPV
TYPICAL AZIMUTHAL PLANE
MEASURED CIRCULARITY
H(`PIZONTAL POLARIZATION
1
0
a
7,441
6,869
6,854
6,841
TW -12 traveling wave antenna for Channel 12 the overturn moment
CPV
SINGLE DIPOLE ELEMENT
VSWR
1
*4140
44440
RP-2.5M-379
ADV. 527A PTD. IN U.S.A.
192
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION MANGLING
CBR DEVELOPMENT. Harris has spent more than 2 years in
research and development of the circular transmission concept
for television broadcasting. Basic design objectives of the CP
antenna stressed optimum circularly polarized performance,
combined with all of the conventional features of the Harris line
of television antennas. Theoretical design followed by extensive
prototype testing has proven the CBR to be the best approach to
circularly polarized transmission to date.
CIRCULARLY
POLARIZED
TELEVISION
ANTENNA
Excellent axial ratio -- reduces ghosting effects
Wide bandwidth permits multiplexing of all V.H.F. high band T.V. channels
High power handling capabilities
Requires no electrical de -icing when used with radomes
Wire -mesh cavity design minimizes windloading
Superb horizontal circularity
Excellent control of vertical pattern
Antenna elements are at D.C. ground potential for
lightning protection
Horizontal elements
vertical elements
may be driven independent of
Harris Cavity Backed Radiator (CBR) circularly
polarized television broadcast antenna offers the ultimate in
television signal transmission and reception. Whether the
viewer uses a circularly polarized receiving antenna, conventional rabbit ears or ordinary outside receiving antenna, picture
quality may be improved with the reduction of ghosting and/or
increased signal to noise ratios.
The new
In
addition, the extremely wide bandwidth inherent in Harris'
CBR antennas permits multiplexing of any two or more stations
in the VHF high -band channels. All cavity backed radiators are
designed, built and tested at the Harris antenna test facility,
assuring the optimum in axial ratio, horizontal circularity and
vertical pattern shape.
193
www.americanradiohistory.com
The Harris Cavity Backed Radiator consists of a crossed dipole
radiator fed in phase quadrature and mounted within a circular
cavity director. Rotating RF energy is produced when the cavity
is excited by the dipole elements. The signal eminating from the
cavity is considered right -hand circular when the field of rotation
is clockwise as viewed in the direction of propagation. Cavity
size is principally determined by beamwidth requirements. A
beamwidth of 90 degrees is required for a 4- around array and 120
degrees is required for a 3- around array, (measured at the
half -voltage coordinates).
GRID CAVITY. The cavity used in the Harris circularly polarized
television antenna is welded steel grid which is then galvanized.
The cavity grid is supported from a center mounting plate, which
also serves as a mounting for the dipole assembly and for
attachment of the unit to the supporting structure.
Radomes, standard with the Harris CBR circularly polarized TV
antenna, eliminate the need for electrical de -icing in virtually all
environments. This can save hundreds of dollars per year in
electrical heating costs --in addition to the savings in not having
to purchase heater elements, transformers and wiring. The
combination of grid cavities and aerodynamically designed
radomes minimizes windloading of the Harris C P antenna.
DIPOLE ELEMENTS. A special wideband flat dipole is used for
excitation of the cavity and to safely handle the required power
levels. Each dipole is mechanically supported and fed from
special baluns for both vertical and horizontal polarization.
Because of their independant nature, either the horizontal or
both sets of elements may be driven to provide horizontal or
circular polarization. In addition, the baluns provide D.C. ground
potential to each dipole element for lightning protection for
antenna and transmitter.
AXIAL RATIO. The Harris CBR antenna has superb axial ratio
characteristics as a direct result of the precise tailoring of the
radiated pattern by the cavity. Axial ratio, the ratio of the major
and minor axes of the polarization elipse, critically defines the
quality of a radiating element. When circularly polarized
receiving antennas are used by the viewer, reflected signals are
attenuated, thereby reducing ghosting effects.
WIDE BANDWIDTH. Maximum utilization of antenna aperture is
realized with the Harris CP antenna because two, three or more
VHF high -band stations may feed one structure. Multiplexing
has become a significant factor in reducing station costs in view
of the recent increases in the price of tower structures. The
broadband radiating element used in conjunction with
conventional high power hybrid junctions assures excellent
performance over all channels from 7 -13. VSWR is 1.1:1 or
better at any frequency between channels 7 and 13 as illustrated
in the measured VSWR graph on the facing page.
Ei H PLANE RADIATION
PATTERN COMPARISON
HARRIS
194
M
www.americanradiohistory.com
HIGH POWER CAPABILITIES. The Harris CP antenna is
designed for multiplex applications as well as single station
operation. Up to 100kW power ratings are available for single
transmitter operation. For dual station operation, up to 150kW
input may be accommodated. For applications requiring the
multiplexing of more than two stations, special high power feed
systems are available.
MEASURED HORIZONTAL
RADIATION PATTERN
MECHANICALLY ROTATING
DIPOLE ILLUMINATION
VERTICAL PATTERN. Vertical pattern contouring to introduce
beam tilt and null fill may be provided by means of standard
phase distribution techniques such as has been used in many
successful Batwing installations. Control of the vertical pattern
is accomplished with no degradation of the axial ratio.
Therefore, contoured vertical patterns are available much the
same as in conventional horizontally polarized TV antennas.
RELATIVE FIELD [DB
HORIZONTAL CIRCULARITY. For omnidirectional stations, the
shape of the horizontal pattern will vary from omni by less than
± 2dB for three -sided tower configurations. With a four- around
antenna array, the typical circularity will be comparable.
Stations employing directional arrays will find one of the several
patterns available to be ideally suited to their specific need.
The Harris Cavity Backed Radiator circularly polarized antenna
marks a new dimension in television broadcasting. The excellent
axial ratio, superb horizontal and vertical patterns and
application flexibility make it a technically superior antenna.
Careful design consideration of important mechanical details
assures a long and dependable lifespan. No matter what your
VHF high band television antenna requirements
may
be... Harris has a circularly polarized antenna to meet them.
MEASURED VSWR
VSWR
OF A
CIRCULARITY
zt 1.75 DB
SINGLE HIGH POWER CAVITY
CP MODE
2.0
19
18
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
CHANNELS
1.3
7
-13
1.2
1.1
1.0
100
150
200
250
300
350
FREQUENCY MHz
HARRIS
ap
195
f
www.americanradiohistory.com
Single radiating element of
the Harris C P antenna
Radomes eliminate the need
for electrical de -icing equipment
WINDLOADING
[Triangular Mast with Radomas]
MOMENT
[FT. LBS.]
WEIGHT
[LBS.]
4,885
6,550
8,350
10,205
83,045
148,360
235,890
345,440
5.425
7,350
9.300
11,500
33.2
44.0
55.0
65.8
4,770
6,355
8,130
9,925
79,185
139,810
223,575
326,535
5,300
7,150
9,075
11,175
10
12
32.2
42.7
53.2
63.7
4,625
6,175
7,875
9,600
74,465
131,840
209,475
305,760
5,150
6,950
8,775
10,825
10
10
10
10
6
8
10
12
31.4
41.6
51.7
62.0
4,510
6,010
7,650
9,350
70.810
125,010
197,775
289.850
5,025
6,750
8,525
10,525
11
6
11
8
11
11
10
12
30.7
40.6
50.5
60.4
4,410
5,865
7,475
9,110
67,700
119,060
188,750
275,125
4,900
6,600
8,325
10,250
12
12
12
12
6
8
10
12
30.0
39.5
58.7
4,310
5,710
7.260
8,850
64,650
112,775
178,250
259,750
4,800
6,425
8,100
9,975
13
13
13
13
6
8
10
12
29.3
38.7
48.0
57.3
4,210
5,590
7,100
8,640
61.680
108,200
170,400
247,550
4,675
6,275
7,900
9,725
NO.OF
BAYS
MAST LENGTH
[FEET]
7
6
7
'8
7
7
10
12
34.0
45.3
56.5
67.7
8
6
8
8
8
10
8
12
9
6
9
8
9
9
CHANNEL
SHEAR @ 50 PSF
[LBS]
49.1
SPECIFICATIONS
SINGLE CHANNEL
MULTIPLEX
VSWR
GAIN /BAY
1.1:1
UNITY
1.1:1
UNITY
CIRCULARITY (Top Mount)
AXIAL RATIO
POWER RATING
< 2dB
100 kW
±
2dB
CP-3.5M-977
±3dB
c 2dB
150 kW
ADV. 456 PTD. IN U.S.A.
i95
www.americanradiohistory.com
High quality performance
o
HARRIS
(31,IIVILJNI,
IONS
AN.
Simple, reliable, economical design
Maximum pattern versatility
Low VSWR
TRAVELING
WAVE
HELICAL
TV ANTENNA
Low impedance, non -resonant radiating element
Maximum lightning protection
Superior pattern stability under adverse wind conditions
Easy to de- ice
-no
internal heaters or radomes required
Actual factory measurements of horizontal and vertical
patterns provided for each antenna
Heavy duty mechanical construction
Low maintenance costs
www.americanradiohistory.com
The Harris traveling wave Helical television transmitting anten-
uncomplicated design that greatly enhances
reliability, while providing maximum pattern versatility and
stability. The antenna employs the traveling -wave principle,
which results in a smoothly contoured, low sideband single bay
pattern, and excellent VSWR characteristics. VSWR is typically
08 or better across the band, 1.05 or better at visual carrier.
When used in a multi -bay array, the Helical can provide an infinite variety of patterns. Typical VHF high band vertical and
horizontal patterns are shown below.
na is noted for its
1
HELICAL DESIGN. The traveling wave Helical antenna consists of a right- and -left -hand helix wound around a conducting
mast with the feed point at the center. The antenna uses the
traveling -wave principle to excite a large portion of the aperture
from a single feed point on each bay. The RF current, because
of the radiation loss, is attenuated as it approaches the ends of
the conductor. Since only a small amount of energy remains at
this point, the ends of the helices may be left open or grounded
to the mast, rather than terminated, with negligible effects on
performance
The helix is designed to meet certain dimensional requirements
as necessitated by the frequency so that the currents at like
points in each of its turns are in phase. Thus, as the current
progresses from turn to turn, it is delayed for each turn an
amount of time equal to that consumed by an integral number
of cycles. Each turn is made an integral number of wavelengths in helical circumference as measured at the velocity of
propagation along the helix. Most frequently, two wave - lengths
per turn are used
The spacing of the helix radiating element from the steel mast
is such that an appreciable amount of radiation loss per turn oc-
lo
nnnl,liYn11
I-IARR16
0.9
0.7
LOW- IMPEDANCE, NON -RESONANT RADIATING ELEMENT. A right- and left -hand helix are used in each section to
effectively cancel the vertically polarized radiation components
due to the helix pitch angle. The two helices are placed end to
end and are fed by a common feed point at their junction
located at the section's center. This reduces the feed -point impedance to approximately 100 ohms. This low impedance, and
consequent low RF voltages, minimizes dielectric breakdown
problems. and results in an antenna design inherently immune
to moderate icing conditions. This basic design characteristic.
coupled with the fact that the Helical antenna is fundamentally
a non -resonant circuit, contributes to reliable. stable performance under extreme weather conditions. In addition, each feed
point is provided with a shorted quarter -wave stub that
prevents coupling lightning surges into the transmission line
and the transmitter.
ANTENNA PATTERNS. Since the gains achieved with most
Helical antennas are usually high. the need for pattern contouring must be carefully considered. The Helical is designed
especially for ease of contouring, and almost any pattern
desired is obtainable. Also, beam tilt and null fill are tailored to
the customer's specific requirements, and simple modifications
of both may be accomplished in the field to compensate for
shifting population densities. Each Helical is tested at the Harris
Ca =_=_+-_
0.9
nnna1n:mjn..
TAN -15H
nnn1111n111111111
HELICAL TV ANTENNA
3
rnnmnu
iflnnn11111
TAN.20H
4 BAY
BAY
CHANNELS
7
HELICAL TV ANTENNA
0.e
-13
CHANNELS 7.13
Typical Calculated
Vertical Field Pattern
Typical Calculated
Vertical Field Pattern
20'/. Null Fill
5` Beam Tat
i11111=111111nl=C::
=
horizontal pattern to meet horizontal -pattern requirements.
1111111n111nn
0.9
o
curs along the helix. The design objective for this radiation loss
is about 4 dB per turn. Since there are approximately six turns
on the helix, the energy remaining at the ends is down 24 dB.
The total length of the helix has been adjusted commensurate
with the loss per turn so that resonance effects due to end
reflections are avoided. This reduces partial clover -leafing of the
0.7
20% Null Fill
5° Bean Tilt
O6nn1nn111 11111
nnl=11n111n 111n11111111
íiiiní%líiiníi111>,sfe®®®
n1::®:11111
11n
nniá®®L®:n
O.4:Si1'151!®®®
N1/8 11®®efi®8f®i1N1l81j8i0®®
111111
1111111111
o
0.6
W
1111
os
G
1nn11:1sm111
=
N81' ®®®18ái® ®®11N®1011810111!1!i®
0.311®®®®®E®(:TMnE®á®1®11i1
0.2
ßn1111111111111111
111111C1n11111111s11
nnnnnnnnnvIinn
nnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Dn11n11n
i :nnnnllnn
0.I
4
!
HARRIS
2
l
Di
0
3
ANGLE
FROY
4
5
HORIZONTAL
6
7
G
9
0.4
N
0.3
0.2
or
i0
DOWN
W/
///
198
www.americanradiohistory.com
2.
UP
0
l'
ANGLE
e
3
FRON
4
5'
HORIZONTAL
6'
7.
DOWN
e
9
4'26
TV antenna test range before shipment, and the customer is
furnished the measured horizontal and vertical patterns.
BEAM TILTING. Simple beam tilting without appreciable null
fill -in may be achieved on the Helical antenna by introducing
phase shift between successive sections. This is accomplished
by using a different length of feed line between the power
divider and feed elbow of each section on a VHF Helical. Simple
beam tilt in the range of zero -to -one degree does not basically
change the vertical pattern shape as compared to a standard
vertical pattern. Nor do simple beam tilts of this order reduce
the peak -power gain appreciably.
NULL FILL. Null fill -in is often desirable and may be obtained
by proper power distribution and current phase in each bay.
Large degrees of null fill -in will reduce the antenna gain.
However, the advantage of a higher signal level over the close in area will often justify this loss in gain.
EASY DE- ICING. De -icing is accomplished by a low- voltage.
high current fed through the radiating helix -no internal
heaters or radomes are required. This current is supplied by a
thermostatically controlled transformer (for each bay), which is
included when de -icing is ordered. The dissipation is a nominal
1.5 watts per square inch of helix element surface. Because of
the relatively small area. only 2.5 kilowatts of power per section
is required for effective de -icing on VHF high band Helicals.
HEAVY -DUTY CONSTRUCTION. All Harris traveling wave
Helical antennas are of heavy -duty construction and are designed to operate in areas where heavy winds and /or heavy ice
1.0
i
9
6'®
1®®
®
t _8£2tIMEE
i:rú
=sEJ2.Egi rammal w®
=.=FAMMIO®®®
=alailwit.M®
- E-JE
0.8
HARRIS
RE
16--FIV
W
0.
6
0.5
W 0.4
A:
0.3
0.2
W
KUID -TV
KUID -TV CHANNEL 12
MOSCOW. IDAHO
Typical Vertical
Field Pattern
®
rz
®
fiáE
Mr
EL®®E
S_
MENi®NEEME®!
- --
Measured
Calculated
5=_a-.
20% Null Fill
in
0 5° Bearn Tilt
®®®®M
®NEEEN
EN
®EE®®
.=M
NEEMEM
®®
sMM®®
®E
m
fiINIE®M
MAmmWETM
CHANNEL 12
MOSCOW. IDAHO
VHF HELICAL ANTENNA
ERraW®dh
EMEi
MEASURED HORIZONTAL FIELD PATTERN
TAH -10H VHF HELICAL ANTENNA
2-BAY
OVARMI®E
=_=FsflEEE®
O
ble on the outside of the mast, and pole steps are provided on
the mast for easy inspection and maintenance. Due to the convenient element accessibility and the simplicity of the antenna
design, maintenance costs are typically very low.
TAH.10H
B3mKVrn-$N®®®®
07
COMPLETE MECHANICAL ACCESS, LOW MAINTENANCE COSTS. All radiating elements are totally accessi-
;._ M_ EN sr
-
0.9
loading may be encountered. The extra stiffness and strength of
the Helical mast minimizes antenna sway. and enables the
Helical to withstand a pressure on projected flat surfaces of 50
pounds per square feet of windloading -which corresponds to
an actual wind velocity of 112 miles per hour. All hardware is
weather resistant stainless steel or zinc plated.
®n
altraMMEIMIEMEMMITEMMIIMMIN
®®R®
®E
`iffiBaMM®M®NE®®RI
®
HEMEMEMEMEAMIMILIMINIMMIIIERME
IMgErfaraffiiirreARZ®N.I® ENIMIENN
EN
MgEZMOLE
MINE®LEELFEN
MNIABO.t
a=MECEN=EIZIEBIRCEEIWAIBIZORFR
ftialm
s®mm
N®
®
liRF
-_8a®
EMEEMENIEMINEEMEINIIMEmi
0.1
EE
e1526dB
i'MENIENES2=111111=111111111111=1111111Milia
3'
2'
l'
2'
3
LIP
r,
a.erage crcie
ANGLE
FROM
4
3'
HORIZONTAL
6
7
DOWN
8
9
l0
HARRIS
199
www.americanradiohistory.com
HELICAL VHF SPECIFICATIONS CHANNELS 7-13
For information on VHF low band and UHF Helicals contact Harris
Antenna
Type
CHANNEL
Antenna
Height
Null
Fill
H
ft. lc)
Input Power (e)
kW
dBk
R
ft. Id)
M
S
Moment
ft.- lbs.la)
Shear
W
Weight
lbs. (a)
lbs.
12.41
330.480
330.480
587.650
4,950
7,030
7.030
9.250
7,500
13,000
13,000
19.500
9.64
11.14
1.46
12.55
159,540
330,480
330,480
587,650
4.950
7,030
7.030
9.250
7.500
13.000
13,000
19.500
9.49
131,410
272.610
272.610
472,450
4.310
6.190
6.190
8.140
6.500
11.000
11.000
17,800
131,410
272.610
272,610
472.450
4.310
6.190
6.190
8,140
6,500
11,000
11.000
17.800
131,410
272.610
272.610
472,450
4.310
6.190
6.190
8.140
6,500
11.000
11,000
17,800
102.980
219.310
219,310
379.030
3,670
5,340
5,340
7,010
5.900
10.000
10.000
15.500
102,980
219,310
219.310
379.030
3.670
5.340
5.340
7.010
5.900
10.000
10.000
15.500
Power Gain
Maximum (b)
Rad.
Center
TAH -10H 2 Sections
TAH -15H 3 Sections
TAH -20H 4 Sections
Ratio
dB
7
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
TAH-15H
TAH -20H
17.48
18.26
18.57
56
67
72
123
20.90
55
66
17.40
18.20
9.0
9.54
11.00
11.30
67.67
97.25
97.25
127.25
35.51
67.67
97.25
97.25
127.25
35.51
53.74
50.88
67.90
71
18.51
121
20.83
9.2
13.0
14.0
18.0
20%
20%
63.33
15%
15%
91.25
119.25
33.24
50.25
47.61
63.70
54
65
70
118
17.32
18.13
18.45
20.72
8.9
12.5
13.5
17.4
10.97
11.30
12.41
20%
20%
63.33
91.25
91.25
119.25
33.24
50.25
47.61
63.70
53
64
69
115
17.24
18.06
18.39
20.61
9.2
12.9
13.9
17.4
11.11
1.43
12.41
63.33
91.25
91.25
33.24
50.25
47.61
63.70
52
63
17.16
17.99
18.33
20.53
13.3
14.3
17.4
111
17.08
17.92
18.26
20.45
12.7
13.7
17.7
50
.16.99
61
17.85
18.20
20.37
20%
20%
15%
15%
53.74
50.88
67.90
12.6
13.5
17.4
159.540
CHANNEL 8
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
TAH-15H
TAH -20H
20%
20%
15%
15%
1
CHANNEL 9
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
TAH-15H
TAH -20H
9125
CHANNEL 10
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
TAH-15H
TAH -20H
CHANNEL
15%
15%
9.64
1
11
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
TAH-15H
TAH -20H
20%
20%
15%
15%
1
19.2 5
68
113
9.4
9.73
1.24
11.55
1
12.41
-
CHANNEL 12
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
TAH-15H
TAH-20H
20%
20%
15%
15%
111.25
30.97
46.77
44.31
59.50
59.25
85.25
85.25
111.25
30.97
46.77
44.31
59.50
59.2 5
85 2 5
85.2 5
51
62
67
9.59
9.1
1.04
11.37
12.48
1
CHANNEL 13
TAH-10H
TAH-15H
20%
20%
TAH-1 5H
TAH -20H
15%
15%
66
109
HELICAL NOTES:
1. Gains shown in the tabla: Antenna having .5' beam tilt and either 15% or 20%
null fill. Other patterns available on request
2. Horizontal pattern circularity: +1.5 dB or better.
3. Input connections: Standard single 8K" EIA flanged line. 50 ohm.
I.
9.2
12.8
13.8
17.7
9.64
1
1.07
11.40
12.48
Data shown is these tables is typical. Specific data may be obtained on request
Lightning protectors
from Harris Corporation. Broadcast Products Division.
g.
Beacon
Antennas are delivered completely assembled to the customer F.0.B Harris Test
Rage
customers option may be partially di
bled to facilitate
transportation. Re- assembly of the antenna at installation site is the responsibiliand at the
ty of the customer. Supervision of re- assembly and impedance test can be
KEY TO DATA:
a.
supplied at the customer's request.
Supporting structure necessary to support antenna during re-assembly end
American National Standard of Building Coda Requirements for Minimum Design
Lads in Building and Other Structures (ANSI A58.1- 1972). The loading data
must be supplied by the customer. Construction prints of the supporting structure
shown in the table is based on
mal to flat surfaces.
h.
For all antennas listed.
Radio Horizon is
a
wind pressure of 50 lbs. per sq.
ft
acting nor-
instilled above 500 bat AAT, the relative field at the
max. and thus. per FCC 73.884 (c) 1. nad
grater than 90% of
d.
not be given separately.
H: height above tower top including 4.00 ft. of lightning protector.
R: height of radiation center above tower top.
e.
Pak visual power rating:
c.
multiply by .8.
JK
1
will
Radiation
tut
The antennas are designed in accordance with the Uniform Building Coda and the
center
- --
be supplied by the company.
h.
The beacon lighting cable to the bottom of the antenna is included.
i.
Antenna will be supplied with
j.
color required at time of installation.
All mechanical parts are fabricated from hot dipped galvanized steel or other
materials that resist corrosion such
copper. brass. bronze and stainless steel.
k.
Demonstration of pattern test at the test range available at extra cost.
a
coat of protective primer only. Customer to paint
L
a
I.
Supervision of installation and tasting of antenna and transmission line at the
`
5
R
w
custom(' sits
For average black level power including 20% aural,
m.
is available at extra cost.
Nominal amounts of null fill and beam tilt available et no increase in price.
5M-977
ADV 447 PTD. IN U.S.A
200
www.americanradiohistory.com
Available with Diode Gun Plumbicon pick -up tubes
Exclusive Highlight Handling system
HAIRFUS
Complete remote set -up saves time and money
COMMUNICATION AND
High signal -to -noise ratio for quiet pictures
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Automatic color balance, automatic iris and
automatic timing are standard
TC -80A
Automatic Live
Color TV Camera
Versatile add -on modular Triax system
Efficient switching power supply greatly reduces
power consumption
Master -gamma allows picture contrast control flex-
ibility
Rugged construction; designed for use with any
quality lens
Stability of camera settings means controlled,
repeatable performance.
.;iit;it
;
:
.T1..-.
1
201
www.americanradiohistory.com
TC-80A...a significant advance in
As an evolution in TV camera design
from previous Harris successes with the
TC -50 and TC -80. the TC -80A offers you
the most recent developments in TV
camera technology -including Diode
Gun Plumbicon pick -up tubes and
Highlight Handling -to bring you superb
picture quality in the studio or in the
most demanding remote situations.
Harris' broadcast cameras are now
being used in a variety of markets in the
U.S., ranging from large markets such as
Los Angeles (ADI No. 2), through
medium size markets such as Dayton.
Ohio (ADI No. 49). to small markets such
as Quincy, Illinois (ADI No. 138). The
continuing development of new features
by the Harris video engineering staff has
added to our cameras' usefulness to
broadcasters throughout the country. All
of these features have now been
combined with a breakthrough in pickup technology to produce the Harris TC80A. As a result, color fidelity and picture
integrity of this top -of- the -line model set
a new standard of excellence for live
color cameras.
Standard automatics in the TC -80A
include digital black and white balance, a
three -speed automatic iris and
automatic timing. Automatic full -time
horizontal and vertical centering is
optional. These automatic features,
combined with the TC -80A's inherent
stability, allow camera operation by nontechnical personnel. freeing your
engineers for other station duties. The
stability has been engineered in, so that
most controls for the TC -80A, under
normal studio conditions, seldom
require resetting.
philosophy of complete remote set -up
and operation has guided the
development of the TC -80A, from the
add -on Triax feature, to the location of all
set -up and operational controls at the
Camera Control Unit (CCU). When more
than one TC -80A is being used, the
remote set -up provides consistency
A
across camera chains for uniform video
throughout a production. Also, operate
panels for several TC -80A cameras may
be centrally located so that one person
can control the video, freeing the
cameramen to follow the action. Now you
can have network quality pictures in the
field as well as the studio, with high
camera sensitivity and a master gamma
contrast control that provides sharply
defined pictures under all types of
lighting conditions.
'Trademark of N.V. Philips of Holland
202
www.americanradiohistory.com
All lenses designed for the one -inch
image format may be used with the TC80A, from the largest 42:1 to 10:1, or
smaller. All standard lenses use a
hanging. self -positioning mount and
positive lock, and may be connected or
disconnected quickly.
With its outstanding picture quality, low light -level capability, true ease of set -up
and operation, and unique flexibility, the
TC -80A offers you a positive way to
improve the quality of your live telecasts
and commercial productions, while
broadcast television camera design
Diode Gun Plumbicon camera
tubes, the most useful recent
development in broadcast pick -up
technology.
from picture highlights virtually
disappear on Diode Gun Plumbicon
tubes, and substantial improvement is
seen on standard XQ1070 Plumbicon
tubes as well. Able to handle up to 4F
stops of highlights in any color, this
circuit dramatically pulls crisp detail out
of shots with difficult exposures by
eliminating blooming. The duty cycle of
increased beam current in the
Plumbicon tube is extremely low so that
the lifetime of the tubes is not materially
affected.
Highlight Handling at the flick of a
switch...a revolutionary, easy -to -use
circuit that reduces comet tailing
The TC -80A is available with Diode Gun
or regular Plumbicon tubes; and
changing tubes, or even tube types, is an
holding the line on operating costs. This
camera reflects Harris' many years of
broadcast experience, and is another
industry leader in the Harris video
product line.
Advances In Pick -Up Technology.
Topping the long list of TC -80A features
are:
10:1!
Diode Gun Plumbicon tubes demonstrate better resolution, overbeam
capability and lag. The standard 1 -inch
Plumbicon has always demonstrated
better lag than the 11a -inch tube, but now
the performance gap is even wider.
Modulation depth at 400 TV lines has
been improved to better than 65% in
Green, 65% in Blue and 60% in Red.
The adjustment -free Highlight Handling
system makes objectionable comet -tails
amazingly simple field operation taking
only minutes and requiring no tools.
Highlight Handling and Diode Gun
Plumbicon tubes provide clean, sharp
video under the most severe conditions
of extreme contrast with brilliant
specular reflections; or in action
situations under low -light -level
conditions. Take this camera into any
situation and you'll get the shots you
want.
Automatic Color Balance. Color
balance is simply and easily achieved at
the touch of a button, with modern digital
circuitry providing error -free white and
black alignment in a matter of seconds.
During white balance, the TC -80A
viewfinder provides a window area for
aiming the camera at a white reference
target.
Similarly, black balance is achieved by
pushbutton control. Capping the lens
provides the camera with its reference
black, and again, the camera
automatically indicates balance
completion.
Automatic Iris Control. Special
weighting and frequency discriminating
digital circuitry prevents specular
reflections or momentary errors from
upsetting an otherwise properly exposed
picture. High iris speeds are used to
correct big errors fast -then, as the
proper exposure is approached, slower
speeds are used to reach, and never
overshoot, the proper setting. Several
front panel response controls permit
tailoring automatic performance to
specific requirements.
Super -Quiet Pre -Amps. I he front end of
each pre -amp is a folded -cascode
configuration utilizing the lowest -noise
field effect transistors available. This
provides a wideband video amplifier
which is the heart of the transresistance
pre -amplifier. D.C. coupling from the
tube and through the pre -amplifier
eliminates low frequency break points
for clean, smear -free video.
Low -light -level performance is enhanced
by these low -noise pre -amplifiers in
conjunction with bias light, efficient
prism optics and a master gain control.
The master gain control switches in
steps of 6. 12 and 6 dB, and has 6
dB of continuous vernier adjustment for
18 dB of gain.
up to
'
Pictures are surprisingly noise free at
five foot -candles or less! The electronic
color temperature corrector, in
conjunction with the automatic color
balance feature. is especially useful
when color temperature shifts
accompany changes in light level.
While balancing, the camera's paint
controls are disabled, meaning that
artistic effects can be preserved even
though color balance is retouched.
Automatic Centering. With this optional
feature, independent digitial electronic
circuitry in the TC -80A provides constant
sensing of scene content for registration
errors and automatically compensates
horizontal and vertical centering. These
circuits operate continuously on picture
information and do not require special
charts, scenes or operator intervention.
203
www.americanradiohistory.com
e
The pre -amps are identical in all three
channels and may be interchanged
easily for troubleshooting.
r,
v
S.
O
.u
40
WM
Mt
V
.Ot
r
..
!.'.
i°
.
I
r.
I
The TC -80A remote set -up philosophy is evident from the set -up and operate
panels which allow complete centralized picture control, even 3- channel remote picture rotation. The TC -80A CCU has four 19" rack unit components
the processor frame, the set -up and operate panels, an intercom panel and the
main power supply. A modern console-type cabinet is available from Harris to
house the CCU.
-
ww
Y.
O
!;
e
f
haze or fog.
.3<5
.
S.
Contrast Control. The unique master
gamma control on the CCU /operate
panel allows you to either increase or
decrease contrast for interesting shots in
difficult lighting conditions. The master
gamma control can reduce contrast
under conditions of severe lighting
differences such as shadows on a
football field. but can also increase
contrast for pleasing shots from very flat
scenes such as skylines with ground
b
O
O
N.
0001
.O!
OE
CVO
01M
a.!
V
C.41
MO
.Y.
is
O
I
0 AM
ó.a
O
NAP
Io vY.
!Y
CPO
V
IO.4 5011101
POwf
MOW
Y.5
11G0
MAW
SuO
Stu
1300'
0000
o MO
sri
OM
/
CID
o
AUTO
CpV.
\
.!
CZ
/
\
.M
/
ONv.
545«
/
\
!
.G
INA
ii
/
\
OM
SM1
CM®
Linear Color Matrix. True color masking
allows accurate compensation for optical
color -splitting deficiencies, and for
phosphor inadequacies in receiver
tubes. Positive and negative addition of
the three primary colors is accomplished
prior to encoding of the color signal to
optimize the camera taking
characteristics. Flesh tones, deeply
saturated reds and pale yellows -the
truest test of a camera's accuracy -are
faithfully reproduced by the TC -80A.
dimension in picture quality. Some
unique features of this system include:
fully gamma corrected detail
enhancement to maintain resolution
even in the low -light areas: and
adjustable horizontal boost frequency
and single control horizontal /vertical
ratio adjustment to allow tailoring the
picture crispness to the scene material.
Calibrated Beam Set. The TC -80A uses
a calibrated electronic attenuator to
Electronic Color Temperature
Corrector. This exclusive feature
reduce sensitivity in all three channels by
50% at the turn of a knob, ensuring
consistent registration.
provides lighting temperature
equalization in four calibrated
increments. without reduction of pick -up
tube face plate illumination. This means
that the camera's excellent signal -tonoise ratio is maintained even when a
long zoom lens is employed.
Flare Compensation. Individual front panel controls are provided for flare
compensation in all three color channels.
This ensures accurate reproduction of
blacks. even with scenes of extreme
contrast.
Aperture Correction. A horizontal and
2 -line vertical aperture corrector,
employing both comb filter and noise
Master Blanking. Blanking leve is
readily adjusted with a black le el
control, and a unique electronic null
provides the operator with easy return to
coring techniques. provides
a new
www.americanradiohistory.com
correct set -up level. Master blanking
unaffected by the electronically
independent contrast control.
is
Encoder Flexibility. The TC -80A's new
integral encoder emphasizes more
versatility for the video engineer. Output
options include: three' individually
selectable composite /non- composite
signals; and front panel choice of color,
mono or mono with burst.
The inserted sync is an AGC'd replica of
the incoming signal from the station sync
generator, so that the tiniing and
controlled rise and fall times of the
incoming sync signal are maintained.
Burst flag is internally generated with
controlled rise and fall times. and is
timed from the leading edge of sync to
conform to the proposed EIA standard.
The built -in color bar generator is
inserted before encoding for accurate
verification of system performance, and
can be activated either locally or from
the operate panel. Color bar options
TC -80A shown in a typi-
cal field configuration,
with Triax and extended
range zoom lens.
include: 75% bars or 75% bars with
100% white; and full field or split field
format. Color bars are produced by
synchronous switching, with shaping
controlled by active filters, to generate
an exceptionally clean signal.
Add -On Triax. An optional Triax
accessory offers maximum versatility in
field operations. Eliminating bulky and
costly multicore cable on runs of up to
one mile, the Triax system extends
operation without picture degradation or
loss of the TC -80A's fine automatics and
other features.
picture monitor, also selected by
pushbutton, are: R,B.G. G; and
encoded output.
Cameraman Conveniences. The TC80A camera head is a cameraman's
delight, with numerous conveniences,
including advance design for smooth
panning and tilting: a tilting, detachable
viewfinder; four tally lights; two -way
signaling; and a spring -loaded script
clip. The intercom system has two
independent channels with a separate
channel for program audio.
Mechanical Integrity. The all- aluminum
TC -80A camera case and the
-inchthick aluminum optical mounting plate
are combined in a solid, precision machined and stress -relieved unit. This
provides stable operation even under the
most demanding field conditions. All
Sync Generator. The modular optional
NTSC sync generator plugs into the
processor frame of the CCU. Color
genlock, with protection for loss of
reference, is a standard feature. With
this accessory, single cable
synchronization of camera chains is
simply and inexpensively accomplished.
Sync, blanking and subcarrier outputs
are available at the rear of the CCU for
driving other cameras or ancillary
equipment.
Special Effects. Various optical
accessories such as star filters. ciose -up
adapters, additional color and neutral
density filters. etc. are available for use
in the filter wheel to create special visual
effects. Linear red, blue and green
outputs are standard with the camera for
use with Chroma Keyers or other special
effects generators.
Waveform And Picture Monitoring. The
TC -80A provides the following waveform
outputs: sequential R,B,G;
superimposed R,B,G; R -G; B -G; and
encoded output. These signals are
routed to the waveform monitor by
pushbutton control. Video signals to the
High -Efficiency Switching Power
Supply. The TC -80A power supply uses
high -efficiency switching regulators for
both camera head and processor frame
power. Switching frequency has been
optimized to reduce weight while
increasing efficiency to insure reliable,
cool operation without need for forced air cooling. Size. weight and heat
reductions for the switching supply, and
a wide- input -lines spec of 90- 130/180260 VAC. make this supply ideal for
operation in remote vans or under
"brown -out" conditions.
'
1
optics, yoke assemblies and lens are
precision- mounted in this integral unit to
give the TC -80A a truly adjustment -free
optical system.
The camera head weighs only 85 pounds
with viewfinder. enhancing its portability
yet maintaining enough weight for
Planned For Serviceability. With its
designed -in reliability, the TC -80A will
provide long -term, trouble -free
operation with minimal servicing. When
service is required. however, many
useful features such as easy tube
change, interchangeable pre -amps,
readily accessible components and
extensive use of test points and voltage
status lights have been included to cut
maintenance time and costs.
smooth panning and tilting. Swing -out
carrying handles add to the TC -80A's
portability. The removable viewfinder,
with indoor and outdoor viewing hoods.
has an advanced tilt mechanism with
TEFLON' impregnated bearings and
improved tension adjustment for
smoother tilting action.
For complete information on the TC -80A.
contact your Harris TV District Manager
or Harris' TV Sales Department in
Quincy, Illinois (phone: 217/222- 8200).
-Registered Trademark of DuPont
205
www.americanradiohistory.com
TC -80A Specifications
Registration Accuracy
Electrical Scan Standards
525/60
625/50
EIA
CCIR
Power Requirements
Voltage
90 to 130V or 180 to 260V
47 to 63Hz
Frequency
500W (exclusive of
Power Load
monitoring)
Inputs (Loop- Through, Bridging)
Sync
2 to 8 Vpp, negative
Blanking
2 to 8 Vpp, negative
1 to 4 Vpp
Sub Carrier
VF External Video... 1.0 Vpp Composite
External video or black burst with
1.0 Vpp
optional sync generator
Outputs
Program Video .. 3 separately selectable
for composite or non -composite
Chroma Key (R, B, G) ..0.7 Vpp across
75 ohms
Picture Monitor Video ..0.7 Vpp across
75 ohms
Waveform Monitor
0 7 Vpp across
Video
75 ohms
Monitor Switching Facilities
R, B, & G or - G separately
Picture
or combined; color output (program)
R, B, G sequential or
Waveform
superimposed; R -G; B -G; color output
(program)
R, B or G; Y video;
Viewfinder
external video
Sensitivity (Typical tubes)
Minimum Incident Light for full output
6 fc
with f1.6 lens
Incident Light for rated Signal /Noise
at f2.8
80 fc
Signal /Noise Ratio
52 dB
NTSC
49 dB
PAL
(300 na green signal current; 1.0
gamma; bandwidth NTSC - 10 kHz
to 4.2 MHz, PAL - 10 kHz to 5.5
MHz; masking, aperture & chroma off )
Resolution (no aperture
600 TV lines
correction)
Optical System
Color Separation ..Single unit prism with
Integral Bias Light
Correction Filters ..5 position filter wheel
Red
Blue
Green
Pick -Up Tubes
S73XQER or XQ1073R
S73XQB or XQ1070B
S73XQG or XQ1070G
ACT tubes also available.
.8V)
Zone 1 (circle
1.0V)
Zone 2 (circle
1.0V)
Zone 3 (circle
Zone 4 (all other)
0.05%
0.1%
0.2%
0.4%
Picture Geometry
1.0%
1.0%
Zone 2
Zone 4
Camera Cable Length
With 0.65 inch (17mm) diameter
2000 ft. (610m)
cable
With 1.1 inch (28mm) diameter
3000 ft. (914m)
cable
With 0.5 inch (13mm) diameter
Triaxial Cable and optional Triax
5000 ft. (1524m)
System
Over 5000 feet with larger diameter
Triax Cable.
Operating Environment
Temperature
Camera Head -20 to +50 degrees C
Control Unit .... 0 to 50 degrees C
0 to 95% RH
Humidity
0 to 10,000 ft. (3048m)
Altitude
Shading Provisions
H & V sawtooth and parabola modulation. H & V sawtooth and parabola additive, for Bias Light.
Aperture Correction
Combined horizontal and vertical aperture correction derived from green with
Comb filtering and noise coring. Primary
horizontal boost frequency 6 MHz, with
adjustable 2.5 MHz secondary boost.
Gamma Correction
Each Channel .... Continuously variable
from linear to 0.35
Master Gamma .. Continuously variable
from linear to 0.35 independent of
channel controls
Intercom
Two headsets;
Camera Head & CCU
Production, Engineering &
Cue circuits
Party Line ... Accepts up to three party
lines; selectable impedance matching
Unbalanced
Program Audio
bridging for cue audio
Signaling System
Pushbutton flashes
camera tally lights
Camera to CCU ...Pushbutton operates
audible signal
CCU to Camera
Viewfinder
6 1 in. (155mm)
Screen Diagonal
Picture Brightness 0 to 150 ft. lamberts
Resolution
better than 600 TV lines
AFC
Picture Timing
Video Equalization ....Full Cable length
Controls .... Contrast, Brightness, Input
Select and Response (flat, peak, notch)
Focal Length Indicator ... White bar top
of picture
Mechanical
Camera Head (Less lens)
19.5 in. (495 mm)
Height
10.5 in. (267 mm)
Width
21 in. (533 mm)
Depth
85 lbs. (38 kg)
Weight
Processor Frame
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
8 75 in.
(222 mm)
19 in. (483 mm)
15.5 in. (393 mm)
30 lbs.(14 kg)
Operate & Set -Up Panel
7 0 in. (178 mm)
Height
19 in. (483 mm)
Width
7 0 in. (178 mm)
Depth
11 lbs. (5 kg)
Weight
Intercom Panel
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Main Power Supply
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Interconnect Panel
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
1
75 in. (44 mm)
19 in. (483 mm)
7 25 in.
(184 mm)
3 lbs. (1.4 kg)
5 25 in.
(133 mm)
19 in. (483 mm)
20 in. (508 mm)
56 lbs. (25 kg)
7 in.
(178 mm)
19 in. (483 mm)
6 in. (142 mm)
8 lbs. (3.6 kg)
Accessories
Triax System
NTSC Sync Generator Module
All one -inch format zoom lenses from
Angenieux, Canon, Fujinon, Rank and
Schneider.
Camera Cable. std. length 50 ft., 75 ft.,
100 ft., 150 ft., 200 ft., 250 ft., 300 ft., 400
ft., 500 ft.
Triax Cable. std. length 100 ft., 250 ft.,
500 ft., 1000 ft.
Headset, single or dual, carbon mic
Conrac SNA9 9 -in. Picture Monitor
Tektronix 528 or 1480 Waveform Monitor
Cam Heads and Pedestals from Vinten,
ITE and Quick -Set (Houston -Fearless).
Vinyl Rain Cover
ADV. 538 PTO. IN U.S.A.
J8K-2.5M-279
206
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS ANO
INFORMATION HANDLING
TC -80
ADD -ON
TRIAX CABLE
SYSTEM
Extends range of camera operation up to 5,000
feet
Maintains all operational features of the Harris
TC -80 color camera, including automatic
features
Reduces camera cable costs for remotes
Triax cable is easier to transport, install, repair
and use on remotes
Allows camera use
in previously inconvenient
locations for more interesting coverage
207
www.americanradiohistory.com
a typical field configuration, with Trias and extended range zoom lens.
Complete Trias system is made up of components
at right camera head unit. Triaxial cable, and
CCU interface drawer.
TC -80 (above). shown in
F3132eitt
The Harris Triax Cable System provides
a new dimension in versatility and flexibility for field operation of the Harris TC80 camera. Easily added, with no special
tools or camera modifications, the Triax
system eliminates bulky, multi -conductor camera cable, and greatly extends the camera's range of operation.
Careful development of the Triax system
has allowed Harris to offer this modern
camera convenience with all of the basic
TC -80 camera's fine automatic features.
The Triax system itself is fully automatic
and has no operational controls of any
kind. The system automatically compensates for any change of Triax cable
length.
Additional Triax advantages include a
significant cost reduction in long cable
runs. And, since the system operates
with smaller cable. not only will there be
less weight to carry, but cable will take
up less space in storage. There will also
be sizeable cost reductions in permanent
cable installations such as sports arenas,
college campuses, or industrial complexes.
The TC -80 is the first American -built TV
camera to offer you triaxial operation as
an option without compromises in setup or operation
significant advance-
-a
ment in camera design.
MULTIPLEXING SYSTEM. The
positioning of all set -up and operate
controls remote from the camera head
allows convenient camera set -up, saving
time and money. The remote set -up
philosophy requires 40 channels of con-
208
www.americanradiohistory.com
tinuously variable control information
and 9 channels of switch information to
be transferred from the CCU to the
camera head.
The frame update rate is fast, so that the
operator feels he has solid wire control
from the set -up panel, and is unaware of
the signal processing.
The red, blue and green camera video
signals are returned to the CCU individually, on AM carriers, rather than as
one encoded signal. This allows separate
RBG outputs for clear. sharp chroma
keying.
Table 1 shows the information which
must be transmitted on the triaxial cable
to maintain all of the fine features of the
TC -80 camera.
CAMERA CABLE. The Triax system
functions completely automatically on
75 ohm triaxial cable. The second shield
of the triaxial cable provides added safety by maintaining an equal potential
between the CCU and the camera head
chassis. Cable lengths are limited only by
DC resistance of the center conductor shield loop and /or the RF attenuation of
the coaxial cable. The Triax system will
compensate for as much as 25 ohms of
loop resistance and an RF attenuation of
55 dB at 50 MHz. The camera system is
designed to operate using any of the
Triax cables available.
Table
1
TRIAX CABLE SPECTRUM
CCU -TO- CAMERA HEAD
1. Power (+ 130V DC)
2
Table 2 (on back page) shows typical
cable types and maximum operating
cable lengths. The Triax unit is supplied
with a male bulkhead Kings Tri-Loc®
connector at the camera head and a 4foot pigtail with a female Kings Tri-Loci
cable connector at the CCU. The pigtail
allows increased flexibility for installation in studio or van racks.
FREQUENCY ALLOCATION
D.0
Composite Sync
Carrier 2.04 MHz, VSB AM
3. CCU -to- Camera Controls
Carrier 2.04 MHz, VS8 AM.
digital information, time
domain multiplexed with
composite sync
(40 control channels.
9 channels of switch
data)
4. Audio channels
5
Carriers, 2 7. 2.8. 2 9
MHz. DSB AM
Viewfinder Video
Carrier 55.5 MHz. DSB AM
SERVICEABILITY. With its designed -in
reliability, the Triax system will provide
long -term, trouble -free operation with
minimal servicing. When service is required. many useful features such as
plug -in modules. use of common electronic components, IC sockets, readily
accessible components, the drawer within- drawer concept of the CCU,
voltage status lights and front panel test
points at the CCU have been included to
cut maintenance time and costs. The
CCU drawer has been designed so that
the unit can be extended, exposing all
circuitry for troubleshooting without
removal from the rack, and without the
use of extender boards. In addition. 23
test points on the front panel monitor
the operation of all subsystems and
verify correct operation without opening
the unit.
CAMERA HEAD -TO -CCU
Red Video
Carrier 18.5 MHz. DSB AM
2
Blue Video
Carrier 9 25 MHz. DSB AM
3
Green Video
Carrier 37 MHz. DSB AM
4.
Camera -to -CCU Controls
Carrier 18.5 MHz. DSB AM.
1.
digital information. time
domain multiplexed with
red video blanking
5. Audio Channels
Carriers 3.1 and
DSB AM
2
(Mini
MHZ.
000'
TV 81
3
TC-80
3 3
cable)
000'
CCU
(Standard TV 81 cable)
CCU
5.000' (Triax cable)
TC -80
TRIAX
I/F
with Triax
TC-80 remote capabilities with Triax
209
www.americanradiohistory.com
TABLE 2
TYPICAL CABLE FOR USE WITH TRIAX SYSTEM
WEIGHT
MAX MUM
CABLE
CABLE LENGTH
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
Inches
(mm)
TRIAX
TYPE
MANUFACTURER
(Shown for
comparison
purposes only)
Fat
(Meters)
1.000 ft.
Per
100m
in Ns.
(ie e)
0.36
(9.1)
9267
TV20
Belden
BIW
Neoprene or
Hypelon
2.000
(650)
74
(54)
0.52
(13.2)
9232
Belden
BIW
Neoprene or
Hypelon
5.000
(1.640)
135
(98)
Belden
BIW
Neoprene or
Vinyl
7.700
(2.520)
550
(401)
Vinyl
2.000
(610)
375
(273)
Vinyl
3.000
(914)
875
(638)
TV14
MULTI CONDUCTOR
JACKET
Per
1.03
(26.2)
0.65
(17)
1.1
(28)
--
-
TV81
Mini
TV81
TC -80 TRIAX SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
HUMIDITY: 0 to 95% RH. non- condensing.
See the Harris TC -80 brochure for specifications of the camera.
ALTITUDE: 0 to 10.000 ft.
ELECTRICAL SCAN STANDARDS
525/60.
625/50.
EIA
CCIR
POWER REQUIREMENTS
MECHANICAL
in. (31.8cm). Width 9.1 in. (23.1 cm) excluding
camera cable. Depth 12.8 in. (32.5 cm). Weight 17 lbs. (7.7 kg).
CAMERA HEAD: Height 12.5
CCU: Height 7 in. 117.7 cm). Width 19 in. (48.3 cm) Depth 21 in. (53.3 cm).
Weight 40 lbs. (18.1 kg).
_
Supplied completely by Harris TC -80 camera.
INPUTS AT CCU: Signals on 81 conductor cable connector and 14 pin triax
accessory
connector.
INPUTS AT HEAD: Signals on 81 conductor cable connector and 13 pin triax
audio connector.
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
GREEN VIDEO:
RED VIDEO:
1
1
dB at 5 MHz.
d9 at 5 MHz.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
TEMPERATURE: Camera Head
- 20
50 feet (15.2m)
100 feet 130.5m)
250 feet (76.2m)
500 feet (152.4m)
1.000 feet (304.8m)
Connectors
Connector,
Connector,
Connector,
Connector
BLUE VIDEO: 3 dB at 3 MHz.
1
Triax cable may be ordered in standard lengths of.
The above include connectors. Triax cable may also be ordered in 1.000 -foot
(304.8m) rolls, without connectors.
dB at 3 MHz.
VIEWFINDER VIDEO:
CABLE AND CONNECTOR
ORDERING INFORMATION
to
+50°
C.
Control Unit 0 to
+50°
C.
available include:
male
female
female bulkhead
retrofit kits
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ADV. 491A PTO. IN U.S.A.
JK -2M -977
210
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
1
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INF
OHMATION HANDLING
Top -of- the -line camera performance
TC -50
Live Color
Television
Camera
Bias light for low light level capability
Triple voltage regulation for excellent
stability
Sealed prism optics
Rugged, cast aluminum frame for
precision alignment
Electronic picture rotation
Integral encoder with color bars
Designed to accept long, heavy lenses
www.americanradiohistory.com
... a first
line broadcast quality prism camera
In the TC -50, Harris has applied
its extensive experience in
broadcast equipment to offer you
a camera with excellent color
fidelity, superb picture quality, and
great flexibility -all at a much
lower price than you would expect
for top grade broadcast performance. To accomplish this, we have
concentrated on basics, and
eliminated frills and seldom used
automatic features.
For operating convenience, a
remote control philosophy has
guided the design of the TC -50.
The camera can be set up and
operated from the Camera Control
Unit. Cameraman controls are
minimized.
The system has been designed
throughout to provide excellent
stability and reliability in
performance.
Superb color performance
The TC -50 is a prism camera using
three 1 -inch Plumbicon° tubes.
The prism, which includes all color
separation surfaces, is built and
installed as a sealed package unit
in the camera. This assures
uniformity from camera to camera,
and optimum colorimetry.
filter wheel\
retardation plate
light in
lens
Linear color matrix: Superb
colorimetry is achieved through the
use of a linear color matrix.
Aperture correction: An integral
horizontal aperture corrector
produces sharp, clear pictures. For
added crispness an integral contours from-green image enhancer with
comb filter is provided.
®Reg.
trademark N.V. Philips
Anti -polarization: The TC -50
optical system incorporates a
retardation plate, which eliminates
color shift or distortion resulting
from polarized light produced
by sources such as polished floors
or hair spray.
Color correction: A 5- position
color correction filter wheel is
incorporated in the optical system
to allow for varying light
conditions.
Low -light capability: The TC -50
is designed for outstanding
capability under low- light -level
conditions. Through the use of
a single master gain control,
correct color balance is maintained
with optimum signal to noise.
Integral bias light: The optical
system includes an integral bias
light which reduces lag when
operating at low light levels. This
improves picture quality and
avoids "smear."
212
www.americanradiohistory.com
Stability
and reliability
A basic objective of outstanding
stability and reliability of operation
has been achieved through rugged,
imaginative design.
For example, the color
separation prism is a sealed,
adjustment -free unit. All optical
components are mounted on a
rigid cast -aluminum plate and case
to assure long -term stability.
The TC -50 is light enough to
be transportable, yet solid and
rugged for durability and reliability. Strong handles attached to
the camera frame swing out to
permit easy carrying.
Cast aluminum mounting
plate and case comprise a solid,
precision- machined, stress -relieved,
integral unit. The lens interface
surface is machined after assembly
to assure adjustment -free optical
alignment. The rigidity of construction permits the camera to
accommodate long, heavy lenses
where desired.
Precision yoke assemblies: Each
of the Plumbicon" tubes is mounted
in a printed coil yoke. Each yoke
assembly is precisely located on the
rigid optical bed by a self- aligning
quick -release mechanism.
Triple regulation: All critical
voltages are regulated -not once
but three times -to assure excellent stability of operation.
Interference protection: Shielding
is incorporated throughout the
camera to minimize effects of radio
frequency interference.
Keeps cool and dry: A fan is
mounted in the bottom of the
camera to provide forced air
ventilation and positive air
pressure inside the case. This
assures increased reliability of
camera and viewfinder. Camera
head is designed for dependable
outdoor operation.
213
www.americanradiohistory.com
Intercom plug
Beam push -button
Cue intercom volume
Status
Red and blue
Video meter
and status light
Monitor
Selection
/
Registration'
switch
level controls
Mode
switch
Master I
gain
Tally call
/
Red, blue and green
blanking controls
Red, blue and
beam controls
Master blanking
Iris limit
\\Red, blue and green
horizontal alignment
Iris
lied, blue and green
iertical alignment
green
Red and blue horizontal centering
Designed for
convenient set-up
and control
Lens cap
Bear.,
Flare compensation: Controls are
provided for flare compensation in
all three color channels. This
Controls are centralized at the
circuitry maintains blacks even
CCU (Camera Control Unit), thus
under extremes of contrast.
the camera can be set up and
field case.
operated from the CCU. Control
Master blanking: The video
Picture rotation: A unique
and set -up procedures have
can readily adjust the
operator
an
adjustdesign feature provides
been designed to eliminate control
black level of the picture over a
ment at the CCU for electronic
inter- action.
wide range with the master
rotation of the red and blue
blanking control. The normal
pictures. This eliminates the need
1St
operating point is located readily
yoke
rotation.
mechanical
for
by an electronic null at the
Master gain control: Under
the
center position of the control.
light
conditions,
insufficient
.DDD
Video meter: A small video
provides
master
gain
control
O
meter on the front panel of the
for boosting video gains while
©©©44D©
maintaining correct color balance. control drawer provides quick,
simple set -up of white balance and
The master gain control is
black balance and can substitute
continuously variable, providing
for a waveform monitor.
smooth transition and optimum
Integral encoder: Camera system
signal -to -noise ratio.
Push- button beam set: The beam includes NTSC encoder in the
control drawer. A built -in color
can be adjusted easily by using
bar generator facilitates encoder
The CCU has three components: a push- button circuit which
alignment.
in
momentarily
reduces
sensitivity
operate panel, set-up panel control
Lens cap: Lens cap is remotely
50
This
-6
dB
by
%.
each
channel
drawer, and power supply. These
for ease of set -up, and for
operable
facilitates
following
gain
feature
can be conveniently rack mounted
standby
periods.
the recommended beam setting
in one location, or the operate
procedure.
panel can be remoted to another
location.
A remote control philosophy has
guided the design of the TC -50.
Mounting: Control units can be
mounted in a standard 19 -inch
rack occupying only 8 rack units
(14 inches) or in a compact
D
214
www.americanradiohistory.com
1117
13121
Cameraman
convenience
Filter wheel: A color correction
filter wheel, particularly desirable
for outdoor use, is incorporated
in the optical system. To simplify
use, the wheel is accessible without
opening camera head doors.
Clip control: To simplify set -up,
the camera is equipped with a
master white clip control.
Special effects: Many visual
effects can be created with various
optical accessories including star
filters, close -up adapters, additional
color and neutral density filters,
etc. These are available off-theshelf for use with the TC -50.
Red, blue, and green outputs
are provided for use with Chroma
Keyers or other special effects
generators.
Camera operation is enhanced by
its weight and size, assuring
smooth panning and tilting. With
controls centralized at the CCU,
a technical man is not required
at the camera head. Likewise,
adjustments in the camera head
are minimized.
For the cameraman's convenience, the following controls are
provided at the camera head:
High peaking control, activated
by push- button, to aid in
focusing.
Selectable viewfinder display.
Viewfinder brightness and
contrast.
Intercom volume -one for each
headset.
Main tally "off -on" switch.
Call button.
Versatile viewfinder display: The
integral viewfinder is designed
for versatility, with a three -position
selection of display.
The encoded output position
displays properly framed output
of the camera. The CCU monitor
switch output position presents
individual red, blue, green, or
difference pictures. The external
video position displays special
effects such as split screen.
Separate viewing hoods for
indoor and outdoor service are
included.
Tallys: The main camera head
tally light is large, bright, and
located on top of the unit for 360 degree visibility. Another tally
is located on the viewfinder for
convenience of the cameraman.
A two -way signaling system is
provided between the camera
and the CCU. A push- button at
the camera head energizes an
audible signal and the tally light at
the CCU. A push- button at the
operate panel lights the camera
tallys.
Intercom: An intercom system
links the camera and the CCU.
Facilities are provided at the
camera head for two headsets.
A bridging input is provided so
that program audio can be inserted
in the intercom system. A volume
control for this input is located
at the CCU.
Script clip: As an added
convenience feature for the cameraman, a script clip is provided at
the rear of the camera.
215
www.americanradiohistory.com
Planned for serviceability
The TC -50 has a rugged mechanical design, and numerous
innovative features to provide
exceptional reliability. When
service is required, however, the
system is designed for ready
accessibility and simplified
service.
aligning quick - release mechanism.
A single connector provides
connections for the pre-amp, the
tube, and the yoke.
Captivated hardware: All covers
and camera head circuit boards
are fastened with captivated
thumbscrews.
Removable viewfinder: The
viewfinder is detachable. A long
extension cable is provided to
facilitate servicing.
Status lights: Seven indicator
lights inside the camera show
availability of necessary voltages
Camera head can be serviced
from the CCU to assist in
without use of extenders; circuit
fault isolation.
boards can be checked without
Test points are provided at all
removing.
critical locations to simplify
Interchangeable pre-amps:
maintenance.
Because of differences in sensiHour meter: The camera head
tivity in the three channels,
selectable pre-amp gain is provided includes an elapsed time meter as
an aid to preventive
to assure matched pre-amp
outputs. Pre-amps are interchange- maintenance.
User connections: Tally light
able, simplifying maintenance
and stocking of parts.
and intercom connections are
readily accessible and identified at
the rear of the CCU.
Pick -up tubes: Replacement is
quickly accomplished without
use of tools, and does not require
removal of other camera head
components. Each precision yoke
assembly is attached with a self-
Camera will handle a variety of
standard lenses. These are interchangeable, and are attached with
a quick -disconnect bayonet mount.
216
www.americanradiohistory.com
CCU control drawer extends
and tilts for ready access and
servicing.
Flexibility in
accessory selection
Lenses: The camera accommodates
a wide choice of standard, readily
available lenses offered by all
leading lens manufacturers.
These range from the basic 10/1
zoom, up through faster, more
versatile lenses with extended zoom
ranges.
Commonly used lenses
which interface with TC -50:
Schneider TV -38.
l0X (17 -170mm f/2.0)
Canon PV10X15B -IE.
l0X (15 -150mm f /1.8)
Fujinon K10X16RW -2
l0X (16.160mm f/2.0)
In addition, most other
standard broadcast lenses available
for the 1 -inch format can readily
be used with the camera.
Compatible pedestals: All
popular cam heads and pedestals
can be used.
Optional plug-in module
accessories in CCU:
Integral cable compensator
module for up to 1500 feet.
Integral NTSC sync
generator module.
217
www.americanradiohistory.com
TC-50 Specifications
Registration Accuracy
Electrical Scan Standards
EIA
CCIR
.
.
.
.
.
525/60
625/50
Power Requirements
Voltage
90 to 130V or 180 to 260V,
60 Hz (50 Hz on request)
Power Load
260 VA (exclusive
of monitoring)
Inputs (Loop -Through, Bridging)
Sync
2 to 8Vpp, negative
H Drive
2 to 8Vpp, negative
V Drive
2 to 8Vpp, negative
Sub Carrier.
1.5 to 4Vpp
VF External Video
1.0Vpp composite
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Outputs
Program
Video
Two Composite,
1Vpp across 75 ohm
Chroma Key
(R,B,G) non -composite.
Monitor Video
non -composite
0.7Vpp
across 75 ohm
0.7Vpp
across 75 ohm
Monitor Switching Facilities
Picture and
Waveform
R,B, & G separately
or combined with -G or
-B; color output (program)
Viewfinder
output of picture &
waveform monitor switch;
Y video; external video
Sensitivity (Typical tubes)
Minimum Incident Light for full output
with f2.0 lens
12fc
with f1.6 lens
8fc
Incident Light for
rated Signal /Noise
100fc at 12.8
Signal /Noise
Ratio
better than 48 dB
(300 na green signal current;
1.0 Gamma; bandwidth 10 kHz to
4.2 MHz; masking, aperture and
chroma -off)
Center Resolution: typically 40% 4 5MHz
at program output -correctable to 100%
Optical System
Color Separation
single unit prism
with Integral Bias Light
Correction Filters
5 position
filter wheel
Depolarization
retardation plate
at prism input
Pick -up Tubes
Red
Amperex XQ1073 extended red
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Blue
Green
Amperex XQ1070B
Amperex XQ1070G
Zone 1 (Circle = .8V)
Zone 2 (Circle = 1.0V)
Zone 3 (Circle= 1.0H)
Zone 4 (All Other)
0.05%
01%
0.2%
0.4%
Picture Geometry
Zone 2
Zone 4
.
Camera Cable Length
Without Optional
0.5%
1.0%
Module
to 300 ft. (91M)
With Optional
Module
to 1500 ft. (457M)
Operating Environment
Temperature
-Camera Head
-20 to +50
degrees C
-Control Unit
0 to +50
degrees C
Humidity
0 to 95% RH
Altitude
0 to 10,000 ft. (3048m)
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stability
After a 30 minute warm -up the camera
will perform within specifications for 8
hours, provided the temperature change
does not exceed ±10 degrees C or the
specified limits.
Shading Provisions
H &V sawtooth and parabola modulation,
H &V sawtooth and parabola additive,
for Bias Light.
Aperture Correction
Combined horizontal and vertical aperture correction derived from green with
comb filtering and noise coring.
Gamma Correction
Continuously variable from linear to 0.35,
each channel.
Intercom
Party Line
.
.
.
600 ohm balanced
.
to ground
accommodates
two headsets;
Camera Head
Operate Panel
Program Audio
.
.
.
.
Signaling System
CCU to Camera
Camera to CCU
separate amps
& controls
one headset,
amp & controls
bridging input
(unbalanced with
level control)
push- button
operates camera
tally lights
push- button
operates tally lights
and audible signal
JK-3M-977
Viewfinder
Screen Diagonal
Picture Brightness
7
in. (178 mm)
0 to 150 ft.
lamberts
Resolution .... better than 600 TV lines
Picture Timing
AFC
Video Equalization
Automatic to
maximum cable length
Controls
Contrast, Brightness,
Video Peaking and
Input Select
Mechanical
Camera Head (Less lens)
Height
19.5 in. (495 mm)
Width
10.5 in. (267 mm)
Depth
21 in. (533 mm)
Weight
Approximately
75 lbs. (34 kg)
Control Drawer
Height
5.25 in. (133 mm)
Width
19 in. (483 mm)
Depth
22 in. (559 mm)
Weight
20 lbs. (9 kg)
Operate Panel
Height
1 75 in. (45 mm)
Width
19 in. (483 mm)
Depth
7.25 in. (184 mm)
Weight
2 lbs. (.9 kg)
Main Power Supply
Height
7 in. (178 mm)
Width
19 in. (483 mm)
Depth
18 in. (457 mm)
Weight.
38 lbs. (17 kg)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Accessories
NTSC Sync Generator Module
Cable Compensation Module
Zoom Lenses
Canon PV10X15B -IE, 15.150mm, f1.8
Schneider TV -38, 17.170mm f2.0
Fujinon K10X16RW -2, 16.160mm, f2.0
Most other one -inch format lenses from
Angenieux, Canon, Fujinon, Rank and
Schneider
Camera Cable, std. lengths
50 ft., 100 ft.,
150 ft., 200 ft., 250 ft., 300 ft.,
400 ft., 500 ft.
Operate Panel Extension Cable, std.
lengths 25 ft., 50 ft., 100 ft., 200 ft.
Headset, single and dual
Conrac SNA9, 9 -inch Picture Monitor
Tektronix 528 Waveform Monitor
ITE Cam Head, 142 or 113; ITE P4 or P5
Studio Pedestal
ITE -WA Wedge Adapter; ITE -WP Wedge
Plate
Quick -Set (Houston -Fearless) and Vinten
Cam Heads, Pedestals, etc.
Vinyl Rain Cover
ADV. 495 Ptd. IN U.S.A.
218
www.americanradiohistory.com
Computer-Aided
Eciting System
s
_
s
{
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
219
www.americanradiohistory.com
Ó
0>
1
DISPLAY
ó
LOCK
ABORT
RPPLE
FORMT
2
3
4
DoRv
LINE
NMI
PIMP 0.
FRAME
S
NTR
X
S
CUE
FRAME
6
8
A
2R
C
OSPLY
ÊXT
TEXT
START
T
CONT
0
NNGE
;
CAN
1
2
BKL
H
AUDIO
}
r",
I
VIDEO
L
NRW
9R
V
X-PIT
RL
U
R
M2STR
C
x
(AUX 2
DA D
1151
READ
RL
9
(
XTEND
I/
7
ALL STOP
I
I
I
I
ID)
Computer versatility with less hardware overhead
The CVS EPIC is a complete,
software -based system that provides
everything you need for fast, accurate,
on -line or off -line editing with multiple VTRs -from quadruplex and 1"
units to 3/4" casette units. Unlike other
editing systems, EPIC puts as many
functions as possible into software,
to reduce total system costs while
giving you more editing versatility
and convenience.
With EPIC, functions that, before,
required separate, costly hardware,
such as time code generation, are
now done in software. In addition, all
necessary interface circuitry is on
plug -in circuit cards (See Figure 2)
housed in a single, rack mounted
chassis. Figure 1 (see flap page)
compares a typical "hardware oriented" system with EPIC.
What's more, EPIC comes with a
completely developed software
package. You don't need computer
experience or a knowledge of programming. Commands and displays
are in simple English, and operator
training time is minimal.
The flexibility of a software
approach also allows customizing
many aspects of the system to your
special requirements at little, or no,
extra cost. Future capabilities are
also easily implemented in existing
systems. And, of course, reliable
performance and service is assured
because Harris is an established
leader in video signal processing for
the television industry.
Wide Range of VTRs
Generally speaking, any VTR with
remote control can be used in the
EPIC system. Plug -in interface cards
are available for a large number of
VTRs, from 3/4" to 2 ", and you can
mix formats. VTR interface requires
only minimal modification with no
loss of VTR capabilities.
220
www.americanradiohistory.com
VariShuttle
VTR Control
Many newer VTRs feature variable speed play and shuttle modes. With
VariShuttle, you don't give up any
of these features. You keep complete control of all VTR functions,
such as shuttle speeds, slow motion
and so on. Whatever the VTR will do,
EPIC will do.
Figure 2: Circuitry for 4 time code
generators is contained on one EPIC
plug -in card.
Time Saving Thru Multi- Tasking
A major advantage of the EPIC
system is multi- tasking: the ability
to do more than one thing at a time.
This feature alone saves hours over
other editing systems.
For example, while you're executing one edit decision, you can be
storing another and be printing out
previous edits. Or while you're using
some VTRs for editing, you can, at
the same time, be writing time code
on others and searching out the
next take on still another.
Works With Most Video Switchers
EPIC can be interfaced easily to
almost any computer -compatible
video switcher, with virtually no loss
of video switcher capability. CVS's
unique capability to control two
mix /effects buses and up to 16 input
crosspoints adds flexibility and
makes editing much faster. Wipe
keys, dissolves, split screens ...
whatever the switcher can do, EPIC
will do.
Figure 3: A single. re- usable EPIC mini
floppy disc automatically stores 2.000
edits.
Full Audio Capability
EPIC is available with an 8 x 2 audio
switcher that has both mix and position capabilities. Split audio /video
edits, with no limit on in -out times,
is also part of EPIC. Many audio
tape recorders may also be readily
interfaced.
A Complete Software Package
The Standard EPIC software package includes everything you need for
fast, accurate professional editing
with multiple VTRs. Computer pro-
All of the following functions are
EPIC standard.
Rapid Entry of Edit Data: Edits
can be entered from floppy discs,
optional paper tape, on line video
tapes or manually. Edits can be
modified the way you want, without addition or subtraction.
Flexible List Management: Modify
decisions, insert new ones anywhere on the list and move or
delete existing ones. Changes are
verified immediately on the display.
Pushbutton selection of ripple or
non -ripple is also standard.
Look Ahead: VTRs are positioned
ahead of time (with staggered
start) to set up edits as switcher
transitions. This allows smooth
A/B rolls without need for a
matched edit.
Continuous Editing: A long chain
of edits can be entered at one time,
then executed without interruption.
gramming experience isn't required.
221
www.americanradiohistory.com
Multi -Tape SMPTE or EBU Time
Code Generation and Reading:
Permits coding of 4 tapes simultaneously, saving hours of production time. Also, a time code reader
is included on each VTR interface
card. You don't need expensive,
stand -alone time code generators
or readers for each VTR.
Jam Time Code: Allows rewriting
missing or poorly recorded time
code.
Adjustable Cue Time: Variable
from 3 seconds to 2 minutes to
match pre -roll times to varying
VTR requirements or different
tape conditions.
User Bit Reel Identification: Reel
numbers are put on tapes in user
bits. EPIC reads the tape, and the
reel number appears on display.
Preview Single or Multiple Edits:
On the master, on the source or
on both together.
Mix Drop & Non -Drop Frame Tapes:
An added convenience for production, if necessary.
Text Notations: Notes are recorded with edits and will appear
on the display when the edit is
recalled.
Software Expansion
Due to the software-based design
of EPIC, it is anticipated that new
software routines-adding even
more flexibility to the system -will
be developed. Because of this, the
basic EPIC system price includes a
full year of software updates. Subsequent updates will be made available
at nominal cost.
I
110
rs
Ft.,
'»
.r
!
'
e..
nI
!WM o- san a;
n 142441i 112q11
t12
1
.
'
t
:y
*or*
!!..
'd
1.
441140 141e
fltkItnlle4IIIIlII!!12114
4t't
}1
»It
4)
4
11 11
414
I%
44?4
`
!
MS44e !
0 I0
ataR
41:
4
1
.
,
'
Figure 5: EPIC uses standard video
monitors to display editing data on
uncluttered formats.
Figure 4: All EPIC components, except
the compact keyboard, can be housed
in a single 19" rack.
Color Framing: EPIC writes time
code at pre -established color
phase, thus reducing color frame
discontinuities. An optional color
framing accessory will soon be
available to look at off -tape color
burst and provide absolute framing.
Almost Unlimited Edit Storage
EPIC discs give you essentially unlimited capacity, plus millisecond
access to stored edits. A single,
reusable disc holds 2,000 edits (See
Figure 3). In addition, EPIC automatically stores edits on disc, as you
make them, without slowing down
your editing. This protects against
the loss of your edit decision list if
there's a power failure or other
malfunction.
www.americanradiohistory.com
Direct Action Keyboard
EPIC is designed for editors who
know what they want. When you
press a key on the EPIC keyboard,
the related function happens
instantaneously.
Figure 6: "Slide -out" rack mount chassis
provide easy access to all circuitry.
Choice of Outputs
In addition to a floppy disc list output, the EPIC system can be supplied
with a printer, TTY and a CMXcompatible paper tape punch /reader.
Multiple Display Formats
Instead of jamming everything onto
one display format, EPIC can provide several different, uncluttered
displays. One of these is shown in
Figure 5. And, since the display is
a standard TV monitor, updates and
changes are displayed almost
instantly.
Reliability Backed By Service
Since EPIC has less electronic hardware than most other systems, there
are fewer things that can go wrong.
And that means less downtime. In
addition, every EPIC system is
checked out completely, using the
most stringent standards in the industry. Along with this, an established
worldwide network of authorized
sales and service distributors
provides unequaled service support.
A complete system for on or off-line editing
o
EPIC provides everything you need
for professional, multiple VTR editing. The basic 3 -VTR system can be
easily expanded to 8 VTRs (or more)
by merely adding plug -in interface
cards. In addition to a complete software package (described on facing
page), the standard EPIC system
consists of a keyboard, a proven, off the -shelf minicomputer, a disc storage unit and one or (optional) two,
101/2" high, 19" wide chassis. The
chassis hold printed circuit boards
which contain all necessary circuitry.
Customizing
Since many EPIC functions are in
software, the system can be readily
tailored to your way of doing things.
Initialization, for example, is an
easily changed software routine. What
cue time do you want? Do you want to
look at all VTRs immediately? Do you
want time code with drop frame or
non -drop frame? The versatility made
possible by EPIC is almost unlimited.
EPIC Fits Your Facility
With EPIC, the only thing you interact
with is the free standing keyboard.
Electronic chassis and the computer
fit in a customer -supplied 19" rack
(See Figure 4). And, since the keyboard is compact, you can put it
anywhere you like: on a desk or in
your own custom console. You can
also put the display anywhere you
want because EPIC uses a standard
video monitor to display the edit list.
Figure 1: Comparison of typical "hardware- oriented" system with
EPIC software -oriented system.
"hardware" system needs separate
units for such things as time code
generating and reading.
EPIC puts most functions in software
to significantly reduce hardware. This
A
improves cost effectiveness.
STD
SPECIAL
DISPLAY
TY
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
(CPU)
WITH POLLING
KEYBOARD
TTY,
MON
DISC.
ETC.
KEYBOARD
VTR
1
1I
SMPTE
GEN
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
(CPU)
WITH INTERRUPTS
wy
SMPTE
READER
SMPTE
GEN
SMPTE
READER
VTR
M
N
EPIC
CHASSIS
fa
DEDICATED
"INTELLIGENT"
CONTROLLER
DEDICATED
"INTELLIGENT"
CONTROLLER
VTR
VTR
M
M
N
www.americanradiohistory.com
TTY,
DISC.
ETC.
CONDENSED SPECIFICATIONS
Digital Chassis
10.5" (26.7cm) high
19" (48.3cm) wide
20" (50.8cm) deep
Audio /Video Chassis
10.5" (26.7cm) high
19" (48.3cm) wide
20" (50.8cm) deep
Computer
5 25" (13.3cm) high
19" (48.3cm) wide
23" (58.4cm) deep
Keyboard (stand -alone or
panel mountable)
4" (10.2cm) high
25.75" (67.3cm) wide
11.5" (29.2cm) deep
THE COMPANY BEHIND EPIC
EPIC is just one of the ways Harris
Video Systems (formerly Consolidated
Video Systems) uses modern digital
and analog technology to make your
video production look better. Besides
being the acknowledged world leader
in digital time base correction, Harris
also manufactures other advanced
products using video and digital techniques for professional television.
Power
117 VAC 50/60 Hz, 500 W
approx.
Video Input /Output (Time
Code Character Insertion). .1V p -p @ 75 ohms (opt.)
Video Output, Display
Compatible with 525/60
T.V. Monitor
Audio Input (8)
Audio Output
+4 dBm balanced or
unbalanced bridging (opt.)
+4 dBm balanced, low
impedance (opt.)
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Worldwide customers include all
major TV networks, many independent commercial and educational
stations, most large duplicating
facilities and a large number of
educational, industrial and CATV
organizations. All Harris products are
3M 12/79
backed by a worldwide network of
Authorized Sales and Service Distributors. For a demonstration of the
CVS EPIC, or any other Harris product, contact your local Authorized
Distributor.
Litho in U.S.A.
224
www.americanradiohistory.com
CVS 516
Digital Video
Time Base Corrector
CVS
Corrector
Time Base
516 Digital
x.
3EN
-0'
POWER
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
225
www.americanradiohistory.com
516 Digital Time Base
Corrector
CVS -516: the ideal TBC for heterodyne VTRs
GENERAL
The CVS 516 is a broadcast quality, NTSC digital time
base corrector made and priced to give users of non segmented, heterodyne VTRs all the proven advantages of
modern digital video processing. It works with 525/60
monochrome and NTSC color heterodyne video signals
from helical VTRs to give both broadcast and non broadcast video users expanded creative versatility for
ENG, teleproduction, studio VTR backup and much more.
Based on the field proven experience of over 3000 CVS
digital TBCs, the CVS 516 comes with features that, before,
were found only in units costing up to twice as much.
STANDARD FEATURES
-
"Gyrocomp" Memory Organization
allows correction
of large time base errors (such as gyroscopic errors),
without breakup or hue shift, to make ENG tapes
broadcast compatible.
Bypass Record Mode
automatically routes genlock
video to the VTR advanced sync output. This allows the
VTR to record the live genlock signal without changing
connectors.
Automatic Advanced VTR Sync
automatically
monitors off -tape and local sync to correctly position
vertical blanking.
Adjustable H & V Blanking
allows signal to be
tailored to user needs. Provides added assurance of
compliance with FCC rules.
Digital Color Averaging
lowers chroma noise by
3 dB and reduces velocity errors by using digital
variable delay lines to average chroma.
Compact Size
advanced electronic circuitry makes
the CVS 516 exceptionally compact, a key advantage
for field production. Height is just 31/2 inches (8.9 cm);
weight is only 35 lbs (15.9 Kg).
Convenient, Front Panel Operation
makes possible
pushbutton selection of operating mode. Controls have
a preset unity position to reduce the possibility of
misalignment. Secondary controls and switches are
behind a sliding cover
easy to get at but protected
from accidental use.
One Cable Gen Lock Sync Generator with Outputs
simplifies system interface.
Built -in Color Dropout Compensator
cleans
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
up
"dirty" tapes.
Built -in Processing
-
Amplifier- provides clean,
outputs.
AG
The CVS 516 is more than a digital TBCit is a total video signal corrector.
-
stable
-
Digital Chrominance-to- luminance Delay Adjustment
compensates for a common heterodyne VTR defect.
Frame Locked Vertical Interval Edits
smooths out
rough edits.
VTR Versatility
works with Capstan Servo and Non -
-
-
Capstan Servo VTRs.
TESTED RELIABILITY
Each CVS 516 is individually tested before shipment using
the toughest quality control in the industry. This includes
computer checking of components and individual testing
of each board. Units are then vibration tested, baked out
for 100 hours and checked by inspectors who are independent of manufacturing. The result? A TBC that stands
up to the most demanding operation, backed by a
worldwide network of distributors and service centers.
226
www.americanradiohistory.com
APPLICATIONS
The CVS 516, with its advanced features and ease of
operation, opens up entire new application areas for the
use of video, from Field Production to closed circuit
instruction. Listed below are just a few of the uses for
this versatile TBC.
Electronic Journalism
The CVS 516 plays an integral part in field production
applications, like Electronic Journalism. You can use a
relatively inexpensive, portable VTR for remote coverage,
documentaries, news, commercials and special features.
Additionally, the built -in sync generator gives you field
production capability, field editing and mixing of sources,
and direct feedback to the studio via microwave.
Back -Up Operations At The Studio
Instead of using an expensive, non -segmented or quad VTR
for back -up recording requirements, use the CVS 516 with
an inexpensive, V lock heterodyne VTR. This allows you to
make better and more efficient use of your expensive
machines to do in -house production. Overall savings can
be significant.
General Playback, Dubbing, Editing & Problem
Tape Correction
The CVS 516 effectively handles many chores related to
broadcast, cable and closed circuit TV operations, whether
monochrome or heterodyne color. Among other things, it
ensures high picture quality playback for special review,
training or CCTV distribution systems. It also gives you
the ability to do quality dubbing or editing. This latter
application is where the full signal correction potential of
the CVS 516 is realized. With the CVS 516, problem tapes
no longer need to be a problem.
OPTIONS
Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer
The CVS 516 Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer is a plug -in
board that reduces noise in both the luminance and
chroma channels. It also provides a 3 to 5 dB reduction
in noise of the input signal, and horizontal enhancement.
These picture quality improvements are accomplished
without any degradation or compromise of other specifications, including differential phase and gain. Switches
for adjustment of noise reduction and enhancement
levels, and an Enhancer on /off switch, are located behind
the sliding panel on the front of the TBC.
16 Line Window
This increased memory is available for special "worst
case" applications. With a ±8 line correction range, it
further minimizes the effect of gyroscopic errors.
Fiberglass Carrying Case
Unique packaging and minimal weight (35 lbs.) make the
CVS 516 easy to take anywhere. With this specially designed fiberglass carrying case, the unit is fully protected
special advantage when doing field productions.
-a
BASIC OPERATION
Operationally, the Model CVS 516 accepts an input video
signal, digitizes it and stores it. The signal is then clocked
out at a corrected rate and referenced to either an
external or internal sync generator. The result is a time
base corrected video signal.
Capstan Servo VTR
When the input signal to the CVS 516 is a heterodyne type
recording from a capstan servo VTR, the output signal
is a broadcast stable, fully interlaced and color framed
video signal.
GEN LOCK
(COMPOSITE VIDEO
OR DRIVES)
¡I
UNSTABLE
VIA
-
COLOR OR MONOCHROME
BROADCAST STANDARD
VIDEO OUT
ADV. VTR SYNC
Note: For DOC, the CVS 516 requires R.F carrier from VTR.
Non -Capstan Servo VTR
When the input signal to the CVS 516 is a heterodyne type
recording from a non -capstan -servo VTR, the output signal
is a stabilized color signal. Dub to quad capability is also
available at the flip of a switch.
The unique "flat-pack" design of the CVS 516 makes all components easily accessible for fast, easy maintenance, testing
and troubleshooting.
THE COMPANY
Harris Video Systems (formerly Consolidated Video
Systems, Inc.) is located in Sunnyvale, California, U.S.A.
Customers include all four major U.S. TV networks (ABC,
CBS, NBC and PBS), major international networks, independent commercial and educational stations, most
duplicating facilities and a large number of educational
and industrial organizations worldwide.
HVS received the coveted Emmy Award for "outstanding
achievement in engineering development" in May, 1974.
HVS has been issued a basic U.S. patent covering the
general technique of correcting certain video signals by
means of a digital time base corrector.
NON- CAPSTAN
SERVO VTR
(INCLUDING
BATTERY
MACHINE)
UNSTABLE
VIDEO
-
STABILIZED
VIDEO OUT
Note: For DOC, the CVS 516 requires R.F. carrier from VTR.
525/60 Monochrome Signal
When the input signal to the CVS 516 is a wideband
525/60 monochrome signal, the output is a stabilized
signal with bandwidth of 5 MHz.
227
www.americanradiohistory.com
L
f0111
STIK
(OW
W,
(pp)
(.J)
(Jp)
SW
o~
SPARE
(s..
`dSYNC-1¡GEN1(g1T\/
COY
an
CVS 516 NTSC
INPUTS
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Reference
(Gen Lock)
GENERAL
Television Signal
Standard
Accepts monochrome or heterodyne NTSC standard 525 line
60 Hz signals.
Requires signal from capstan
Recorder Interface
servo or line lock VTR. Not designed to work with quadruplex
or segmented VTRs.
2 Horizontal lines.
Window of Correction
Resultant Time Base
Correction'
K- Factor (2T Pulse)
..
Differential Phase
Differential Gain
Signal -to -Noise Ratio
Bandwidth, Color
Bandwidth,
Monochrome
Color /Mono
Compatibility
.
Video Luminance: ±20 nsec.
Video Chrominance: ±2 nsec
relative to burst.
4% color, 2% monochrome.
Less than 1.5% at 0.280 V sub,
carrier.
Less than 1.5% at 0.280 V sub carrier.
55 dB (peak-to -peak signal to rms
noise) as measured on Rohde and
Schwarz noise meter.
3 dB down at 2.5 MHz.
Less than 3 dB down at 5.5 MHz.
If burst is not present, the CVS
516 automatically selects mono
Lock Time
Processing Amplifier
Frame Lock
Gen Lock Range
mode.
Color lock within one millisecond
after capstan servo VTR has
obtained V -lock. Approximately 2
seconds after line lock VTR has
reached operating speed.
Reinserts sync, blanking and
color burst (color burst deleted
on monochrome signals).
Will automatically frame lock segments edited randomly at vertical
interval.
Adjustable
2 /Lsec.
Input Video
LGC1t
GEN
nN0
ca
Ó
(II)
1
V p -p composite video with
burst or composite sync and sub carrier.
Composite video from VTR, 1 V
p -p @ 75 Ohms.
Input D.O.C. Reference
R.F. from VTR for drop out compensator, 0.5 V p -p (nominal) @
75 Ohms.
OUTPUTS
Video
Advanced VTR Sync
Composite video output,
1 V p -p
@ 75 ohms.
For V -lock VTR: Advanced composite sync ± 10 lines, 1 V @ 75
ohms; automatic or manual.
Sync
Horizontal, vertical, composite
sync, composite blanking, burst
flag, 4 V @ 75 ohms. Subcarrier
2 V @ 75 ohms.
PHYSICAL
Size
Power
Weight
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Humidity
48.3 cm (19 ") wide x 8.9 cm (3.5 ")
high x 48.3 cm (19 ") deep. Shipped as stand alone unit with rack
ears.
Approx. 175 W: 100,120,220,240V,
48-66 Hz
35 lbs. (15.9 kg)
50 °F - 104 °F (10° - 40 °C)
10% - 80%
OPTIONS
Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer
16 Line Memory
Fiberglass Shipping Case
'Note: Recorder and tape signal to noise capabilities affect time
base stability. A decrease in signal -to -noise ratio below approximately 40 dB will cause an increase in residual time base error.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
5M 12/79
228
www.americanradiohistory.com
Printed in U.S.A.
I
CVS 517 PAL /SECAM
Digital Video
Time Base Corrector
1
FIARFtis
W
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
229
www.americanradiohistory.com
CVS
517 Digital Time Base Corrector
:w
1
.1.ec
O
CVS 517: the ideal TBC for PAL/SECAM
GENERAL
The CVS 517 is a broadcast quality, PAL (and optional SECAM)
digital time base corrector made and priced to give users of
non- segmented, heterodyne VTRs all the proven advantages of
modern digital video processing. It works with 625/50 monochrome and color heterodyne video signals from helical VTRs to
give both broadcast and non -broadcast video users expanded
creative versatility for ENG, teleproduction, studio VTR backup
and much more. Based on the field proven experience of over
3000 HVS digital TBCs, the CVS 517 comes with features that,
before, were found only in units costing up to twice as much.
STANDARD FEATURES
"Gyrocomp" Memory Organization -allows correction
of large time base errors (such as gyroscopic errors),
without breakup, to make ENG tapes broadcast compatible. Standard memory has a 2 horizontal lines
correction window.
Improved Bandwidth- improved input circuitry allows
tapes from new "high band" 3/4" cassette recorders to
be processed without picture degradation.
Digital Color Averaging -lowers chroma noise by 3 dB
and reduces velocity errors by using digital variable
delay lines to average chroma.
Compact Size -advanced electronic circuitry makes the
CVS 517 exceptionally compact, a key advantage for
field production. Height is just 8.9 cm (31/2 "); weight is
only 15.9 Kg (35 lbs).
Convenient, Front Panel Operation -controls have a
preset unity position to reduce the possibility of misalignment. Secondary controls and switches are behind
a sliding cover -easy to get at but protected from
-
accidental use.
One Cable Gen Lock Sync Generator with Outputs
simplifies system interface and maintains 25 Hz PAL
offset in all modes.
Built -in Color Dropout Compensator-cleans up "dirty"
tapes.
Built -in Processing Amplifier -provides clean, stable
-
outputs.
Digital Chrominance -to- luminance Delay Adjustment
compensates for a common heterodyne VTR defect.
Frame Locked Vertical Interval Edits- smooths out
rough edits.
VTR Versatility -works with Capstan Servo and Non Capstan Servo VTRs.
TESTED RELIABILITY
Each CVS 517 is individually tested before shipment using
the toughest quality control in the industry. This includes
computer checking of components and individual testing
of each board. Units are then vibration tested, baked out
for 100 hours and checked by inspectors who are independent of manufacturing. The result? A TBC that stands
up to the most demanding operation, backed by a worldwide network of distributors and service centers.
APPLICATIONS
The CVS 517, with its advanced features and ease of
operation, opens up entire new application areas for the
use of video, from Field Production to Closed Circuit
Television distribution. Listed below are just a few of the
uses for this versatile TBC.
Electronic Journalism
The CVS 517 plays an integral part in field production
applications, like Electronic Journalism. You can use a
relatively inexpensive, portable VTR for remote coverage,
documentaries, news, commercials and special features.
Additionally, the built -in sync generator gives you field
production capability, field editing and mixing of sources,
and direct feedback to the studio via microwave.
230
www.americanradiohistory.com
APPLICATIONS (cont.)
Back -Up Operations At The Studio
Instead of using an expensive, direct color VTR for back-up
recording requirements, use the CVS 517 with an inexpensive, V lock heterodyne VTR. This allows you to make
better and more efficient use of your expensive machines
to do in -house production. Overall savings can be
significant.
General Playback, Dubbing, Editing & Problem
Tape Correction
The CVS 517 effectively handles many chores related to
broadcast, cable and closed circuit TV operations, whether
monochrome or heterodyne color. Among other things, it
ensures high picture quality playback for special review,
training or CCTV distribution systems. It also gives you the
ability to do quality dubbing or editing. This latter application is where the full signal correction potential of the
CVS 517 is realized. With the CVS 517, problem tapes no
longer need to be a problem.
OPTIONS (cont.)
Dub -to -quad
This option allows PAL mains lock or remote VTRs to be
dubbed to direct color video recorders such as quadruplex, type "C" and BCN.
Fiberglass Carrying Case
Unique packaging and minimal weight (11.4 Kg) make the
CVS 517 easy to take anywhere. With this specially
designed fiberglass carrying case, the unit is fully pro tected-a special advantage when doing field productions.
BASIC OPERATION
Operationally, the Model CVS 517 accepts an input video
signal, digitizes it and stores it. The signal is then clocked
out at a corrected rate and referenced to either an external
or internal sync generator. The result is a time base
corrected video signal.
Capstan Servo VTR
When the input signal to CVS 517 is a heterodyne type
recording from a capstan servo VTR, the output signal is
a broadcast stable, fully interlaced and color framed
video signal.t
GEN LOCK
(COMPOSITE VIDEO
OR DRIVES)
CAPSTAN
--s SERVO VTR
L
-+
UNSTABLE
VIDEO
CVS 517
COLOR OR MONOCHROME
BROADCAST STANDARD
VIDEO OUT
RGB OUTPUTSt
(SECAM ONLY)
ADV. VTR SYNC
Note: For DOC, the CVS 517 requires R.F. carrier from VTR.
The unique "flat-pack" design of the CVS -517 makes all components easily accessible for fast, easy maintenance, testing
and troubleshooting.
Non-Capstan Servo VTR
When the input signal to the CVS 517 is a heterodyne type
recording from a non- capstan -servo VTR, the output signal
is a stabilized color signal.t Dub -to-quad capability is also
available at the flip of a switch (optional ).
OPTIONS
SECAM
The SECAM option allows the CVS 517 to accept heterodyne or direct color inputs from non -segmented SECAM
VTRs, and provides PAL to SECAM and SECAM to PAL
transcoding.
When the input signal is from a vertical lock VTR, the
output signal will be broadcast stable. When the input
signal is from a mains lock VTR, the output will be a
stabilized signal. RGB outputs are available on the back
panel for routing to RGB switching systems or to an
external, customer supplied SECAM encoder.
PAL /SECAM Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer
The Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer provides a total of
5 dB of noise reduction in both the luminance and chroma
channels. Also included: a 3 to 5 dB reduction in ringing
of the input signal, and horizontal enhancement. The level
of noise reduction and enhancement is adjustable. An
Enhancer on /off switch is located behind the sliding panel
on the front of the TBC.
The picture quality improvements are accomplished
without any degradation of specifications.
Increased Memory
A 16 line memory is available for special "worst case"
applications. This ±8 line correction range further minimizes the effect of gyroscopic errors.
Direct Color
This option is specifically designed to function with slide
store devices. It allows processing of any direct color signal. However, bandwidth is limited to that of the CVS 517.
NON -CAPSTAN
SERVO VTR
(INCLUDING
BATTERY
MACHINE)
UNSTABLE
VIDEO
CVS 517
--
STABILIZED
VIDEO OUT
IRGB OUTPUTSt
(SECAM ONLY)
Note: For DOC, the CVS 517 requires R.F. carrier from VTR.
625/50 Monochrome Signal
When the input signal to the CVS 517 is a wideband 625/50
monochrome signal, the output is a stabilized signal with
bandwidth of 5 MHz.
tin
SECAM, CVS 517 has time base corrected PAL and synchronized RGB
outputs. For composite time base corrected SECAM video out signal, feed
RGB outputs through a SECAM encoder.
THE COMPANY
Harris Video Systems, Inc. is located in Sunnyvale, California,
U.S.A. Customers include all four major U.S. TV networks (ABC,
CBS, NBC and PBS), major international networks, independent
commercial and educational stations, most duplicating facilities
and a large number of educational and industrial organizations
worldwide.
HVS received the coveted Emmy Award for "outstanding
achievement in engineering development' in May, 1974. HVS
has been issued a basic U.S. patent covering the general technique of correcting certain video signals by means of a digital time
base corrector.
Other HVS products include the CVS 630 Series Digital
Framestore Synchronizer and the EPICTM computer- assisted
videotape editor.
231
www.americanradiohistory.com
rst
-rDA
rM
0
(AI[
OOAR
0
0
(,/Lp1i)
(1JQAi)
GEN
m
CVS -517 PAL /SECAM
INPUTS
Input Reference
(Gen Lock)
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Television Signal
Standard
Accepts monochrome, heterodyne PAL or SECAM standard 625
line 50 Hz signals.
Requires signal from capstan
Recorder Interface
Window of Correction
Resultant Time Base
Correction*
K- Factor (2T Pulse)
servo or mains lock VTR. Not designed to work with quadruplex
or segmented VTRs.
.2 Horizontal lines.
.
...
Differential Phase
Differential Gain
Signal -to -Noise Ratio
Bandwidth, Color
Bandwidth,
Monochrome
Color /Mono
Compatibility
Lock Time
Processing Amplifier
Frame Lock
Gen Lock Range
Litho in U.S .A.
.
.
Video Luminance: ±20 nsec.
Video Chrominance: ±2 nsec
relative to burst.
.4% color, 2% monochrome.
Less than 1.5% at 0.280 V
subcarrier.
Less than 1.5% at 0.280 V
subcarrier.
55 dB (peak -to -peak signal to rms
noise) as measured on Rohde and
Schwarz noise meter.
± 1 dB, 50 Hz to 3.3 MHz.
If burst is not present, the CVS 517 automatically selects mono
mode.
Color lock within one millisecond
after capstan servo VTR has
obtained V -lock. Approximately 2
seconds after line lock VTR has
reached operating speed.
Reinserts sync, blanking and
color burst (color burst deleted
on monochrome signals).
Will automatically frame lock segments edited randomly at vertical
interval.
Adjustable
2 µsec.
0
G
LOCI(
RO
0
0 0 0
an
ea
S
composite video with
burst or composite sync, sub carrier and PAL I.D. Pulse.
Input Video
Input D.O.C. Reference
Composite video from VTR, 1 V
p -p @ 75 Ohms.
R.F. from VTR for drop out compensator, 0.5 V p -p (nominal) @
75 Ohms.
OUTPUTS
Video
Advanced VTR Sync
Composite video output, 1 V p -p
@ 75 Ohms. RGB (SECAM option
only)- separate Red, Green and
Blue outputs, composite or non composite.t
For V -lock VTR: Advanced composite sync ± 9 lines, 1 V @ 75
Ohms.
Sync
H
,
V.,
composite sync, composite
blanking, burst flag, PAL I.D.
PHYSICAL
Size
-3 dB at 3.5 MHz.
Less than 3 dB down at 5.5 MHz.
a
NRO
V p -p
1
YAM
O
II I
1(KYNC-f-GENf-OUT\/
I11nRL
NI
K
ÓR
Power
Pulse, 4 V @ 75 Ohms. Subcarrier 2 V @ 75 Ohms.
48.3 cm (19 ") wide x 8.9 cm (3.5 ")
high x 48.3 cm (19 ") deep. Shipped as stand alone unit with rack
ears.
Approx. 175 W: 100,120,220,240V,
48 -66 Hz
15.9 Kg. (35 lbs)
10° - 40° C
10% - 80%
Weight
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Humidity
OPTIONS
SECAM
PAL /SECAM Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer
16 Horizontal Line Memory
Direct Color
Dub -To -Quad
Fiberglass Shipping Case
'Note: Recorder and tape signal to noise capabilities affect time
base stability. A decrease in signal -to -noise ratio below approximately 40 dB will cause an increase in residual time base error.
tin SECAM,
CVS -517 has time base corrected PAL and synchronized RGB
outputs. For composite time base corrected SECAM video out signal, feed RGB
outputs through a SECAM encoder.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
232
www.americanradiohistory.com
5M 5/79
CVS 520
Digital Video
Time Base
Corrector
520
POWER
ON
Digital Time
Base
Corrector
n n
NORMAL
COLOR
VC
K/4
P úq
á'
,.
!F.
w
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
PROCESSING
INFORMATION PROCESSING
233
www.americanradiohistory.com
More than a superb TBC- -
complete
signal processing system.
a
The 520, in addition to the industry's most advanced time base
correction, gives you a complete, self- contained, digital signal
processing system. Extra -cost options and accessories have
been all but eliminated -those capabilities have been built into
the basic package. For example:
Line -by -line look -ahead velocity compensation is standard; the
520 gives you a highly effective digital system that greatly
reduces chroma phase errors within each video line. It functions
with both heterodyne and direct color signals.
A digital dropout compensator, also standard, continually
monitors RF carrier information from the VTR. In the event of a
tape dropout, video information from the preceding line
the
correct color phase
inserted in place of the missing
information. RF automatic gain control (AGC) insures that
high- and low- energy tapes can be intermixed without a need
-in
-is
for any readjustment.
Switching on the Color Interlace system permits a feed from a
non -capstan -servo recorder to be dubbed to a production
recorder
quadruplex VTR, for example. The 520 does this
without resorting to any kind of auxiliary equipment -external
amplifiers, for example.
-a
2T pulse response
What does nine -bit, four -times -subcarrier, PCM digital
technique mean for you?
In any digital television system, the rate at which the video
signal is sampled and the number of digital bits available to
describe the video signal are critical. They establish theoretical
limits for such key specifications as K factor, signal -to -noise
ratio, differential gain and phase, and bandwidth. By increasing
the sampling rate from three -times -subcarrier to four- timessubcarrier, the CVS 520 has made significant improvements in
all these key areas. And by increasing the number of available
digital bits from eight to nine, it has improved linearity and
signal -to -noise ratio -while providing additional headroom for
those occasions when "hot" video
excessively high levels
fed to the TBC.
How do these improvements affect what you see on the
monitor?
Picture quality is better. The differences are evident even on
first -generation program material, and they become more
pronounced and obvious on multi -generation tapes. To look at
the improvement another way, here are actual, unretouched
photographs of two measurements of the 520's performance:
-is
mulliburst response
-at
Tames even the wildest errors.
The 520 handles even the most severe errors with its wide
correction range -three horizontal lines. Of course, a window of
this size guarantees that even random edits, if made on a
vertical interval editor, will be clean and smooth, without picture
breakup or disturbance. The output of the 520 will always be
a fully framed signal.
What happens to the output signal when errors exceed the
width of the correction window-for example, when sudden
movement of a portable VTR sets up gyroscopic errors? The
520's exclusive Gyrocomp circuitry is activated as soon as the
window is exceeded. The picture then moves gently upward in
one line steps -creating the subjective impression that the
camera has been tilted downward slightly. The image does not
break up; both horizontal movement and hue shift are held to
the minimum.
Even noisy tapes are no problem for the 520. Normally, noise
on the input signal tends to reduce the stability of the output
signal; but Harris has designed an extra degree of noise
immunity into all 520 circuitry. The result is superior time base
234
stability -even with noisy tapes.
www.americanradiohistory.com
o
n n
Better looking pictures from your ENG tapes.
Digital time base correction is what made ENG a reality. Now
it has come into widespread use, and has been joined by more
sophisticated Electronic Field Production techniques. The CVS
520 offers some special benefits for both of these applications.
The 520 does more than just correct the signals from all ENG
recorders
can actually improve picture quality. For example:
most VTRs commonly used for ENG suffer from chrominance-
MCP
wcT
Volvo
-it
NM
ww
to- luminance delay problems. The 520 lets you program these
problems out of your playbacks by way of internal jumpers.
The 520 also provides regenerated or "littered" 3.58 MHz
subcarrier; you can feed this signal to the playback VTR,
standardizing the output and permitting the 520 to be used in
the Direct mode. The result will be better resolution and
improved K factor.
The 520's size and power consumption are important benefits
for ENG work. It weighs just 35 pounds (15.9 kg) and measures
just 19 x 3.5 x 19 inches (48.3 x 8.9 x 48.3 cm).
5 7
*6
'5
"6
Operation: Simple and straightforward.
There's nothing complicated about operating the 520.
Select the operating mode you want by pushbutton; if you want,
the 520 will even select automatically between Direct and
Heterodyne color- making the mode change without changing
the hue! Status lights on the front panel confirm that the system
is functioning properly.
The 520 gives you five operator controls: Video Level, Chroma
Level, Hue, Set -Up, and V Phase. Three of these -Video Level,
Chroma Level, and Set -Up -have a preset unity position to
reduce the possibility of misadjustment. The Chroma Level
control is operational in all modes; improper chroma levels from
playback tapes can be corrected to give correct reproduction.
Secondary controls and switches are located behind a sliding
cover -easy to get at but protected from inadvertent contact.
Maintenance made easy.
If testing and troubleshooting become necessary, the 520's
concise, straightforward maintenance manual will make them
easier. All components are readily accessible, and a number of
thoughtful touches make it easy to work on the 520:
Test points and components are easy to identify. Black test
points are Ground; white test points are Signal.
When an oscilloscope ground clip is put on a black test point,
it is always in close proximity to a Signal test point.
An internal test generator makes it easy to check the
analog -to- digital and digital -to- analog circuitry: simply lift the
520's cover, move a jumper, and the 520 delivers a ramp
signal for scope display that will identify the location of any
errors in the system.
Moving a set of jumpers makes the Most Significant Bit the
Least Significant Bit-and vice versa. This provision lets the
operator quickly locate problems relating to the LSB, which
would otherwise be difficult to identify in the nine -bit system.
ADV
sYec
K
srMC
vela'
wut
ACM
rti
OUT
I
"
_OCt
a
N.
prlV'
vTa
CM,
.
St
SNOf
©1
eUN`'
0
SYNC GEN OUT
00
opc
hV
rrpto
O_'
2
Censokdeled Video Systems. inc.
Clara, Call/errata
Sla
100( iy
COVIIID
ST PATENT
35110152, 5.010115
Interconnects easily with any television system.
The 520's advarced design makes for an easy interface with
any system.
The genlock sync generator (with a complete set of outputs)
has timing adjustable from four -microsecond advance to
two- microsecond delay. It can be timed into virtually any system.
An additional advance of one horizontal line is available to
compensate for such external equipment as the CVS -310
Image Enhancer/Noise Reducer.
Pulse widths of the processing amplifier are set to nominal FCC
values; they can be adjusted precisely to match those of your
facility by means of internal jumpers.
235
www.americanradiohistory.com
Any of the last eight lines of the vertical interval may be
unblanked to pass VITS and VIRS information. H Blanking is
also variable.
Adjustable advanced sync or vertical drive, for use with capstan
servo recorders, makes it simple to connect the 520 to your
VTR. The 520 readily uses front porch switch and tach pulse
signals for segmented recorders (such as quadruplex). The
dropout compensator uses RF feed for dropout sensing.
The 520 is reliable.
Every manufacturer, of course, claims to put out a reliable
product. But Harris backs its claim with the most stringent
quality control in the industry.
Several visual checks during assembly start the inspection
process. Key components are pre- checked by computer before
being installed.
Each circuit board is then "cooked " -connected to power for
a period of time-and individually tested. Only then is it
installed in the TBC.
The assembled TBC is subjected to a vibration test and placed,
under power, in an environmental chamber where the temperature is cycled from +50 °C to +10 °C over a 100 -hour period.
Finally, it is checked by an inspector who is independent of the
rest of the manufacturing /test organization. The inspector is
under orders to behave like a customer -deciding whether the
product is acceptable for purchase. If absolutely anything is
substandard -including scratches on the front panel
is
rejected.
The result? A product that will stand up under even the most
arduous day -to -day use -and that is backed by a worldwide
network of distributors and service centers.
-it
236
www.americanradiohistory.com
CVS 520.
A major step forward
in digital technology.
The CVS 520 is a versatile, high -performance device designed
to accept signals from video recorders of every kind and to
reduce or eliminate inherent time base errors. It's equally at
home with segmented and non -segmented VTRs, monochrome
VTRs, heterodyne or direct color VTRs, with or without capstan
servos. It is compact, extremely reliable, and simple to operate.
It is the most advanced digital TBC in the world.
520 Digital Time Base Corrector
L
Ma.
J
J L
COI OM
Z
Las
rt
secr
0
www.americanradiohistory.com
Ò
CVS Model 520
Specifications
Oeral
Television Signal Standard
Accepts NTSC or NTSC -type 525 -line /60 Hz signal.
Recorder Interface
Requires a signal from any segmented or non -segmented VTR with or
without capstan servo, heterodyne or direct color or monochrome.
Lock Time
One millisecond after vertical lock (capstan servo VTR); appr. 2 seconds
after line lock VTR reaches operating speed.
Window of Correction
i-1.5H
Resultant Time Base Correction:
Monochrome
Direct Color
Heterodyne Color
±20ns
±2ns
K
Factor, 2T Pulse
±3ns relative to burst
1% Mono & Direct Color
3% Heterodyne Color
4% Line Lock
Differential Phase
2
Differential Gain
2% with 40 IRE subcarrier
Signal -to -Noise Ratio (p -p signal to
Greater than 60dB as measured on Rohde & Schwarz noise meter with
10kHz highpass and 3.58MHz subcarrier traps engaged.
RMS noise)
Bandwidth, Direct Color
&
Mono
with 40 IRE subcarrier
±0.5dB from D.C. to 4.2MHz; -1dB
Bandwidth. V -Lock. Heterodyne Color
- 3dB @ 2.5MHz
Genlock Range
Advance of 4 µsec, delay of
2
@ 5.0MHz
µsec
Inputs
Input Video
0.56 to 1.78V p -p (1V nominal @ 75 Ohm) terminating input.
Input Reference (Genlock)
Composite video with burst 0.3 to 2.0 p -p @ 75 Ohm. High impedance
looping input.
Input D.O.C. Reference
R.F. carrier, 3MHz to 10MHz nominal, 0.5V to 2.0V @ 75 Ohm.
Tech Pulse Input
TTL input 0 to +4.0V terminated in 75 Ohm.
Outputs
Video Output
One composite output available in all modes except bypass. One composite or non- composite output available in all modes. 1V p -p nominal
into 75 Ohm.
Sync
H
Drive, V Drive, Sync, Blanking and Burst Flag, 4.0V p -p two
Subcarrier 2.0V p -p into 75 Ohm.
Ohm.
Advanced VTR Sync
Vertical drive or composite sync (selectable) 4.0V p -p into 75 On.r..
VTR 3.58
Regenerated 3.58MHz subcarrier containing time base errors of Input
video signal, 1.0V p -p (minimum) into 75 Ohms.
F.P. Switch
Head switching pulse for segmented VTR 3V p -p.
Physical
Ambient Temperature
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104 °F)
Ambient Humidity
10% to 80%
Power
150W @ 100, 120, 220 or 240V. 50 or 60 Hz.
Weight
15.9 kg (35 lbs.)
Dimensions: W -H -D
48.3 x 8.9 x 48.3 cm
19
x 3.5 x 19
inches
Recorder and tape signal -to -noise capabilities affect time base stability.
approximately 40dB will cause an increase in residual time base error.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
=Ns
3M 12/79 Pnnted in U.S.A.
238
www.americanradiohistory.com
A decrease in
signal -to -noise ratio below
CVS 630 Series
Digital
Frame Synchronizer
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
239
-
PAN.
OMAM MN/
Uaty
0
0
0 00
w
¡j:
UT
a.
a:ia
1111111111111111
C..
u...
KR
CVS 630 Series: A family of superb
frame synchronizers, and much more
With the introduction of the CVS 630 Series, video users
can now have a combination of signal processing capabilities that have never before been available in a single
instrument.
Although this brochure specifically describes the CVS
630 NTSC unit, the features and options listed are also
included in PAL, SECAM and PAL -M models.
First of all, the CVS 630 is a superb synchronizer that
locks any non-synchronous video source-satellite, microwave, portable camera or studio feed
any television
system. And it does this as well as, or better than, any
competitive unit.
Superb synchronization, however, is just the start of
CVS 630 capabilities. Its combination of features,
versatility and economy puts it in a class by itself.
-to
A New Digital Architecture
The CVS 630 departs from other digital systems by using a
unique 8 bit, 14 MHz coding system that processes
the video signal in component form instead of in
composite form.
In operation, when a signal is received, the CVS 630
captures it, digitizes it in component form and stores it in
a modern, 16 K RAM -based frame memory. Then, using a
PROM-actuated memory controller, it reads out the signal
in precise synchronization, re -codes it and sends it out in
correct vertical, horizontal and color synchronization.
RF >
VIDEO
INPUT
INPUT
PROC
DATA
PATH
MODULE
DIGITAL
VIDEO
DATA
D
C
OR
DNR
I
MEMORY
COMPRESSOR
OPTION
DATA
PATH
MODULE
I
SYNC
GEN
RCG
I
D
AB
OUTPUT
-+
L
PROC
Adaptable to all TV Standards
Because the CVS 630 does have a universal memory, its
basic design is applicable to all world TV standards
NTSC, PAL, SECAM and PAL -M. Furthermore, all models
in the CVS 630 Series have a high degree of commonality
in parts and plug -in circuitry, to provide additional cost
and reliability benefits for all users.
-
Time Base Correction
Outstanding time base correction is a built -in feature of the CVS
630. Because Harris originated the digital TBC, and is still the
world leader. HVS engineers have been able to incorporate the
knowledge gained from more than 3000 digital TBCs now in use
worldwide. As a result, you get a time base corrector that operates smoothly and efficiently under noisy and less than ideal
conditions, without loss of output quality. In fact, its performance
is actually superior to stand -alone TBC s.
Special Effects
Another advantage of the CVS 630 is an outstanding
effects capability. Picture freeze (field or frame) is standard, and several other effects, like video compression and
positioning (see facing page), are available as options.
In addition, because of the flexible memory architecture
used in the CVS 630, many planned -for "optical" effects
can be readily supported.
AUX OUT
AUX I/O
MEMORY
CONTROL
This component coding technique, already thoroughly
proven in over 1000 CVS digital time base correctors,
results in simplification of digital circuitry and, consequently, more flexibility. It also allows a "universal"
memory architecture that makes the CVS 630 much more
than just a superb synchronizer.
Also, because component coding is inherently immune
to color phasing problems, "cycle jump" and horizontal
picture shift are both theoretically and actually impossible.
The 4 field (NTSC), 8 field (PAL) or 12 field (SECAM) color
sequence is always maintained without horizontal picture
shift.
Figure 1: Basic Block Diagram CVS 630 Frame Synchronizer
OUT
RGB
Digital Noise Reduction
To even further expand the capability of the CVS 630, a
digital noise reducer is available as a simple and economical option. Designed to complement the built -in TBC,
this option is described more fully on the facing page.
Future Expansion
Besides offering all of the performance features described
above, the CVS 630 has been specifically designed to
encourage and permit digital interface. As a result, the
potential additional applications for the CVS 630 are
virtually limitless: digital graphics ... real time picture
analysis ... multiple picture effects ... digital still
store ... and more.
240
www.americanradiohistory.com
FEATURES
Stable or Unstable Inputs: Operator attention is not
needed because stable and unstable inputs can be
intermixed without switching from "normal" to "TBC"
modes.
"Dual Mode" Hot Switching: Exclusive circuitry permits
switching of input sources without disruption of output
video. It also provides smooth handling of odd field
edits (see below).
Smooth Handling of Odd Field Edits: At the flip of a
switch, the CVS 630 is converted to a framestore /field
action synchronizer. This allows odd field edits to "slide
through" without freezing, eliminating the jerky, "1920's
movie" effect often encountered in other synchronizers.
Compensation For Lost Video: If input video is lost, the
CVS 630 either automatically freezes on the last good
picture or cuts to black, depending on the setting of a
board -level switch.
Picture Freeze: Increases production versatility by
providing front panel -selectable field or frame freeze.
High Noise Immunity: Built -in circuitry extracts maximum
information from even the poorest quality tapes; signals
with severe hum and noise pass through without
difficulty.
Exceptional Write Clock Range: Ensures that normal
tapes, tapes with "gyro" errors and even off -speed
tapes will play back with proper correction.
RGB Mode: A unique RGB mode, is selectable from the
front panel of the CVS 630. This mode allows use of
the CVS 630 with a number of video processing devices
already available, such as encoders, enhancers, color
correctors and the like.
Digital Interface: In addition to the normal video inputs
and outputs, the CVS 630 incorporates a direct memory
access (DMA) digital /O. This opens the door to a wide
range of digital video processing capabilities.
Convenient Front Panel Operation: Operating modes are
pushbutton selectable, and all operating controls are
on the front panel. All controls are preset /variable
so a "standard" setting is always achievable.
Secondary controls are behind the sliding front panel.
Included are chroma /luma delay adjustment and split
screen for use in comparing input and output signals.
Easy Maintenance: The use of plug -in cards for all
circuitry makes maintenance and /or service of the CVS
630 simple and fast. Usually it will only involve swapping
a board. A built-in test generator makes troubleshooting
easy, and all technical adjustments and test points are
located behind the front filter grill: readily accessible
but out of the way.
Tested Reliability: Outstanding reliability is achieved for
the CVS 630 through a combination of careful design
and thorough testing, using some of the most stringent
quality assurance standards in the industry. All components are de -rated to ensure long life operation, even
under extreme conditions. Additionally, air flow has
been maximized to reduce the possibility of hot spots.
Furthermore, each CVS 630 is put through a 100 hour
operating burn in. It is then inspected and operationally
checked by a Customer Acceptance group that reports
only to the company President. If the CVS 630 doesn't
pass inspection in every detail, it isn't shipped.
I
OPTIONS
Video Compressor /Positioner
This plug -in circuit card and remote control panel package
allows you to reduce, in real time, synchronous or non synchronous video input signals to Y of their normal size.
The resulting reduced picture can then be placed in any of
5 preset positions on the video screen or, through use of
a joystick control, it may be positioned anywhere the
cperator desires. Horizontal and vertical joystick control of
full -size pictures is also included.
Correct Color D.O.C.
Also contained on a plug -in card, this option is especially
useful for local tape playback applications. It monitors off
tape R.F., detects dropouts, reinserts correct color video
from the previous line and stores corrected video in the
frame memory. This ensures that even "frozen" video is
dropout corrected.
Digital Noise Reducer
The flexibility of the unique memory architecture in the
CVS 630 makes Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) a simple,
economical plug -in option rather than an expensive,
separate add -on. You don't even have to buy a D.O.C.
because the DNR option includes it.
Through the use of X, Y and Z domain processing, 12 dB
of noise reduction is readily achievable by the CVS 630
DNR without the motion artifacts and resolution loss
common to other noise reduction devices. The DNR even
reduces quad "banding" to help you salvage older tapes.
And, since not all signals have the same kind of noise, the
CVS 630 DNR has separate controls for luminance and
chroma noise reduction. As a result, the achievement of
quiet chroma no longer means over-reduction of the
luminance.
241
www.americanradiohistory.com
CVS 630 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Signal Inputs
Video
Genlock
D.O C
RGB
Signal Outputs
Video #1
Video #2
RGB
Sync & Blanking
Stability
1
V p -p composite, stable interlaced or
unstable heterodyne. 75 ohm
terminating.
1
V p -p composite video or composite
sync, subcarrier and (625 only) PAL
pulse. High impedance looping.
1 V p -p R.F., 75 ohm terminating
0 7 V ea, 75 ohm terminating
1
V p -p composite, by- passable
Video bandwidth
.... ±7 nsec with 50 dB
PAL
SECAM
to 4.2 MHz
±0.5 dB dc
to 5.0 MHz
±0.5 dB dc
to 3.6 MHz
57 dB (ave)
55 dB (ave)
55 dB (ave)
N/A
N/A
17 ns max.
..... ±0.5 dB dc
S/N ratio p -p video
to RMS noise, R/S
noise meter with
bandpass filter,
S.C. Trap & 10
kHz LPF
Differential phase
Differential gain
factor
C/L delay
Physical á Electrical
1%
2°
2%
1%
17 ns max.
17 ns max.
Dimensions
10.5" (26.7 cm) H x 19" (48.3 cm) W x
22" (55.9cm) D
50 lb (22.7 kg)
..10 ° -40 °C
10 % -90% non -condensing
95 -125V; 190 -250V 50/60 Hz
2T K
1 V p -p composite
0 7 V each
4 V p -p
S/N input signal
±20 ns with 40 dB S/N input signal
Residual chroma TBE .. ±1° with 50 dB S/N input
±4° with 40 dB S/N input
Residual luma TBE
625/50
525/60
NTSC /PAL -M
Performance
Weight
Ambient temperature
Humidity
A.C. voltage
A.C. power
.1.5°
1
5%
2%
350 W
ABOUT HARRIS VIDEO SYSTEMS
The CVS 630 is just one of the ways HVS uses modern digital and
analog technology to make your video production look better.
Besides being the acknowledged world leader in digital time base
correction, HVS also manufactures other advanced products using video and digital techniques for professional television.
Among these are the EPICTM Computer -Aided Editing System
and the CVS 310 Image Enhancer /Noise Reducer.
Worldwide customers include all major TV networks, many
independent commercial and educational stations, most large
duplicating facilities and a large number of educational, industrial and CATV organizations. All HVS products are backed by a
worldwide network of Authorized Sales and Service Distributors.
Litho in U.S.A.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
242
www.americanradiohistory.com
3M 6/79
I-1AF2RIS
1,1NANIUNI1(
AN()
HARRIS 9100
FACILITIES
CONTROL
For Radio Or TV
Building block concept allows a wide variety of applications, from complete automatic facilities control
(including ATS), to simple remote or local control
Reduces operating expenses
Improves transmission quality
Improves transmission system reliability
Offers automatic security
capital investment
measures to protect your
Allows automatic control of building environment
Handles time- related
lights on /off, etc.
www.americanradiohistory.com
functions
automatically -tower
The Harris 9100
Facilities Control Provides
Protection...And Significant Savings!
The Harris 9100 is a facilities control system
designed to improve your performance,
protect your investment and cut your
operating costs. The Harris 9100 in its various
configurations can provide intelligent remote
control; automatic transmitter control;
automatic logging; plant protection through
intrusion and fire alarms; automatic control of
such items as tower lights and building
temperature; and automatic exercising of
standby equipment.
short, the Harris 9100 Facilities Control
provides surveillance over your transmission
system and your physical plant, and offers
protection from costly failures wherever they
may occur.
In
family of microcomputer controlled "building blocks" which
determine the configuration, based on a
specific application. Whether your need is to
monitor and control a single co- located site or
to operate up to three remote sites from a
single location, the Harris 9100 Facilities
Control has the flexibility to meet your requirements. No matter what the size of your
operation- whether you're AM, FM or TVyou will find many beneficial applications for
the Harris 9100 Facilities Control to help
improve your profitability.
The system is composed of
a
WHAT HARRIS 9100
CAN DO FOR YOU
There are three major areas where Harris
9100 Facilities Control can provide significant
savings and /or improvements in a station's
operation -1) manpower allocation, 2)
protection, and 3) equipment performance.
Let's take a closer look at each of these for
specific examples.
Improved Manpower Allocation. The FCC
requires monitoring and adjusting the broadcast transmission to assure compliance with
technical standards. In addition, it is imperative that optimum use be made of the equipment while simultaneously protecting it from
catastrophic failure. These requirements have
been complicated by the increasing use of remote transmitter sites which, while ideal for
transmission, are not conducive to manned
operation.
The trend in both radio and television has
been toward delegation of the transmission
system to operations personnel. Remote control equipment has been used increasingly as
the only acceptable alternative to a full -time
staff at the remote site. This has been a cost effective approach for management, consistent with the increased stability and reliability
of transmitting equipment. However, this approach does not provide the continuous
monitoring which can spot trouble about to
happen, which can provide trend analysis
through careful parameter logging and which
can allow operation at peak performance
without rule violation.
The first responsibility of operations personnel is usually to the program chain. The combo operator often signs the transmitter log
radio it's the announcer, in television it's the
first -phone switcher. Even in those stations
with a full -time transmitter engineering staff,
monitoring the transmitter system may give
way to higher priorities of equipment
maintenance and repair.
-in
The Harris 9100 Facilities Control meets all
existing and currently proposed FCC regulations governing the monitoring, adjustment
and remote control of radio and television
transmitters. It can offer very valuable assistance to your operators for flawless transmission monitoring, adjustment and logging- freeing them for more effective work
elsewhere.
Operation, Equipment and Plant Protection.
The broadcaster is faced with potentially costly mishaps on a daily basis. One such area is
violation of FCC rules and the resulting fines,
particularly since Congress has dramatically
raised the amount of maximum fines. This
potential for higher fines has also increased
as more stations operate their equipment at
the legal maximum power and modulation
levels, and operate with lower skilled, often
untrained operators.
The transmission system also must meet its
own rules in terms of what constitutes safe
operation. Careful monitoring together with
the proper action and associated alarms as
provided by the Harris 9100 Facilities Control
can help prevent operation outside the legal
limits, or costly equipment failures with
resulting lost air time.
Additional protection can be provided for the
244
www.americanradiohistory.com
entire physical plant with monitoring and
alarms for intrusion or fire which may lead to
reduced insurance premiums for these sites.
Improved Performance. Maximizing equipment life and minimizing FCC violations are
not the only advantages of Harris 9100
Facilities Control. In an increasing number of
markets, large and small, operating equipment at the maximum levels is a key to the
successful competition for higher ratings and
increased revenues. Even the most stable
transmission system needs the attention of
the Harris 9100 to operate at peak performance over extended periods of time with
minimum equipment problems, and without
FCC rule violations.
Another area for improved performance with
the Harris 9100 is in trend analysis. Long range tracking of very accurate readings helps
locate problem areas in the transmission
system and pinpoint areas for improvement.
HOW HARRIS 9100
FACILITIES CONTROL
IS USED
Remote Control. The traditional remote
control system provides commands to the
transmission system and feeds back a limited
amount of information to the control point.
Such a system has command channels to
raise, lower and turn off or on; status channels
for on -off indication; and analog channels to
measure such parameters as voltage, current,
temperature, etc. The Harris 9100 Facilities
Control opens a new dimension in remote
control, providing intelligent surveillance and
decision -making. Channels are automatically
scanned and compared with pre -programmed limits; and alarms are initiated or
corrective action taken, as appropriate. Power
can be computed using the indirect method of
power determination and the Harris 9100 can
serve either as an efficiency monitor or as the
primary means of power control.
Automatic logging of all parameters can be
performed on a regular basis, eliminating
periodic interruptions of station personnel.
Also, the logger fully records out -of- limits
conditions when they occur.
Time -initiated switching may be employed for
power levels, changing control limits, check-
Harris 9100
Facilities Control
Components
Studio Unit (9120)
ing tower lights, and other time -oriented functions.
Transmitter Unit (9130). Location: transmitter site. Function:
Automated Transmission System (ATS).
The Harris 9160 Automatic Control Unit (ACU)
provides for ATS operation with its power and
modulation control, yielding additional
benefits to management. Relaxed operator
restrictions will give greater flexibility in the
selection of staff and duties; the FCC requirement for a person to be present for monitoring
can now easily be met by utilizing a receptionist, switchboard operator or guard. Under
existing and currently proposed ATS rules,
there will be a reduction in requirements for
routine inspections, meter readings and logging requirements. And there will be much
less anxiety concerning the reliability of
switching power modes in AM stations, very
often a problem where "combo" operators are
employed.
Transmitter Unit (9130)
site. Function: provides
automatic facility control -i.e.,
automatic control of transmitter
(ATS), building environment,
security measures, etc.
Automatic Control
Unit (9180)
power.
Facilities Control. The Harris 9100 Facilities
The Harris 9100 Facilities Control design is
based on over half -a- century of experience by
Harris in the broadcast equipment field -and
the quality is backed by the most experienced
provides remote control of the
transmission facility when used
with a Studio Unit (9120) or an
Automatic Control Unit (9160).
Allows remote control from a
studio facility or from another
transmitter facility. Alternate
function: provides local control
of the transmission facility.
Autometic Control Unit (9180).
Location: transmitter or studio
To sum it up, the Harris 9100, operating under
ATS rules, will provide cost savings considerably beyond those provided by remote
control, through more efficient use of man-
Control is a true systems approach to the
transmission system and related physical
plant. Up to three remote sites can be controlled from a single common control unit at
the studio. In addition to control of the transmission system, related functions can be surveyed and controlled. Heating, air conditioning and ventilation equipment can be
monitored. Backup equipment can be exercised and performance logged, all on an
automatic basis. And temperature sensors
and intrusion alarms can be constantly on
guard for plant protection. By combining the
monitoring and control of all functions, the
Harris 9100 Facilities Control will profitably
produce greater consistency, precision and
reliability of operation than is obtainable with
existing manually operated equipment. In addition, The Harris 9100 will allow maximum
operation of the transmission system to
provide the most competitive broadcast
signal in your market.
Studio Unit (9120). Location:
studio facility. Function: communicates with the Transmitter
Unit (9130) or the Automatic
Control Unit (9160) to provide
monitoring and control of the
transmitter facility.
Options
Channel Expansion Panel. Offers additional
channels for the Transmitter Unit (9130) and
the Automatic Control Unit (9160). Each panel
adds 8 telemetry, 16 status and 16 command
functions. Up to 7 Channel Expansion Panels
may be added to each 9130 and 9160 unit.
Multi -Site Module (not shown). Allows a
Studio. Transmitter or Automatic Control Unit
to communicate with up to three remote sites.
Channel Expansion Panel
K
Logger. Provides printout of all analog and
status channels from up to three remote sites.
Monitor and Alarm Panel. Used in conjunction with the Automatic Control Unit (9160),
provides minimal monitoring and control in
compliance with FCC ATS rules for monitor
and alarm points.
rvri'
Logger
mum
Monitor and Alarm Panel
service organization in the industry.
245
From a complete multi -site automatic facilities control system...
B
FM
TV
ST ANOBT
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
M
CHANNEL
EXPANSION
FACILITY
MONITORING
A CONTROL
TRANSMITiFR
N
I{Y-
MONITORING
6 CONTROL
CHANNEL
EXPANSION
t7
MODU-
AUTOMATIC
ONTROL
UNIT
MON TOR
A
CHANNEL
EXPANSION
ON
M000A
ION
MONITOR
O
U IT
191601
197601
VIDEO
COR RECTOR
AUTOMATIC
CONTROL
N
FACILITY
MONITORING
6 CONTROL
AUTOMATIC
CONTROL
UNIT
äá
DEM ODULA OR
)
É
STUDIO
UNIT
OQ
.1201
m
HARRIS 9100 - TYPICAL MULTI -SITE ATS SYSTEM
to basic automatic control
CHANNEL
EXPANSION
FACILITY
MONITORING
6 CONTROL
AUTOMATIC
CONTROL
a
FM
MODULATION
MONITOR
UNIT
601
w
rU
Q Q
mm
....to remote or local control, the
Harris 9100 Facilities Control can
be configured to fit your requirements.
For complete information and assistance in
meeting your system needs, please contact
your Harris Radio or Television
District Sales Manager, or Harris'
Domestic Sales Department in Quincy,
Illinois (phone: 217/222- 8200).
HARRIS 9100 - BASIC AUTOMATIC CONTROL
J8K-4 5M-379
ADV 542 PTD IN
246
www.americanradiohistory.com
U S A
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
mspwuTnN
woaMIw
THE
HARRIS 9000
PROGRAM CONTROL
SERIES
Three distinct systems available, offering the broadcaster a complete selection to meet his particular
requirements
MULTI -FILE' Program Memory saves you time...and money
Easy -to- understand
video display of current system status
Conversational messages
No special skills required to
Live- assist features and ease of operation meet the needs of today's fast -paced
operate system
combo operator
Advanced micro -computer design
Operationally and environmentally proven...
hundreds of Harris' systems in field use.
www.americanradiohistory.com
The Harris 9000 Program Control
The purpose of radio program control
equipment is to maximize station profits
through greater operating efficiency and
through the presentation of a more saleable
program product. That's pretty basic, but that's
what it's all about...saving time...improving your
product...increasing your profits.
That's what the Harris 9000 Program Control
is all about, too. It has been designed to give
you the best tool available to increase the
efficiency and effectiveness of your staff, while
providing the opportunity to improve your
sound -whatever your format may be.
As the originator of micro- computer
program automation, Harris has drawn on its
years of experience, and taken the next step
forward to give you more flexible, more
convenient, more reliable, and easier to
operate systems than any available before.
Harris 9000 systems will handle any format
flawlessly, yet are so easy to understand, and
so easy to program that even the most nontechnical person in your station will readily see
how they work and appreciate their help.
With many exclusives, from live- assist
features to the truly advanced MULTI-FILEProgram Memory, the Harris 9000 Series is
definitely the most advanced concept in
program automation, and the best there is at its
job -helping you improve your results, on the
air and on the bottom line.
UNLIMITED
FLEXIBILITY
TO HANDLE
ANY FORMAT....
With the wide variety of program formats that
are on the air today, a system must have great
versatility if it is to be able to handle any one of
them. Harris' 9000 systems have that versatility.
No programming is too complicated -or too
simple. They will faultlessly handle everything
from fast -paced "lots -of- music, lots -of- talk"
programming to a more simple sequence of
reel -to -reel events integrated with commercials
at the proper times. In addition, the Harris 9000
enables management to achieve its goal of
minimizing the time and errors associated with
entering commercials and other schedule
changes.
EFFICIENCY AT
EVERY STAGE....
The Harris 9000 aggressively pursues
maximum efficiency at every stage of station
operation. The video terminal provides
necessary information -very complete yet very
simple -for schedule entry and review. Even
during editing, a status display informs the
operator of the on -air situation, alerting him
to possible problems. Conversational
messages provide easy -to- understand
prompting regarding the nature of errors. The
keyboard layout, developed from Harris'
experience in hundreds of installations, is
aimed at fast and reliable scheduling.
SIMPLIFIED SCHEDULE
ENTRY WITH
MULTI -FILE
PROGRAM MEMORY....
The need to separate commercials from
repetitive format elements was partially
satisfied with the use of sub -routines, a concept
developed by Harris and now widely copied
throughout the industry. With the MULTI -FILE
Program Memory, Harris' 9000 has vastly
improved on a good idea, providing a real
solution to an error - prone, time -consuming
problem.
Commercial schedules, music rotations,
repetitive format elements and special
programs are all independent schedules which
must be integrated to create the broadcast day.
MULTI -FILE Program Memory provides
independent files for these schedules,
eliminating the need to refer to unrelated
material. Traffic, for instance, no longer needs
to know where to go after a commercial cluster.
Traffic keeps the commercial file, the music
director keeps the playlist file, etc. This is a real
time- saver.
The Harris 9000 with MULTI -FILE Program
Memory keeps things simple by integrating
these various schedule files, according to plan
and always on time. The operator can highlight
on the video screen the look -ahead display of
entries from any particular file; in addition, a
bar graph can be displayed, distinctly
illustrating the integration of upcoming
schedule files. The innovative use of graphics
248
www.americanradiohistory.com
MORE VERSATILE, MORE EFFICIENT
THAN ANYTHING YOU'VE SEEN BEFORE
in the Harris 9000 is not only of great assistance
to the operator, but minimizes effort in the area
of operator training.
comments that are frequently made about
Harris' program control equipment.
Live or automated operation is no longer the
issue when the end result is a significant
advantage in ratings and revenues. The Harris
9000 provides multiple overlaps, dependable
voice -track synchronization, plus solid support
for the fast -paced live announcer.
IMPECCABLE
EXECUTION....
Today's competitive operation can't afford to
waste time deciding whether or not a format
change is possible. The Harris 9000 Program
Control knows that any format is possible, and
concentrates on impeccable execution.
"Tighter playlist control...more consistent air
sound.. .increased ratings" are broadcaster
Live -assist means never having to keep a
program log, stack carts or cue records. A
countdown timer, complete with a ten -second
warning, helps maintain a tight sound. Insertion
of unscheduled material is easy. This is live assist that really aids your on -air talent and
encourages more creative performance.
The 9000
Series
Control
Electronics
At right is a typical system for
use with a program service.
Music is on reel -to -reel. Commercials (and other cartridge
material) are in the instant access Instacart (5) and the random access Go -Carts (6 & 7).
When time -announce is used,
deck 14 has even numbered
minutes and deck 15 has odd
numbered minutes. The system
electronics require only half of a
standard rack for mounting.
SIM
computer mainframe includes the monitor panel and
A. The
control electronics.
B. The
solid -state
Audio
houses source
modules, dual silence sensors, program amplifiers,
faders and 25 Hz filters.
Switcher
C.
Computer -grade power supply.
flexible -disk drives for
memory storage
capabilities (9002 and 9003).
D. Dual
increased
249
www.americanradiohistory.com
The 9000 Series Control Terminal
Programming and operating instructions are communicated to the
system from a terminal that may be located up to 150 feet from the system
electronics. The terminal provides continuous video display of various
operational functions, and is also used for editing purposes.
4,
acrl.a YN.
101R L4111.
P.m 1.1
a:r:r ,«i.. a..ey.
a:r:M 1111... 6cI
11
Lower area shows, in
tl
13 PI
mvb as II
e.11
er
studio terminal video
display.
01
a
á
The
,uy.
tyt
^,ae.. 1.1.
ull Or*: a.
...
o !t
the .,-11'. Ie.)w,
s
full typewriter
=
1?
dedicated
function keys to eliminate typing frequently used instructions
_- -IllIIIMIIN
/ga
N
111111
V
(PLAY, INTRO, LINK,
etc.).
-t
1
-
be entered (scheduling, set clock, log
encoding, etc.). Manual operation keys are
used for remote control (START, STOP,
FADE, etc.).
includes
r- -1--Y--.t:.,
I!iiM/ili
1: 1:
/? f/; 1:
NI MI
io ifa
.^
Mode Control
Keys are used to determine what data is to
The Data Entry Keyboard is used for entering instructions. It
keyboard is provided
for entering log messages for encoding. In
the 9003, the keyboard
is also used for titles
and for live copy insertions.
s:11
instance, this copy
may be typed on the
news room terminal
and will appear on the
J.ntyl.1e.l..0.
Or-il
1.
M ,
en..
w.1.t
sl.... led
1y.1.11
U+1 R nt
111
LAMP
a a a al.M,t.
0 11a10.lpr.Mv
a a > 1u110 Ist,
Ll n n limo, 1.1.r
the various operational displays, a list of
upcoming schedule
entries. In the editing
modes, this serves as
a "work area ".
.
r. 010 ai
a
M
aawr..,a
11/11 a
A
the 9003, up to 3
lines may be used for
bulletins or other copy
for live insertions. For
In
Upper area shows onair status, real time,
and the next scheduled event.
I
K
V
YOUR CHOICE OF SYSTEMS TO MEET
YOUR PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS. The
Harris 9000 Series is composed of three
distinct systems, each showing a progressive
increase in programming capability. The 9001
is a basic program control system which can
be used for any automation requirement. It
uses a single video terminal, and has a 1,999 event memory, which is expandable up to
9,999 events. The 9002 fills all program
control requirements, plus has the ability to
interface with an external business system,
and can be programmed from totally
independent terminals. It has a 1.999 -event
memory, expandable up to 9,999 events. The
9003 handles even the most sophisticated
t/"11
e 1
.
0
L
°.
a
:
,
,a
IV-
a -
titi'or
format faultlessly -plus has the ability to
generate a programming schedule!
The Harris 9000 Series has been designed
to expand as your needs expand. All 9000
Series models can easily be upgraded in the
field to a higher numbered model.
THE HARRIS 9001. The 9001 has the full
mainframe, audio switcher and heavy -duty
power supply already in use in hundreds of
installations worldwide. The 1,999-event
memory (expandable to 9,999 events) and the
7 -day clock allow you to program for a
weekend or an entire week ahead. The simple
keyboard and plain -text programming assure
mastery of system operation by most station
250
www.americanradiohistory.com
personnel in less than a day. Dual- intensity
video allows highlighting of the schedule
items chosen by the operator. The types of
highlighted entries could be commercial
clusters, music sets, contest /promos -any
file from the MULTI -FILE' Program Memory.
random -access source equipment, are now
avoided in the Harris 9003. For example, the
system will alert you that deleting the airline
spots, because of a plane crash, will result in a
beer commercial adjacent to the Alcoholics
Anonymous PSA.
Among the many other important 9001
features are: automatic power failure restart,
time announce control, network join, ready
sensing to prevent dead air, remote control
and countdown clock for live- assist, bulletin
insertion, "coffee pot" function relays, self testing for on -site troubleshooting, and
MULTI -FILE Program Memory.
With the plain -text title display feature, the
music director no longer has to wonder if the
system will air the recurrent record he wants
following a commercial break. With Harris
9003 in charge of a random access music
library, it is now possible to specify the names
of the music selections. Instead of a "Play 0527" indication, an operator will see that the
scheduled selection is "Sara by Fleetwood
Mac ", along with other information, on the
same line, such as intro /running time and
chart position.
THE HARRIS 9002. In addition to the many
features of the 9001, the 9002 includes dual
flexible -disk drives to increase the memory
capability and to provide a permanent
As more stations seek to better localize
their syndicated programming, there is a need
for periods of live programming; this may be
for drive time or news blocks. In any case, the
Harris 9003 is ideal for the live operator. The
display shows the name of a song or
commercial that is on the air, plus the names
and starting times of upcoming scheduled
events...and the countdown timer
automatically gives the time remaining for the
on -air event.
memory storage medium.
Another key innovation is the ability of the
9002 to support totally independent terminals.
Using MULTI -FILE Program Memory, the
traffic director and program director can have
their own files in the program memory. Now
they can both edit their respective areas of
event memory simultaneously! And, while this
is happening, data can be received or
transmitted to an external business system
using the port provided for this purpose.
The system software is contained on the
disk. In the unlikely event of disk failure, the
system defaults to programmed Read -Only
Memory (EPROM) chips located on the single
8080 CPU board; it would then operate
similarly to the Harris 9002.
THE HARRIS 9003. The Harris 9003 has
revolutionized the role of program control in
radio broadcasting by integrating the
program system into the planning process
extending the benefits of program control
beyond the operations level to everyone
concerned with the on -air product.
-
Going beyond the traditional role of the
program system, the Harris 9003 brings
significant benefits to the broadcaster -cost
reduction due to reduced workload at the
planning stage; improved on -air performance
from scheduling flexibility; reduction in lost
revenue due to scheduling errors; and
improved operator performance due to easier
system operation.
The traffic director can enter scheduling
requirements on any 9003 terminal; the
system either accepts the entry and
determines where the source material should
be placed in the system, or advises the traffic
director of a conflict. Back -to -back
scheduling problems, formerly possible using
MAJOR SYSTEM CAPABILITIES
ir4)
9001
3'
15'
No
Programmable
9002
3 -15'
15 -31'
Yes
Yes
Programmable (Optional)
9003
31"
(Minimum)
Not
Applicable
Yes
Automatic
No
Yes
(Optional)
cQ
QQ
cm
Q; Ó
Yes
Manual
Yes
No
No
Yes
Manual
Yes
No
No
Yes
Automatic
Yes
Yes
Yes
'Based on average of 110 events per hour.
'Based on average of 50 events per hour
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
www.americanradiohistory.com
251
STANDARD FEATURES
IN ALL HARRIS 9000
SYSTEMS...
Video editing and display
MULTI -FILE' Program
Memory
Jock -assist
countdown
clock with 10- second warning
Automatic power failure
restart
Internal diagnostic program
for on -air troubleshooting
Built -in time announce control
Interfaces to all popular random access machines
Ready sensing to prevent
dead air
Crystal- controlled
7 -day
clock
Simple one -time bulletin insertion
Operator "error sensing"
Automatic voice track control
Programmable
for talk -over
fade-under
Software logic
-
your
safeguard against future obsolescence
Front panel access to test
points and adjustments
Full function monitoring and
audition
Optional logging, which
provides discrepancy
diagnostics
25 Hz detection included for
all reel -to -reel sources
Ready for most syndicated
programming services
Four "coffee pot" function
relays included
Micro -computer versatility
Complete system remote
control
All processing is accomplished by a single CPU board. Harris 9000 Series circuit boards
are designed and tested by computer -controlled equipment.
A COMPLETE LINE...
The Harris 9000 Series has been
designed for easy plug -in expansion
to accommodate the growth you expect for your station. Starting with
the Harris 9001, which is the basic
control system, on through the Harris 9002 and 9003, you have a choice
of models, depending on your initial
application requirements. Each
model is easily upgraded in the field
to any higher model number. The
9001 features the same mainframe,
audio switcher and heavy -duty
power supply already in use in
hundreds of installations worldwide.
The 9002 adds dual -drive flexible disk storage, independent -terminal
circuitry, and business system interface hardware. The Harris 9003 integrates the program system into
the planning process to extend the
benefits of program automation to
the management level. Additional
sources may be added to all models,
as may the sophisticated Harris logging system.
BUILT AND BACKED
TO PROVIDE
LONG -TERM VALUE....
The Harris 9000 Program Control is
built using the latest computer assisted techniques to assure outstanding reliability in the field. The
quality of Harris' micro -computer
program control is backed by the
most experienced service organization in the industry, and is proven
with the largest users' group in the
country. Benefit from the experience
of others. It all adds up to make the
Harris 9000 Program Control a very
secure investment for your station.
For a complete evaluation of your requirements, and a
system proposal, please contact your Harris Radio District
Sales Manager, or the Harris Radio Sales Department in
Quincy, Illinois (217/222- 8200).
Dual silence sensors
Stereo and sum -channel
mono outputs
Emergency back -up operation panel
JK-3.5M-280 'HARRIS CORPORATION 1980
252
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADV. 554 PTO. IN U.S.A.
Sophisticated audio control for the radio and television
broadcaster
FIARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
High
RFI
EMI
immunity
Factory pre -wired and tested, but field expandable
Two, four and eight output configurations
Combined monaural output standard
M90
Up to twenty -six mixing positions
Up to
fifty -two inputs -more
on special order
Customer selected module placement
Modular Audio
Patented linear motion attenuators -five year warranty
Optional
Control
Console
EQ on each
Switchable
input
Hi Pass Lo Pass
filter
on each
input
Input level of -70 dBm to +20 dBm with gain trim
LED
function indicators
Independent monitor feeds
Input and output monitoring
www.americanradiohistory.com
M90 control board, showing typical 4- output channel configuration.
One of the most versatile audio consoles
available today, Harris' Model M90 is an
expcndable, completely modular, professional on- air /production/ reinforcement
unit. The console provides 2 or 4 output
channels with up to 26 mixing positions (52
inputs), or up to 24 mixing positions (48 inputs) in the 8 output channel version. Combined monaural output is standard in all
versions.
Customization of each M90 is readily accomplished by selecting, from a wide variety of plug -in modules, those that exactly
meet your requirements. In addition, there
are a number of easily altered console
functions that are "programmed" by the
use of jumper wires, creating a broad
choice of operating characteristics.
The M90 provides complete VU metering,
two echo send /return channels, talkback
communications, programmable control
room and studio muting, optional EQ at
each input, two foldback mix outputs (one
is optional), a slate /test oscillator, optional
stereo inputs, and a full line of matching
accessories that includes a plug -in patch
bay.
A full capacity system, the M90 fills the
gap
between conventional broadcast consoles
and sophisticated recording consoles, with
additonal flexibility to meet demanding
requirements of quality conscious broadcasters.
Depending on the choice of modules, the
M90 is ready to be used in many different
applications.
ON -AIR
The M90, in the 2, 4 or 8 channel versions,
functions as either a mono or stereo on -air
broadcast console. It may be used to
provide simultaneous discrete mono and
stereo feeds (rather than limiting the mono
output to an inferior combine of the stereo
program). Combined mono is available,
primarily for checking phase compatibility
(or where time does not allow a discrete
mono mix to be established). Monitor
muting is interfaced to the input module
On /Off and Mic/Line switches in typical onair fashion, except that reprogramming of
muting is vastly simplified and improved by
the use of Transistor -Transistor Logic (TTL)
circuitry instead of relay logic.
PRODUCTION
M90 also functions in the four channel
configuration as a production console, with
discrete program outputs suitable for professional multi -track recording and broadcast production. For these applications, the
console is equipped with completely independent monitor feeds for the control
room, studio, and foldback headphones.
An important monitoring function is served
by the built -in, 2- section, 4- channel over dub/foldback mixer which permits sync
playback of previously recorded tracks
The
254
www.americanradiohistory.com
with the program output of the console. In
television, the foldback mix is valuable for
re- recording (looping). With many more
monitoring features, and the capability of
mono and stereo monitoring, awkward
outboard mixers are no longer a necessity.
With optional tone oscillator and high pass
filter sections, this console becomes an outstanding production unit for automation
tapes.
pots are standard on most input
modules for creative effects. High and low
pass filters can be useful in cleaning up
poor recordings. Channel input equalizers
provide up to 12 dB of boost or cut at 6
selectable frequencies.
Pan
An
11
position input gain trim provides an
additional 40 dB attenuation or 25 dB
boost to handle unexpected input level
variations, and accommodates input levels
of -70 to +20 dBm. This feature is
available on all input modules except the
stereo line input module set.
Complementing the monitor system, a full
input SOLO system permits preview of all
inputs for cueing with far greater flexibility
than conventional cue systems. Control
room monitor speakers are automatically
muted when a SOLO button is depressed.
CONSOLE MAIN FRAME
The M90 main frame provides housing for
all modules, terminations, and interconnec-
required in the console. The all
aluminum enclosure is furnished with
walnut formica sides. The system concept is
one using a motherboard with plug -in
modules containing amplifiers and
associated controls. Behind the hinged
meter panel are plug -in line output
amplifier cards used as outputs for
program, echo send, monitor and fold back.
regulated and protected against over
voltage, excessive current, and line voltage
variations. Power drain is less than 100
watts. A current limited, fully protected 48volt phantom microphone power supply,
wired to microphone inputs, is included for
central powering of condenser microphones while retaining dynamic microphone compatibility.
fions
TYPICAL INPUT
frame is exceptionally rugged,
and lightweight enough to be practical in
portable applications. Blank space on the
meter panel con be used for installation of
digital clocks or other accessories, and
space is available on the console top panel
for installation of tape remote controls, etc.
The main
A typical input position provides a linear
motion attenuator and stepped sensitivity
control to accommodate levels from -70
dBm to +20 dBm. An optional 3 knob, 6
frequency equalizer provides 12 dB boost
or cut at 80 Hz or 150 Hz, 1.8 kHz or 4
kHz, and 7.5 kHz or 12 kHz; In /Out switch
with LED indicator; plus Hi -Lo filters.
An illuminated VU meter appears for each
of the 2, 4 or 8 program outputs in the console.
Switch selection between two inputs which
may be either microphone or line level is included. Solo function with LED indicator at
each position may be used without interruption of program. A simple strapping
change on the input module PC board permits altering solo function to a pre -fader
cue function for broadcast applications. An
On -Off switch with LED indicator and controls for echo send A and B appear on each
input.
The main frame motherboard will accept
input modules with or without EQ in any of
the input positions. Unused positions are
covered with matching blank panels.
Positions to the extreme right are allocated
to monitor and master control modules.
A fully protected rack -mount power supply
provided. Designed to work from 230 or
115 volt AC, 40-60 Hz line source, it is
is
Frequency
response:
Noise:
Distortion:
Crosstalk:
Maximum
Output Level:
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
±1 dB 20- 20,000 Hz, measured any input to any output at any
level up to +18 dBm out.
Measured from any microphone input to any output channel is
not less than 74 dB below +4 dBm output, with a
input,
-50
nominal gain settings, 20- 20,000 Hz unweighted. Measured from
any line input to any output channel is not less than 80 dB below
+4 dBm output, with +4 dBm input, nominal gain settings, 2020,000 Hz unweighted.
THD less than 1/10 of %, 30- 20,000 Hz at any level up to +18
dBm output. Less than 5/10 of 1% 30- 15,000 Hz at levels +18 to
+24 dBm output. Measured any input to output. IM distortion
less than 0.5% at +18 dBm output.
Not in excess of -80 dBm at 1,000 Hz and -65 dBm at 10,000
Hz. Measured worst case condition, any input to any output, adjacent busses.
Patented linear motion fader is impervious to
liquid or solid foreign matter -warranted for five
years!
1
+24
dBm, transformer isolated.
Reor view, M90,
showing input and
output connections
through
standard
multi -pin connectors.
XLR
1:1
111
111
..:111r1?
;J ._
connectors
are
optional.
255
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS' M90 MODULAR AUDIO CONSOLE MAIN FRAME AND MODULES
following listings cover the major components available to customize the M90 audio console to your own
requirements. Order numbers are listed in parentheses following the descriptions. A complete chart of these
components is shown on the following two pages for your ordering convenience.
The
MAIN FRAMES
MIXING MODULES
M90 -SPF2 TWO CHANNEL BUSS
The M90 series includes four
configurations
of main frames involving two sizes -all
constructed of heavy aluminum extrusions.
Each main frame is supplied with support
legs to make it free standing or it may be
flush mounted in a desk or table top.
The general term "mixing modules " encompasses a wide variety of plug -in modules,
both mono and stereo, including faders, in-
AND PAN MODULE WITH
FOLDBACK #2. Performs same function as
M90 -SPF4 module, but for use with 2
channel output console. (740 -0213 -000.)
All plug -in modules and components, with
the exception of the power supply, are
housed in the main frame. Signal interconnect, logic and power distribution for
all modules is provided by a mother board.
Patch points, input and output terminations
are located at the back of the main frame
through multi -pin connectors; however, XLR
terminations are also available.
FADER. Smooth linear action attenuator
with over 4 inches of travel. Adjustable tension. Sealed elements are impervious to
dust, dirt, liquids. Warranted 5 years!
(740- 0215 -000.)
M90 -2MF TWO CHANNEL OUTPUT
MAIN FRAME (MAXIMUM 18 FADERS).
M90 -IME MONO INPUT MODULE WITH
2 channel output console.
master faders, master control
module (MC4), talkback module (TB), 2 line
amplifiers (A30), 2 VU meters, power supply, logic circuits and wired for maximum
number of inputs. Accommodates up to 18
faders (mono, stereo or combination) and
12 line amplifiers. Size: 38 inches wide,
321/2 inches deep and 291/2 inches high
(floor to padded arm rest). (740 -0201000. )
Main frame for
Includes
M90 -4MF FOUR CHANNEL OUTPUT
MAIN FRAME (MAXIMUM 18 FADERS).
Main frame for 4 channel output console.
Same size and facilities as 2 channel output
main frame except it is supplied with 4 VU
meters and 4 line amplifiers. (740 -0202000. )
M90 -4MFS FOUR CHANNEL OUTPUT
MAIN FRAME (MAXIMUM 26 FADERS).
Same facilities as 4 channel output main
frame except it will accommodate 26
faders. Size: 491/2 inches wide, 321/2 inches
deep and 291/2 inches high (floor to padded arm rest). (740- 0225 -000.)
M90 -8MF EIGHT CHANNEL OUTPUT
MAIN FRAME (MAXIMUM 24 FADERS).
Main frame for 8 channel output console.
Accommodates up to 24 faders (mono,
stereo or combinations). Includes master
faders, 2 talkback modules (TB), 2 master
foldcontrol modules (MC4 and MC8),
back master control module (FBM), 8 VU
meters, and 11 line amplifiers (A30). Frame
will house up to 18 line amplifiers. Size:
491/2 inches wide, 321/2 inches deep and
291 inches high (floor to padded arm
rest). (740- 0226 -000.)
1
put modules (with or without equalization)
and switching modules.
M90 -A1A LINEAR MOTION MONO
M90 -A2
LINEAR
MOTION
FADER. Some as mono
stereo. (740- 0216 -000.)
STEREO
fader, except
ASSIGN
M90 -8SPF8
EIGHT CHANNEL BUSS
AND PAN MODULE WITH
FOLDBACK 2 MIX. Performs some function as M90 -SPF4 module, but for use with
ASSIGN
8
channel output console. (740- 0230 -000.)
M90 -SSM4 STEREO SWITCHING /BUSS
ASSIGN
MODULE -FOUR
CHANNEL.
Used with 4 channel output models only.
Assigns left and right output from stereo input module (SIM) to output busses. (740-
0211-000.)
SECTION EQUALIZER. Plug -in mono input module for use in any main frame. OnOff switch with LED indicator. Automatic
muting. Two inputs, mic or line, selected by
mic
interlocked pushbutton; supplied for
and line input, but can be easily strapped
for 2 mic and 2 line. Gain trim accommodates inputs from -70 to +20 dBm;
patch points; switchable High Pass and Low
Pass filters independent of equalizers. Solo
selected by latching type pushbutton with
LED indicated for "Cue" or "Preview", with
option for pre -equalizer, pre -fader or post equalizer, post -fader operation. Three section equalizer -each section fully adjustable and each individually selected by
latching pushbutton, and two echo send
controls for assigning an adjustable portion of the module output to either one or
both of two "Echo" or effects busses. (7400206 -000.)
3
1
1
M90 -IM INPUT MODULE (NO
EQUALIZER). Some as M90 -IME module,
but less the 3 section equalizer. (740 -0207000. )
M90 -SIM STEREO LINE LEVEL INPUT
MODULE (NO EQUALIZER). Accepts left
and right inputs at line level. Has module
On -Off switch with LED indicator and
provides SOLO feed as a combination of L
and R. (740- 0208 -000.)
M90 -SPF4 FOUR CHANNEL BUSS AND
PAN
MODULE WITH FOLDBACK #2.
with
4 channel output models only.
Used
Provides method of assigning output from
mono input module (IME and IM) to any
one or all of the four output busses. Also
contains PAN pot and foldback On -Off
switch and foldback level control. (7400210 -000.
)
256
www.americanradiohistory.com
M90 -SSM2
STEREO SWITCHING
MODULE -TWO CHANNEL. Some function as M90 -SSM4 module, but used only
with 2 channel output models. (740 -0214000. )
MONITORING MODULES
Ten
different monitoring modules are
available, offering relatively simple to very
extensive monitoring for both loudspeakers
and headsets.
M90 -CRM CONTROL ROOM MONITOR
MODULE. This is a basic monitor select and
control module for 2 and 4 channel output
consoles. Facilities include: mono or stereo
operation; monitor level control; separate
pushbutton switches for on -off operation of
left and right control room speakers; 8
position interlocked pushbutton switch
providing monitor inputs from 4 channel
mix, 2 channel program, 2 track tape,
mono program, mono tape, sum (L +R),
foldback and auxiliary; LED indicators for
control room mic and SOLO and SOLO
buss level control. (740- 0203 -000.)
M90 -8CRM
CONTROL
MONITOR MODULE FOR
ROOM
CHANNEL
OUTPUT CONSOLE. Some operation as
M90 -CRM module, but used only with 8
channel output console. (740- 0227 -000.)
M90 -SM STUDIO MONITOR MODULE.
Used with 2 and 4 channel output consoles.
Provides the source for left and right studio
monitoring speakers. Facilities include:
level controls for monitor, talkback and
foldback; talkback microphone; LED warning light for live studio microphone; manual pushbutton switch for studio muting
with LED indicator and 6 position pushbutton switch for feeding studio monitor from:
control room monitor, 2 track tape, mono
tape, foldback and 2 and an auxiliary input. (740- 0204 -000.)
1
8
1
M90 CONSOLE
MAIN FRAME
32 50
(82.55cm)
5
(125.73cm)
..
(For 2 and 4 output
modules, width
0010 10{{ -
(13.79cm)
1281
(32 54cm)
r
SMiLyBBG MN FOLDBAGt
29 50
(74.93cm)
2
[yy
MOILS
js
r
M 4IMDDMLS
1
m
7
2212
:
(56.18cm
jc
kt4MOSS
no
g
M
e
!
{{
!!
á
I
-TOP VIEW-
-SIDE VIEW-
M90 -8SM
STUDIO
MONITOR
MOD -
M90- 8FB1 /16 FOLDBACK
1
MIX
ULE-8 CHANNEL.
MODULE.
(740- 0232 -000.)
000.)
M90 -8MM8 MONITOR MIX MODULE.
M90 -HPC STEREO HEADPHONE CON-
(740- 0233 -000.)
TROL MODULE. Contains headphone level
control and 6 position pushbutton switches,
permitting headphone monitoring of: control room monitor, SOLO, foldback and
2, and auxiliary inputs. (740. 0218 -000.)
M90 -8MM16 MONITOR MIX MODULE.
Provides same functions as M90 -SM module, but used only
with 8 channel output console. (740-0228-
1
M90 -FM4 FOUR CHANNEL FOLDBACK
#1 AND MONITOR MIX MODULE. This
module is employed mainly in overdub
recording where it is necessary to feed the
performer a foldback mix from up to four
sources at a different mix ratio than the
control room operator. (740- 0217 -000.)
M90- 8FB1 /8 FOLDBACK
MODULE.
(740- 0231 -000.)
1
MIX
(740- 0234 -000.)
four modules above perform the same
function as the M90-FM4, but apply to 8
channel output operation.
The
SPECIAL PURPOSE MODULES
M90 -TO
OSCILLATOR MOD OUTPUT. This
module provides 8 fixed frequency sine
waves from 50 Hz to 15 kHz for level setting plus a pushbutton operated 30 Hz
slate tone. The output may be directed by
TEST
ULE-2/4 CHANNEL
pushbutton switches to any one or all of the
mixing busses. (740-0220-000.)
OSCILLATOR MOD OUTPUT. Performs
same function as M90-TO module, but
applies to 8 channel output operation.
(740- 0235 -000.)
M90 -8TO
TEST
ULE-8 CHANNEL
M90 -ERM ECHO RETURN ASSIGN
MODULE PROGRAM AND MON-
ITOR-2/4 CHANNEL
OUTPUT. This
module allows the assignment of the echo
return (delayed audio, reverb or special
effects) to any one or all of the mixing
busses. Echo return may also be directed
only to the monitor circuit. Echo master
gain control and pan control is also included. (740-0205-000.)
M90 -8ERM ECHO RETURN ASSIGN
MODULE PROGRAM AND MON-
ITOR-8 CHANNEL
OUTPUT. Performs
same function as M90 -ERM module, but
applies to 8 channel output operation.
(740- 0229.000.)
257
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS' M90 MODULAR AUDIO
03
\
N
SCr
O
P
ORDER NO.
740-0201 -000
740 -0305 -000
740 -0202 -000
740 -0306 -000
740 -0225 -000
740 -0307 -000
740 -0226 -000
740 -0308 -000
740 -0213 -000
740 -0214 -000
740 -0210 -000
740 -021 -000
740 -0203 -000
740 -0204 -000
740 -0205 -000
740 -0206 -000
740 -0207 -000
740 -0208 -000
740 -0215 -000
740 -0216 -000
740 -0217 -000
740 -0218 -000
740 -0219 -000
740 -0220 -000
740 -0310 -000
740 -0236 -000
740 -0227 -000
740 -0228 -000
740 -0229 -000
740 -0230 -000
1
TYPE NO.
M90-2MF
M90-2MFX
M90-4MF
M90-4MFX
M90-4MFS
M90-4MFSX
M90-8-MF
M90-8MFX
M90-SPF2
M90-SSM2
M90-SPF4
M90-SSM4
M90-C RM
M90-SM
M90-ERM
M90-1 ME
M90-1M
M90-SI M
M90-Al A
M90-A2
M90-FM4
M90-HPC
M90-A30
'
43
.7
N
\ N\
\
tt CO
03
O
O
O
O.
O
O
DESCRIPTION
'
Channel Output Main Frame
2 Channel Output Main Frame with XRL Connectors
4 Channel Output Main Frame (18 input pos. max.) *'
4 Channel Output Main Frame (18 Pos.) with XLR Connectors
4 Channel Output Main Frame (26 input pos. max.) *'
4 Channel Output Main Frame (26 Pos.) with XLR Connectors
*2
8 Channel Output Main Frame *',
*2
8 Channel Output Main Frame with XLR Connectors *',
2 Channel Buss Assign & Pan Module w /Foldback #2
Channel
Stereo Switching Module
4 Channel Buss Assign & Pan Module w /Foldback #2
Channel
Stereo Switching /Buss Assign Module
Control Room Monitor Module *3
Studio Monitor Module *3
Echo Return Assign Module Pgm & Monitor
Input Module with 3 Section Equalizer
Input Module -No Equalizer
Stereo Line Level Input Module -No Equalizer
Linear Motion Mono Fader"
Linear Motion Stereo Fader
4 Channel Foldback #1 & Monitor Mix Module
Stereo Headphone Control Module
Plug -in Line Output Amplifier Card
2
'
'
J
J
-2
J
J
-4
'
Oscillator Module
Talkback /Slate Switch Module
M90-TO
M90-TBS
Test
M90-B
M90-8-CRM
M90-8-SM
M90-8-ERM
M90-8-SPF8
Input Position Blank Panel Kit *5
Control Room Monitor Module *3
Studio Monitor Module *'
Echo Return Assign Module Pgm & Monitor *'
8 Channel Buss Assign & Pan Module w /Foldback
NOTES
*'Each main frame includes floor stand, housing, external power supply with
phantom (48V) microphone power, master control module talkback switch,
program line amplifiers, master faders, VU meters, logic circuits; completely
wired for maximum number of inputs.
'Includes M90 30 /MS Power Supply, eleven A30 Line Amp. Cards, MC4 &
MC8 Master Control Modules and FBM Foldback Master Control Module.
258
www.americanradiohistory.com
J
J
J
J
J
2
Mix
CONSOLE ORDERING INFORMATION
co
d
ORDER NO.
o
740-0323-000
740- 0309 -000
740- 0231 -000
740- 0232 -000
740- 0233 -000
740- 0234 -000
740 -0235 -000
740 -0237 -000
740 -0313 -000
740-0314 -000
740 -0238 -000
740-0239 -000
740-0241 -000
740 -0242 -000
740-0243 -000
740 -0263 -000
740 -0264 -000
740 -0265 -000
740-0315 -000
740 -0316 -000
740-0317-000
740 -0318 -000
740 -0311 -000
740 -0312 -000
740 -0319 -000
740 -0320 -000
740-0321 -000
740 -0322 -000
250- 0288 -000
TYPE NO.
,o
C44
c4
'Cr
CO
d
d
DESCRIPTION
M90 -8 -HPC
8 Channel Stereo Headset Control Module
M90 -8 -SSM
8 Channel Stereo Buss Assign Module
Foldback Mix Module (Ch. thru 8)
M90- 8 -FB1 /8
Foldback Mix Module (Ch. 9 thru 16)
M90- 8- FB1 /16
Monitor Mix Module (Ch. thru 8)
M90 -8 -MM8
Monitor Mix Module (Ch. 9 thru 16)
M90- 8 -MM16
Test Oscillator Module
M90 -8 -TO
Extra VU Meter Installed When Console Built
M90 -VU
VU Meter w /Buffer Amp. Installed at time of manufacture
M90 -VUB
VU Meter w /Peak Indicator Installed at time of manufacture
M90 -VUP
Tape Transport Remote Control
M90 -TRC
Plug -in Patch Bay -Inc. Desk Top Cabinet
M90 -PB
6" Extender Module
M90 -EX6
9" Extender Module
M90 -EX9
M90 -30 -MS
Spare Power Supply (1 15 or 230 Volt)
Digital Clock Mounted in Console
M90 -DC
M90 -DT
Digital Timer Mounted in Console
Cue Speaker and Amplifier Mounted in Console
M90 -QS
4 Pos. Input Selector Module - Mono
M90 -15AM
4 Pos. Input Selector - Mono - Mounted in Tray
M90 -154TM
4 Pos. Input Selector Module - Stereo
M90 -15AS
4 Pos. Input Selector - Stereo - Mounted in Tray
M90 -154TS
2 Channel Transformer Isolated Plug -in Amp. - Line Level
M90 -ABP2T
2 Channel Transformer Isolated Plug -in Amp. - Mic Level
M90 -AMP -2
4 Channel to Mono Mix Down Module
M90 -OMM
4 Channel Program Output On /off Switch Module
M90 -5 -PS
4 Channel Program Output Solo Module
M90 -PSM
M90 -BMS
8 Channel Mono Mix Down Module
Patch Cord for use with M90 -PB patch bay. Switchcraft "Tini- telephone"
ft. long, 2 conductor shielded with tip -ring
patch cord type TT -/742;
sleeve plug, Type TT -253, on each end.
1
1
1
1
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
V
V
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
V
J
J
J
V
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
V
V
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
1
NOTES
*'Requires one Model M90 -A30 Line Amp. for each of 2 Outputs. If only
Mono Monitoring is used, one Model M90 -A30 is sufficient.
*'Requires one Model M90 -A30 as Line Amp.
*'One Blank Kit required for each unused input position.
"Must be used with Model M90 -SIM Stereo Input Module.
259
www.americanradiohistory.com
ECHO RETURN
ERM
O
RETURN
CH A
ECHO
ECHO RETURN CHANNELS RE
DESIGNED FOR HPUT LEVEL 0E
NOTE
-10E.M
ECHO RETURN
CH B
MODULE
TO.I5M
v
ECHO
O
.uureu:
INPUTS
MIC
OF
K
ez Now
.euPOSITIONS
IME
E
INPUT MODULE
LINE
SOLO
I1
SEND
OUTPUTS
AN.
ECHO A
SEND
][
A30
ECHO'S SENO
NO
NE
ECNO
B
O SEBD
L
A-30
MIC 2
..
I
-0
IME
LINE 2
OUTPUT
STTUS
RELAY
CHI
AMC
3
IME
LINE 3
PGM OUT
=MI
_0
GNG
MASTER
MG
I°
PGM OUT
ADER
CH 2
PGM OUT
ANC
IME
LINE 4
-O
1
MASTER
CONTROL
MODULE
AMC
our
vc"M
5
IME
TR. TAPE
I.
LINE 5
I
ONN
Ss
O
MIC 6
LINE 6
O
TOR PATCH
POINTS
k
EMR EOC
CH 4
PGM OUT
-
AJO
IME
SUMILR)
PGM OUT
FM4
MIC 7
LIE
$GEREUT
SP-4
IME
7
MIC 8
IME
LINE 8
_.!
FBI
O OUT
4 CHANNEL
FOLDBACR MON
MIX MODULE
1
SP -4
AIL.,
CH M
-0
LEFT
CONTROL RH
-0
RIGHT
CONTROL RM
MON OUT
OU
L
LCH PAM
MON OUT
2raTPE CRM
PON
SUMILrRI
SEE
2
MP
NITOR PA
POINTS
TAPEIL.RI
ONO
NOTE
3C
,
l
(NOTE SI
I
30
T
CON. RM MONITOR
MIC IS
LINE IS
SEE NOTE 2
OPTIONAL
MODULE
IME
SP -4
P
-
--_-0
FOU$
-
2
T
SO
MIC 16
IME
LINE 16
SP-4
1111
ONO
IME
iIII
SP-4
IME
LINE IS
SP-4
JIII
M90 SIGNAL FLOW DIAGRAM
MONO /STEREO OR DISCRETE
TEST
OSCILLATOR
4
SR)
31
RIGHT
STUDIO
MON. OUT
E
STUDIO MONITOR
MCpULE
ïlI
HIC 18
TPE(I
(NOTE
UR
ALN
TAPE
2 TR%
17
LINE I7
STUDIO
MON. OUT
E.I
POINTS
MIC
LEFT
CR MON
MONO TAPE
MONITOR PATCH
F
.2
MON
(NOTE SI
9
Aux
MONITOR
INPUTS
ii;
20-.. -
NPC
HEADPHONE
1
MODULE
4- CHANNEL OUTPUT
JaK-2.5M-1278
Tr
CONTROL
MODULE
'
uSTEREO
,.
20E.M
HPHONE
Y
O
TEST
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
ADV. 516A PTD. IN U.S.A.
260
www.americanradiohistory.com
Program stereo output, Audition stereo output, plus selectable PGM or AUD sum channel
HARRIS
Simple stereo bus assign pushbutton switches
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCESSINO
Monitor selector switches for typical broadcast functions
(PGM, AUD, AIR, etc.)
Multiple studio speaker muting
M90
Available with 18 or 26 input channels
Incorporates most of the features of the M90 two, four and
eight output channel consoles
Modular Audio
On -Air
M90 ON -AIR audio console is an extremely versatile,
highly flexible dual stereo modular unit with a selectable sum
channel output. The console is available with an 18 or 26 input
mainframe to mount the plug -in modules required for your operation. Except for the output bus switching and monitoring modules,
most of the standard M90 modules can be installed in your M90
ON -AIR console to customize your board to your exact requireThe Harris
Console
ments.
i; i
11
í
II
1,
i-
;A-
www.americanradiohistory.com
Designed specifically for on -air use, the
modules described below feature simplified
switching and ease of operation. The additional modules needed to complete your onair console configuration are covered in our
eight -page M90 Modular Audio Control Con-
tuated by a switch located on the extreme
right panel in the fader row. An external
talkback microphone may be used if desired.
A studio speaker feed ON /OFF switch and
LED indicator provide additional operator
control. In addition to the studio monitor level
control, there are talkback level controls for
studio speakers and foldback -1.
sole brochure.
talkback feeds into the left studio
speaker with appropriate muting control.
Foldback -1 is seldom used in an air board, but
the feed is available for any special requirement. The Mix A and Mix B outputs may be
used for any special requirements as well.
They are available from mono input channels
only.
The studio
Suo
?
Por
1
suo
-s
Par
d
uo
1
..
aboo
o
p
. ..
M90-MS4B
M90-HPCB
M90 -CRMB Module and the control room
speaker muting. The second cue position permits normal control room monitoring. Mix A
and Mix B are feeds from the optional line
amps in the Echo Send A and
M90-SS4B
M90-SSP4B
M90 -SS4B PGM /AUD Bus Assign
Module is used in stereo input channels with
The
associated M90 -SIM Input and M90 -A2A
Fader Modules. These three units are required
for each stereo input channel. An engaged
switch button will release when the other one is
actuated on the M90 -SS4B Module.
M90 -HPCB Headphone Control
The
Module
has a 6- position input selector with a
unique feature on the top pushbutton. This
pushbutton interrupts the cue feed into the
AKlc
-
1
circuits.
The M90 -CRMB Control Room Monitor
Module has the input selectable to console
output channels, air feed, network feed and
an auxiliary input. Other facilities include:
mono or stereo operation; monitor level control; and separate pushbutton switches for onoff operation of left and right control room
speakers.
-
The M90 -SSP4B PGM /AUD /PAN Bus Assign Module is similar to the M90 -554B
Module except for the pan pot. This is used to
feed a mono input to the stereo output busses,
panning the signal from stereo left to center to
stereo right. An associated M90 -IME or M90IM Input and M90 -A1A Fader Module completes a mono input channel.
The M90 -MS4B Master Control Module
cortoins recessed screwdriver adjustable
program and audition stereo controls (individual left and right), a pushbutton selector
to feed the sum channel from the program or
audition outputs, and the sum gain control.
The screwdriver pots provide for initial setup
and discourage operator changes. The Mono
PGM, or sum gain control, can be adjusted by
the operator for center buildup and other summing problems.
B
Other optional items such as the digital timer,
digital clock, cue amplifier and speaker can
be obtained in the M90 ON -AIR Console. The
cue function in this board replaces the solo
function in the other M90 consoles, and the input and monitoring modules have the function
designated as "cue" on the module panels.
There is no reason to add the cue amplifier
and speaker to the M90 consoles unless a different quality of sound is desired for cue than
that obtained from the control room monitor
speaker. The cue circuits are connected into
the left control room speaker in boards
without the cue amplifier.
A studio muting card is
available for any of
the M90 consoles with two individual muting
relay driver circuits for external relays. 24 -volt
power for the relays is taken from the M90
power supply. Several M90 -125M Remote
Studio Muting Cards may be mounted in the
M90 cabinet with the relay coil connections
appearing on rear panel plugs.
-I1
very logical placement of the M90
modules, and the controls on the modules,
make this board comfortable for the operator
almost immediately after he sees it for the first
time. Yet it has all the versatility and flexibility
found on highly complicated looking boards.
11
Improve your operation with an M90 ON -AIR
Console!
The
.1
ORDERING INFORMATION
Order No.
Description
740 -0326 -000 M90 -4MFB Mainframe, 5
VU
meters, 18 input channels
740 -0336 -000
M90 -4MFSB
Mainframe,
5
VU meters, 26 input channels
740 -0327 -000
740- 0328 -000
M90-CRMB
M90-SMB
The M90 -SMB Studio Monitor Module has
all but Mix A and Mix 8 inputs appearing on
the M90 -CRMB Module. It contains a high
quality studio talkback microphone that is ac-
5M.979
740 -0329 -000
740 -0331 -000
740 -0332 -000
740- 0333 -000
740 -0330 -000
M90 -MS4B Module
M90 -5548 Module
M90 -SSP4B Module
M90 -CRMB Module
M90 -SMB Module
M90 -HPCB Module
M90 -RSM Card
ADV. 545 PTO. IN U.S.A.
262
www.americanradiohistory.com
10
full- stereo mixing channels
29 inputs to the mixers
HARRIS
All solid -state plug -in amplifiers
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCE SSINC
Low distortion
Excellent frequency response
Provision for plug -in sum channel amplifier
EXECUTIVE
10- Channel
Stereo
Audio Control
Console
The Executive is one of the most versatile audio consoles available today, offering 29 inputs into 10 full stereo mixing channels. This highest -quality console
offers excellent audio performance, and has built a
solid reputation for long -term reliability. In addition, the
board layout has been "human engineered" to provide
great operating convenience.
MIXING SYSTEM: This ten -channel stereo mixer
utilizes low impedance ladder type controls in a parallel, minimum loss type, mixing circuit.
MICROPHONE CHANNELS: Three microphone channels can be individually switched from the front panel to
either full stereo operation or fully isolated monophonic
feed from one microphone into the stereo mixer. There
are two separate preamplifiers in each of the three
microphone channels, operated in parallel for stereo
use. The second preamplifier is bridged off the first
when a single microphone is used to feed the stereo
program, simplifying disc jockey, control room or news
room microphone insertions.
263
www.americanradiohistory.com
Microphone transfer switches are
located immediately above the
microphone mixing channels for instantaneous changes in programming requirements. A second switch
for each microphone channel allows
the selection of two sets of stereo
microphones into each of the three
channels. This permits the use of six
sets of stereo microphones without
patching.
TURNTABLE CHANNELS: Channels
4 and 5 have switching to accommodate four turntables into either
channel in any sequence. A cue
position on these two channels permits cueing in the channel not in use.
TAPE CHANNELS: Channels 6 and 7
have switching to accommodate four
tape machines into either channel in
any sequence. There is a cue position on channels 6 and 7 to permit
previewing and cueing of all
recorder material before feeding
the transmitter.
it
to
ride, remote talk -back, studio intercom, turntable cueing, tape cueing
and general previewing and cueing
on all but the microphone channels.
The control room and studio speakers are muted by the channel keys
and muting relays when there is a
live microphone in any of these locations.
The cue signals from channels 4
through 10 are fed into the cue intercom amplifier regardless of the
position of the cue selector switch.
PROGRAM SWITCHING FUNCTIONS: One front panel switch
changes the master operation of the
Executive console from stereo to
simultaneous or separate operation,
as desired by the operator. Stereo
program busses and stereo audition
busses are designated: "Program
Left," "Program Right," "Audition
Left," and "Audition Right." The
"Program Left" bus is permanently
connected to the "Master Left" channel.
REMOTE CHANNEL: Four remote
lines are switched into channel 8
when mixed into either stereo or
monophonic programming. The
stereo mixer in channel 8 has a splitting pad on the input to permit
feeding a monophonic source to
both sides of the stereo mixer.
NETWORK CHANNEL: Channel 9 is
the network channel. It is also a
stereo mixer with a splitting pad on
the input, since most network
facilities are monophonic at the present time. Should this condition
change, you simply remove the splitting pad and the full stereo facilities
are restored. An occasional stereo
network program could be patched
into one of the stereo channels. A
cue position permits previewing the
network, then smoothly fading it into
the program channel.
AUXILIARY CHANNEL: Channel 10
is the auxiliary channel, with two
isolation transformers on the input of
the stereo mixer to prevent any interaction or grounding problems
with almost any input source.
In the STEREO position, the input of
the "Master Right" channel is connected directly to the "Program
Right" bus. Thus, each half of the
dual attenuators feed through a
program amplifier to the stereo output line.
the optional program amplifier is
used during stereo programming, its
input is bridged across the output of
both the "Master Left" and "Master
Right" channels. The output of the
optional amplifier is then equal to
L R, the compatible stereo signal,
and may be used to feed an AM
If
+
tramsitter.
the SIMULTANEOUS position, the
input of the "Master Right" channel
is bridged off the output of the
"Master Left" channel. This allows
simultaneous programming of an
AM and FM transmitter. If the optional program amplifier is used, its
input can also bridge the output of
the "Master Left" channel for
simultaneous feed.
separate programming may be fed
to the AM and FM transmitters.
The left hand VU meter is connected
to the output of the "Master Left"
channel at all times. This is the "Left"
channel in stereo programming. The
right hand meter can also be
switched to the output of the "Master
Left" channel for a calibration check.
It may also be switched to the output
of the "Master Right" channel for
stereo metering. In addition, it may
be switched to the output of the optional program amplifier to check the
level of the compatible stereo, or
separate programming, to the AM
transmitter. The next position on this
switch connects the meter to the
network feed to check the level of
the network at any time. The last
position is for external measurements.
STEREO MONITORING AMPLIFIERS: Two 8 watt amplifiers are built
in the Executive for complete stereo
monitoring. An input switch on the
stereo monitoring amplifiers permits
them to be connected to the output
of the master channels, the output of
the audition bus booster amplifiers,
or to an external stereo input. Two
sets of muting contacts on each
relay permit muting of the stereo
speakers -in the control room and
the studios. These relays are completely encased, and plug -in for
complete
reliability
and
maintenance.
TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIERS: The Executive stereo console is completely
transistorized. All amplifiers are
plug -in type, with the exception of
the stereo monitor amplifiers. The
standard amplifier complement consists of:
In
preamplifiers (3 pairs for stereo)
booster amplifiers (1 pair for
stereo)
2 program amplifiers (1 pair for
stereo)
2 monitor amplifiers (1 pair for
stereo)
cue -intercom amplifier
6
2
1
addition, there is the regulated
In
the SEPARATE position, the input
of the "Master Right" channel for the
In
CUE -INTERCOM SYSTEM: The cue -
intercom system provides flawless
network monitoring, remote over-
optional program amplifier is connected to the "Audition Left" bus, so
transistorized power supply and
provisions for a third compatible
program amplifier.
264
www.americanradiohistory.com
EXECUTIVE CONSOLE
www.americanradiohistory.com
EXECUTIVE SPECIFICATIONS
MIXING CHANNELS:
10 Full
stereophonic each with stereo low impedance ladder at-
ten uator.
INPUTS:
12 Stereo microphones to 6 preamps.
9 Stereo turntables. tape and projector inputs into
4 Remotes into 1 stereo mixer.
1
3
5
stereo mixers.
Individual stereo network channel.
Stereo monitor inputs.
OUTPUTS:
3 Program lines:
2 Stereo program
lines- simultaneous or stereo.
Monophonic compatible or independent program line.
Stereo muted monitor outputs.
Stereo unmuted monitor outputs.
Stereo recording outputs.
or more Stereo speaker outputs.
Interlocked studio intercom outputs.
Headphone outputs.
1
8
2
4
10
2
2
AMPLIFIERS:
10 Plug -in transistor preamplifiers.
6 microphone preamplifiers.
2 Optional microphone preamplifiers (where ordered).
2 Booster amplifiers.
3 Plug -in transistor program amplifiers.
2 Program amplifiers feeding stereo /simultaneous outputs.
Optional compatible or independent.
1
Plug -in transistor cue /intercom amplifier.
2 Full level transistor monitor amplifiers with ganged level controls.
1
POWER SUPPLY:
1
Full regulated, electronically protected transistor power supply.
GAIN:
Microphone to program line: 102 dB 2 dB, Turntable /tape /projector /remote to program line: 56 dB, 2 dB.
Turntable /tape /projector /remote to speaker output: 70 dB.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
(Typical) +1.5 dB from 20 to
- 1.0 dB from 30 to 15,000
(Typical) 2 2.0 dB from 20 to
1.5 dB from 30 to 15,000
20,000 Hz in all regular program circuits.
Hz in all regular program circuits.
20,000 Hz in all monitor speaker circuits.
Hz in all monitoring speaker circuits.
HARMONIC DISTORTION:
(Typical) 0.5% Maximum, 20 to 20,000 Hz at +8 dBm output in all
regular program circuits.
0.5 % maximum, 30 to 15,000 Hz at +8 dBm output in all regular
program circuits.
0.5/ maximum, 50 to 15,000 Hz at +18 dBm output in all regular
program circuits.
(Typical) 1.0% Maximum, 20 to 20,000 Hz at 4-38 dBm in all monitor
speaker circuits.
1.0% maximum, 50 to 15,000 Hz at +39 dBm (8 watts) in speaker outputs.
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION:
(Typical) 0.5% maximum, 20 to 20,000 Hz at +8 dBm output in all
regular program circuits.
0.5% maximum, 30 to 15,000 Hz at +8 dBm output in all regular
program circuits.
(Typical) 0.5% maximum, 20 to 20,000 Hz at +18 dBm output in all
regular program circuits.
0.5% maximum, 30 to 15,000 Hz at +18 dBm output in all regular
program circuits.
(Typical) 1.0% maximum, 20 to 20,000 Hz at +38 dBm in all monitor
speaker circuits.
1.0% maximum. 50 to 15,000 Hz at +39 dBm (8 watts) in all monitor
speaker circuits.
SOURCE IMPEDANCE:
Microphones -30/50 or 150/250 ohms.
Turntable/ tape /projector /remote/network -600 ohms.
LOAD IMPEDANCE:
All program lines -600 ohms.
Speaker outputs -4 to 16 ohms.
Recording outputs -600 ohms.
NOISE:
-122 dBm equivalent input noise- microphone to program line.
CROSSTALK:
Below noise level in all channels.
STEREO ISOLATION:
Below noise level in all channels.
TRANSISTOR COMPLEMENT:
10 Industrial type totaling 76.
POWER CONSUMPTION:
Approximately 50 watts at 110/117/125 volts, 50/60 Hz.
SIZE 8 WEIGHT:
531/2" long, 11'/z" high and 17'/2" deep. 107 lbs. net wt., 220 lbs.
domestic, 270 lbs. export, 27 cu. ft.
FINISH:
Satin anodized black nomenclature on natural anodized aluminum
background panels, white cabinet, blue trim.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Executive 10- channel transistor stereo audio control console, complete with 2
monitor amplifiers, 6 preamplifiers, 2 booster amplifiers, cue -intercom amplifier,
2 program amplifiers and power supply
Optional preamplifier
Optional program amplifier
Speaker matching transformer
Optional 3rd VU meter
Intercom sub-station
994 -6158 -002
994 -6034 -001
994 -5700 -003
478 -0291 -000
994 -6208 -001
994- 6424 -001
ADV. 107F PTD. IN U.S.A.
JK-1 5M-180
266
www.americanradiohistory.com
STEREO 80
8- Channel
o
Mal
Audio Control
HARRIS
Console
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
www.americanradiohistory.com
AÌ HARRIS
WCOMMUNICAY,ON ANO
114IOM UNIC TION ANA
STEREO 80
Eight Channel Stereophonic
Transistor Audio Console
FEATURES
Each of these stereo channels may select from two
different pairs of input signals by means of a
front -panel switch.
Eight stereo mixing channels
Eighteen inputs to the mixers
Channel 3 is also equipped with low -noise
preamplifiers, and is also intended for use with
low- impedance, broadcast type microphones. This
channel has a stereo input and is assigned to the
control room since these microphones function as
part of the talkback system.
High program output capability
Interchangeable cue, monitor
program amplifiers
and
Cue amplifier and speaker built in
All solid state plug -in amplifiers
Talkback to and from two studios and
remote lines, built in
Excellent frequency response and low
distortion
Audition output for recording
Channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 are all medium level inputs
and may be used with stereo turntable preamplifiers,
reel -to -reel tape, or cartridge machines. All channels
have input transformers whose center taps may or
may not be grounded, depending upon the given
installation. They are shipped with the center taps
ungrounded. A nominal level of -20 dBm or +4
dBm at 600 ohms is required. Input pads for the +4
dBm are provided on the various tape inputs.
Concealed master gain controls
Harris' Stereo 80 is designed for the FM stereo
broadcaster who is looking for great flexibility and
superb audio quality. The console features a wide
choice of inputs and such outstanding performance
specifications as: frequency response, 20 to 20,000
Hz with less than 1 dB variation; and distortion less
than 0.5% at all frequencies.
INPUTS: Eighteen inputs may be switched into
eight stereo mixing channels to provide a degree of
flexibility that will satisfy virtually any stereo
requirement. Inputs include five microphones, four
turntables, five tapes (cartridge or reel -to- reel), three
remotes and network.
MIXING CHANNELS: Channels 1 and 2 are equipped
with low -noise preamplifiers, and are to be used
with low- impedance, broadcast -type microphones.
Channel 8 is specifically designed to function with
network and remote lines as sources. Various
combinations of preview, talkback, and program cue
are possible using the front panel switches. A
nominal input of at least -20 dBm at 600 ohms is
required for remotes and -14 dBm for the network.
All eight channels may be switched to either the
program or audition positions to permit independent
recording and monitoring of any of the incoming
sources without disturbing programming. Channels
4 through 8 have a cue position associated with the
channel attenuator which provides signal to the
amplified cue system. This signal can be monitored
by an internal speaker or external headphones. On
Channels 1 and 2, the center position of the program
audition key switch provides a microphone cue
signal to the cue selector switch. On Channel 3 this
position is used with the control room microphones
for talkback.
268
www.americanradiohistory.com
SPEAKER MUTING:A protective system of warning
lights and relay speaker muting is provided to
prevent acoustic feedback and broadcasting of cue
signal when "live" microphones are nearby.
Program, cueing and monitor amplifiers all have the
same electrical design and construction, and are
interchangeable. As a result, two backup program
amplifiers are provided as part of the console.
AMPLIFIERS: Each solid -state plug -in amplifier is
mounted on a separate printed circuit board, which
in turn mounts in a card -rack holder. These modules
are as follows: six preamplifier modules, five
booster amplifier modules, five output amplifier
modules and one power supply regulator panel.
Silicon transistors are used to assure the meeting of
performance specifications and assure optimum
console operation over a wide ambient temperature
range. All amplifiers are completely accessible when
the top of the console is opened, simplifying
maintenance.
HIGH LEVEL, HIGH FIDELITY OUTPUT: The
dynamic range of the preamplifiers will accommodate microphone levels to -17 dBm without
overload or distortion. The program amplifiers
deliver +32 dBm output and the monitor amplifiers
+40 dBm, all with wide frequency response, low
distortion and low noise.
STYLING:The Stereo 80 is handsomely styled with
satin anodized aluminum front panels, and white
Pebble -Tex cabinet. The modern design will complement any control room decor.
The hinged top of the Stereo 80 raises and the front panel lowers to provide
easy access to all console components. The plug -in modular components
are easily removed for service.
269
www.americanradiohistory.com
Litt WIWI
.t:
SIS
tw; aft
'
Olt
E
v
I MI ?WWII
10.
Siv
t.
ï S
'-;"ma
tt,
af
It
;n
,
vie
'
T
1
_
11 3
WI
-t
II
o
o
}
.10
° ffC. trat
on
:'IS .M
o..tIW.w°
.t.
°"11,
In
S 11
ISM
-::::::fl far.at
}=-o
}
CV"
a't:11,v,
^"
a.tlxl[
t::_
1
«
J
o
,.
IIS
04
Ö
00
-°.
I
.
°
t..,...,
_-°,
ó
011
W 10
FT
1
0
LS
o
to
1=.1. 1/1/00.:
1010
11[
as
IN,,
t
t
,,.
W t
n,
811
---
:i1
-
BLOCK DIAGRAM
RO CONSOLE
STEREO
4.444
Specifications
Operating Mode: Single output stereo programming with
audition positions.
Mixing Channels: Total -8. Three for microphones, two for
turntables, two for tapes and one for remote /network.
Input Circuits: Total -18. Five stereo pairs of microphones,
four turntables, two tape machines, three cartridge tape
machines, three remote lines and one mono network.
Amplifiers and Power Supplies Provided: Six preamplifiers,
five boosters, five output modules -program, monitor and
cue (interchangeable as supplied). One rack -mount power
supply panel.
Output Circuits: One stereo program output @ +8 VU, one
stereo audition output @ -26 VU, one monitor speaker pair
unmuted for lobby, three monitor speaker pairs muted, one
mono and one stereo headphone output.
Monitor Outputs: +40 dBm @ 8 ohm minimum load.
Multi- speaker operation should use high impedance
speakers (32 -45 ohm) or accessory speaker- matching
transformer (48/8 ohm) for minimum load of 8 ohms.
Gain: Microphone to line: 100 dB, ± 2 dB. Medium level to
line: 60 dB /36 dB, ± 2 dB.
Impedances: Microphones: 150/250 ohms balanced. Turntable /tape: 600 ohms balanced. Network /remote: 600
Ordering
Information
ohms balanced. Monitor output: 8 ohms nominal
unbalanced. Program output: 600/150 ohms balanced.
Audition output: 600 ohms built out.
Response: Program: ± 1.0 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Monitor:
1.0 dB, 30 Hz to 15 kHz.
Distortion: Program circuits: 0.5% maximum, 20 Hz to 20
kHz @ + 18 dBm. Monitor circuits: 1.0% maximum, 30 Hz
to 15 kHz @ +40 dBm (10 watts).
Noise: Program circuits: 75 dB below +18 dBm with -50
dBm input ( -125 dBm equivalent input noise. measured 20
Hz to 20 kHz). Medium level inputs: (program) 78 dB below
+18 dBm with -10 dBm input. Monitor circuits:
signal /noise = 78 dB below +40 dBm output.
Finish: Satin anodized aluminum panels with lettering in
black. Cabinet color.... white Pebble-Tex.
Power: 117/234 volts, 50/60 Hz, single -phase. Consumption:
120 watts, maximum.
Mechanical Size: (Console) 45" wide, 153/4" deep, 73/4" high.
Weight: 105 lbs. (Power supply panel)19" wide, 73/4" deep,
7" high. Weight: 21 lbs.
Shipping Data: Packed weight: domestic, 210 lbs.; export,
250 lbs. Cubage: 19 cubic feet.
Stereo 80 eight channel stereo console, complete with six preamplifiers; five boosters; five
program /monitor /cue output modules (interchangeable); and one power supply panel ..994- 6867 -001
478- 0291 -000
Speaker matching transformer
ADV. 355D PTD. IN U.S.A.
CP-3M-279
270
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCESSING
STEREO 5
Solid -State
5- Channel Stereo
Audio Control
Console
Thirteen inputs
channels
into
five
stereo
mixing
Compact size saves control room space
Quiet "push -on /push -off" input switches
Extensive use of integrated circuits
All solid state
... silicon
Great versatility at
a
transistors
modest price
Harris' Stereo 5 is a solid- state, stereophonic
audio control console that provides a high degree
of flexibility through the use of thirteen inputs
into five mixing channels. Although compact in
size, and economical in price, the Stereo 5 offers
facilities and performance specifications comparable to many larger, more expensive consoles.
271
www.americanradiohistory.com
In medium and smaller size FM
stereo stations, the Stereo 5 is
ideal as a main console. In larger
stations, the Stereo 5 will find
application as a production console, or may be used for independent programming from a
second facility.
MEDIUM LEVEL CHANNELS (3, 4
These three channels are
designed for medium level inputs
and may be used with turntables,
cartridge tape machines, or reel -toreel machines. Remote, network or
auxiliary sources may be assigned
to any of the nine medium level
& 5):
inputs.
VERSATILE INPUT SWITCHING:
Thirteen inputs can be switched
into the five mixing channels in a
manner to satisfy most stereo
programming requirements. These
inputs can include four stereo
microphone pairs, three stereo
turntables, three stereo cartridge
reproducers, one stereo reel -toreel reproducer, one network and
one auxiliary stereo source. The
thirteen front panel input switches
are of the "push -on / push -off" type
for quiet control room operation.
There are isolation transformers on
all program inputs and outputs.
MICROPHONE CHANNELS (1 &
2): These two channels are
equipped with low -noise preamplifiers for use with low- impedance,
broadcast -type microphones. Each
of these channels may select from
two different input signals by use
of front panel switches.
HARRIS
PROGRAM, AUDITION AND CUE
SELECTION: Any of the five
mixing channels may be switched
to the Program Channel or Audition to permit independent monitoring or recording of incoming
sources without disturbing programming. Channels 3, 4 and 5
also have cue positions, which
provide signal to the amplified cue
system. This signal can be monitored by an internal speaker or
external headphones. Switching is
by telephone -grade lever -type keys
that provide maxium durability and
master gain control, an internal
adjustment, is preset at the
factory to provide 16 dB of reserve
gain for the console, and is the
optimum setting for providing
adequate operating margins of
signal -to -noise and "headroom ".
The 4 -inch VU meters are standard volume indicators and are
used in conjunction with the
mixing channel attenuators to
establish a reference volume of
"0" VU, which is equivalent to an
output level of +8 dBm.
ADDITIONAL FACILITIES: A
three -position monitor selector
switches the monitoring amplifier
input to (1) program circuit, (2)
terminals for an external source,
and (3) audition circuit. Front panel
controls also include monitor gain
reliability.
and cue gain, and conventional
high impedance cue and program
headset jacks for stereophonic
headphones are provided.
PROGRAM CHANNELS: The left
and right program channels are
identical --each consisting of a
summing type booster amplifier,
audio output amplifier, VU meter,
and a master gain control. The
protective system of warning
lights and speaker muting is
included in the Stereo 5 to prevent
acoustic feedback and broadcasting of a cue signal when live
microphones are nearby.
OD
272
www.americanradiohistory.com
A
HARRIS
OD =.=.::::
273
www.americanradiohistory.com
STEREO 5 SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING
MODE:
Single- channel,
stereo-
phonic.
MIXING CHANNELS: Total -5. Two microphone
channels, three medium level (turntable, tape,
remote, network) channels. Cue positions on
medium level channel switches.
Total -13. Four microphone
INPUT CIRCUITS:
inputs, nine medium level (turntable, tape,
remote, network) inputs.
output: 60 dB, ± 3 dB. Medium level input to
monitor output: 80 dB, ±4 dB.
± 1 dB,
Program circuits:
±
1.5 dB,
30- 15,000 Hz. Monitor circuits:
RESPONSE:
30- 15,000 Hz.
DISTORTION: Program circuits: 0.5% maximum Lc ±8 dBm; 1.0% maximum @ +18
dBm output level, 30- 15,000 Hz. Monitor
circuits: 3.0% maximum aI 6 watts output
level (lobby output only).
Program circuits:
at least 70 dB below
OUTPUT CIRCUITS:
NOISE:
AMPLIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLY: Four preamplifiers, two program, one cue and two
monitor amplifiers. Self- contained power supply.
FINISH: Beige -gray Pebble-Tex cabinet, natural
aluminum front panel.
Total -5. Program, audition,
two muted monitor for control room and studio,
one unmuted monitor for lobby.
Microphones: 150/600 ohms,
IMPEDANCES:
balanced. Medium level: 150/600 ohms, balanced. Program output: 150/600 ohms, balanced. Audition output: 1,400 ohms maximum. Monitor outputs: 8 ohms nominal.
Audition and monitor outputs are unbalanced.
GAIN:
dB,
Microphone input to line output:
3 dB. Medium level input to
±
100
line
output with -50 dB input to mic
channels or -10 dBm input to medium level
channels. Monitor circuits: at least 70 dB below
6 watts output level with same input levels.
18 dBm
10 %, 50/60
117/234 volts,
single phase, 55 watts maximum.
POWER:
SIZE: 30 inches long,
inches deep (76.2 cm
WEIGHT:
44
81/2 inches
x 21.6 cm x
Hz,
high, 171/2
44.5 cm).
pounds (20 kg).
Packed weight, domestic, 54
pounds; export, 104 pounds (47.2 kg).
SHIPPING DATA:
ORDERING INFORMATION
Stereo 5, five -channel stereophonic audio console, complete with preamplifiers,
program amplifiers, cue amplifier, monitor amplifiers, and self- contained power
994 -7691 -001
supply
ADV. 439C PTD. IN U.S.A.
CP-2.5M-879
274
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION ANO
esoNMAOOoN
PPOOCKISINNO
Eight monaural mixing channels
Eighteen inputs to the mixers
Extremely low distortion
Interchangeable cue, monitor and program amplifiers
GATES WAY 80
All solid state plug -in amplifiers
Excellent frequency response
User serviceability
8- Channel
Solid -State
Audio Control
Console
The Gatesway 80 combines excellent audio, a wide choice of inputs, and operating ease in a unit which is attractively and
functionally styled.
This is a high -quality monophonic console which provides all
necessary studio functions and facilities for the typical AM, FM,
or TV station that broadcasts monophonic programs exclusively.
INPUTS. The flexibility of the Gatesway 80 is in its wide choice
of inputs. Eighteen inputs can be switched into eight mixing
channels. These include five microphones, four turntables, five
tapes (cartridge or reel -to- reel), three remotes and network.
MIXING CHANNELS. Channels and 2 are equipped with low noise preamplifiers, and are to be used with low- impedance,
broadcast -type microphones. Each of these channels may select
from two different input signals by means of a front -panel
1
switch.
275
www.americanradiohistory.com
WIDE CHOICE OF INPUTS, UNSURPASSED SOUND
SERVICEABILITY
Full service accessibility to the
Gatesway 80 is through the
hinged cabinet cover and panel. All plug -in modular components are easily removed for
service.
Channel 3 is equipped with a low -noise
preamplifier and is also intended for use
with a low- impedance, broadcast -type
microphone. This channel has a single
input and is assigned to the control room
since this microphone functions as part of
the talkback system.
Channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 are all medium level
inputs and may be used with turntable
preamplifiers, reel -to -reel tape, or cartridge machines. All channels have input
transformers whose center taps may or
may not be grounded, depending upon the
given installation. They are shipped with
the center taps ungrounded. A nominal
level of
20 dBm or + 4 dBm at 600
ohms is required. Input pads for the + 4
dBm are provided on the various tape
inputs.
-
8 is specifically designed to
function with network and remote lines as
sources. Various combinations of preview,
talkback, and program cue are possible
using the front panel switches. A nominal
20 dBm at 600 ohms is
input of at least
Channel
required.
-
All eight channels may be switched to
either the program or audition positions to
permit independent monitoring of any of
the incoming sources without disturbing
H.o.RRls
276
programming. Chanels 4 through 8 have a
cue position associated with the channel
attenuator which provides signal to the
amplified cue system. This signal can be
monitored by an internal speaker or
external headphones. On Channels 1 and
the center position of the program
audition key switch provides a microphone
cue signal to the cue selector switch. On
Channel 3 this position is used with the
control room microphone for talkback.
2,
booster amplifier modules, three output
amplifier modules and two power supply
regulator modules. High quality solid state devices are used to assure the
meeting of performance specifications and
assure optimum console operation over a
wide ambient temperature range. All
amplifiers are completely accessible when
the top of the console is opened,
simplifying maintenance.
SPEAKER MUTING. A protective system
of warning lights and relay speaker muting
is provided to prevent acoustic feedback
and broadcasting of cue signal when "live'
microphones are nearby.
INTERCHANGEABILITY. Program, cueing,
and monitor amplifiers all have the same
electrical design and construction, and are
completely interchangeable. As a result,
two backup program amplifiers are provided as part of the console.
UNSURPASSED AUDIO. Harris advanced
all solid state plug -in amplifiers are one of
the many reasons for the excellence of the
Gatesway 80. Audio response is excellent,
and distortion is at an extremely low level.
The Gatesway 80 provides first -class audio
quality for AM, FM, TV broadcasting, and
recording studios.
HIGH LEVEL, HIGH FIDELITY OUTPUT.
The dynamic range of the preamplifiers
will accommodate microphone levels to
17 dBm without overload or distortion.
The program amplifiers deliver + 32 dBm
output and the monitor amplifiers + 40
dBm, all with wide frequency response,
low distortion and low noise.
MODULAR CONSTRUCTION. Each amplifier is mounted on a separate printed
circuit board, which in turn mounts in a
card -rack holder. These modules are as
follows: three preamplifier modules, three
STYLING. The Gatesway 80 is handsomely
styled with satin -anodized aluminum front
panels, and neutral white cabinet with blue
trim. The modern design will complement
any control room decor.
W
www.americanradiohistory.com
-
GATESWAY 80 BLOCK DIAGRAM
1,4
MIC
MIC I-B
III
0
®
o
VU
PGM
PHONE
MIC 2-A
MIC ..B
©
v
PGM
LINE
®
EXT.
MONITOR
CTL RM
0
0
LOBBY
SPEAKER
-0
TOO
TT
I
K
-O
O
TT 2
K
-O
STUDIO A
SPEAKER
STUDIO A
WARNING
LIGHTS
STUDIO
B
SPEAKER
STUDIO
B
WARNING
LIGHTS
TT 3
O
K
TT a
-O
ROOM
CTL
SPEAKER
CTL
ROOM
WARNING
LIGHTS
117V
TAPE
AC
I
CUE
SPEAKER
TAPE 2
EXTERNAL
CUE PHONE
C-T
I
C-T 2
LEGEND
C-T 3
O -I OUTPUT
NET
2
O -3 OUTPUT
3
B
0
1
O -2 OUTPUT
-I BOOSTER
1
BOOSTER 2
B -3 BOOSTER 3
B -2
EMT
RMT 2
PA
I
PA
2
PREAMP
PREAMP
PA
3
PREAMP
EMT
SWITCH
v
0
CUE
I
B
B
TRANSFORMER
'ROGRAM
MASTER GAIN
CUE
GAIN
2
MONITOR
GAIN
3
D
e
ATTENUATOR
RELAY
PAD
277
www.americanradiohistory.com
GATESWAY 80 SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING
positions.
MODE: Single
channel
mono
with
audition
-_
MIXING CHANNELS: Total-8. Three microphones, two turntables, two tapes and one remote /network.
INPUT CIRCUITS: Total -18. Five microphones, four turntables.
two tape machines, three cartridge tape machines, three remote
lines, one network.
AMPLIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES PROVIDED: Three
preamplifiers, three boosters, three output modules-program,
monitor and cue (interchangeable as supplied). Two power supply modules.
OUTPUT CIRCUITS: One program output @ +8 VU, one monitor
speaker output unmuted for lobby, three monitor speakers
muted, two headphone outputs.
MONITOR OUTPUT: +40 dBm @ 8 ohm minimum load.
Multi- speaker operation should use high- impedance speakers
(32 -45 ohms) or accessory speaker matching transformer (48/8
ohms) for minimum load of 8 ohms.
GAIN: Microphone to line: 100 dB
dB t
2
RESPONSE: Program: t 1.0 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Monitor: 1.0 dB, 30 Hz to 15 kHz.
2dB. Medium level to line 60
DISTORTION: Program circuits: 0.5% maximum, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
@ + 18
dBm.
Monitor circuits: 1.0% maximum, 30 Hz to
(10 watts.)
15 kHz @
+40 dBm
NOISE: Program circuits: 75 dB below + 18 dBm with - 50 dBm
input ( -125 dBm equivalent input noise, measured 20 Hz to 20
kHz). Medium level inputs: (program) 80 dB below + 18 dBm
with -10 dBm input. Monitor circuits: signal /noise = 80 dB below
-40 dBm output.
FINISH: Satin -anodized aluminum panels with lettering in black.
Cabinet color ... neutral white, blue trim.
POWER: 117/234 volts, 50/60 Hz, single -phase. Consumption:
60 watts, maximum.
MECHANICAL SIZE: 39 inches wide, 154 inches deep,
inches high. Weight: 88 lbs.
73/4
SHIPPING DATA: Packed weight: domestic, 120 lbs.; export, 170
lbs. Cubage: 12.8 cubic feet (domestic).
dB.
balanced.
150/250
ohms
IMPEDANCES: Microphones:
Turntable /tape: 600 ohms balanced. Network/remote: 600
ohms balanced. Monitor output: 8 ohms unbalanced.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
ORDERING INFORMATION
Gatesway 80, eight channel console, complete with three preamplifiers; three boosters;
three program /monitor /cue output modules (interchangeable) and two power
supplies
Speaker Matching Transformer
994- 6699 -001
478- 0291 -000
ADV. 485A PTD. IN U.S.A.
CP-2 5M-1279
278
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Thirteen inputs into five mixing channels
Compact size saves control room space
Quiet "push -on /push -off" input switches
Solid-State
5- Channel
Audio Control
Console
Extensive use of integrated circuits
All solid state .. silicon transistors
Great versatility at
a
modest price
Harris' Mono 5 is a solid -state audio control
console that provides a high degree of flexibility
through the use of thirteen inputs into five
monaural mixing channels. Although compact in
size, and economical in price, the Mono 5 offers
facilities and performance specifications comparable to many larger, more expensive consoles.
279
www.americanradiohistory.com
0
MONO -5
Y
r
.1111.111.
4111111180
41111111).
dB
Y
MI
110 NM 1M
MS
f
medium and smaller size AM
and monaural FM stations, the
Mono 5 is ideal as a main console.
In
stations, the Mono 5 will
find application as a production
console, or may be used for
independent programming from a
second facility.
In larger
r
ON
y
MEDIUM LEVEL CHANNELS (3, 4
These three channels are
designed for medium level inputs
and may be used with turntables,
cartridge tape machines, or reel -toreel machines. Remote, network or
auxiliary sources may be assigned
to any of the nine medium level
& 5):
inputs.
VERSATILE INPUT SWITCHING:
Thirteen inputs can be switched
into the five mixing channels in a
manner to satisfy most programming requirements. These inputs
can
include four
microphones,
three turntables, three cartridge
reproducers, one reel -to -reel reproducer, one network and one
auxiliary source. The thirteen front
panel input switches are of the
"push -on /push -off" type for quiet
control room operation. There are
isolation transformers on all program inputs and outputs.
MICROPHONE CHANNELS (1 &
2): These two channels are
equipped with low -noise preamplifiers for use with low- impedance,
broadcast-type microphones. Each
of the channels may select from
two different input signals by use
of front panel switches.
PROGRAM, AUDITION AND CUE
SELECTION: Any of the five
mixing channels may be switched
to the Program Channel or Audi-
tion to permit independent monitoring or recording of incoming
sources without disturbing programming. Channels 3, 4 and 5
also have cue positions, which
provide signal to the amplified cue
system. This signal can be monitored by an internal speaker or
external headphones. Switching is
by telephone -grade lever -type keys
that provide maximum durability
and reliability.
PROGRAM CHANNEL: The program channel consists of a sum-
ming type booster amplifier, audio
output amplifier, VU meter, and a
master gain control. The master
gain control, an internal adjust-
280
www.americanradiohistory.com
ment, is preset at the factory to
provide 16 dB of reserve gain for
the console, and is the optimum
setting for providing adequate
operating margins of signal-tonoise and "headroom ". The 4 -inch
VU meter is a standard volume
indicator, and is used in conjunction with the mixing channel
attenuators to establish a reference of "0" VU, which is equivalent to an output level of +8 dBm.
ADDITIONAL FACILITIES: A
three -position monitor selector
switches the monitoring amplifier
input to (1) program circuit, (2)
terminals for an external source,
and (3) audition circuit. Front panel
controls also include monitor gain
and cue gain, and conventional
high impedance cue and program
headset jacks are provided.
warning
lights and speaker muting is
included in the Mono 5 to prevent
acoustic feedback and broadcasting of a cue signal when live
microphones are nearby.
A protective system of
HARRIS
OD
---:-- ...-==
281
MONO
OPERATING
phonic.
MODE:
Single channel,
5
SPECIFICATIONS
mono-
MIXING CHANNELS: Total -5. Two microphone
channels, three medium level (turntable, tape,
remote, network) channels. Cue positions on
medium level channel switches.
INPUT CIRCUITS: Total -13. Four microphone
inputs, nine medium level (turntable, tape,
remote, network) inputs.
OUTPUT CIRCUITS:
Total -5. Program, audition,
two muted monitor for control room and studio,
one unmuted monitor for lobby.
AMPLIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLY: Two preamplifiers, one program, one cue and one
monitor amplifier. Self- contained power supply.
IMPEDANCES: Microphones: 150/600 ohms,
balanced. Medium level: 150/600 ohms,
balanced. Program output: 150/600 ohms,
balanced. Audition output: 1,400 ohms.
Monitor outputs: 8 ohms nominal. Audition
and monitor outputs are unbalanced.
Microphone input to line output: 100
3 dB. Medium level input to line
output: 60 dB, ± 3 dB. Medium level input to
monitor output: 80 dB, ± 4 dB.
GAIN:
dB,
±
RESPONSE: Program circuits: at 1 dB, 3015,000 Hz. Monitor circuits: ± 1.5 dB,
30- 15,000 Hz.
DISTORTION: Program circuits: 0.5% maximum @ +8 dBm; 1.0% maximum @ + 18
dBm output level, 30- 15,000 Hz. Monitor
circuits: 3.0% maximum @ 6 watts output
level (lobby output only).
NOISE: Program circuits: at least 70 dB below
+ 18 dBm output with -50 dB input to mic
channels or -10 dBm input to medium level
channels. Monitor circuits: at least 70 dB
below 6 watts output level with same input
levels.
117/234 volts, ±10 %, 50/60
single phase, 37 watts maximum.
POWER:
Hz,
FINISH: Beige -gray Pebble-Tex cabinet, natural
aluminum front panel.
SIZE: 30 inches long, 81/2 inches high, 171/2
inches deep (76.2 cm x 21.6 cm x 44.5 cm).
WEIGHT:
41
pounds (18.6 kg).
SHIPPING DATA:
pounds; export,
Packed weight, domestic,
pounds (45.8 kg).
51
101
ORDERING INFORMATION
Mono 5, five -channel monaural audio console, complete with preamplifiers,
program amplifier, cue amplifier, monitor amplifier, and self -contained power
supply
994 -7699 -001
CP-2.5M-1179
ADV. 438C PTD. IN U.S.A.
282
www.americanradiohistory.com
MJ
HARRIS
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION MANE/LING
Insures maximum signal power with minimum
MS P-100
Audio
Processor
for
AM /FM /TV
distortion
Replaces six to eight separate processors
Automatic audio processing
Asymmetrical limiting to achieve 125% positive
peak modulation for AM
Switch selection of all operating parameters for
tailoring sound to station format
Expandable to FM stereo by adding plug -in
modules
?83
www.americanradiohistory.com
dependently in each band. Exclusive
crossover compensation assures frequency response free from sharp peaks or dips
under both dynamic and static conditions.
The gain controlling element is
a monolithic four -quadrant multiplier operating in
the two -quadrant mode, assuring optimum noise and distortion performance.
Exact tracking between bands and
between left and right stereo channels is
inherent in the circuits used.
Metering modules are located above the
main signal card frame and contain most
operating parameter adjustment switches.
One module is used per band. Meter circuitry can be switched to monitor left or
right band control signal or the greater of
the two. In stereo operation, the greater of
left or right controls the gain of both sections.
LIMITER SECTION. A broadband fast
limiter controls transient peaks and summation errors present in the output of the
tri -band AGC. The unit analyzes program
content and automatically selects optimum attack and recovery time constants. Automatic attack time selection
minimizes transient intermodulation of
restricted- bandwidth signals during limiting. Automatic recovery time selection
optimizes the degree of dynamic range reduction to the nature of the program
signal.
MSP -100. SHOWING METER MODULE CONTROLS.
A two -quadrant multiplication technique
similar to that employed in the AGC section is used to control limiter gain.
Automatic attack circuitry analyzes the
signal density in six separate frequency
The Harris MSP -100 Audio Processor is
an extremely flexible audio control
package offering new control concepts
and unequaled versatility. It is designed to
allow the highest possible modulation
levels, with minimum distortion. This
single unit incorporates a tri -band AGC
and broadband peak limiter with pre emphasis compensation to permit unparalleled "tailoring" of sound to station
format.
The modular construction assures flexibility in initial installation and in future additions. An FM monaural unit is converted to stereo operation simply by plugging
in "right channel" modules. No critical
calibration adjustments are required.
All audio circuitry employs linear integrated circuit amplifiers with no discrete
transistors, reflecting the state -of- the -art
approach to circuit design.
INPUT SELECTION. An active instrumentation -type input circuit permits
balanced or unbalanced input without
modification. Problems normally associated with transformer inputs relative to
frequency response, low- frequency distortion and transients are eliminated.
An input sensitivity switch (20 dB) and a
further fine adjustment range of 20 dB
allow control of input level to the AGC
section over a 40 dB range.
AGC SECTION. Three AGC circuits
process separate segments of the audio
spectrum independently. Operational
parameters, including frequency bandwidths, thresholds and shapes, and attack /recovery times, are variable to user
tastes in each band. Variation of
parameters directly affects the output
spectral distribution -the characteristic
"sound" of the processed signal. The AGC
module may be quickly set for use as a
gentle AGC, spectral equalizer, fast parallel split -band compressor, or anything in
between.
Confusion in operational adjustment is
minimized by the extensive use of selector
switches rather than potentiometers. High
and low crossover frequencies are adjustable to any one of seven frequencies
each. Attack and recovery times of expansion and compression have five different
periods each per band. The dual recovery
mode expands the range of recovery times
to ten per band. Expansion and compression thresholds may be adjusted in-
284
www.americanradiohistory.com
bands and selects faster attack times
when significant high frequency energy is
present. Automatic recovery is based on
the detection of syllabic rate. Pulsing
signals, such as voice, have a waveform
envelope containing many more pulses
per second than smooth signals, such as
certain musical selections. Recovery time
is selected by a limited bandwidth pulse
counter to eliminate extreme recovery
selection errors on very rapid pulses such
as drum rolls.
Attack and recovery times are monitored
by LED status indicators. Manual selection of attack and recovery times is
available over a range of five values for
each, with dual recovery available in both
manual and automatic modes. Stereo
strapping of limiters is easily connected
and disconnected. An expanded scale
meter indicates limiting over a 12 dB
range; it can be switched to monitor left
limiting, right limiting, or the greater of the
two.
FM PROTECTION SYSTEM. High frequency energy can cause significant overdrive conditions in pre- emphasized
systems such as FM, TV and SCA broadcasting, and tape recording. Modification
of the signal is required to eliminate instantaneous overdrive when high frequencies are present.
A split- spectrum approach is used. Low
employing digital detection techniques,
reverses polarity only when the program
waveform goes through a zero crossing.
This assures very rapid, inaudible, switching. Rapid recovery, with minimum low
frequency distortion, is provided by a unique integrated circuit which eliminates
"holes" produced by conventional delayed
recovery distortion reduction techniques.
frequency signal components have little
overdrive potential but contribute significantly to sigral loudness. High frequency
signal components affect overdrive greatly, therefore they are controlled to a far
more significant degree than low -frequency signals.
Input signal from the limiter is pre emphasized and split into two bands
above and below 400 Hz. The high frequency band feeds a parallel clamp circuit
and fast limiter. The output signal may be
adjusted to combine any combination of
limited or clamped signal with the unprocessed low- frequency signal A final
broadband clamp circuit controls transient
peaks and summation errors. De- emphasis after the clamping sections minimizes
audible harmonic distortion. LED's are
used to indicate operation of the high
frequency limiting and clamping.
POWER SUPPLY. The power supply is
fully regulated, using a redundant regulation scheme. Failure of a module would
not cause the entire unit to cease operation. This is particularly important in
stereo broadcasting. Simple integrated circuit regulators are employed for ease in
trouble- shooting. A unique power status
monitor indicates deviations in the output
of the primary regulators, to quickly locate
faults or identify potential problems.
For operation with transmitters not
capable of 125% positive modulation, the
positive peak ceiling of the limiter is adjustable from 100% to 133 %. LED's are
provided on the front panel for readout of
polarity and asymmetrical limiting.
RFI PROTECTION. Since the processor
will be located near the transmitter in
most installations, special attention has
been paid to RFI protection. Each plug -in
module has been shielded, grounding of
circuitry has been given special attention,
extensive use of ground planes on PC
boards has been made and filters have
been used at critical points.
OUTPUT AMPLIFIER. State -of- the -art
circuitry insures best transient response
without the distortion or ringing limitations of transformers. The output amplifier does not use any transformers or
transistors whatsoever in providing a 600
ohm balanced output capable of delivering +18 dBm. Integrated circuits are used
exclusively. Both coarse and fine output
level adjustments are provided.
AM PROTECTION SYSTEM. To convert
from FM to AM, simply replace the FM
Protection Module with an AM Protection
Module -this is the only change that is
needed.
The AM Protection Module works in conjunction with the broadband peak limiter
featuring low distortion and low noise.
Asymmetrical limiting of the signal is
achieved through the use of innovative
circuitry to allow 125% positive peak
modulation. A polarity reversal circuit,
MECHANICAL.
Modular construction
allows easy access to all circuit elements.
All plug -in modules are easily serviced
through the use of an extender card.
Metering modules lift out for accessibility
and the power supply is easily accessed
by removing the top cover. Ease of
maintenance and an extremely clean
appearance have been achieved through
the use of a mother board and plug -in
card concept. Most maintenance and service is easily performed without removing
the unit from its rack.
Output metering circuitry permits observation of peak signal levels both with and
without pre -emohasis. Meter sensitivity
can easily be changed in precise 2 dB increments. As in the AGC metering
modules, left output, right output, or the
greater of the two can be switched into
the meter.
PROTECTION
1
T
NODULE
INPUT /AGC NODULE
INPUT
SENS IIIRITT
I
I
Dar
o
GA IN
CONTROL
LIMITER NOODLE
7
INPUT
I
25 50
NIGH
PASS
15
OQO
BROAD
BAND
CLAMP
I
LEVEL
ACTIVE
INPUT
APMR
INPUT
-
NIGN
NIGN
PUSS
-20aM
MID
GAIN
CONTROL
I
t
II
L1111ER
GAIN
CONTROL
AO
IREENINASIS
SO
25
H
JJ
15
OE-
EMPUASIS
II
L
-OPF
O
uS
uS
LA
LIMITER
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
LOU
ÌSS
GAIN
CONTROL
J
L
OtlTROI
i
MIEN AGC METED NODULE
MODULE
PASS
J
TACA RECOVER/
AUTO 100E LEO'S
A
OUTPUT AMP IOC
I
"CPU
PARAMETER
SELECT
CONTROL
L
MID
AC
METER MODULE
PARAMETER
SELECT
I
I
110
IGC
CawL
L
1
LE
REAR
ME TER
l
DRIVER
OUTPUT
CH
100E
SELECT
L nT
LEVEL
OUTPUT
al
LIMITER METER NODULE
I
L
LOD ACC METER
I
L
I
LEVEL
OUTPUT
IMP
I
"!
4'
VINE
COARSE
I
J
MWULO
LOW
PARAMETER
I
SELECT
CONTROL
II
L
DI
L
I
MSP -100 (FM) BLOCK DIAGRAM
285
www.americanradiohistory.com
FIOM
AOC
f
/1_
OFF
OFF
o
o
TO LIMITER
rouRm
SWITCH
TO
OUTPUT
MODULE
SERIES
CLIP
LIMITER
ON
RO
o
t
OFF
o
ZERO
CROSSING
DETECTOR
FLIP
FLOP
POS
NEG
SET
SET
ASYMMETRY
CONTROL
POSITIVE PEAK LIMIT
ASYMMETRY
TO OUTPUT
METER
SELECT
MODULE
f
DETECTOR
PAUSE
DETECTOR
p
-
PEAKS
MSP -100 AM PROTECTION MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
MSP -100 SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
EXPANSION THRESHOLD (Applicable to each of 3 bands): -30 dB
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: 30 Hz to 15 kHz. ±
dBm output. control functions disabled.
1
dB of
1
kHz value at
+10
relative, adjustable ± 12 dB.
EXPANSION RANGE (Applicable to each of 3 bands): 12 dB
HARMONIC DISTORTION (TOTAL): 0.25% or less. 20
Hz to 15 kHz at
+10
COMPRESSION RANGE (Applicable to each of 3 bands): 24 dB.
dam output with control functions disabled.
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION: 0.5% or less, 60 Hz and
4:1 at +10 dBm output with control functions disabled.
7 kHz
mixed
NOISE: 65 dB below +10 dBm output over 30 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth for 0
dBm input with control functions disabled.
GAIN: Switch selected. 23 dB or 43 dB,
allow finer adjustment).
±2
dB (input and output controls
MAXIMUM OUTPUT LEVEL: +18 dBm.
Limiter Section
ATTACK TIME: Automatic mode. 25 microseconds to 3.6 milliseconds determined by program signal; manual mode. 0.04 to 3.6 milliseconds.
RECOVERY TIME: Automatic mode. 40 milliseconds to 10 seconds determined by program signal: manual mode. 0.4 to 6.5 seconds. Dual recovery
mode (when used) dynamically increases recovery time up to 11 times
selected period in either mode.
LIMITING RATIO: 12.0.5 (dB /dB). minimum.
GENERAL
LIMITING RANGE:
SOURCE LOAD IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms, balanced or unbalanced.
FM Protection Section
AC INPUT POWER: 115/230 volts. 50/60 Hz. single phase. 40 watts.
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Operating. 0° to +55°
storage. -40° to +85°
HUMIDITY RANGE: Non -condensing,
COMPENSATION CURVES: Flat, 25. 50 and 75 microsecond.
C;
ATTACK TIME, H.F. LIMITER: 100 microseconds.
C.
RECOVERY TIME. H.F. LIMITER: 100 milliseconds.
5% to 95% relative.
OPERATIONAL MODE: Parallel split -band with H.F. control only. Crossover
frequency: 450 Hz. High frequency control: infinitely variable from full
ALTITUDE RANGE: To 10,000 feet A.M.S.L.
DIMENSIONS: 17.6" (44.8 cm) W
x
14" (35.5 cm)
12 dB.
H x
15.1" (38.4 cm)
D.
AM Protection Section
OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
ASYMMETRICAL LIMITING: 100% to 133 %. continuously variable.
AGC Section
ATTACK TIME: Automatic mode. 25 microseconds to 3.6
milliseconds. determined by program signal; manual mode. 0.04 to 3.6
milliseconds.
LIMITER
CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES: Switch selectable. ± 10%:
Low: 75, 95. 105. 135. 160. 230. 320 Hz.
High: 1.7. 2.2. 2.5. 3.1. 3.7. 5.3. 7.2 kHz.
ATTACK TIME: (Applicable to each of 3 bands): Compression or expansion.
switch selected .25, .8. 2.5, 8. 25 milliseconds.
RECOVERY TIME (Applicable to each of 3 bands): Compression or expansion. switch selected 0.4 to 6 seconds: dual recovery mode (when used)
dynamically increases period recovery time up to 11 times selected.
COMPRESSION RATIO (Applicable to each of 3 bands): Switch selected.
12:4; 12:2; 12:1. 12:0.5 (dB /dB) at center of range.
EXPANSION RATIO (Applicable to each of 3 bands): Fixed. 12:24 dB /dB.
COMPRESSION THRESHOLD (Applicable to each of 3 bands): Adjustable
over 12 dB range.
clamp to full gain- reduction limiting.
LIMITER RECOVERY TIME: Automatic mode, 40 milliseconds to 10
seconds. determined by program signal: manual mode. 0.4 to 6.5 seconds.
Dual recovery mode (when used) dynamically increases recovery time up to
11 times selected period in either mode.
ASYMMETRICAL SENSITIVITY:
SWITCHING TIME: Less than
1
5 %.
microsecond.
SWITCHING ACTIVATOR: Pause detector and zero crossing detector.
PAUSE DETECTOR SENSITIVITY: 10 dB. 20 dB. 30 dB below limiting
threshold (switch selectable).
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MSP -100 FM/TV Audio Processor (stereo)
MSP -100 FM/TV Audio Processor (mono)
MSP -100 AM Audio Processor (mono)
994- 7987 -001
994- 7968.001
994- 8148 -001
JK-6.5M-1277
ADV. 509A PTD
286
www.americanradiohistory.com
IN U.S.A.
HARRIS
The Harris MSP -90 is an advanced audio processor that allows
you to "tailor" your sound to your station's format. Reflecting today's latest design techniques, the MSP -90 offers unsurpassed
audio performance plus convenient modular construction. And,
due to the modern manufacturing techniques employed, including computerized testing, Harris is able to offer this audio
processing series at surprisingly low prices.
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION IMOCAIMAKI
Through its great flexibility, the Harris MSP -90 can be ordered in
many configurations: as a mono or a stereo AGC amplifier; an AM
limiter; a dual AM limiter; a mono or stereo FM limiter; an AGC
amplifier /AM limiter; or an AGC amplifier /FM limiter. The main
frame, which includes the power supply, is designed to accept any
two of three plug -in modules (AM limiter, FM limiter, AGC
amplifier) to provide the various configurations.
MSP -90
Audio
Processor
Performance specifications of the MSP -90 are excellent in all configurations. As the unit employs the most advanced circuitry
available, it allows the highest possible modulation levels with
minimum distortion.
The MSP -90 incorporates integrated circuit amplifiers with no discrete transistors. Audio transformers have been eliminated
through the use of active instrumentation -type circuits, allowing
the flexibility of balanced or unbalanced inputs, and eliminating
distortion, ringing and the frequency and transient response
problems normally associated with transformers.
"Tailor" your sound to your format
AM positive peak modulation adjustable 100% to
130%
All In
31/2
Inches of rack space
Extensive LED metering
RFI
protection...permits use
In
transmitter room
Maximum processing flexibility
.
:
.
.,.013,I1K
t6E'
.
Precision LED metering is provided on all modules for accurately
measuring gain control and for indicating modulation percentage
and output level. Dual regulation has been provided in the power
supply for highest reliability. The supply is fully regulated to
eliminate problems associated with high line voltages or brownouts.
Special attention has been given to RFI protection through the use
of shielding, filtering, grounding and special circuit design. The
main frame utilizes extruded construction for extreme ruggedness, and the modular design allows easy servicing with the
use of an optional extender card.
MSP -90 Audio Processor,
AGC Amplifier /AM Limiter Configuration
www.americanradiohistory.com
I
---MP"
,w uaa
`wMrw íl
MOD`
w
,
aa
n
a
s
J
C
-,..M
arn.ru..
a e
(to
MUM
Lem
MSP -90 AM LIMITER MODULE
The MSP -90 AM limiter is designed for
125% positive peak modulation perfor-
from 100% to 130% to match your transmitter's capability.
mance, allowing the loudest possible
signal with minimum distortion. It
eliminates the annoying "thumping ",
"pumping" and "clicks" associated with
many low- priced limiters. Gain is controlled by a monolithic integrated circuit, and
this modern fast limiter assures excellent
noise and distortion specifications. Selectable recovery time is provided for
"tailoring" the sound to station needs.
True asymmetrical limiting for 125%
positive peak modulation is achieved
through innovative circuit design. A
polarity reversal circuit, employing digital
detection techniques, reverses polarity
only when the program waveform goes
through a zero crossing. This allows very
rapid, inaudible switching. Rapid recovery,
with minimum low frequency distortion, is
provided by a unique integrated circuit.
This eliminates audio "holes" produced by
most other techniques.
AM LIMITER
SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT: 600 ohms terminating. Maximum
input level +15 dBm. 0 dB limiting
threshold, +10 dBm to -30 dBm with
switching level and input level control.
OUTPUT: 20 ohms for 600 ohm load.
Nominal output level +10 dBm. Maximum output level +24 dBm.
LIMITING ATTACK TIME: Less than 40
microseconds.
LIMITING RECOVERY TIME: Switch
selectable from 1.3 seconds to 7.5 seconds.
LIMITING CONTROL: On -Off.
ASYMMETRICAL CONTROL RANGE:
100% to 130%.
PAUSE CONTROL:
-
AUTO
-
PAUSE DETECTOR LEVEL: -10 dB, -20
dB, -30 dB below limiting level.
GAIN: 20 dB ±1 dB with input amp set for
0 dB gain.
PHASE SWITCHING TIME: Less than one
microsecond.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: ±1 dB, 20 Hz
PHASE ACTIVATION TIME: Minimum of
50 milliseconds, program dependent.
to 20 kHz.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (* 10 dBm output) 0.15% maximum, 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
limiter disabled; 1.0% maximum, 20 Hz
to 20 kHz, 10 dB limiting, slow recovery.
AC INPUT POWER: 117/234 volts ±10%,
50/60 Hz, 25 watts.
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION: (60
Hz and 7 kHz mixed 4:1 at +10 dBm output (P. Eq)] 0.30% maximum, limiter disabled; 0.75% maximum, 10 dB limiting,
single recovery.
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Operating: -20°
to +55° C. Storage: -40° to +85° C.
into the first instrumentation amplifier.
LED's are also provided on the front panel
for readout of audio polarity and asymmetrical limiting.
NOISE: (20 Hz to 20 kHz) Signal -to -noise
better than 70 dB below limiting
threshold.
ALTITUDE
LIMITING RANGE: 15 dB.
DIMENSIONS: 16.6" (42.2 cm) W
(3.0 cm) H x 10.3" (26.2 cm) D.
Positive peak modulation is adjustable
LIMITING SLOPE: 18:1.
WEIGHT: 3 lbs. 2 oz. (1.42 kg).
An input selector allows gain changes in 10
dB steps for up to a 30 dB increase in sensitivity, while a fine adjustment control allows an additional 10 dB range. An LED indicator is provided to show excessive drive
DC VOLTAGES: Dual series regulation at
*20 vdc and
± 15
vdc.
HUMIDITY RANGE: Non -condensing, 5%
to 90% relative.
RANGE: To 10,000 feet
A.M.S.L. (3048 meters).
x
1.2"
MSP -90 FM LIMITER MODULE
The MSP -90 FM limiter is designed to prevent FM overmodulation while retaining
maximum loudness with excellent clarity
and fidelity. This is accomplished through
a split spectrum limiting approach which
prevents high frequency overdrive for pre-
emphasized systems such as FM, TV and
SCA.
The gain controlling section is a fast
limiter, which includes adjustable recovery
time. It is designed to minimize noise and
distortion.
288
www.americanradiohistory.com
After this precision high -speed limiter the
signal is split into two audio bands, above
and below 400 Hz. The high frequency
band then feeds a parallel clamp circuit
and another fast limiter, and LED's are
used to indicate operation of the clamping
and limiting. Adjustable de- emphasis after
the clamping sections minimizes audible
harmonic distortion. As high frequencies
affect overdrive greatly, they are controlled
to a far more significant degree than the
low frequency audio components, which
have little overcrive potential.
The output signal may be adjusted to combine any ratio of limited or clamped high
frequency signal with the unprocessed low
frequency signal. After combining, a final
broadband clamp circuit controls transient
peaks and summation errors.
FM LIMITER
SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT: 600 ohms terminating. Maximum
input level
15 dBm. 0 dB limiting
threshold,
10 dBm to -30 dBm with
switching level and input level control.
OUTPUT: 600 ohms for 600 ohm load.
Nominal output level - 10 dBm. Maximum output level
18 dBm.
GAIN: 24 dB
0 dB gain
1
dB with input amp set for
LIMITING CONTROL: On -Off
FM
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: ±1 dB, 20 Hz
to 20 kHz.
PROTECTION: Split band
dual
-
mode.
PRE -EMPHASIS: 0, 25, 50, 75 microse-
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (+ 10 dBm output) 0.25% maximum, 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
limiter disabled; 1.0% maximum, 20 Hz
to 20 kHz. 10 dB limiting, slow recovery.
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION: [60
Hz and 7 kHz mixed 4:1 at
10 dBm output (P. Eq)) 0.25% maximum, limiter disabled.
conds.
DE- EMPHASIS: 0,
25, 50,
75
microse-
conds
AC INPUT POWER: 117/234 volts
-
10 %,
50/60 Hz, 25 watts.
DC VOLTAGES: Dual series regulation at
-15 vdc.
20 vdc and
NOISE: (20 Hz to 20 kHz) Signal -to -noise
better than 70 dB below limiting
threshold, FM in hard mode.
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Operating: -20°
to -55° C. Storage: -40° to 85° C.
LIMITING RANGE:
HUMIDITY RANGE: Non -condensing, 5%
to 90% relative.
15 dB.
LIMITING SLOPE: 30:1.
LIMITING START TIME: Less than 40
ALTITUDE RANGE: To 10,000 feet
A.M.S.L. (3048 meters).
microseconds.
LIMITING
RECOVERY TIME: Switch
selectable from 1.3 seconds to 7.5 seconds.
DIMENSIONS: 16.6" (42.2 cm) W
(3.0 cm) H x 10.3" (26.2 cm) D.
WEIGHT:
3
x
1.2"
lbs. 2 oz. (1.42 kg).
MSP -90 AGC AMPLIFIER MODULE
The Harris MSF -90 AGC amplifier is the
most versatile automatic gain control unit
available today, with a wide range of controls to ensure maximum processing flexibility. It is designed to ideally complement
the MSP -90 AM or FM limiters.
The gain controlling section provides up to
12 dB of expansion and 24 dB of compression. Adjustments include: separate attack
and recovery times for the expander and
the compressor; a threshold control for expansion; a selector switch for adjusting the
expansion level n 3 dB increments; and a
four -position slope control. An advanced
integrated circuit used for gain control
minimizes noise and distortion, and
provides exact tracking between left and
right channels when used for stereo.
An input sensitivity switch allows gain
changes in 10 dB steps up to a 30 dB increase in sensitivity, while a fine adjustment control provides an additional 10 dB
range.
An overdrive indicator is provided to show
excessive drive to the input amplifier, and
LED indicators are provided for both gain
control and output level. The gain controlling LED's show both expansion and compression operation, while separate LED's
show actual output level.
AGC AMPLIFIER
SPECIFICATIONS
input level
18 dBm. Compression
threshold +4 dBm to -36 dBm with
switching level and input level control.
OUTPUT: 600 ohms for 600 ohm load.
Nominal output level - 10 dBm. Maximum ouput level . 18 dBm.
GAIN:
dB with input amp set for
expansion and compression
functions disabled.
19 dB -
1
0 dB gain,
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: -1 dB, 20 Hz
to 20 kHz.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (. 10 dBm
ouput) 0.25% maximum, 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
AGC disabled; 1.0% maximum, 20 Hz to
20 kHz, AGC on, SLOW.
INPUT: 600 ohms terminating. Maximum
289
www.americanradiohistory.com
AGC Amplifier Module (continued)
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION: [60
Hz and 7 kHz mixed 4:1 at +10 dBm output (P. Eq)) 0.25% maximum, AGC disabled; 1.5% maximum, AGO on, SLOW.
EXPANSION RECOVERY TIME: Selectable at 15, 5, 2.5 or 1 second(s).
AC INPUT POWER: 117/234 volts ±10 %,
50/60 Hz, 25 watts.
EXPANSION THRESHOLD: ±5 dB.
DC VOLTAGES: Dual series regulation at
NOISE: (20 Hz to 20 kHz) Signal -to -noise
better than 75 dB below compression
COMPRESSION RANGE: 24 dB.
threshold.
COMPRESSION SLOPE: Selectable
EXPANSION RANGE: Selectable at
6
dB,
9
3
dB,
dB or 12 dB.
EXPANSION SLOPE: Approximately
2.5:1.
EXPANSION ATTACK TIME: Selectable
at second, 500, 300, 200 or 100 milliseconds.
1
+20 vdc and ±15 vdc.
at
HUMIDITY RANGE: Non -condensing, 5%
to 90% relative.
24:1, 12:1, 6:1 or 3:1.
COMPRESSION ATTACK TIME: Selectable at 250 microseconds, 1, 2.5 or approximately 25 milliseconds.
COMPRESSION
TEMPERATURE RANGE: Operating: -20°
to +55° C. Storage: -40° to +85° C.
RECOVERY TIME:
Selectable at 3.5 or 1.4 seconds, 750 or
580 milliseconds.
ALTITUDE RANGE: To 10,000 feet
A.M.S.L. (3048 meters).
DIMENSIONS: 16.6" (42.2 cm) W
(3.0 cm) H x 10.3" (26.2 cm) D.
WEIGHT:
3
lbs.
2 oz.
x 1.2"
(1.42 kg).
MSP -90 MAIN FRAME
Only 31/2 inches of vertical 19 -inch rack
space is required to mount the MSP -90
main frame, which supplies input /output
connections and regulated DC power for
two MSP -90 modules. Heavy aluminum
extruded construction is used throughout
for ruggedness and durability. The
well -regulated
primary power supply will operate on 115V
or 230V. while protecting the modules
from brownouts and severe overvoltage
surges. Well- ventilated aluminum top and
bottom covers keep modules cool and
dust free. Nylon guide rails and gold-
conservatively- rated,
plated sockets insure excellent
mechanical and electrical connections for
all modules. Dimensions: 19.0" (48.3 cm)
W x 3.5" (8.9 cm) H x 15.5" (39.4 cm) D.
Weight: 12 lbs. 13 oz. (5.81 kg).
MSP -90 ORDERING INFORMATION
The MSP -90 may be ordered in the configurations listed below.
Optional modules are listed as spares or to allow you to
figure a unit. For instance, you could order an FM limiter module,
and use it to turn an MSP -90 mono FM limiter into
station goes stereo at a later date.
recon-your
MSP -90 AM Limiter
MSP -90 Dual AM Limiter
MSP -90 FM Limiter (Monaural)
MSP -90 FM Limiter (Stereo)
MSP -90 AGC Amplifier (Monaural)
MSP -90 AGC Amplifier (Stereo)
MSP -90 AGC Amplifier /AM Limiter
MSP -90 AGC Amplifier /FM Limiter
NOTE: An extender card Is included with each of the above.
a
stereo unit if
994- 8200 -001
994 -8336 -001
994 -8201 -001
994-8202-001
994 -8203 -001
994 -8204 -001
994 -8205 -001
994 -8206 -001
MSP -90 OPTIONAL SPARE MODULES
AM Limiter Module
992- 5235 -001
992 -5236 -001
992-5237-001
Limiter Module
AGC Amplifier Module
FM
CP-3.5M-279
ADV. 529A PTD. IN U.S.A.
290
www.americanradiohistory.com
MSP -90 Tri Band AGC: A true automatic gain
HARRIS
amplifier, not just
INFORMATION PROCESSING
Time averaged true RMS power control
COMMUNICATION AND
a
compressor
Phase coherent filtering with adjustable band to
band crossover frequencies
Program dependent attack time
Front panel output mix controls enable
equalization of audio chain for optimum results
MSP -90
TRI BAND
AGC
Ease of setup and operation
With the development of the MSP -90 Tri Band AGC,
Harris furthers the technical advancement of audio
processing and offers the broadcaster an added opportunity to increase his coverage area through a
louder signal and improved modulation.
Audio
Processor
-..
Characterized by outstanding reliability, total flexibility, modular construction, and state -of- the -art circuitry, the Tri Band AGC boasts a performance level
previously unattainable in a stand alone unit. In addition, the Tri Band AGC provides high quality and low
distortion while maintaining the Harris reputation for
cost sensitivity.
.
_
-
......
-
..e.
291
www.americanradiohistory.com
With a performance level far
beyond old gated compressor
type models, the Tri Band AGC is
a true Automatic Gain Control
amplifier system based upon
complementary expansion and
compression which totally eliminate irritating noise swish -up.
The time averaged RMS power
control
significantly
increases
signal power without affecting
peak levels. Unlike less advanced
RMS processors that rely on the
use of non -linear LED- PHOTOCELL combinations. advanced
circuitry in the MSP -90 Tri Band
AGC amplifier actually CALCULATES the RMS signal power,
making it possible to maintain the
timbre of musical signals while
simultaneously increasing loudness.
Crossover anomalies and dead
spots in frequency response,
which are common in less
sophisticated equipment, have
been eliminated in the MSP -90 Tri
Band AGC through the use of
phase coherent, single pole, band
to band filtering with adjustable
turnover frequencies. Because
the turnover frequencies of the Tri
Band AGC are each adjustable
over three octaves, the Harris
AGC module has become the
answer to the broadcasters'
needs today and in the future.
parent operation possible.
Program dependent attack time
assures minimum distortion at low
frequencies and optimizes crisp,
clear highs. The Tri Band processing plus RMS control eliminate
the problems normally associated
with record pops and clicks, thus
guaranteeing the most trans-
surpassed audio performance
coupled with flexibility and convenience. The conservatively
rated, well -regulated primary
power supply will operate on 115V
or 230V, while protecting the
amplifier module from brownouts
and severe overvoltage surges.
The front panel output mix controls of the MSP -90 Tri Band AGC
provide the broadcaster with the
capability of altering the frequency response of the audio
chain without the use of external
equalizers. Adequate equalization
for all formats and transmitting
media is assured by the -10 dB
control range of each band.
The Tri Band AGC amplifier
module plugs easily into the rugged MSP -90 main frame to offer
today's creative broadcaster un-
MSP -90 TRI BAND AGC SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT: 600 ohm terminating. Maximum
level
28 dBm. Compression threshold
4 dBm to
26 dBm.
OUTPUT: 600 ohm for 600 ohm load.
10 dBm. MaxNominal output level
18 dBm.
imum output level
NOISE: (20 Hz to 20 kHz) Signal -to -noise
better than 70 dB below compression
threshold.
EXPANSION RANGE: Selectable at
6 dB. 9 dB or 12 dB.
3
dB.
'
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
1
dB. 20 Hz
to 20 kHz, controls flat.
HARMONIC DISTORTION: (
dBm output) 0.25% maximum, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
disabled; 0.5% maximum, 20 Hz to 20
kHz, enabled, slow.
10
INTERMODULATION DISTORTION: ( - 10
dBm output) 0.25% maximum disabled;
0.5 % maximum, enabled, slow; SMPTE.
EXPANSION SLOPE: 2:1.
EXPANSION THRESHOLD: -5 dB from
normal 20 dBm.
EXPANSION ATTACK TIME:
second.
0 5 or
0
1.0.2. 0.3,
1
EXPANSION RECOVERY TIME: 0.25. 0.5,
1, 2. 4. 8 or 16 second(s).
COMPRESSION RANGE: 24 dB.
COMPRESSION SLOPE:
Selectable
at
24:1, 12:1. 6:1 or 3:1.
COMPRESSION TYPE: True RMS power
control.
COMPRESSION ATTACK TIME: Program
dependent. 2.5 m Sec. to 250 m Sec.
COMPRESSION RECOVERY TIME: 0.25,
0.5, 1, 2. 4, 8 or 16 second(s).
OUTPUT MIX: Each band can be varied
10 dB from nominally flat.
BAND SPLITTING: Phase linear, selectable; low frequency crossover 75, 95,
105. 135, 160, 230 or 320 Hz; high frequency crossover 1680. 2180, 2450,
3060, 3700. 5300 or 7200 Hz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MSP -90 TRI BAND AGC with main frame (monaural)
MSP -90 TRI BAND AGC with main frame (stereo)
MSP -90 TRI BAND AGC Module
994- 8357 -001
994-8358-001
992 -5603 -001
ADV. 544 PTD. IN U.S.A.
J K-4 M-679
292
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
Meet or exceed NAB specifications
COMMUNICATION ANO
INFORMATION PROCESSINO
Design simplicity for top reliability
Superb audio performance
Very quiet operation
CRITERION 90 -1
CRITERION 90 -2
Hysteresis synchronous direct capstan drive motor
for speed accuracy and stability
Completely solid -state electronics for extra reliability
Tape
Cartridge
Systems
Computer testing of components and assemblies
Individual testing of each unit
Plug -in printed circuit cards
Minimum hand wiring
Heavy steel chassis construction
CRITERION 90 -1 PLAYBACK
M
CRITERION 90 -2 RECORD /PLAYBACK
NO
MI
2
www.americanradiohistory.com
`
Z
A
.
Criterion 90-2 record /playback, top view. cover oil, showing modular construction
and easy component access.
CRITERION 90 -1 AND
CRITERION 90 -2
With Criterion 90, Harris provides the most
reliable, the most rugged, the best per fo.ming line of tape cartridge systems ever
put on the market. No detail has been
overlooked to insure that your Criterion 90
will give you top service, year after year,
from the very first day of delivery.
Starting with the heavy steel chassis construction and the half-inch thick aluminum
tool plate deck that provides a rugged,
warp- resistant, precisely flat base for the
Micro -Set head assembly -on through the
specially- designed hysteresis synchronous
motor with direct capstan drive for unmatched speed accuracy and stability, the
Criterion 90 line is precision -built to meet
or exceed exacting performance specifications.
The manufacturing process is followed up
by rigorous testing of each unit in Harris'
laboratories. No Criterion 90 is shipped
until it Is thoroughly tested-and a qualification sheet with key measurements,
signed by a test technician, is enclosed
with your unit.
And finally, the Criterion 90 series is regularly undergoing road tests -sample units
are put on delivery trucks and allowed to
bounce around for days. Then the units are
tested to see how well they hold up under
typical shipping conditions.
This practical type of testing played a part
in the design of Criterion 90, showing what
areas might present problems, and helped
us come up with extremely rugged units
that can stand up under any type of handling tape cartridge machines might encounter.
In addition, both Criterion 90 -1 and Criterion 90-2 have been designed in space saving sizes for convenient installation in
today's crowded studios. For instance, two
Criterion 90 -1 playbacks may be mounted
side by side in a standard 19-inch equipment rack, occupying the same space normally required for a single playback. The
Criterion 90 -2 record /playback fits handily
in only 7 inches of standard rack space.
HYSTERESIS
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
The heart of Criterion 90- 1/90 -2 is a hys-
teresis synchronous motor, with direct
capstan drive, built exclusively for Harris,
to Harris specifications. This motor assembly, along with the full swing pressure
roller, offers speed accuracy and stability
comparable to a reel -to -reel machine.
Sealed instrument -type ball bearings are
used to keep transport wow and flutter to
less than 0.15% NAB weighted peak, while
full motor shielding helps maintain a greatly improved signal -to -noise ratio.
The motor is precisely located to help insure correct tape path guidance, correct
pinch roller pressure and minimum wow
and flutter.
294
www.americanradiohistory.com
HEAD ASSEMBLY
AND DECK
The high quality, laminated heads are built
with all -metal hyperbolic faces, providing
for long wear and low oxide accumulation.
These quality heads provide optimum colinearity to assure the best possible stereo
phase relationship. Three tape guides further control the tape path guidance to insure constant output quality, and full audio
response from cartridge to cartridge. In
the playback only units a dummy head
replaces the record head to maximize per-
formance.
The Micro -Set head bracket is easily adjustable for accurate height, zenith and
azimuth. An air -damped pressure roller
solenoid is adjustable from 0.08 to 0.5
seconds for rapid or slow cueing, and the
plunger is Teflon® coated for quiet, easy
operation.
The head and motor assemblies are mounted on a heavy -duty, precision- machined,
half -inch bar stock aluminum deck that
helps provide proper cartridge alignment
on the Micro -Set head for optimum per-
formance.
ELECTRONICS
Criterion 90 electronics are completely
solid state for greatest reliability, and temperature and gain stability. The Improved
design allows Criterion 90 -1 and Criterion
90 -2 to achieve better than NAB standards
for frequency response, distortion and
signal -to- noise. Audio output capability is
+18 dBm (0 dBm nominal) to accommodate losses in complex studio or system
installations. Full automatic muting of all
audio outputs provides better than -75
dBm noise on standby.
all Criterion 90 units, a motherboard
philosophy has reduced hand wiring to a
minimum for long -term reliability and better overall performance. Only two printed
circuit cards carry all of the electronic circuitry for mono or stereo playback units,
and these plug -in cards are identical for
Criterion 90 -1 and Criterion 90 -2, for card
interchangeability. Cards, heads, switches
and motor all have provisions for quick,
easy access.
In
complete remote control capability is
standard in all units, and ground switching
of external control functions provides protection for equipment and personnel. All
Criterion 90 circuits have been RFI proofed
to make them highly resistant to strong RF
fields.
Criterion 90 -2 record playback. with oplional rack adapter.
A
Primary and secondary cue sensing are
standard features in all Criterion 90 playback machines. All Criterion 90 -2 record
playback machines have primary and secondary cue generators and sensors as
standard features. The tertiary function is
added as a standard feature on the -003
and -004 versions of the Criterion 90-1/
90 -2 units. Logging input and output connections are standard for interfacing with
automation systems, in full conformance
with NAB standards.
High -reliability, contoured illuminated pushbutton switches provide visual indication of
machine status. Typical bulb life is over
30,000 hours.
TESTING
most sophisticated computer -controlled test equipment available is used for
testing individual printed circuit boards and
components. In addition, each Criterion 90
is given individual attention in final tests,
and a qualification sheet with key measurements is included with each unit. Extensive
road and shake testing is performed regularly on sample units to assure that your
Criterion 90 will arrive in top operating
The
condition, and perform reliably over
period of time.
a
long
MODELS AND TYPES
Criterion 90-1 is available in playback only,
and accommodates A, AA, B and BB size
cartridges. Criterion 90 -2 is available in
record /playback or playback only models,
and handles A, AA, B, BB, C and CC size
cartridges. Both Criterion 90-1 and Criterion 90 -2 may be ordered in mono or
stereo -and mono models are readily convertible to stereo. All models are mounted
in desk top cabinets, with optional rack
adapters available.
The Criterion 90 series features
modern
cabinet styling in an attractive combination
of white, brushed aluminum and black.
Heavy -duty hall -Inch aluminum tool
plate deck. with air -damped solenoid.
direct capstan drive motor and precision head assembly.
295
www.americanradiohistory.com
CRITERION 90 -1 AND CRITERION 90 -2 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER: 117 VAC, 60 Hz or 117 VAC, 50 Hz.
EQUALIZATION: NAB or CCIR.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: Record or playback: +1 to -4 dB, 50 to
149 Hz; +1 to -2 dB, 150 to 314 Hz; ±1 dB, 315 Hz to 10 kHz;
+1 to -2 dB, 10 kHz to 16 kHz.
HEADS: Standard NAB stereo or mono with cue track.
SIGNAL -TO- NOISE: Ref 1000 Hz NAB standard level of 160 nW /M:
mono. -53 dB minimum, -58 dB typical; stereo, -50 dB minimum,
-55
dB typical.
CROSSTALK: Better than 50 dB at
1
MUTED NOISE LEVEL: Better than
kHz.
-75
dBm into 600 ohms.
SYSTEM DISTORTION: Less than 1.5% at NAB standard reference
level at
kHz.
1
AUDIO OUTPUT: 0 dBm nominal, adjustable to +18 dBm maximum
with standard NAB level tapes. Transformer coupled: 600 ohms
balanced with 150 ohm optional connection. Independent output
for each channel.
AUDIO INPUT: (Record) 600 ohms balanced line, input levels from
-22 to +18 dBm. matching; +10 to +40 dBm bridging (20K).
CUE SYSTEM: All cue sensing and generation conform to 1976
kHz primary cue tone and 150 Hz secondary
NAB standards.
cue tone are standard. Also, models are available with the 8
kHz tertiary cue function. All units are capable of reproducing
3.5 kHz logging signals at NAB standard levels.
1
REMOTE CONTROL: All control functions operated by ground
switching. All lamp circuits are also available from the remote
sockets.
BIAS OSCILLATOR: 85 kHz balanced push -pull oscillator.
TAPE CARTRIDGE SIZES: (Criterion 90-1) Accepts NAB sizes A,
AA, B, BB; (Criterion 90 -2) accepts NAB sizes A, AA, B, BB, C,
CC.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 4° to 55° C (40° to 130° F).
EXTERNAL CONNECTORS: Latching type. Mating plugs furnished.
TAPE DRIVE SYSTEM: Hysteresis synchronous motor, direct capstan drive, sealed ball bearings. Vapor blasted capstan.
MOUNTING: Desk mount standard, rack mount optional.
TAPE SPEED: 19 cm's (7.5 inches per second).
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS: Criterion 90 -1 playback (desk mount):
8.6 inches (21.8 cm) wide, 5.3 inches (13.5 cm) high, 14.1 inches
(35.8 cm) deep. Net weight 23 pounds. Criterion 90 -2 playback
(desk mount): 10.3 inches (26.1 cm) wide, 5.3 inches (13.5 cm)
high, 14.1 inches (35.8 cm) deep. Net weight 25 pounds. Criterion
90 -2 record :playback (desk mount): 17.3 inches (43.9 cm) wide,
5.3 inches (13.5 cm) high, 14.1 inches (35.8 cm) deep. Net weight
35 pounds.
SPEED ACCURACY: 0.1% or better.
WOW AND FLUTTER: 0.15% or better (NAB weighted peak).
TAPE START TIME: Adjustable from 0.08 seconds to 0.5 seconds.
TAPE STOP TIME: .08 second minimum (adjustable).
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING INFORMATION
HOW TO ORDER: Order optional rack adapters for rack mounting. NAB equalization standard. CCIR equalization on special order.
Criterion 90 -1 playback, mono, with 1000/150 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -1 playback, mono, with 1000115018000 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -1 playback, stereo, with 1000/150 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -1 playback, stereo, with 1000/150/8000 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -2 playback, mono, with 1000/150 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90-2 playback, mono, with 1000 /150 /8000 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -2 playback, stereo, with 1000/150 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -2 playback, stereo, with 1000/150/8000 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -2 record /playback, mono, with 1000/150 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -2 record /playback, mono, with 1000/150/8000 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90 -2 record /playback, stereo, with 1000/150 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Criterion 90-2 record /playback, stereo, with 1000/150/8000 Hz cue functions, 60 Hz
As above, except 50 Hz
Rack mounting kit for Criterion 90 -1 playback unit
Rack mounting kit for Criterion 90 -2 playback unit
Rack mounting kit for Criterion 90 -2 record /playback unit or two Criterion 90-1 playback units
994 -7993 -001
994- 7993 -002
994- 7993 -003
994- 7993 -004
994 - 7994 -001
994 -7994 -002
994- 7994 -003
994- 7994 -004
994- 7995 -001
994 -7995 -002
994-7995-003
994- 7995 -004
994- 7996 -001
994 -7996 -002
994-7996 -003
994 -7996 -004
994 -7997 -001
994- 7997 -002
994 -7997 -003
994 -7997 -004
994-7998 -001
994 -7998 -002
994- 7998 -003
994- 7998 -004
994- 8161 -001
994- 8160 -001
994-8162 -001
ADV. S11C PTO. IN U.S.A.
296
www.americanradiohistory.com
Combines three playback decks in
HARRIS
a
single unit
Two Criterion 90 -3's may be mounted side
by side in a standard rack
COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION HANDLING
Meets or exceeds NAB specifications
Design simplicity for top reliability
CRITERION 90 -3
Tape
Cartridge
Playback
Superb audio performance
Quiet operation
Hysteresis synchronous direct capstan drive motor for
speed accuracy and stability
Completely solid -state electronics
Computer testing of components and assemblies
Individual testing of each unit
Plug -in printed circuit cards
297
www.americanradiohistory.com
ì/I
.
I
CI,
JI
I
Two Criterion 90 -3's may be mounted side by side in a standard rack to
provide six playback units In a rack space that will hold only two regular
size playbacks.
Easy access to rear components Is
through the removable rear panel.
Harris' Criterion 90 -3 combines three playback decks in a single space- saving unit
and offers the very best in audio
performance and reliability. No detail has
been overlooked to insure that your
Criterion 90 -3 will give you top service,
year after year, from the very first day of
delivery.
-
Starting with the half -inch thick aluminum
tool plate decks that provide rugged, warp-
resistant, precisely flat bases for the
Micro -Set head assemblies -on through
the specially- designed hysteresis synchronous motor with direct capstan drive for
unmatched speed accuracy and stability,
the Criterion 90 -3 is precision built to meet
exacting performance specifications.
until it is thoroughly tested by sophisticated computer -controlled test equipment.
In addition, each Criterion 90 -3 is given
individual attention in final tests, and a
qualification sheet with key measurements, signed by a test technician, is
enclosed with your unit.
The manufacturing process is followed up
by rigorous testing of each unit in Harris'
laboratories. No Criterion 90 -3 is shipped
And finally, the Criterion 90 -3 is regularly
undergoing road tests -test units are put
on delivery trucks and allowed to bounce
298
www.americanradiohistory.com
around for days. Then the test units are
examined to see how well they held up
under typical shipping conditions.
replaces the record head
performance.
to
maximize
The Micro-Set head bracket on each deck
is easily adjustable for accurate height,
THREE DECKS IN ONE UNIT
Each of the three decks of the Criterion
90 -3 operates as a separate playback unit,
with separate controls. One deck may be
operated alone -or two or three decks may
be operated at the same time, each feeding
a different program input.
The top and center decks slide out for
maintenance, and are easily removed by
opening the `singed front panel and
unplugging head and solenoid connections. Only the motor capstan is common
to the three decks, and the Criterion 90 -3
may be operated with the top, center or
both decks removed without affecting the
remaining deck(s).
The motor is precisely located to the lower
deck to insure correct tape path guidance,
correct pinch roller pressure and minimum
wow and flutter.
and center decks have vernier
adjustment of deck to motor relationships,
with a strong center post reference. This is
superior to referencing to the front panel.
A locking screw,
independent of the
vernier adjustment screw, permits removal
and replacement of the top and center
decks without affecting the deck -to -motor
relationship.
Top
zenith and azimuth. An air -damped
pressure roller solenoid is adjustable from
0.08 to 0.5 seconds for rapid or slow
cueing, and the plunger is Teflon
coated
for quiet, easy operation.
SUPERIOR ELECTRONICS
Criterion 90 -3 electronics are completely
solid state for greatest reliability, and
temperature and gain stability. The
improved design allows the Criterion 90 -3
to achieve better than NAB standards for
frequency response, distortion and signal to- noise. Audio output capability is +18
dBm (0 dBm nominal) to accommodate
losses in complex studio or system
installations. Full automatic muting of all
studio outputs provides better than -75
dBm noise on standby.
Program, cue, control, status and logging
information is available on rear connectors
for remote operations and program automation use -and ground switching of
external control functions provides protection for equipment and personnel. All
Criterion 90 -3 circuits have been RFI
proofed to make them highly resistant to
strong RF fields.
program amplifier cards are
convenient plug -in design. To detect a
secondary cue tone, only one additional
cue card is plugged in to handle all three
decks. For a third tone, only one tertiary
card is added.
Cue and
A Criterion 90 -3 monaural unit may be
changed to stereo operation by changing
the head assembly in each deck, and
adding only one program amplifier card for
the entire unit.
MODELS AND TYPES
The Criterion 90 -3 is available in mono or
stereo playback models. The units are
desk mounted, but an optional rack
adapter is available for mounting two
Criterion 90 -3's side by side in a standard
19 -inch rack. This gives you six playback
decks in only 121/4 inches of rack space! Or
the rack adapter may be used to mount one
Criterion 90 -3 and one optional cartridge
storage rack that holds up to twenty size
"A" or "AA" cartridges. The Criterion 90 -3
accepts "A ", "AA ", "B" and "BB"
cartridges.
Head alignment and other adjustments are
typically performed first on the lower fixed
deck, then on the center deck, and finally
on the top deck. However, adjustments
can be performed in any sequence.
HYSTERESIS
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
The heart of the Criterion
90 -3
is
a
hysteresis synchronous motor, with direct
capstan drive, ouilt exclusively for Harris,
to Harris specifications.
This motor
assembly, along with the full swing
pressure roller, offers speed accuracy and
stability comparable to a reel -to -reel
machine. Sealed instrument -type ball
bearings are used to keep transport wow
and flutter to .ess than 0.2% rms, while
full motor shielding helps maintain a
greatly improved signal -to -noise ratio.
QUALITY HEAD ASSEMBLIES
The high quality, laminated heads are built
with all -metal hyperbolic faces, providing
long wear and low oxide accumulation.
These quality heads provide optimum
colinearity to assure the best possible
stereo phase relationship. Three tape
guides further control the tape path
guidance to insure constant output
quality, and full audio response from
cartridge to cartridge. With each of the
three playback decks, a dummy head
The front panel of the Criterion 90 -3 drops down, and the
center and top decks slide out for convenient maintenance.
299
www.americanradiohistory.com
c=
One Criterion 90 -3 may be rack mounted
with an optional cartridge rack that holds
up to 20 size "A" or "AA" cartridges.
CRITERION 90 -3 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER: 117 VAC. 60 Hz or 117 VAC, 50 Hz.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE:
+ 3, -2 dB 50
to 300 Hz
±
2
dB 300 Hz to 15
kHz.
SIGNAL -TO- NOISE: Ref. 1000 Hz NAB standard level of 160 nW /M:
mono, -53 dB nominal; stereo, -50 dB nominal.
CROSSTALK: Better than 50 dB at
kHz.
MUTED NOISE LEVEL: Better than -75 dBm into 600 ohms.
SYSTEM DISTORTION: Less than 2.0% at NAB standard reference level
at
kHz (160 nW /M).
AUDIO OUTPUT:
dBm nominal, adjustable to +18 dBm maximum.
Transformer coupled: 600 ohms balanced with 150 ohm optional
connection. Independent output for each channel.
TAPE DRIVE SYSTEM: Hysteresis synchronous motor, direct capstan
drive, sealed ball bearings. Vapor blasted capstan.
TAPE SPEED: 19 cm is (7.5 inches per second).
SPEED ACCURACY: 0.1% or better.
WOW AND FLUTTER: 0.2% RMS or better (unweighted).
TAPE START TIME: Set at 0.1 seconds (adjustable).
1
1
EQUALIZATION: NAB or CCIR.
HEADS: Standard NAB stereo or mono with cue track.
CUE SYSTEM: All cue sensing and generation conform to 1976 NAB
standards. 1000 Hz primary cue. 150 Hz secondary and 8 kHz tertiary
cue sensing cards optional. All units are capable of reproducing 3.5
kHz logging signals at NAB standard levels.
REMOTE CONTROL: All control functions operated by ground
switching. All lamp circuits are also available from the remote
sockets.
TAPE CARTRIDGE SIZES: Accepts NAB sizes A, AA, B, BB.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 4° to 55 °C (40° to 130 °F).
EXTERNAL CONNECTORS: Latching type. Mating plugs furnished.
MOUNTING: Desk mount standard, rack mount optional.
DIMENSIONS: Desk mount: 11- a inches high, 8 -"/,Inches wide, 131/2
inches deep. Standard rack mount (2 units): 121/2 inches high, 19
inches wide, 131/2 inches deep.
NET WEIGHT: 38 pounds.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
ORDERING INFORMATION
HOW TO ORDER: Order optional cue cards for second and third tones.
Order rack adapters for rack mounting.
Criterion 90 -3 playback, mono, desk mount, 1000 Hz cue,
60 Hz
994 -7999 -001
As above, except 50 Hz
994 -7999 -002
Criterion 90 -3 playback, stereo, desk mount, 1000 cue, 60 Hz
994 -8001 -001
As above, except 50 Hz
994 -8001 -002
Rack mount adapter for two Criterion 90 -3 units, or one
Criterion
90 -3 and one
cartridge rack (see below)
994 -8045 -001
Cartridge rack for one side of rack adapter (holds up to 20
size "A" or "AA" cartridges)
994 -7697 -001
Secondary cue card to sense 150 Hz cue tone
992-4822-001
Tertiary cue card to sense
8
kHz cue tone
CP6.5M-278
992 -4827 -001
ADV. 524 PTD. IN U.S.A.
300
www.americanradiohistory.com
HARRIS
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCSSING
CB -1201
Precision
Professional
Turntable
The Harris CB -1201 offers the ultimate in engineering excellence, and
a high standard of accuracy in disc reproduction for on -air use and
production work.
In addition, operation and maintenance are
simplified, as there are only three rotating parts in the unit.
The CB -1201 professional transcription turntable chassis provides
both short and long term speed accuracy over a wide temperature and
voltage range through the use of an extremely well balanced hysteresis
synchronous motor and a low- friction dual oilite center bearing. The
rugged motor, the simplified motor mounting, and an advanced shift
mechanism all combine to provide top reliability, even with 24- hour-aday use.
Stereo rumble better than -45 dB
Rugged precision construction...only
parts
3
rotating
Full speed In less than 1/16 revolution
Front panel controls
Three speeds
No 45 RPM spindle required
Speed may be changed with turntable operating
Unique Teflon` coated sleeve on speed change
lever
-45 DB. Exceptionally low rumble has been
achieved in the CB -1201 through precision engineering of the drive
system. The motor is precision balanced with a ground steel three -step
driving surface held to an accuracy of 0.0003". The idler wheel has
an exclusive "shear action" to allow maximum drive torque with
minimum vibration. The bearing of the idler is oil- impregnated sintered
bronze rotating on a 10 micro -inch polished steel shaft held to an accuracy of -.0.00015 ", further reducing rumble and wow and flutter.
RUMBLE BETTER THAN
The well -balanced platter rotates on a dual sintered, impregnated
bronze bearing made with the same high precision as the idler rotating
surfaces.
Measured below NAB reference of kHz recorded at 3.54 cm /sec rms
velocity, stereo rumble in the CB -1201 is better than -45 dB at 33'/2
rpm, which compares with the best in the industry.
1
WOW
& FLUTTER LESS THAN 0.1% (NAB unwelghted). The heavy
(6.9 lb.) machined aluminum platter in the CB -1201 provides for optimum flywheel action to help reduce wow and flutter while permitting
very tight cueing. The virtually friction -free drive components further
reduce the speed variations that also contribute to wow and flutter.
An exclusive innovation, the Teflon- sleeved speed change lever, allows
frictionless "breathing" of the idler mechanism, and accounts for the
exceptional sound reproduction quality.
SPEED ACCURACY BETTER THAN ±0.3 %. Because of the
sophisticated bearing and drive surfaces, long term speed variations
are reduced to a negligible level for the life of the turntable. Short term
speed variation, sometimes misinterpreted as wow and flutter, is in the
order of 0.001 %.
RUGGED, DURABLE CONSTRUCTION. The rugged main frame is
constructed of a one -piece machined casting of aluminum alloy. It is
attractively styled in off -white, with front die -cast panel and heavy felt
platter cover in contrasting blues.
The platter is recessed into the base for maximum protection, and is
offset from the center of the base to allow plenty of clearance for arm
swing. The platter is also specially designed to play 45's with no accessory spindle.
Specifications, ordering information, accessories on reverse side.
301
www.americanradiohistory.com
CB -1201 SPECIFICATIONS
SPEED CHANGE: To 331/2, 45, or 78 rpm by single Teflon sleeved index
lever control.
SPEED ACCURACY: Better than ±0.3% at 33'/2 rpm.
IDLER WHEEL: Shear action, concentric ground Neoprene, self aligning.
POWER: 115 volts, 10 %, 60 Hz, 35 watts maximum (50 Hz model for
117V or 220 V available).
WEIGHT: 21 lbs. Net. Packed: domestic, 26 lbs; export, 50 lbs. Cubage:
1.3 cubic feet.
TURNTABLE PLATTER: Cast aluminum; diameter, 12 "; weight, 6.9 lbs.
CHASSIS SIZE: 16 "x16 "x21/2". Motor hangs 51/2" below bottom of
chassis.
FINISH: Base in off -white, with blue front panel. Platter cover in blue
heavy felt.
CENTER BEARING: 3/4" diameter dual oilite bearings.
MOTOR: Hysteresis synchronous, single phase, 1800 rpm. 117V 60 Hz,
117V 50 Hz, 220V 50 Hz.
CUEING: With dead motor start: at 33'/3 rpm, less than 1/16 (22.5 °)
turn; at 45 rpm. 1/10 turn; at 78 rpm, '/2 turn.
NOISE OR RUMBLE: Stereo (below NAB reference of kHz recorded
at 3.54 cm /sec. rms velocity); -45 dB at 33'/3 rpm.
WOW AND FLUTTER: Less than 0.1 %. NAB unweighted at 33'/3 rpm.
MOTOR START: By pushbutton switch on front panel.
1
ORDERING INFORMATION
CB -1201 Turntable, chassis only, 60 Hz, 117V
CB -1201 Turntable, chassis only, 50 Hz, 117V
994 -7866 -001
994 -7866 -002
TRANSISTORIZED IC TURNTABLE PREAMPLIFIER
Single- channel transistorized turntable preamplifier features low distortion
and excellent frequency response. Designed for use in broadcasting,
recording and for general sound requirements. Harris' IC preamp's input
impedance of 47,000 ohms makes it compatible with virtually all magnetic
cartridges (including stereo). It is self -equalized to the standard RIAA /NAB
frequency response curve. Special mounting holes have been provided on
the top of the preamplifier housing to "piggyback" a second unit for stereo
operation.
The preamplifier is completely self- contained in an aluminum housing, and
includes an integrated circuit, current booster and associated components,
plus the output transformer and power supply.
SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT IMPEDANCE: 47,000 ohms.
MAXIMUM INPUT: 150 mV @ 1 kHz (clip point), 60 mV @ 1 kHz ( +15 dBm
output).
OUTPUT: -2 dBm with 9 mV input @ 1 kHz (typical cartridge level).
RESPONSE: Within t 1 dB of RIAA /NAB standard curve.
DISTORTION: Less than 0.5% at +15 dBm output, 30- 15,000 Hz. Typically
less than 0.1 %.
NOISE: At least 85 dB below +15 dBm output, 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Typically
below 93 dB.
LOAD IMPEDANCE: 600 ohms or 150 ohms, floating for grounded or ungrounded loads.
OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: 0° to +60° C.
POWER: 117/234 volts, 50/60 Hz, 1 watt.
SIZE: 7- 7/16" long, 3 -' /e" deep, 2 -1 /16" high. Net weight, 1 lb.
1.1111...,,.
911
011.116.61.10
401.14.2111
r
"
(-`
994- 6690 -003
994 -6977 -002
12 -INCH SYSTEM
The following
",
STEREO
ORDERING INFORMATION
Monaural IC Turntable Preamplifier
Stereo IC Turntable Preamplifier
n..rnnn.
COMPONENTS
components are recommended to make up your 12 -inch turntable system.
Monophonic System
Stereo System
CB -1201 turntable
994- 7866 -001
723 -0268 -000
303 Micro -Trek tone arm
Shure M44 -7 stereo dynetic cartridge with .0007"
diamond stylus
723- 0236 -000
994 -7866 -001
CB -1201 turntable
723- 0268 -000
303 Micro -Trek tone arm
Shure M44 -7 stereo dynetic cartridge with .0007"
723- 0236 -000
diamond stylus
994- 6977 -002
IC turntable preamplifier
IC
turntable preamplifier
CP-3M-
t
994-6690-003
ADV 537A PTD IN
179
302
www.americanradiohistory.com
U S A
HARRIS
o
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION FIROCRSOIVO
RACK CABINETS
AND ACCESSORIES
994- 8477 -001
994-8478-001
448- 0702-000
994 -8444 -001
994 -8444 -002
994 -8444 -003
944 -8444 -004
994 -8471 -001
994- 8430 -002
994- 8433 -001
o
994 -8444 -001
994- 8444 -002
994 -8444 -003
994 -8444 -004
994-8471-001
RAK -80B Basic Rack, textured black finish 72" high. 251/2'
deep and 221/4" wide with louvered top, louvered rear door.
rear top cowling, two (2) sets of panel mounting angles with
new EIA standard panel mounting hole spacing and panel
mounting hardware. Less front trim and sides. 643/4" panel
mounting space.
RAK -80B Side Panel Kit for above, two panel included in kit.
(Harris white finish).
Lock w /key
Front Trim Kit for single cabinet"
Front Trim Kit for two (2) cabinets"
Front Trim Kit for three (3) cabinets"
Front Trim Kit for four (4) cabinets"
Louver Closure Panel for rear door.
"Front trim finished in brushed aluminum with Harris blue insert.
RAK -90 Basic Rack. textured black finish. 78" high, 22" deep,
221" wide with louvered top. louvered rear door. two (2) sets
of panel mounting angles (One set fixed and one set movable)
with EIA standard hole spacing and panel mounting hardware.
70'" panel mounting space. Less trim and sides.
RAK -90 side panel kit. two panels and mounting hardware in
kit. (Harris white finish).
Front Trim Kit for single cabinet"
Front Trim Kit for two (2) cabinets"
Front Trim Kit for three (3) cabinets"
Front Trim Kit for four (4) cabinets"
Rear door louver closure kit, contains two (2) panels and
mounting materials.
"Front trim finished in brushed aluminum with Harris blue insert.
448- 0648 -000
448- 0649 -000
448 -0650 -000
448- 0559 -000
448- 0591 -000
448- 0592 -000
448- 0593 -000
448- 0594 -000
448 -0636 -000
RAK -86 Basic Rack, textured black finish, 783/4." high, 251/2"
deep and 22!Z1." wide with louvered top. louvered rear door,
rear top cowling, two (2) sets of panel mounting angles with
new EIA standard panel mounting hole spacing and panel
mounting hardware. Less front trim and sides. 70" panel
mounting space.
Same as above but with non -louvered rear door.
RAK -86 Side Panel Kit. two panels included in kit (Harris White
finish).
Door Handle w /Lock.
Front Trim Kit for single cabinet.
Front Trim Kit for two (2) cabinets.
Front Trim Kit for three (3) cabinets."
Front Trim Kit for four (4) cabinets.
"Front trim finished in brushed aluminum with Harris blue insert
RAK -96 Basic Rack. (for mounting 24" wide panels) textured
black finish, 69''1." high, 251/2' deep and 27" wide with
louvered top. louvered rear door. rear top cowling, two (2) sets
of panel mounting angles with new EIA standard panel
mounting hole spacing and panel mounting hardware. Less
front trim and sides 613" panel mounting space.
448- 0637 -000
448- 0638 -000
448- 0559 -000
Front Trim Kit for single RAK -96 cabinet"
Front Trim Kit for two (2) RAK -96 cabinets"
Door Handle .+ /Lock
"Front trim finished
448- 0640 -000
994 -5527 -003
in brushed aluminum with Harris blue insert.
RAK -9 Rak Cabinet. 78" high. 22" wide and 18" deep. 71'."
panel mounting space. Complete with sides. non -louvered top.
louvered rear door and panel mounting hardware. Standard
EIA hole spacing. Black textured finish.
RAK -7 Rak Cabinet. 78" high. 231/22' wide and 191/2" deep.
71'." panel mounting space. Complete with sides, non -
louvered top, louvered rear door and panel mounting
hardware. Standard EIA hole spacing. White textured finish.
ACCESSORIES
265 -0061 -000
432 -0214 -000
432- 0225 -000
992 -2539 -001
994 -6890 -002
994- 6891 -001
Plugmold (10 out.) w /Ent. Fit.
Blower /Panel Assembly (150 CFM)
x 19 ".
Blower /Panel /Filter Assembly 150 cfm, panel size 5'
115 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NOTE: Blower /Panel Assemblies are 19" wide. 3'2" high and
121/2" deep. Finished bright chrome.
Panel Mounting Hardware
Terminal board mounting kit for RAK series of racks. mounts
ADC PJ -100 8 Thomas & Betts CB -120 terminal boards.
Pre -wired jack panel and terminal board.
BLANK PANELS
831 -5483 -003
831.5483 -011
831 -5483 -019
831 -5483 -027
831 -5483 -035
831 -5483 -043
994 -7001 -001
Blank panel. 19" x 1'." W /HF -88 126 Black Pebbletex Finish
Blank panel. 19 x 31/2" W/HF -88 126 Black Pebbletex Finish
Blank panel. 19" a 5''." W /HF -88 126 Black Pebbletex Finish
Blank panel. 19" x 7" W /HF -88 126 Black Pebbletex Finish
Blank panel. 19" x 83/4" W /HF -88 126 Black Pebbletex Finish
Blank panel. 19" x 101/2" W /HF -88 126 Black Pebbletex Finish
OTHER
Power Control Panel Provides on -off switching of 110 VAC
and /or VAC. 19 "x 3'4" x 3 "2"
o
JK-1M-180
'HARRIS CORPORATION 1980
ADV-560 PTD IN U.S.A.
303
www.americanradiohistory.com
Chronology of Contents
MCP -IV VHF -TV Visual Exciter /Modulator
PDM Pulse Duration Modulation
PSM Progressive Series Modulator
UHF Color TV Transmitters
TV -110U 110 kilowatt
TV -60U 60 kilowatt
TV -55U 55 kilowatt
TV -30U 30 kilowatt
Medium Wave Broadcast Transmitters
VP -100A 100,000 watt
MW -50A 50,000 watt
MW -10 10,000 watt
MW -5A 5,000 watt
MW -1A 1,000 watt
MCP 1U Vusual Exciter /Modulator
Antenna Phasing Equipment
AM -80 MW modulation monitor
AF -80 MW frequency monitor
MW Transportable completely assembled MW
Transmitting Station
Circularly Polarized
Short Wave Broadcast Transmitters
Live Color TV Cameras
SW -100 100,000 watt
SW -50 50,000 watt
TC -80A (automatic)
TC -80 add -on triax cable system
TC -50
FM
TV
CPV
CBR cavity backed radiator
Traveling Wave Helical Antenna
Broadcast Transmitters
Digital Video Equipment
FMD -50K 50 kilowatt
FM -40K 40 kilowatt
FM -25K 25 kilowatt
FM -20K 20 kilowatt
FM -10K 10 kilowatt
FM -5K 5 kilowatt
FM -2.5K 2.5 kilowatt
FM 1K kilowatt
FM- 300KD /FM -300K 300 watt
Epic
CVS
CVS
CVS
CVS
MS -15 maximum signal FM exciter
MS -15R FM stereo generator
FM
computer -aided editing system
516 digital TBC
517 digital TBC
520 digital TBC
630 digital frame synchronizer
Audio
1
Circularly Polarized
Antennas
Antennas
FMH Super Power
FML low power
FMP self- supporting
FMS Dual Cycloid
Directional Dual Polarized FM Antennas
FM Antenna Accessories /Isolation Transformers
Service & Training
Cyclotran System for CP TV Signal Transmission
Transmitter Powers - AM -FM -TV
VHF Color TV Transmitters
TV -50H /TVD -100H 50 kilowatt/ 100 kilowatt dual high band
Harris 9100 facilities control for radio or TV
Harris 9000 program control
M90 modular control console
M90 modular on -air control console
Executive 10- channel stereo control console
Stereo 80 8- channel stereo control console
Stereo 5 solid -state 5 channel control console.
Gatesway 80 solid -state 8- channel control console
Mono 5 solid -state 5- channel control console
MSP -100 audio processor for AM -FM -TV
MSP -90 audio processor
MSP -90 tri band AGC audio processor
Criterion 90 -1 & 90 -2 tape cartridge systems
Criterion 90 -3 tape cartridge playback
CB -1201 precision professional turntable
Rack Cabinets and Accessories
TVD -50H 50 kilowatt dual high band
TVD -36H 36 kilowatt dual high band
TV -25H 25 kilowatt high band
TV -18H 18 kilowatt high band
TV -10H 10 kilowatt CCIR Band Ill
BTD -50L2 50 kilowatt dual low band
BTD -36L2 36 kilowatt dual low band
BT -35L2 35 kilowatt low band
BT -25L2 25 kilowatt low band
BT -18L2 kilowatt low band
304
www.americanradiohistory.com
The mechanical and electrical design of the equipment described herein is subject to change without notice as deemed
necessary by the Broadcast Products Division of Harris
Corporation or its suppliers, in the interest of advancing
industry requirements or the state of the art.
HARRIS jji
c
COMMUNICATION AND
INFORMATION PROCESSING
HARRIS CORPORATION, 1980
www.americanradiohistory.com
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77036
MAIN OFFICE AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES
QUINCY, ILLINOIS 62301
7000 Regency Square Blvd.
Suite 200
Phone: 713 -977 -2411
P.O. Box 4290
Phone: 217 -727 -8200
Telex: 404347
Twx: 910 -246 -3212
Cable: GARCO
CANADIAN SALES
MONTREAL OFFICE
212 Brunswick Blvd.
Pointe -Claire, Quebec, Canada H9R 1A6
DISTRICT OFFICES
Phone: 514- 694 -3371
CULVER CITY, CALIFORNIA 90230
5839 Green Valley Circle
Suite 200
Phone: 213-642-0052
TORONTO OFFICE
19 Lesmill Road
Don Mills, Ontario, Canada M3B -2T3
Phone: 416 -441 -2400
NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10017
675 3rd Avenue
Phone: 212- 986 -7600
INTERNATIONAL SALES OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20037
2600 Virginia Avenue, NW
QUINCY, ILLINOIS
8th Floor
Phone: 202-342-3946
O. Box 4290
Phone: 217-722 8200
BOUND PRINTED BLK RT
US POSTAGE
PAID
Shawnee Mission, KS
Permit No. 243
HARRIS CORPORATION Broadcast Products Division
P.O. Box 4290, Quincy, Illinois 62301 U.S.A.
KERC
Chf. Eng,
Box 590
Eastland,
TX
76448
AM
y
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement